False Flags: Final Edition By Greg Fernandez Jr.

Mind Body Soul Productions 2012 ISBN # - 978-1-300-14748-0 The information in this book is public knowledge, used under the Fair Use Policy. The people mentioned or quoted in this book do not necessarily agree with the authors opinions, morals, and spiritual values. All sources, references, quotes, and other facts are listed in the index. This book is designed to provide valuable research to those who do not necessarily have the time or resources to do the research necessary to understand False Flag Terror. This is a great book for your family and friends who are interested in world affairs, real conspiracies, and TRUTH. Greg Fernandez Jr. does not expect you to agree with him, but he thanks you for reading and spreading the information that may save lives in the future.

Table of Contents
Introduction The 9/11 False Flag.1 88 The JFK Inside Job...89 139 New World Order140 148 The Global Empire...149 166 False Flag Terror..167 178 World Wide Caution...179 187 Osama Bin Laden Is Dead...188 214 Obama Drama...215 266 False Flag Iraq..267 327 Jesse Ventura & The Conspiracy Culture..328 338 False Flag Attacks..339 358 Conclusion....359 392 A Spiritual Afterword Index

You are the future. What you do today will set the course for those who are born tomorrow.
The greatest thing about [George W. Bush] is hes steady. You know where he stands. He believes the same thing Wednesday that he believed on Monday, no matter what happened Tuesday. Events can change; this mans beliefs never will. Stephen Colbert

When people within a government secretly attack their own country and blame the attack on a known enemy of the same country, these people have created a False Flag operation. False flag terrorism occurs when elements within a government stage a secret operation whereby government forces pretend to be a targeted enemy while attacking their own forces or people. The attack is then falsely blamed on the enemy in order to justify going to war against that enemy. (Wanttoknow.info) So where does this term, False Flag, come from? The term comes from the old days of wooden ships, when one ship would hang the flag of its enemy before attacking another ship in its own navy. Because the enemys flag was hung instead of the flag of the real country of the attacking ship, it was called a false flag attack. (Wanttoknow.info) The recognition of false flag events can be prolonged for only so many decades before the truth eventually comes out in a quiet, soft spoken fashion...like this... In 1954, Israel sponsored bombings against US and UK interests in Cairo aiming to cause trouble between Egypt and the West. This operation, later dubbed the Lavon Affair, cost Israeli Defense Minister Pinhas Lavon his job. The state of Israel (where it is known as The Unfortunate Affair) finally admitted responsibility in 2005 (Wikipedia.com). Had this evidence been released in 1955, or if Israel admitted

this action back then, false flag operations might not be linked so closely to what detractors and delusional people call conspiracy nuts. Perhaps. Its hard to look anywhere now and not see evidence that people of all races, all genders, and from all walks of life are waking up to realize that false flag terrorism exists. It is as real as the air we breathe. Like the air we breathe, we dont always see it, but we sure do feel it. Aristotle Politics book V xi : As to tyrannies, they are preserved in two most opposite ways. One of them is the old traditional method in which most tyrants administer their government...There are firstly the prescriptions mentioned some distance back, for the preservation of a tyranny, in so far as this is possible; viz., that the tyrant should lop off those who are too high; he must put to death men of spirit; he must not allow common meals, clubs, education, and the like; he must be upon his guard against anything which is likely to inspire either courage or confidence among his subjects; he must prohibit literary assemblies or other meetings for discussion, and he must take every means to prevent people from knowing one another (for acquaintance begets mutual confidence). This is the rulebook for oppression, how to keep the masses separated, ripping their confidence and spirit to shreds, for the good of the nation. He must take every means to prevent people from knowing one another, confirms how important it is for a tyrant to keep people divided. The old divide and conquer technique. Literary assemblies and meetings of discussion are a major threat to tyrannical governments. Knowledge and education are the shield to battle tyranny. So its important for them to horde as much knowledge as they can, while making it virtually impossible for the commoners to achieve such wealth of knowledge. Lets continue... Further, he must compel all persons staying in the city to appear in public and live at his gates; then he will know what they are doing: if they are always kept under, they will learn to be humble... Spying, wire-tapping, government surveillance, sound familiar? ...A tyrant should also endeavor to know what each of his

subjects says or does, and should employ spies, like the female detectives at Syracuse, and the eavesdroppers whom Hiero was in the habit of sending to any place of resort or meeting; for the fear of informers prevents people from speaking their minds, and if they do, they are more easily found out. This next set of rules hint at the false flag scenario, keep your people fighting amongst themselves, so they dont fight against you, the tyrant. Another art of the tyrant is to sow quarrels among the citizens; friends should be embroiled with friends, the people with the notables, and the rich with one another. This next quote is similar to creating a great depression, which arguably, our country is in today. Also he should impoverish his subjects; he thus provides against the maintenance of a guard by the citizen and the people, having to keep hard at work, are prevented from conspiring... Notice how our taxes go up, but they never come back down. Over the years, our tax system gets worse and worse, yet our cost of living does not match the rising costs of property, income, and sales taxes. Another practice of tyrants is to multiply taxes, after the manner of Dionysius at Syracuse, who contrived that within five years his subjects should bring into the treasury their whole property. Of course, what tyranny would be complete without pointless and endless wars? And the tyrant is also fond of making war in order that his subjects may have something to do and be always in want of a leader. And whereas the power of a king is preserved by his friends, the characteristic of a tyrant is to distrust his friends, because he knows that all men want to overthrow him, and they above all have the power. The power belongs to the people, unless you can oppress the people for so long that they forget they have any power, and fall asleep. Its time for us to wake up and exercise our power, like we exercise our muscles. Just as you can exercise your muscles without using violence, so too, can you practice your rights in the same manner. Never forget this! The power is in your hands. The government of any free society is the people. If we dont get involved and practice our rights, how will we know when we have lost them? What is a terrorist? One who spreads terror. The irony in this is that we have a government who is spreading terrorism (fear) to get the

people to agree with things like the Patriot Act, a war in Iraq, wiretapping people of the United States, and so much more. What is the definition of terrorism? Dictionary.com says: 1) The use of violence and threats to intimidate or coerce, esp. for political purposes. 2) The state of fear and submission produced by terrorism or terrorization. 3) A terroristic method of governing or of resisting a government. Its the third definition that applies here in America, A terroristic method of governing, that can be connected to false flag operations. When we make the connection between terrorism, a government, and false flags, the results are often scary. If our leaders create fear to get a desired result, that is terrorism. The above quote by Alex Jones deals with the fact that in South Carolina, the state government has passed a bill, stating that anyone who opposes the governmental view is to be put on a list. Why? Isnt this an invasion of freedom of speech? Under the common law, the constitution, are we supposed to acknowledge an unlawful law? If a law is unconstitutional, is it really a law?

The 9/11 False Flag

Explosions and Dead Bodies of September 11th

Its hard to say what happened to Barry Jennings, Deputy Director of Emergency Services Department for the New York City Housing Authority. Some think hes dead. Other suspect he is in a witness-protection program of some sort. Reportedly, a spokesperson for the NY Housing Authority has confirmed that Jennings passed away in August 2008 (just days before NIST released its WTC 7 report to the public). The information he revealed to Dylan Avery proves that explosives demolished the lobby of WTC Building 7. Fire fighters have separately confirmed that the lobby in one of the towers was hit with explosives as well. All this happens before the towers fall. Jennings will continue to hear explosions until he is rescued from Building 7 later that day; just before the building collapses. Jennings describes feeling like he was walking over dead bodies as he exited WTC 7, we were stepping over people and you know you can feel when youre stepping over people. (A) In a breathtaking exclusive video for Loose Change 911.com and Infowars.com, Averys interview with Jennings would also be a big part of the Jason Bermas film, Invisible Empire. Jennings said he received a call shortly after the first plane hit. He made his way to WTC 7. He was on the 23rd floor of World Trade Center 7 when the second plane hit. When he got to the OEM EOC there was no one there. I saw coffee that was on the desk. Smoke was still coming up from coffee, Jennings told Avery. I saw half-eaten sandwiches. It was just he and Corporation Counsel Michael Hess in the building. He made a few calls and was told to leave the building, leave right away. The two men made their way to the stairwell, intent on exiting the building as told. While running down the stairs in total darkness, the two men

The Inside Job

made it to the sixth floor stairwell. The landing that we were standing on gave way, Jennings continues. There was an explosion, and the landing they were standing on gave way. Jennings was hanging onto what was left of the sixth floor stairwell. I was left there hanging. The force of the explosion rocked Mr. Jennings so hard he ended up hanging onto a pole closer to the seventh floor. Im thinking Im standing on the landing. Im actually holding onto a pole above us. He and Mr. Hess went back up to the eighth floor. Lets remember that at this point, both Towers are still standing. This should be around the same time fire fighters witnessed the lobby of one of the towers collapse, after witnessing three explosions. From the time the North Tower is struck at 8:46 a.m. to the time the South Tower is hit at 9:02 a.m, some fire fighters were injured due to explosives going off inside the towers. William Rodriguez also heard explosives going off. These same fire fighters said there could be more bombs in any of the near-by buildings. Building 7 fits that description perfectly. Barry Jennings was trapped inside WTC 7 before the South Tower collapsed in free-fall speed, in ten seconds. Remember, the South Tower fell first, even though it was struck after the North Tower. That alone should raise some questions. Construction for the North Tower began in late 1966 and took about six years to complete (1972). The South Tower was completed a year later. At 8:46 a.m., New York time, the North Tower was struck by an airplane. At 9:03 a.m. the South Tower was also struck by an airplane. At 9:59 a.m. the South Tower collapsed. The North Tower collapsed at 10:28 a.m. in the same manner, straight down. Both towers fell in about ten seconds. The North Tower was struck first, but fell second. How do we explain that? Built first, fell last? Could jet fuel alone from the planes cause a 100 floor building to collapse within an hour of impact? How does the official theory account for the multiple explosions heard on September 11th? The 9/11 Commissions Final Report simply does not mention any eyewitness accounts of explosions. Jennings and Hess watched all this happen while trapped inside Building 7, waiting for fire fighters to rescue them. At this point both

The 9/11 False Flag

buildings are standing, says Jennings. The fire department came and ran. This happened twice, when each tower fell. After being trapped for several hours inside WTC 7 (before and after the towers fell) firefighters came back to the rescue the two men for a third and final time. This time Jennings and Hess were escorted out of the building to safety. Jennings describes explosives going off while he and Mr. Hess are trapped in the building. Jennings explains, all day on 9/11, All this time, Im hearing all type of explosions. All this time, Im hearing explosions. Jennings was led out of the building by fire fighters. The lobby of WTC was unrecognizable. This used to be the lobby, Jennings was told. The lobby was in total ruins. What Jennings witnessed inside what was once the lobby is horrifying and only adds to the mystery of WTC 7. As hes being led out of the building, the firefighter that took us down kept saying do not look down. The reason Jennings was told not to look down was because we were stepping over people and you know you can feel when youre stepping over people. Before WTC fell a police officer then told Jennings You have to run because there were reports of more explosions. Jennings, like so many other people, does not understand why WTC 7 fell. I know what I heard. I heard explosions. Jennings was later told that explosions he heard, and the reason why WTC 7 fell was because of fuel oil tanks inside of the building. Im an old boiler guy. If it were the fuel oil tanks, it would have only been one side of the building. The only thing possibly stranger than someone walking over dead bodies in Building 7 on 9/11 would be a fire fighter opening a closet door inside of one of the Twin Towers, and finding a dead body inside. Why would a dead body be inside a closet in one of the towers? For New York firefighter John Schroder, thats exactly what happened. As one of the brave 9/11 First Responders, Schroder was some of the last people to exit the towers after rescuing people inside. When he got down to the third floor of the stairwell, thats where the stairwell collapsed on us. Schroder and eleven other people dug their way out of the rubble as one of the towers were collapsing. Saying his payers, he and

The Inside Job

another lieutenant began looking for another stairwell to exit the building. They open a door and find a body in this closet. Were like, what the heck is that? Where did this come from...something crazy going on. He describes watching the first plane hit. Almost instantly there were 30 floors of fire. Along with other fire fighters, Schroder made his way to the lobby of the North Tower, where commanding officers were coordinating what to do next. Schroder was ordered to team up with Engine 5, and start our way up [the North Tower stairwell]. As hes preparing, there is a loud explosion in the lobby, I look down to my right, and the elevators exploded. For him was like something you would see in a Die Hard movie. People are running out of the elevators into the lobby, on fire. Something wasnt right. I mean the planes up there, now theres fire down here [in the lobby of the North Tower]. Even with that happening, Schroder and other brave fire fighters still went up the tower stairwell. As we were going up [the stairs], theres fire here, theres fire [there]. People burnt up on different [floors]. His group was trying to figure out what floors these people were coming from. There were some fires on different floors and some people were reportedly trapped on other floors of the North Tower. Still, Schroder says that people remained calm, thanking the firemen. You know what, we knew werent gonna put the fire out. We were saying hail marys all the way up the stairs. We knew that we were gonna die...I said Im never comin back here today. Schroder was in the North Tower when reports of a second plane came across the radio. Within seconds our building got rocked. We got bounced around in the stairwell, like pin-balls, man. Thats when the decision was made to exit the building. We got out as much people as we could; most of the people were out. We were the last guys going up the stairs. When they reached the third floor, the stairwell collapsed on them. After digging their way out, the fire fighters searched for another stairwell. Thats when they discover the dead body in the closet. Looking for an exit, veteran maintenance worker, William Rodriguez was shining a flashlight that caught Schroders attention. Thats where the maintenance fella, with a little flashlight, saved our lives...if it

The 9/11 False Flag

wasnt for him, we never would have found another stairwell. The building wouldve collapsed. Rodriguez saved many lives that day, eleven of which were with fire-fighter John Schroder, who is eternally grateful. Both of these men, and many more people who were there, are True heroes that tell True stories. Thank you all. The last men in the tower made it to the lobby. We got down to the lobby, Schroder continues, and everything was blown out, exploded. Being the only ones in the lobby, Were going, wait a second here, where is everybody? Cause the building was coming down on the outside, they moved the command post to World Trade Center Two [South Tower]. Why would the command center be moved to the South Tower? Did authorities assume that the South Tower would be safer as a command post since the North Tower was hit first? In the lobby, Schroder continues, it looks like everything [had] exploded. Schroder and his group all fled the scene, with Schroder diving in the river to Jersey as the South Tower collapsed. The North Tower came down shortly after that. One of the many curious things from Schroders interview is when he says that after being in the North Tower for five minutes, the lobby elevators explode. This contradicts the theory that after the plane hit the North Tower a fireball went down the elevator shaft and blew up the lobby. It couldnt possibly take five minutes for the flames to reach the lobby. Had Schroders testimony been scrutinized by the 9/11 Commission, perhaps the people could have some answers about what Schroder witnessed that day. The reason why this information has not been discussed by mainstream news is because it would reveal the lies of the 9/11 Commissions Final Report. That would have possibly led to a criminal investigation of traitors working with the terrorists who pulled off the airplane hijackings and suicide dives into the towers, as well as the Pentagon attack and whatever happened on Flight 93. Hopefully this information will lead to an independent investigation, but at the very least, the information is out there for anyone who is searching for it. Schroder adds, There was definitely a distinct timedelay between the planes hitting and the elevators exploding. One eyewitness in New York says, as the second plane hits the South Tower, I think they were delivering bombs. The explosion went

The Inside Job

up on that last building. There was probably a bomb inside the plane. A second eyewitness agreed that the explosion went up like a mushroom. (B) It looked like another explosion, Jeremy Fox told WPIX, live on TV. He watched the second building (the South Tower) blow, and it just crumbled down and I saw the core of the building slowly crush to the ground, fall to the ground. (C) During the live interview, Jeremy says while both towers were burning, it looked like there was an explosion in the South Tower, below where the fire was burning. This is more evidence of secondary explosions; explosions that did not come from the impact of the planes or any generators inside the building. Bushs Moment of Silence
A time comes when silence is betrayal. Martin Luther King Jr.

It was like watching a silent movie, President Bush told the National Geographic Channel. Perhaps it was like watching a silent movie because the commander-in-chief made it that way by doing nothing but sitting in a classroom while something strange was happening in New York. It would be funny if this were an episode of Seinfeld where even doing nothing is still something. Yet this is no laughing matter. To cover his ineptitude, Bush said first he got angry! Then he thought of the children and the contrast between the attack and the innocence of children. The silence of the President only adds more confusion to what Bush did and didnt see that day. He has previously told us he watched the first plane hit the towers on TV. That would suggest he saw the attacks before he went into the classroom. So when Andy Carr tells him America is under attack, he would have already known that. Of course in a previous statement, he simply said he saw the first plane hit and thought that is one terrible pilot. Is Bushs moment of silence meant to be a distraction from how bad a job our current president is doing? At least hes not like Bush, Ive been told. Yet Obamas actions are very much like Bush, for Obama has simply expanded on the precedent set by Bush. I have watched many Obama supporters realize this when evidence can be

The 9/11 False Flag

presented to them in a way they can understand. This is not easy and each person will react to such information in many different ways. Bushs interview with National Geographic was conducted back in May 2011 and will no doubt be part of the continuing propaganda conspiracy that is the governments official story of 9/11. The propaganda machine does not sleep. Evil knows no bounds. Its up to all of us to continue the fight for truth. We are the other side of the coin! We are the ones who rebut the governments propaganda in our own ways. If the truth was on the side of 9/11 official theory conspirators, they would easily be able to explain the hundreds of testimonies of explosives in the buildings, the free-fall collapse of WTC 7, the inconsistency in the 9/11 Commissions Final Report, and why all three lobbies of the WTC towers and Building 7 exploded well before the unexplained collapses. I think the promoters of the official story of 9/11 are getting more desperate with each passing second and its all because of people like you. These powers-that-be are so desperate to keep their official story intact for as long as they can, that they need to regurgitate and promote anything that will give credit to the official lie of September 11th. In doing so, they hope to divert away from any inconsistencies in their official narrative. There are just too many holes in their story to take them seriously. In the land of smoke and mirrors, this looks like a bait-andswitch to me. (D)

The Inside Job

FALSE FLAGS: 9/11/2001

The 9/11 False Flag

Section 1. The Inside Job Ten years before the second attack on the World Trade Center in New York City, President George H.W. Bush gave a cryptic State of the Union address where talked about a New World Order coming into view. How would they usher in this New World Order? Through fear and manipulation the country is slowly giving up all its constitutional rights in order to fight terrorism. So we ask the question, who are the real terrorists? For years many people have warned against the Military Industrial Complex and a New World Order. From my perspective, those who want a New World Order are the real terrorists. Those responsible for and those who assisted in the cover-up of 9/11 are the real terrorists! The cover-up alone proves 9/11 was an inside job on some level. Usually when a crime is committed its the ones responsible

The Inside Job

for the crime who cover up the crime. We can conclusively prove that people within (and outside) of the U.S. Government, and those responsible for the final version of the 9/11 Commission Report, are the criminals who covered up or completely ignored crucial facts about 9/11. There is no mention of William Rodriguez or explosives on 9/11. Nor is there mention of WTC Building 7. Why? Its clear that mistakes were made before, during, and after the events of 9/11. Just because some people may have made mistakes, is it fair to say that all of them did? Did some knowingly control and assist the alleged hijackers on 9/11? More so, how could al-Qaeda get bombs into three World Trade Center buildings without inside help? That is, help from people within the United States. Im not saying Bush is the mastermind behind the events of 9/11. Theres some testimony from Norman Mineta that Dick Cheney was monitoring something that was going to hit the Pentagon and let it happen. It was Clarke who suggested Mineta join Cheney and Secretary Rice in the bunker. There are two different accounts of when Cheney actually entered the bunker, where he allegedly monitored and saw whatever really hit the Pentagon. Yet Cheney did nothing. George Bush sat in a classroom and did nothing. Richard Clarke stepped in for Condi Rice and took control of things at the White House, with a possible hostile plane en route towards his location. Several times he tried to reach Cheney in the bunker but got the dial time every time. Finally he got through to a person who grunted before passing the phone to a subordinate. The subordinate, Major Mike Fenzel told Clarke the grunting man who answered the phone was Vice President Dick Cheney and Cheney wanted to see Clarke in the PEOC. If that was so, why didnt Cheney just answer the PEOC line that Clarke called several times? Perhaps the PEOC doesnt have call waiting. Shortly before the evacuation of the White House, due to a plane heading towards the White House, Clarke took control of the White House as Crisis Manager. Before Rice was to join Cheney in the PEOC bunker she him what he needed from them. All he asked for was an open telephone line to her and Cheney. He didnt get it until much later, and even then all he got was a grunt from the Vice President. Clarke writes he was named Crisis Manager by Secretary Rice after he

10

The 9/11 False Flag

burst into the Vice-Presidents office and told Cheney, Its an al-Qaeda attack and they like simultaneous attacks. This may not be over. According to Clarkes book Against All Enemies, Clarke saw eight agents ready to move Dick Cheney and Secretary Rice to the PEOC, the Presidential Emergency Operations Center, a bunker in the East Wing. Clarke wrote that FAA administrator Jane Garvey had reports of eleven aircraft off course or out of communications, maybe hijacked. All this can be found within the first five pages of Clarkes book. I am convinced that Clarke is either a gate-keeper to steer the events of 9/11 in a certain direction, or he has not seen the evidence about 9/11 being an inside job. Clarke does not mention WTC 7 or explosives. Many New York Fire Fighters did hear explosions inside the Twin Towers. Some even watched the lobby of one of the towers collapse in front of their eyes. What really hit the Pentagon? If the government would release the surveillance videos that filmed whatever hit the building it would finally end this issue. Instead they treat us like little children, giving us a couple frames from the raw video. Anyone who has seen this video might notice that based on the video alone, what hit the Pentagon is inconclusive. Some in the main stream media are convinced that a few grainy frames of a blurry object conclusively prove a 747 hit the Pentagon. Based on this assumption many good people have been tricked into believing the same. Those who dont are labeled conspiracy theorists. In reality we are presenting facts that prove a conspiracy. In other words, people like me search for and study facts to prove the conspiracy while others just throw around labels so they have an excuse to ignore the facts. In the previous chapter we discussed the various quotes about a new world order. Its clear that such an order would require the dismantling of the United States Constitution. That would be treason, plain and simple. I do not want a global government of any kind. Such a government exists today and is building towards a new order. This new order demands that the U.S. Constitution be treated like a piece of paper and thrown in the trash. We see the lack of respect for the Constitution when our rights are constantly being violated by those who run our government. People like them want to dismantle the Constitution,

11

The Inside Job

which would end our quest for the pursuit of happiness as a free human being. People like me want a restoration of the United States Constitution and global sovereignty. I want America to stay out of foreign entanglements designed to bring about a New World Order. If you support a New World Order or some form of global government then you have a lot in common with Bush Sr. and many global elitists. We see their plan coming into view and its never too late to stop them through peaceful activism.
It is a big idea, a new world order. President George H.W. Bush (September 11th, 1991)

In 1988, with U.S. knowledge, Osama bin Laden became the leader of al-Qaeda (The Base): a conglomerate of quasi independent Islamic terrorist cells spread across at least 26 countries. The CIA trained and funded al-Qaeda to fight against the Soviet occupation in Afghanistan. Anyone who has seen Fahrenheit 9/11 knows about the supposed ties between the Bush and the Bin Laden Families. The Bin Ladens are a huge family of Saudi Arabian royalty. It is not clear to me that George W. Bush or his father had direct contact with Osama bin Laden. However, if we follow the money, we may find who knew what, when, where, and how long they knew it. More documents need to be declassified. Thanks to activist groups who sued NIST under the FOIA (Freedom of Information Act) more video evidence, proving explosions were heard inside of the towers, has been made public. On January 11th 2001 Donald Rumsfeld and the Rumsfeld Commission warned that a space Pearl Harbor (would be) the only event able to galvanize the nation and cause the US Government to act. Exactly nine months later, the WTC attacks happened. Talks of removing the government in Afghanistan may have begun as early as 1998. On March 15th 2001 Janes Defense News reported that the United States was planning an invasion later that year. Then in June of 2001, our own government told India that an invasion of Afghanistan was planned for October 2001. (1) The Phoenix Memo shows how people within our government

12

The 9/11 False Flag

received a warning before 9/11 that Osama bin Laden was going to commit a terrorist act inside the United States. The memo was conveniently titled Bin Laden Determined To Strike The U.S. Rice claims that neither she or the President saw the memo before September 11th. A May 2002 New York Times article explained that the Phoenix Memo expressed concern that Mr. bin Laden and other groups could be using the flight schools to prepare for terror attacks. It urged F.B.I. officials to check the visas of foreigners at American aviation academies. But no action was taken before Sept. 11. The article adds that another person who was sent the memo was the top counterterrorism agent for the New York FBI office, John ONeill. Mr. ONeill retired from the F.B.I. in late August. He had just begun a job as the security chief of the World Trade Center when he was killed in the attacks. This memo was sent by a Phoenix F.B.I. agent to F.B.I. headquarters on July 10, 2001, just about two months before the attacks on the World Trade Center buildings. This memo explained the possibility of Osama bin Laden sending students to the United States to attend civil aviation schools. It has been reported that this memo makes it way to President Bush on August 6th in a classified PDB (Presidential Daily Brief). According to the book, authored by French intelligence analysts Jean-Charles Brisard and Guillaume Dasquie, Bin Laden, La Verite Interdite, (Bin Laden, The Forbidden Truth) ONeill resigned because the Bush administration blocked his terrorism investigations. It seems the administration was trying to negotiate with the Taliban to have them hand over Osama bin Laden for pre-911 terrorist acts. Brisard claims ONeill told him that the main obstacles to investigate Islamic terrorism were U.S. oil corporate interests and the role played by Saudi Arabia. John ONeill The Taliban would not hand over Osama before or after 9/11. Looking at some of the alleged terms of negotiations set forth by the U.S. its easy to why things didnt work out. The Forbidden Truth claims that once negotiations crumbled U.S. representatives told the

13

The Inside Job

Taliban, either you accept our offer of a carpet of gold, or we bury you under a carpet of bombs. (2) Military plans were already in order to attack Afghanistan around October 2001. September 11th, 2001 provided a convenient excuse to invade Afghanistan. Even after the alleged assassination of Osama bin Laden we are still in Afghanistan, guarding huge poppy fields and supporting global corporate interests. As usual its the people in Afghanistan that suffer the most. More so, our troops are left to wonder, what are we still doing here? The global war is just beginning. Even without an investigation into what really happened on 9/11, the United States invaded Afghanistan on October 7th, 2001, supposedly to hunt down Osama dead or alive for the 9/11 attacks. It would be over a year before the Bush administration is pressured into mounting an official investigation through the creation of the 9/11 Commission. The commission would prepare a full and complete account of the circumstances surrounding the September 11, 2001 attacks. Well, that failed because of what they didnt put into the final report. There is no mention of WTC 7 or eyewitness testimony about explosions in the basement, lobby, or floors of the towers. There is also no logical explanation of why the Twin Towers collapsed straight down at free-fall speed in ten seconds. According to basic physics, this is impossible. Why would something so crucial to the truth be covered up? Inside jobs always have a cover story. The cover story is usually provided by those who committed the crime. If one did not commit the crime, why risk getting caught covering up someone elses crime? It has also been reported that Marvin Bush (brother of George W. Bush) was the director of the company responsible for security of the World Trade Center from 1993 to 2000. George W. Bushs cousin, Wirt Walker 3 was the CEO of the same company, Securacom, from 1999 to January 2002). (3) When we look at the evidence, we find there are many strange things that surround the events of September 11th. If we choose to ignore this evidence, it becomes impossible to see the truth about 9/11. On some level, 9/11 was an inside job by people within the United States.

14

The 9/11 False Flag

Sibel Edmonds Sibel D. Edmonds is a former FBI translator who claimed that the FBI, Pentagon, and the State Department had been infiltrated by a Turkish and Israeli-run intelligence network. She says that the FBI received information in April 2001, from a reliable Iranian intelligence asset, that Osama bin Laden was planning attacks on 4-5 cities with airplanes. The public has still not been told of the intentional obstruction of intelligence. The public has not been told that certain information, despite its relevance to terrorist activities, is not shared with counter-terrorism units. This was true prior to 9/11, and it remains true today. She is also the founder of the National Security Whistle Blowers Coalition (NSWBC). Susan Lindauer Michael Collins spoke with Susan around March of 2009. In his article, Susan Lindauer Blows the Whistle Again, Susan explains how she tried to warn the Attorney Generals office about the coming terrorist attacks being planned in America. By early August, 2001, our team was gravely concerned that an attack was imminent...Dr. Fuisz instructed me to telephone United States Attorney General John Ashcrofts office. In mid-August, I phoned the staff of his private office at the Justice Department---identifying myself as an asset covering Libya and Iraq, I made a formal request that his private office issue an emergency alert throughout the department for any fragment of intelligence pertaining to possible airplane hijackings or airplane bombings. I explained that we expected a major attack involving that scenario, and we urgently needed cooperation from all other agencies.
(4)

She drops a bomb shell saying, Dr. Fuisz never formally revealed his source to me. But within about 30 minutes after airplanes struck the Twin Towers, he blurted something to me over the phone. He told me the Israeli Mossad had advance warning about the attack. As I recall, he said it before the buildings collapsed. He asked me if I

15

The Inside Job

thought it was an accident that a man and woman happened to be waiting on the sidewalk with a video camera, ready to record the attack. He was highly agitated. He challenged me how often a bystander has a camera cued up to record a car accident? Then he said, Those are Israeli agents. Its not an accident. They knew this attack was coming. And they were waiting for it. I was outraged and shocked by the images on the television. I shot back something to the effect of, You mean, weve been looking for an attack all this time! And the Israelis knew about it? And they didnt tell us? In retrospect, outside the passion of that particular moment, the Israelis may have told us much more than Richard Fuisz may have known. Immediately the phone-line cut dead between us. I called him right back. Very calmly, he said, Susan, we must never talk about that again. Sibel Edmonds and Susan Lindauer are just two of the many whistleblowers who knew about foreknowledge of what was going to happen on September 11th. I am certain that if John ONeill were alive today he would be a whistleblower as well. All three of these people were punished for speaking the truth about Osama bin Laden being determined to fly planes into targets on U.S. soil. In all cases, the government did nothing. In reality we the people are the true government of this nation. It is our turn to do what our government did not. Something. Pentagon Reports Losing $2.3 Trillion The Day Before 9/11 On September 10th, 2001, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld made remarks during a speech at the Pentagon where he said, According to some estimates, we cannot track $2.3 trillion in transactions. (5) In the beginning of this speech he refers to the new adversary that the Pentagon faces. Perhaps this adversary sounds like the former Soviet Union, but that enemy is gone: our foes are more subtle and implacable today. You may think Im describing one of the last decrepit dictators of the world. But their day, too, is almost past, and they cannot match the strength and size of this adversary. The adversarys closer to home. Its the Pentagon bureaucracy.

16

The 9/11 False Flag

The adversary may be very close to home, as Rumsfeld suggests. The next day would loosen the chains of this bureaucracy. War was declared on the people of the United States and the free world in general. The real question is who declared war on us and why? Rumsfeld also spoke of a transformation within the Department of Defense. To transform the department, we must take advantage of the private sectors expertise. Ive asked the members of the Senior Executive Council to streamline the acquisition process and spur innovation in our traditional supplier base. Just in time... Section 2. The Day Of 9/11 At 8:45 a.m. the North Tower of the World Trade Center is hit by an airplane, American Airlines, Flight 11 (allegedly led by Mohamed Atta). Firefighters rush to the scene, just as they have been trained to do. Yet they are not trained to deal with explosives going off inside of one of the twin towers, as three firefighters state. Their verbal accounts of that day would be suppressed for many years. Their account did not fit into the 9/11 Commission Report because it would have discredited the 9/11 Commission Report from the start. Again, here we have a cover-up by our own government. Its extremely important that three firefighters will say that there were bombs going off in the lobby and there may be other bombs in near-by buildings as well. Why was this information hidden from the public for so long? This evidence of what they saw has just been released by NIST, due to being sued by the International Center for 9/11 Studies, under the Freedom of Information Act. There are two versions of this particular video. I have included as much as I can of what three firefighters witness before and after the South Tower is hit at 9:03 a.m. From the beginning of the shorter two minute video, you will notice that the radio in Firefighter #1s hand, he is referred to as Jimmy G., is not working. The radio receiver is attached to his waist, but is dangling towards the ground. The camera catches Jimmy Gs sunken head staring at the ground in disbelief. He and two fellow firefighters sit on a concrete ledge, covered in white

17

The Inside Job

dust in front of two parked fire trucks. Jimmys nose is bloody with a thin coat of gray dust. It looks like something hit him in the face; possibly debris from the explosions in the lobby. Tell my sister Im ok, he says towards the cameraman. Imagine yourself in these three mens shoes as you read the following account of explosions going off on 9/11. This is what NIST does not want you to see, hear, or read. Using the Freedom of Information Act, the International Center for 9/11 Studies was able to shine more light on the truth about that day. It reinforces what some people already know and what some people would like to forget. The truth about what happened to these firefighters speaks for itself. What happened? someone off-camera asks. Firefighter #2 answers, We was in an explosion. From one of the nearby radios, presumably from one of the firefighters, comes a beeping noise. Firefighter #2s head tilts upward, presumably towards the burning towers. He explains vaguely that in the lobby and...[during] the third explosion, the whole lobby collapsed on us. As Firefighter #2 speaks, you can see Jimmys upper-body rocking back and forth as he sits and relives the nightmare he just experienced. What was it like? says a female voice. She quickly repeats, What was it like? Horrible, answers Firefighter #2. It was like hell, adds Jimmy. He lifts up his head, presumably looking towards the lady asking him the question. With blood dripping down his swollen nose and bloody mouth, his eyes widen as he adds, You dont wanna know. Firefighter #2 swings his left arm towards where the towers presumably are, The whole building just collapsed on us, inside the lobby. A mans voice asks him, Was that a secondary explosion? Yes it was, Firefighter #2 answers. Definitely a secondary explosion cause we was inside waiting to go upstairs and on our way

18

The 9/11 False Flag

upstairs the whole fuckin thing blew and it just collapsed on everybody inside the lobby At this point, Jimmy still has not reached for his radio receiver. Remember that there were numerous reports that firefighters radios were not working properly that day. Wiping himself with a bloody white cloth, Jimmy tosses the cloth aside and grabs his radio. He slaps his radio seven times as dust flies off his thick gloves. He looks back at his buddy and the man asking the questions as the conversation continues. Firefighter #2 goes on to say, Everybody was inside the building, waiting to go upstairs and they just, they just let loose. Everything just let loose inside the building. A mans voice asks, So what youre tellin me is that there was a plane or whatever hit the building, then a secondary explosion- Firefighter #2 explains there were like three explosions after that. We came in after the fire...when the fire was going on already. We was in the staging area, inside the building waiting to go upstairs, then the explosion, the whole lobby collapsed on the lobby inside. This is more evidence of bombs in the basement of the towers, as William Rodriguez has been saying for years. This testimony could have been suppressed to decrease the credibility of Rodriguezs story; even though there were many other witnesses who have the same story. Jimmy hastily tries to communicate through his radio again. Unsuccessful again, he hits his radio three times, obviously proving it isnt working properly. His head droops down again. The man then asks Firefighter #2 to clarify if it was just mayhem after that? Firefighter #2 tells him that everybody tried to make their way out. A lot of people was trapped inside...

A Black, Very Large Airplane This is where Firefighter #3 comes into the picture. We watched the first explosion, he says calmly. As were watching the

19

The Inside Job

buildings I saw a black, very large airplane fly right into the second building. Came out at south. Right in front of our eyes, just, his eyes trail off into the distance. He appears to shake his head in disbelief, It was so surreal, it was like a movie set. Then hes asked about the second and third explosions from an off-camera male voice, Second and third explosions also right? We were in the building for the third [explosion], collapsed, Fire-fighter #3 tells him. I was on this drive here, for the other one. The shorter video cuts to Jimmy, who still has a bloody nose. But in the longer version of this clip, Firefighter #3 is asked an inaudible question. It sounds like a female asks, How many people are still back there? but Im not entirely sure on this yet. She asks this twice when Firefighter #3 asks, I beg your pardon? (Pause) He looks over to Jimmy as if to clarify the exact numbers, Id say about 50% of what units that were on scene. Lots of people in that building. Jimmy comes alive after a cup of water is handed to him. He spits it out, presumably to get the dust out of his lungs. (Asbestos?) He then explains to anyone within earshot, These people dont understand, there may be more, any one of these fuckin buildings can blow up. This aint done yet. He continues to spit on the ground; you can hear him trying to clear the phlegm from his throat. Off-camera, Firefighter #2 says, It couldnt be no worse than this...youre in the buildings trying to help people and then an explosion on your side of the building, so I dont think itll get any worse than this. (6) It gets worse. All of the above conversation happens before either of the towers fall.

9/11 Stand Down Order? As The South Tower Falls The video opens with both of the World Trade Center Towers burning against a bright blue sky. Not a single cloud in sight. The North

20

The 9/11 False Flag

Tower stands in front of the South Tower. To the left of the North Tower stands WTC Building 7. The white smoke clouds of the North Tower curve like an umbrella, over Building 7. A woman in a dark gray suit stands with one hand on her hip, examining the scene. In front of her is a wide street, with a fence on each side. Many other citizens sit and stand, looking at both towers burning in the back-drop. One guy on roller-blades skates past the camera, towards the towers. Then the unthinkable happens. At 9:59 a.m. the South Tower (which was hit second) collapses behind the North Tower. The cameraman moves to get a closer view and a lady runs away from the towers screaming, God! and almost runs into the camera. The man on roller blades stops and puts his hand on the fence as the South Tower falls before the eyes of thousands of people. Will he skate towards the destruction while everyone else is running as far away, into safety, as they can? Yes, he is the only one in this video that goes towards the dust clouds that slowly approach this street. The people who were sitting on the bench near-by grab their backpacks and begin to flee the area with everyone else. Like the man on roller blades, the camera begins to walk towards the towers. Frankie! someone calls out; this is presumably the cameraman but maybe not. Well call him Man #1. More people run toward the camera, away from the towers, as the camera gets closer to the clouds in near-view. The same voice, Man #1, tells someone, presumably Frankie, Were not going in the place. You hear me? We dont know who this person speaking is yet. There is no audible rebuttal. Just silence, from what I can hear. A foreign speaking reporter, dressed in black slacks and jacket, walks past the camera, towards the towers as the dust cloud continues to rise and expand throughout the surrounding area. He may be speaking Punjabi or something similar, but Im not sure yet on that either. A linguist will solve that in seconds. Just like the audio above. Ok, the second tower has gone down, says a different, more firm, voice, (almost in a questioning his superior way?). Well call him Man #2.

21

The Inside Job

Were not going any closer, says Man #1. They had it wired for explosives obviously. Obviously there was a truck in there with explosiveswere not going any further Then it sounds like someone says, So were not going any closer than here? I cant hear what is being said next until Man #1 says what sounds like, Our lives are the most important first, agree? You can then hear what sounds like audible receptive responses to this request. It sounds like a stand-down order, but maybe Im reading too deeply into this? He already is talking about explosives, just like back in 1993, when explosives were placed in a small truck and detonated under the North Tower. Man #1 is obviously the person in charge of whoever these men are. How many men are there? Man #2 reaffirms, as if hes stating the obvious, This is really a coordinated attack. It has to be. Man #3 then quickly relays, Someone just told me that they attacked the Pentagon too? Once the camera man starts getting the reactions from the sobbing citizens, some already covering their mouths, Man #1 tells him, Let me have the camera. This sounds like these people were told to stand down. If so. Who gave the order? More so, who are these people? It sounds like they are either police, fire fighters, or some type of government employees. Crash At 8:43 a.m. the top of the North Tower is struck by American Airlines Flight 11. At 9:03 a.m. the South Tower is struck by United Airlines Flight 175. This is the plane that Firefighter #3 describes as a black, very large airplane. At 9:59 a.m. the South Tower (the second tower to be struck by a plane) completely crumbles into rubble and dust in just 10 seconds. Twenty nine minutes later, at 10:28 a.m. the North Tower

22

The 9/11 False Flag

(which is struck before the South Tower) falls in roughly 10 seconds. Why would the South Tower fall first? If the North Tower was hit first, shouldnt it fall before the South Tower? How do these buildings collapse straight down at free-fall speed without resistance? How is it possible that two 110 story skyscrapers, completed in 1973, burn for about 56 minutes across 8 floors and 103 minutes over 5 floors before collapsing to the ground? How does NIST account for the laws of physics being completely ignored? First they dance around the issue. Then NIST ignores repeated attempts to debate on the subject. I dont think people like Richard Gage, Stephen Jones, David Ray Griffin, and Ed Hass will stop pursuing a televised debate about the issue until NIST and its supporters retract their account of what happened on 9/11 (or prove their theory in the court of public opinion, where the facts truly matter). The 9/11 Truth Movement will be waiting for them, whenever and wherever they are ready to debate the facts. The media can ignore the 9/11 Truth Movement as much as they want. The more they do, the more they discredit themselves. When a partially self-educated man in his early thirties has a better understanding of what happened on 9/11 than the mainstream media, you know the media is full of crap. Even more revealing is that at 5:20 p.m. on 9/11, World Trade Center Building 7, a 47 story skyscraper; collapses into its own footprint in just 7 seconds without any plane hitting it.

The building was designed to have a fully loaded 707 crash into it. That was the largest plane at the time. I believe that the building possibly could sustain multiple jetliner impacts because this structure is like the mosquito netting on your screen door. This intense grid, and the jet plane is just a pencil puncturing that screen netting. Frank DeMartini (World Trade Center

23

The Inside Job

Construction Project Management Manager, recorded 1/25/01)

The Twin Towers had an internal core of 47 steel box columns, which measured 36 by 90 centimeters. The thickest steel in the buildings were ten centimeter thick steel columns, located near the base of the buildings. Explosives would need to be set in the basements or lower levels of the building in order for it to collapse into itself. The upper floors had a thickness of 6 centimeters. Again, we have multiple eyewitness testimony of flashing lights across floors of the towers and multiple explosions going off all day long. Each floor was a steel plate into which concrete had been poured. In the center of the buildings was a reinforced core, featuring four steel columns encased in concrete. If we spend a few moments on the Architects & Engineers for 9/11 Truth website, we can see that the government sponsored Pancake Theory is impossible at free-fall speed. The Twin Towers were designed by Lee Robertson, a structural engineer who built the towers to absorb the impact of a Boeing 707 commercial airliner. Another thing I learned from Architects & Engineers for 9/11 Truth is that hydrocarbons (jet fuel) cannot produce the temperatures capable of turning steel into molten. If there were bombs in the buildings, the 3,000 people that died deserve a criminal investigation into what happened and why. Maintenance workers, pedestrians, firefighters, EMTs, and at least one detective are on record as saying they heard or saw explosions (or bright flashes around the buildings) just before the towers collapsed.

24

The 9/11 False Flag

The third installment of the Loose Change documentary series, Loose Change: Final Cut, pointed out that when the Twin Towers came down, they released over 500 tons of pulverized asbestos into lower Manhattan, along with lead, barium, mercury, chromium, copper, and several other toxic chemicals. 425,000 cubic yards of concrete is pulverized. 600,000 square feet of glass is turned into dust. William Rodriguez
...there was an explosion that came from under our feet, we were pushed upwards lightly by the effect, I was on Basement level 1 and it sounded like it came from [Basement] 2 and [Basement] 3 level. Rapidly after that we heard the impact far away at the top. My assertions are that in my 20 years experience there, and witnessing prior to that many other noises that [I can] conclude without any doubt where the sounds were coming from...some of the same people I saved gave testimonies in interviews of the same experience... William Rodriguez, WTC employee for over 20 years

William Rodriguez is a citizen of the United States, residing in New Jersey. He is also a native of Puerto Rico and has gone on a global tour to tell his side of the story about what happened on 9/11. Mr. Rodriguez worked as a maintenance worker at the World Trade Center in New York City. On September 11th, he was one of the last people to exit the World Trade Center, along with numerous firefighters he saved. He saved many firefighters lives, like John Schroeder (Schroeders story of a dead body in a closet inside one of the towers will be covered later). Rodriguez bravely led firefighters through the emergency stairwell inside of one of the towers, unlocking doors as they ascended to the bottom of the building. In doing so, he helped possibly hundreds of people evacuate out of the building. Rodriguez saved so many lives because he was the only worker on site that had a master key to the North Tower. God bless you Mr. Rodriguez. His website www.william911.com explains everything you might want to know about William Rodriguez. Rodriguez, at great risk to his own life, re-entered the Towers three times after the first, North Tower impact at about 8:46 a.m., and is believed to be the last

25

The Inside Job

person to exit the falling North Tower alive, surviving the buildings collapse by diving beneath a fire truck. After receiving medical attention at the WTC site for his injuries, Rodriguez spent the rest of 9/11 aiding as a volunteer in the rescue efforts, and at dawn the following morning, was back at Ground Zero continuing his heroic efforts. Rodriguez lost his employment of 19 years as a direct result of the attacks on the WTC on 9/11. Deeply affected, as one might imagine, by his experiences of 9/11, Rodriguez has, in a variety of capacities and through several different organizations, worked ever since that terrible day to help others who were affected by the atrocities committed. He has continued in these labors, notwithstanding the fact that, due to the loss of his employment, he was unable to earn a living, and was even homeless for a time. His story became an example of compassion and dedication. Rodriguez became an expert on disaster management and goes around the world giving lectures on facing adversity among other themes. (For more info. Go to www.william911. com, or write to wtcbill@gmail.com) Firefighters Witness Explosions John Schroeder, 9/11 Fire Fighter, First Responder, explains his version of what really happened that day. So we were heading up to the 24th floor stairwell and all of a sudden we heard mayday, mayday, second plane, second plane. Were lookin at each other, come on, second plane? Theres no way theres a second plane. Within seconds, our building got rocked...we got bounced around in the stairwell like pinballs man. And we just said, You know what? Time to go. We got down to the lobby and everything was blown out, exploded. We were the only ones in the lobby now. Were goin wait a second here, where is everybody?...but for every window in the lobby to be exploded, I mean them windows...they were two, three inch glass, you know? Come on. They exploded out of the lobby...it wasnt from the jet fuel.

26

The 9/11 False Flag

No way. The elevators exploded. They were [far away] down from the lobby. The lobby was over here. That should never have happened....we came down, it looked like a bomb went off in the lobby. There was no fire. It just looked like a bomb went off. The oral histories of the what happened on 9/11 (over 12,000 pages) are voiced by firefighters, paramedics, and emergency technicians. There are many people who heard or thought they heard explosions going off inside the World Trade Center Towers on September 11th, 2001. Chief Frank Cruthers said, There was what appeared to be at first an explosion. Firefighter Kevin Gorman also heard the explosion, looked up, and saw like three floors explode, saw the antenna coming down. All of a sudden, said Firefighter Thomas Turilli, it almostsounded like bombs going off, like boom, boom, boom, like seven or eight. Do you remember hearing this in the corporate-run media...ever? Its public record, almost hidden in plain sight. As we are looking up at the building said Firefighter Joseph Meola, it looked like the building was blowing out on all four sides. We actually heard the pops. Didnt realize it was the fallingyou heard the pops of the building. Fire Marshall John Murrays testimony explains the building didnt come down, it shot straight out over our heads, like straight across West Street. The pops heard in the towers were most likely explosions, not a result of the pancake theory. If the floors pancaked, its hard to believe that pieces of the building would be shot straight out over our heads, like straight across West Street. Firefighter William Reynolds was distracted by a large explosion from the South Tower and it seemed like fire was shooting out a couple of hundred feet in each directionmaybe twenty floors below the impact area of the plane.
It actually shook my bones. Louis Cook, Paramedic (E.M.S.)

Bradley Mann, Lieutenant (E.M.S.), said that shortly before the first tower came down I remember feeling the ground shaking. I heard a terrible noise, and then debris just started flying everywhere. Captain Karen Deshore, E.M.S., described the popping sounds

27

The Inside Job

being accompanied by orange and red flashes, providing more evidence of explosives inside the towers. With each popping sound it was initially an orange and then a red flash came out of the building and then it would just go all around the building on both sides as far as I could see. These popping sounds and the explosions were getting bigger, going both up and down and then all around the building. For those who still believe the 9/11 Commission Report, thats not how buildings fall. Thats how theyre demolished; imploding into its own footprint in an orderly fashion. So-called experts will tell you that buildings will fall due to the plane hitting it, when combined with the massive heat that the jet fuel produced. Science proves that this isnt possible due to jet fuel alone. Who would you trust to have a thorough analysis? Scientists, or angry debunkers? To the debunkers, I say, prove it. Show me your litmus test; show me when, in the history of the entire world, has a building collapsed the same way as WTC 1, 2, and 7. It never has and Id bet money it never will again. If you believe science is credible, then research the science of 9/11, A&E911truth.org. If you dont believe basic provable science or physics...well, thats a completely different issue. Detective Thomas M. Inman corroborated E.M.S. Captain Karen Deshores eyewitness account when he stated, [referring to WTC #1] Suddenly there was another loud boom at the upper floors, then there was a series of smaller explosions which appeared to go completely around the building at the upper floors. And another loud earth-shattering blast with a large fire ball which blew out more debris[Referring to WTC #2:] When I looked in the direction of the Trade Center before it came down, before No. 2 came downI saw low-level flashes. (7) Low level flashes are also inconsistent with the pancake theory. Firefighter Kenneth Rogers described hearing explosions in the South Tower. Floor after floor after floor. One floor under another after another and when it hit about the fifth floor, I figured it was a bomb, because it looked like a synchronized deliberate kind of thing. These people are not crazy. They just reported what they heard and saw. Yet our culture today associates anyone who believes that there were bombs in the Twin Towers with those crazy conspiracy

28

The 9/11 False Flag

theorists. Firefighter Timothy Julian testified that he heard like an explosion and then [a] crackling type of noise, and then it sounded like a freight train, rumbling and picking up speed, and I remember I looked up, and I saw it coming down. Captain Dennis Tardio also heard explosions. It is as if the building is being imploded, from the top floor down, one after another, boom, boom, boom. I stand there in amazement. I cant believe what I am seeing. This building is coming down. (8) Fire Marshall John Coyle recanted this first statement when he said, I finally got through on my phone to my father and said, Im aliveI just so narrowly escaped this thing. He said, Where were you? You were there? I said, Yeah, I was right there when it blew up. He said, You were there when the planes hit? I said, No, I was there when it exploded, the building exploded. He said, You mean when it fell down? I said, No, when it exploded. Did he then change his story to match the propaganda that was being reported on TV? You decide. Heres the retraction Fire Marshall Coyle reportedly made later, The tower was it looked to me I thought it was exploding, actually. Thats what I thought for hours afterwards, that it had exploded orthere had been some device on the plane that had exploded, because the debris from the tower had shot out far over our heads. Deputy Commissioner Thomas Fitzpatricks testimony adds more proof leaning towards an explosion, rather than steel melting into a pancake collapse. A puff of smoke coming from about two thirds of the way up. Some people thought it was an explosionit looked like sparkling around one specific layer of the buildingthen the building started to come down. My initial reaction was that this was exactly the way it looks when they show you implosions on TV. Firefighter Craig Carlsen claimed he heard about 10 explosions before WTC 2 collapsed perfectly straight down. You just heard explosions coming from building two, the south tower. It seemed like it took forever, but there were about ten explosionsWe then realized the building started to come down. New York Firefighter John Schroeder knew that somethins wrong here when the elevators exploded in the lobby of one of the

29

The Inside Job

towers. A plane just hit the Trade Center...There was a lady on fire right outside of the door. My buddy Teddy Rivera had a can, he was puttin her out. That might of saved his life...By the time we got around to the corner, to the west side, there was 30 floors of fire. So were standin there in the lobby. Were getting it together. I look down to my right and the elevators exploded, some kind of like a Bruce Willis Die Hard Movie. People just come runnin out of the elevators on fire. Fire ball. We were in there for maybe five minutes. Five minutes and the elevators exploded on us. Yeah, we said somethins wrong here. The plane hit up on the 80th floor...I mean in five minutes, and all of a sudden now, the elevators are exploding on the first level of the Lobby? The following is a quote from Mayor Giuliani during an interview on 9/11 with Peter Jennings for ABC News. I went down to the scene and we set up headquarters at 75 Barkley Street, which was right there with the Police Commissioner, the Fire Commissioner, the Head of Emergency Management, and we were operating out of there when we were told that the World Trade Center was going to collapse. And it did collapse before we could actually get out of the building, so we were trapped in the building for 10, 15 minutes, and finally found an exit and got out, walked north, and took a lot of people with us.
All I ask for is the truth. But lets remember, we in America today like to say we want to hear the truth. We like to fell we want to hear the truth. Then why is it that we attack all the truth tellers? Jesse Ventura

On September 11th, 2001, there were multiple firefighters who mention or believe that they heard an explosion or explosions in either the North or the South Tower. I put these quotes in this book as proof to the eyewitness accounts of that day. There are many more I could have added. Im sure you get the idea. Are all these firefighters conspiracy theorists for believing there were bombs in the basement? Of course not. Is it possible that they all heard bombs, but were all wrong? Yes, its possible. But is it plausible? I think you can figure out that for yourself. Keeping your eyes open, do you see something wrong with the 9/11 Commission Report and the image of 9/11 in the

30

The 9/11 False Flag

corporate-run media? Can you feel it in your gut? Maybe you cant quite put your finger on it, but do you get the sense or vibe that something is wrong here? That is what led me to dig for the truth. The spiritual battle is what keeps me going. Flight 77 Pentagon As for the Pentagon attacks, we may know what happened to the Pentagon if we could see the surveillance cameras and what video evidence was captured of what hit the Pentagon. According to many sources, the Pentagon has more camera surveillance than anywhere else in America, and perhaps the world. Yet, we have been given only very few images of whatever hit the Pentagon that day. Its been reported that employees of local gas stations and such have been threatened and forced to keep their mouths shut about what they saw that day. Why? What does the FBI or anyone else have to hide? What is on those tapes? I want to know. This is what I am willing to say I know for sure, the official story is not the full account of what happened on 9/11. At this point, even most of the 9/11 Commissioners themselves have problems with the official account of 9/11. I do not want my children in public schools learning this lie about 9/11! The truth may hurt, but Id rather give my kids the truth than feed them a lie. Theyre depending on us to set a good example for the future. We cant do that with lies. As Flight 77 made an unauthorized turn to the south along the Kentucky-Ohio border, it disappeared off the radar screen, at approximately 8:56 a.m. Thats unheard of. Just as you cant easily lose $2.3 trillion dollars of tax payer money, you cant easily lose a huge 757 Boeing commercial airliner. What happened to the money remains a complete mystery. But what about Flight 77, which hit the Pentagon? Jesse Venturas book sheds some light on that, though you may have also read it elsewhere. Captain Wittenberg has said that if Flight 77 was actually off the radar screen for 36 minutes, then it was no longer airborne. Did it land in some remote field, while something else maybe the missile Charles Lewis heard about at LAX hit the

31

The Inside Job

Pentagons financial records area? Ventura points out that the only evidence that Flight 77 was still airborne after 36 minutes, and did not land somewhere remote, were the two phone calls that Ted Olsons wife made on board Flight 77. Ted Olsen was involved in the 2000 Florida recount. He was also a Solicitor General for the Justice Department after that scandal. There are many questions as to whether his wife, Barbara actually made the alleged phone calls. Suspicions have been raised because at that time, the plane in question did not have the type of phones on board that could place calls at such high altitudes. Since the official record of Flight 77 remaining airborne is based solely on one persons alleged phone calls, I think its fair to say the official account is inconclusive in this area. Even the FBI admitted, at Zacarius Moussaouis trial (the alleged 20th 9/11 hijacker), that Barbara Olson made one unconnected call that lasted zero seconds. Zero. So what evidence do we have that the plane remained in the air as the official story goes? Doesnt sound like much. The Official Pentagon Lie The official story is a speculative lie based on no evidence that we have available. The only video evidence of what hit the Pentagon has been classified. The American people have never seen the alleged plane that hit the Pentagon, yet were told to trust the government. A government that hastily got rid of the physical evidence of the crash, tampering with one of the biggest crime scenes in the history of this nation. An argument can easily be made that the people responsible for removing evidence from the crime scene were more interested in cleaning up the mess than solving the actual crime. According to the official 9/11 Commission Report, some 60 people were herded into the back of Flight 77 by terrorists, wielding box cutters and threatening that they had a bomb on board. Four or five terrorists supposedly overwhelmed 60 people? Like Rumsfelds explanation for missing $2.3 trillion dollars the day before 9/11, I find that hard to believe the official account on Flight 77, given so little evidence of their claim.

32

The 9/11 False Flag

If you examine the photographs of the crash site on the Pentagon lawn, you will visibly see that something stinks here. The crash itself does not match up with the damage of a 757 Boeing; especially when you compare the wingspan of the huge airliner to the crash site photos we have been able to see. Still, most speculation would end instantly if we could see the classified videos of what really hit the Pentagon. Why would they need to classify it? If its for the safety of the American people, why cant our elected representatives in government see it? Remember the Zapruder film in the JFK assassination? What did it show? The kill shot. So what does the confiscated videotapes of the Pentagon show? Back and to the left...back and to the left...back and to the left... Missing Time In Cheneys Bunker On 9/11 Norman Mineta worked for the Department of Transportation and was in the bunker with Vice President Dick Cheney, National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice, and a few others. Minetas testimony is contradictory to the official 9/11 time-line. Mineta testified that Vice-President Dick Cheney knew about an incoming flight towards the Pentagon. What were the orders for the incoming plane? Heres another question thats been raised by many critics of the official story. On September 11th, what time did Vice President Dick Cheney enter the PEOC, (Presidential Emergency Operations Center), which was located in a bunker under the White House? Norman Mineta was the Secretary of Transportation (2001-2006) at the time. He is the longest serving Secretary of Transportation in the history of the United States. Even Richard Clarke has referred to Mineta as a rare-holdover from the Clinton administration. According to Minetas testimony, when he entered the PEOC at 9:20 a.m. Dick Cheney was already there. Yet according to the 9/11 Commission Report, Dick Cheney did not enter the PEOC until shortly before 10:00 a.m., perhaps at 9:58 a.m. That would be 20 minutes after the Pentagon was attacked, which was at 9:38 a.m. This is important because Mineta reports that Cheney

33

The Inside Job

was giving a standing order to a young man who was entering and leaving the room, asking if the order still stands. Mineta maintains that a stand down order was being given by Cheney. Mineta states that Chaney was aware of an incoming plane headed for the Pentagon. Mineta doesnt claim to know the size of the plane, but he testifies that Cheney knew of a plane headed towards the Pentagon and did nothing! We learned all this from suppressed video footage of Transportation Secretary Mineta being questioned by the 9/11 Commission. He told the commission, During the time that the airplane was coming into the Pentagon, there was a young man who would come in and say to the Vice President...the plane is 50 miles out...the plane is 30 miles out....and when it got down to the plane is 10 miles out, the young man also said to the vice president do the orders still stand? And the Vice President turned and whipped his neck around and said Of course the orders still stand, have you heard anything to the contrary? It seems Cheney knew exactly what was about to hit the Pentagon. Mineta eventually adds that the only information we had at that point was when it crashed. A September 11th, 2002 CNN article adds that after the planes struck the twin towers, a third took a chunk out of the Pentagon. Cheney then heard a report that a plane over Pennsylvania was heading for Washington. A military assistant asked Cheney twice for authority to shoot it down. (9) In addition is a 911Truth.org article by Gregor Holland, (10) In the CNN piece Cheney aid Josh Bolton describes the same exchange between Cheney and the young man that Mineta did, but Bolton ties the exchange to a report that a plane over Pennsylvania was heading for Washington. This is the official White House legend, the one adopted in the White House produced 9/11 Commission Report, the one exposed by Mineta. More strange is the fact that Norman Minetas testimony does not make it into the 9/11 Commission Report. (11) Why not? The time Cheney says he went into the bunker is also disputed by Mineta. Yet the corporate media has not followed up on simple questions. Thankfully independent media like 911Truth.org have. We know video evidence of what hit the Pentagon exists. A few still images were released to quell the masses, but it didnt work. The images released do not provide clear

34

The 9/11 False Flag

evidence that a commercial airliner hit the Pentagon. Camera surveillance of what happened at the Pentagon was recorded by multiple places, including a Citgo gas station nearby. Why did the FBI confiscate the video tapes, and why has the truth been withheld from the public for so long? One Citgo gas station employee said that the FBI was here within minutes and took the film. (12) Yet there is no testimony in the 9/11 Commission Report relating to what eyewitnesses at nearby gas stations and hotels saw hit the Pentagon. Is the Pentagon video part of the ever-growing cover-up? Building What? WTC Building 7 Barry Jennings was a City Housing Authority worker when he and corporate counsel Michael Hess found themselves trapped in World Trade Center Building 7. Though later Mr. Hess would deny he heard any explosions inside of Building 7, he was caught on film on 9/11 telling a reporter there was an explosion and weve been trapped on the eighth floor with smoke, thick smoke, all around us, for about an hour and a half. Jennings told Dylan Avery in an interview that when he made it to the sixth floor there was an explosion. The explosion was beneath me. He added that the staircase that I was standing on just gave way. When Jennings heard explosions below him, he and Mr. Hess made it back to the eighth floor. I heard some more explosions. Thats when Jennings turned to Hess and said, This is it, were dead. Were not gonna make it out of here. Jennings was very clear when he said that while this chaos was happening both [of the Twin Towers] were still standing. That does not match the official story. He told Dylan Avery, I was trapped in there when both [Twin Towers] came downAll this time Im hearing explosions. Later that day, after both towers had fallen, Jennings and Hess were still trapped inside Building 7. It was the heroic firefighters who saved the two men from certain death; soon after Jennings and Hess were rescued, that same day, Building 7 imploded straight down, just like the Twin Towers. Yet unlike the towers, no plane hit Building

35

The Inside Job

7. One can easily compare footage of any controlled demolition to the three buildings on 9/11 and see the similarities. The firefighters led Barry Jennings and Michael Hess down into the lobby of Building 7. Before the airplane attacks all was normal in Building 7. The lobby had nice escalators. It was a huge lobby. When they were being led out after the attacks, Jennings didnt recognize the lobby anymore. At one point he turned and asked a firefighter, Where are we? This was the lobby, Jennings was told. You gotta be kidding me, responded Jennings. The lobby was in total ruins. Walking over what he said felt like dead bodies, Jennings said the firefighter kept telling him, Do not look down. Why is that? Jennings asked. The firefighter repeated, Do not look down. Jennings then told Dylan Avery on camera he was stepping over people and you know you could feel when youre stepping over people. He would later clarify that, I never saw dead bodies...it felt like I was stepping over them but I never saw them. Two days before the release of the NIST Final Report on the collapse of WTC 7, Barry Jennings allegedly died or went missing on August 19, 2008. Alex Jones also reported on the death of Barry Jennings, We interviewed him for Loose Change: Final Cut...He begged us, saying hed been threatened. Saying his pension had been threatened, his job had been threatened and other threats...if he didnt shut up. Then he didnt really recant, he said yeah there were explosions. Yeah, before the towers fell, in Building 7. A 2008 Infowars.com article by Aaron Dykes sums up the coincidence between a newly released NIST report and the death of Barry Jennings. It is very unusual that a prominent - and controversial - 9/11 witness would die only days before the release of NISTs report on WTC7 and shortly after a firestorm erupted over his testimony that he heard explosions inside the building prior to collapse of either tower and that there were dead bodies in the buildings blown-out lobby. His boss talked about explosions, said Alex Jones after Jennings passed away. Firefighters, police talked about it. EMTs talked about it. Theres cops on CNN saying, get back, theyre gonna blow it up, its gonna come down. And the owners said they blew it up. So, the problem is, see, hes credible because he was the Deputy

36

The 9/11 False Flag

Emergency Manager of that area. So thats why they had to get rid of him, and I have no doubt they killed him. Owner Decides To Demolish WTC 7 On 9/11 Referring to why WTC Building 7 was brought down on September 11th, 2001, lease holder of the World Trade Center, Larry Silverstein said, You know weve had such terrible loss of life, maybe the smartest thing to do is pull it, ah, and they made that decision to pull and then we watched the building collapse. He claimed Building 7 was pulled on 9/11. Paul Joseph Watson, writing for Prison Planet.com, April 23, 2010, has revealed some interesting facts about Building 7. In his article titled, Bombshell: Silverstein Wanted To Demolish Building 7 On 9/11, he adds more fuel to the suspicious nature of Larry Silversteins actions on that day: However, the most damning aspect of the article is Shapiros inadvertent revelation that Larry Silverstein was on the phone to his insurance company pushing for the building to be demolished, which is precisely what happened later in the day, and as innumerable eyewitnesses as well as video footage and physical evidence prove, the collapse of WTC 7 could have been nothing else than a controlled demolition, which would place Silversteins $500 million insurance payout in severe jeopardy if ever acknowledged. Shapiros testimony, intended to debunk questions surrounding the official story behind 9/11, has only succeeded in raising more, because it completely contradicts Larry Silversteins insistence that he never considered deliberately demolishing WTC 7 with explosives. Craig Bartmer, an NYPD officer, gave an eyewitness account that should have been mainstream news. I walked around it (Building 7). I saw a hole. I didnt see a hole bad enough to knock a building down, though. Yeah there was definitely fire in the building, but I didnt hear anyI didnt hear any creaking, orI didnt hear any

37

The Inside Job

indication that it was going to come down. And all of a sudden the radios exploded and everyone started screaming get away, get away, get away from it!It was at that momentI looked up, and it was nothing I would ever imagine seeing in my life. The thing started pealing in on itselfSomebody grabbed my shoulder and I started running, and the shits hitting the ground behind me, and the whole time youre hearing boom, boom, boom, boom, boom. I think I know an explosion when I hear itYeah it had some damage to it, but nothing like what theyre sayingNothing to account for what we sawI am shocked at the story weve heard about it to be quite honest. As reported in Watsons article, EMT Indira Singh (Senior Consultant for JP Morgan Chase in Information Technology and Risk Management) told the Pacifica show Guns and Butter, I do believe that they brought Building 7 down because I heard that they were going to bring it down because it was unstable because of the collateral damage. Dan Rather can be heard comparing the collapse of Building 7 to a controlled demolition. Im sure CBS was not happy about that comment. That would be the beginning of the end for Dan Rather in the mainstream news. Live BBC video footage proves that BBC presenter Phil Hayton and reporter Jane Standley were fed information that Building 7 had collapsed. Yet Building 7 was still standing at this point. It would not collapse for another 20 minutes. Who fed them the early information and why? How did someone at BBC know Building 7 was going to collapse, implode, or be taken down? Phil Hayton was at the BBC studio while Standley was reporting from New York. When questioned by We Are Change UK years later Hayton initially forgot he was broadcasting live for the BBC on 9/11! I was in a theater, Hayton told the patient activists. He was at a matine I didnt have anything to do with it on the day. When the activist mentions reports of the BBC reporting the collapse of WTC 7 prior to the actual collapse, Hayton responds, I dont know that. I havent heard that oneIm surprised I havent heard it. Hayton is then asked if hes heard of World Trade Center Building 7, to which he responds, no. The activist jars his memory some more by reminding

38

The 9/11 False Flag

Hayton that he was one of the first to report the collapse of Building 7 before it actually happened. Hayton still doesnt remember, telling We Are Change UK, I dont remember it, no. My memorys not my strongest suit, and there was so much going on I really dont remember the sequence of events. I wasnt in the studio, for sure that day. I didnt go in, Hayton continues as hes still being reminded of his role on 9/11. He was in the BBC studio. The video on 911forum.org.uk plays all of the above dialogue and more before adding Haytons own words from around 5 p.m. (Eastern Time) on 9/11. On 9/11 Hayton reported live on the BBC, Now more on the latest building collapse in New Yorkthe Solomon Brothers building collapsing, and indeed it has. Apparently thats only a few hundred yards away from where the World Trade Center Towers were. And it seems that this was not a result of a new attack. It was because the building had been weakened during this mornings attacks. Its only when Hayton is reminded that he was in the studio on the evening of 9/11 that he remembers he went to the theater with his son, heard the news about 9/11 on the radio and went back to the BBC studio. The activist for We Are Change UK tells Hayton one of the reasons this topic is so controversial is because to this day, no scientist or engineer has been able to provide a plausible reason for this buildings collapse. The activist points out that NIST believes even the most plausible scenario is highly unlikely. Hayton responds, This sounds so significant. Im just amazed I didnt know about this. He asks, Is there no official explanation? None at all. Hayton asks what the BBCs response to this was and is told the BBC claims they lost the original footage. Hayton then asks, I sense that you think theres a conspiracy here. You might be right. (13) The Solomon Brothers building, WTC 7, is a forty-seven story skyscraper. At 5:20 p.m. eastern time, on September 11th, 2001, it collapsed with possibly only two contained fires on two separate floors. Offices inside WTC Building 7 included the Department of Defense, the IRS, the Security & Exchange Commission, the Secret Service, one of the largest CIA offices outside of Virginia, and the N.Y. Office of

39

The Inside Job

Emergency Management (O.E.M.). In a live BBC news report on the day of September 11th, 2001, the reporter, broadcasting from New York is explaining to BBC presenter Phil Hayton (in London) that Building 7 has just collapsed. The text screen at the bottom of the TV read as follows: The 47 storey Salomon Brothers building, close to the World Trade Center has also collapsed. (14) Just before WTC 7 actually collapses, the live feed for Jane Standley goes dead, as Phil Hayton looks on from the BBC broadcast studio. The BBC has since apologized for the mistake. When comparing Building 7 to Building 4, 5, and 6, it is strange that 4, 5, and 6 have more structural damage than WTC 7, yet they did not collapse. Video of this has to be seen to understand how strange this is. Stephen Jones understood early on what to look for in tracking down some of the culprits who helped pulled off 9/11. An investigation well beyond the scope of this paper would look for purchases of aluminum and iron-oxide powders (and sulfur) in multi-ton-quantities prior to 9/11/2001. Fox News correspondent David Lee Miller said on September 11th, 2001, We are told by one firefighter source that a building identified as Trade Center number 7 is in danger of collapse, we are told that engineers have gotten as close as they can to the building and that this building is on fire and there is a chance that this building could give way and we are told that if it does they expect that it would collapse in a southerly direction. Paul Joseph Watson wrote an amazing article asking, How would they know which way it would fall if the event was unprecedented? So the question is how did the building collapse? If it happened as Larry Silverstein said - that the decision was made to pull it (bring the building down by controlled demolition) - how did they get the demo team through Ground Zero, wire the building in record time, and bring it down? Why would they need to pull WTC 7 in the first place? Prison Planet.com reported Firefighters were told to move away from the building moments before it collapsed. In February of 2002 Silverstein Properties won $861 million from Industrial Risk Insurers to rebuild on the site of WTC 7. Silverstein Properties' estimated investment in WTC 7 was $386 million. So: This building's collapse

40

The 9/11 False Flag

resulted in a profit of about $500 million! So we have three buildings that fell the exact same way, yet one was admitted to be a controlled demolition by the owner of the World Trade Center, Larry Silverstein. Silverstein leased the buildings on July 2001. The insurance on the WTC allowed Silverstein to make a huge billion dollar profit off of the towers collapsing. Had the towers not fell that day, Silverstein would have had to pay around 200 million dollars in renovations, including removing the asbestos from inside the towers. Building 7 and both WTC towers collapsed almost the exact same way. Why was the collapse of Building 7 not mentioned in the 9/11 Commission Report? MSNBC asked FDNY Lieutenant David Rastuccio during a live broadcast after the last demolition on the afternoon of 9/11, You guys knew this was coming all day? Rastuccio then replied, We had heard reports that the building was unstable and that it eventually would either come down on its own, or it would be taken down. The FDNY Lieutenants comments directly corroborate what the leaseholder Larry Silverstein described in a PBS report as a decision to literally pull the building. Why wont the mainstream media further investigate their own reports? Who told this Lieutenant and others in the FDNY and the BBC that the buildings were going to come down? Whoever it was, knew that WTC 7 was going to collapse, despite the fact that such a collapse had never occurred before in the history of mankind. Any Truth Seeker should understand the significance of Rastuccio comments. Even MSNBCs Pete Williams, during an interview with WeAreChange.org, refused to comment on the attacks and the premature mainstream media reports of WTC 7 coming down. In terms of my opinion, its not even something I want to express. At 1:55 p.m. on September 11th, Henry Kissinger openly told CNN that this is comparable to an attack like Pearl Harbor, and we must have the same response. And the people who did it must have the same as the people who attacked Pearl Harbor. But it isnt just the people who did it, its the people who make it possible. As we have learned, that includes people with the United States government who knowingly covered up or omitted many facts about what happened on 9/11. On 9/11, George W. Bush wrote in his diary, The Pearl Harbor

41

The Inside Job

of the 21st Century took place today. We think its Osama bin Laden. We think there are other targets in the United States, but I have urged the country to go back to normal. We cannot allow a terrorist thug to hold us hostage. My hope is that this will provide an opportunity for us to rally the world against terrorism. With the creation of the Patriot Act, the Department of Homeland Security, and declaring the nation to be in a state of emergency, it seems Bush gave Osama everything he wanted if its true that al-Qaeda hates us for our freedom. Or is there more to this? Bush reportedly told Colin Powell, This is a great opportunity. He would reiterate this in his diary, My hope is that this will provide an opportunity for us to rally the world against terrorism. (15) During the attacks, Bush did nothing, Cheney did nothing, the FAA lagged, and Richard Clarke was coordinating efforts from the White House, which meant Condoleezza Rice was doing nothing. Section 3. An Investigation? A real investigation into 9/11 never happened until concerned citizens took it upon themselves to look into the facts. Eventually Bush was forced to create the 9/11 Commission. Still, the only real investigation has taken place outside of the government. The government and mainstream media dropped the ball. The governments cover-up of what really happened proves an inside job at some level. Less than one year after the attacks President Bush made his true feelings about Osama bin Laden when he said, I dont know where [Osama bin Laden] is...you know I just dont spend that much time on him. (16) The country, the continent, and the world have asked for proof of Osamas involvement, but the United States Government has refused. Why?
On September 11th, 2001, along with hundreds of my fellow troops, I went to Ground Zero. No one asked us, no orders were given. We went because our city, our country, our neighbors were under attack and we knew what to do, or at least we thought we did. On September 13th, we marched back in, in groups of twos and threes at first, and then dozens, until there must

42

The 9/11 False Flag

have been more than two hundred of us; carrying ropes, ladders, tools of every kind, back into the smoke and the poison, the rubble, where we reached an intersection of hundreds of civilians cheering us on. Our uniforms were torn and soiled, our resolve was simple. Stay and dig as long as we had any hope to save anybody. I want to tell you about how sick some of these brave men and women have become. I want to tell you about how the Mayor refused to accept the fact that not dozens, not hundreds, but many thousands of us were contaminated, sickened and poisoned by the most toxic combinations of building materials in the history of disaster relief; and that for five terrible years, he ignored that fact. Five years of our family members watching us drop dead. And every time Popular Mechanics calls the people of this movement nuts? These propagandists, professional liars and tools who cannot by any stretch of the imagination be considered journalists, strike another nail into the coffin of another rescue worker. David Miller, 9/11 First Responder

Secretary of State Colin Powell told Meet the Press on September 23rd, 2001, We are hard at work bringing all the information together, intelligence information, law enforcement information. And I think in the near future we will be able to put out a paper, a document that will describe quite clearly the evidence that we have linking him [Osama bin Laden] to this attack [September 11, 2001]. (17) But the next day, September 24th, 2001 Powell elaborated, that would be our intent. But most of it is classified. But theres no question that this network, with this gentleman at the headis the one who is responsible. And as we are able to provide information that is not sensitive or classified, I think we will try to do that in every way. (18) Ari Fleisher, White House Press Secretary, aided Powells back-pedaling saying, there are going to be times when that information cannot immediately be forthcoming. We are still waiting for the evidence. The Taliban publicly stated they were willing to hand over Osama bin Laden to the United States. All the United States had to do was show them proof. A senior Taliban official responded to the allegations that Osama bin Laden was responsible for the attacks on 9/11. We do not want to fightWe will negotiate. But talk to us like a sovereign country. We are not a province of the United States, to be issued orders to. We have asked for proof of Osamas involvement, but they have refused. Why? (19)

43

The Inside Job

To this, Richard Boucher, State Department spokesman said All one has to do is watch television to find Osama bin Laden claiming responsibility for the September 11 bombings. There is no question of responsibility. Bombings? Even the State Department spokesman said there were bombings on 9/11. Yet in the same sentence he blames Osama bin Laden. How could bin Laden get the buildings wired for explosives without help from someone within the United States? The bigger problem is the lack of evidence for Osamas involvement. We have some reports where he takes responsibility and some reports where he denies responsibility. Even more disturbing is when the FBI would later confess that they had created some fake bin Laden videos.
(20)

Speaking to a Pakistani newspaper, shortly after 9/11, Osama bin Laden denied any involvement in these terrorist acts. Some of the videos of Osama bin Laden released to the public are seen as questionable at best; the fact that the videos show two to three different versions of Osama bin Laden add more questions as well. Not long after being accused of these crimes against humanity, Osama reportedly tells the Pakistani newspaper, I have already said that I am not involved in the 11 September attacks in the United States...I had no knowledge of these attacks, nor do I consider the killing of innocent women, children and other humans as an appreciable act. Islam strictly forbids causing harm to innocent women, children and other people. Such a practice is forbidden even in the course of a battleWhat had earlier been done to the innocent people of Iraq, Chechnya and Bosnia?...The U.S. has no friends, nor does it want to keep any because the prerequisite of friendship is to come to the level of the friend or consider him at par with you. America does not want to see anyone equal to it. It expects slavery from others...Whoever committed the act of 11 September are not the friends of the American people. I have already said that we are against the American system, not against its people, whereas in these attacks, the common American people have been killed (emphasis added)...The United States should try to trace the perpetrators of these attacks within itself; the people who are a part of the U.S. system, but are dissenting against it. Or those who are working for some other system; persons who want to make the present century as a century of conflict between Islam and Christianity so that their own

44

The 9/11 False Flag

civilization, nation, country, or ideology could survive. They can be anyone, from Russia to Israel and from India to Serbia. In the U.S. itself, there are dozens of well-organized and well-equipped groups, which are capable of causing a large-scale destructionIs it not that there exists a government within the government in the United Sates? That secret government must be asked as to who carried out the attacks. (21) One thing that comes across as common sense is reported by a former high-level intelligence officer who tells journalist Seymour Hersh, Whatever trail was left, was left deliberately for the FBI to chase. Shortly after the attacks, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld echoed what Bush said about a great opportunity. [The 9/11 and Pentagon] attacks created the kind of opportunities that World War II offered, to refashion the world. Somehow passports from one of the terrorists that flew the plane into one of the Twin Towers managed to make its way, a little burnt but readable, to the rubble of the World Trade Center that same day. How this magic piece of paper was able to do what humans couldnt do withstand fire and a falling building is an unsolved mystery. Its more likely that Hershs source is correct. The trail was left deliberately. An unnamed man reportedly gave NYPD detective Yuk Chin the passport of Satam Al Suqami. This is more unbelievable than the magic bullet theory posed by Arlen Specter after JFK was assassinated. (Specters claim of eight exit wounds by one bullet is laughable.) Pakistans head of the ISI (equivalent of CIA) wired 100,000 dollars to Mohammad Atta, the ring leader of the attacks who died in the plane crash. When it was reported that the Pakistan head had meetings on and around September 11th, 2001, with Senator Bob Graham, Porter Goss, and CIA Director George Tenet - as the India Times reports on 10-09-01 - the head of the ISI quietly retired. Why is this important? In any criminal case like thisyou follow the money. What does the 9/11 Commission say about this wire transfer of money? On page 172 of the 9/11 Commission Report, it states that the US Government cannot find the origin of the money used to finance September 11th and that its of little practical significance. When real reporters questioned the chairman of the 9/11 Commission, Thomas

45

The Inside Job

Kean, on why its of little significance, Kean responded, Because it cost so little money. It cost less than $500,000. I Dont Spend That Much Time On Him On March 13, at a press conference in Washington D.C., President George W. Bush made it very clear that his top priorities did not include finding Osama dead or alive. I dont know where [bin Laden] is...you know I just dont spend that much time on him. I thought he was trying to bring these evil doers to justice? Wasnt it on September 14th that he promised the American people, live on TV, I can hear you! The rest of the world hears you! And the people who knocked these buildings down will hear all of us soon! We heard real factual information from an FBI agent named Rex Tomb, when he was interviewed by Ed Hass of The Muckraker Report, Bin Laden has not been formally charged in connection to 9/11in the case of the 1998 United States Embassies being bombed, bin Laden has been formally indicted and charged by a grand jury. He has not been formally indicted and charged in connection with 9/11 because the FBI has no hard evidence connecting bin Laden to 9/11. Ed Hass was astounded that the evidence threshold for gaining a federal indictment is much lower than for gaining a conviction. Yet for reasons that remain obscure from the public record, the U.S. governmenthas not gained such an indictment of Osama bin Laden. No indictment, no hard evidence, questionable video tapes where Osama admits masterminding the terror attack, and the missing black boxes from the planes that hit the WTC towers all point to more questions that need to be asked. A quick investigation is never a good thing when a crime has been committed. Shutting up potential whistleblowers and not allowing them to testify in front of congress or under oath raises eyebrows across the world. Even if the people dont understand what happen that day, they generally understand that something isnt right with the official story, as was the case with JFKs murder, and rush to judgment on who plotted the assassination. How do we know that these forces that knocked down

46

The 9/11 False Flag

the Twin Towers, WTC Building 7, and hit the Pentagon wont commit another terrorist attack and cover it up again? Section 4. 9/11 Commission & Mistakes of 9/11 The 9/11 COMMISSION

Im saying thats deliberate. I am saying that the delay in relating this information to the American public out of a hearing...was deliberately slowwalkedthe 9/11 Commission was deliberately slow-walked, because the administrations policy was, and its priority was, were gonna take Saddam Hussein out. Senator Max Cleland

Senator Max Cleland resigned from the 9/11 Commission, calling it a national scandal, saying, One of these days we will have to get the full story because the 9/11 issue is so important to America. But this White House wants to cover it up. 9/11 Commissioner Bob Kerry stated, There are ample reasons to suspect that there may be some alternative to what we outlined in our version. 9/11 Commissioner Tim Roemer has publicly said, We were extremely frustrated with the false statements we were getting...We were not sure of the intent, whether it was to deceive the commission or merely part of the fumbling bureaucracy.

47

The Inside Job

Petition Signers
Citizens in a democratic society deserve to know the truth, and to seek the truth in matters of such fundamental national importance should be treated as an expression of patriotic duty rather than the reverse. Richard Falk, Princeton Law Professor (Salon.com) First of all, the statement asks for a new inquiry into 9/11. That is hardly an insane demand, considering the many obstacles and limitations that prevented the 9/11 Commission from doing a proper job. Mark Crispin Miller (New York University professor of media studies)

Mark Miller has explained that the 9/11 Commission was under-funded. The 9/11 Commission had a budget of three million dollars to complete their investigation. Miller compares this to the forty million dollar White Water investigation. Miller adds the 9/11 Commission was denied access to what they considered vital information. The commission had no subpoena power and the entire process was rushed. There have also been various reports of others that were present while the investigation took place, citing that there were minders who were mysteriously present during the hearings. The Chairman of the Commission, Thomas Kean said the commission did not like somebody sitting behind them during the investigation. The Commission feels unanimously that its intimidation to have somebody sitting behind you all the time, who you either work with or works with your agency. Let us never forget that Bush and Cheney refused to testify separately. Instead, these two would only speak to the commission off the record, not under oath, and with a very strict time limit. Why not go under oath? Douglas Sturm, who is a professor at Bucknell University, teaching political science and religion, told Salon.com that there should be a new investigation to investigate closely and carefully a series of questions about that tragic event that have yet to receive fully satisfactory answers. With so many omissions and unanswered questions about 9/11, its easy to understand why people like Mark Miller would call on the media to do their job and examine the evidence. Instead, the media

48

The 9/11 False Flag

vilifies those who would speak out against the official story.
If every administration started to reexamine what every prior administration did, there would be no end to it. This is not Latin America. Arlen Specter

How did Arlen Specter remain a Senator for so long? Of course, during his last senate run, he jumped ship from being a republican to a democrat. Why? It was the only way he thought he could get elected in his home state of Pennsylvania. Is it surprising that he is opposed to truth investigations? This is the same guy who created the Magic Bullet Theory, which was used to prove the official story about John F. Kennedys death. Working under guidance of the Warren Commission, Specter tried to explain how three bullets could account for seven or eight bullet wounds. More so, the bullet was found in excellent condition. The magic bullet theory is in parallel with the WTC Building 7 mystery. The bullet made several impossible turns in Kennedys motorcade car, striking Governor Connelly and making impossible entry and exit points. Likewise, World Trade Center Building 7 fell the same way that the Twin Towers fell, yet no plane hit it. Newtons Law of Conservation of Momentum is defied on September 11th, as two twin hundred-story skyscrapers free-fall to the ground, in less than 11 seconds, with no resistance. Even if the pancake theory were true, (where the building collapsed like a pancake on top of another pancake) the buildings would not fall at the same rate of speed as any solid object dropped from a hundred story building. It just doesnt happen like that. Yet on 9/11, we told thats exactly what happened.

The interesting fact is that each of these 110-story Twin Towers fell upon itself in about ten seconds at nearly free-fall speed. This violates Newtons Law of Conservation of Momentum that would require that as the stationary inertia of each floor is overcome by being hit, the mass (weight)

49

The Inside Job

increases and the free-fall speed decreasesEven if Newtons Law is ignored, the prevailing theory would have us believe that each of the Twin Towers inexplicably collapsed upon itself crushing all 287 massive columns on each floor while maintaining a free-fall speed as if the 100,000, or more, tons of supporting structural-steel framework underneath didnt exist. William Rice (March 1, 2007, Vermont Guardian Why the towers fell: Two theories)

Senator Bob Graham was surprised by the degree to which agencies were not communicatingbut also I was surprised at the evidence that there were foreign governments involved in facilitating the activities of at least some of the terrorists in the United States. I am stunned that we have not done a better job of pursuing that to determine if other terrorists received similar support and, even more important, if the infrastructure of a foreign government assisting terrorists still exists for the current generation of terrorists who are here planning the next plots. To me that is an extremely significant issue and most of that information is classified, I think overly-classified. I believe the American people should know the extent of the challenge that we face in terms of foreign government involvement. That would motivate the government to take action. (23) Cofer Black, the CIAs intelligence chief later recollected that there were certain things that the 9/11 Commission didnt want to know. That coincides with a cover-up as well. Despite the intelligence brief The Phoenix Memo that arrived on George Bushs desk August 6, 2001, Condoleezza Rice would still claim that I would remember if I was told...that there was about to be an attack in the United States, and the idea that I would somehow have ignored that, I find incomprehensible. Me too, Condi. Many people find it incomprehensible that you would forget such a memo. George Bush said he never could have imagined that someone would fly a plane into a building, never. He said he would have moved heaven and earth to stop it, yet he couldnt, or didnt bother to even read the memo. Donald Rumsfeld told the 9/11 Commission that he didnt know of any intelligence briefing warning of an attack to use commercial airlines as missiles to fly into the Pentagon or the World Trade Center. It is possible that the memo warning of Osama using planes to fly into buildings was never read by these people. Just because

50

The 9/11 False Flag

you have a book on your desk doesnt mean youve read it. But if they didnt bother to read that memo, they werent doing their jobs. If they tried to cover up this memo after the fact, that makes them accomplices.
How did the buildings fall at the rate of gravity? They fell in ten seconds. Both in the 9/11 Report and you can stop-watch it. How can that be if youve studied physics? In physics, when a movable object hits one thats not moving, its gonna slow everything down. Its that simple, people; and yet these buildings were on the ground in ten seconds. If you took a billiard ball and dropped it in a vacuum, from the height of the World Trade Center, it would take 9.3 seconds to hit the ground. How could these buildings of steel and concrete land within 7/10th of a second of a free-falling billiard ball? Jesse Ventura

There were at least 14 exercises related to 9/11, some of which happened on the day of 9/11. One of these was apparently staged in Chantilly, Virginia, out of the National Reconnaissance Office. According to Webster Griffin Tarpleys book 911 Synthetic Terror (one of the best books on 9/11 Ive ever read) this supposedly took place on 9/11. It was based on the idea of flying commercial airliners into office buildings. He also states that Amalgam Virgo involved firing a cruise missile against a land target from a rogue freighter in the Gulf of Mexico. Tarpley believes that this may have been done in preparation for what happened at the Pentagon on 9/11. Whatever you think about the inside job theory on 9/11, its hard to deny the facts you have just read...most of which points to an inside job. Would firefighters lie about explosions? Was the death of Barry Jennings and the timing of the release of the Final NIST Report on Building 7 a coincidence? Has fire ever brought down a high-rise building, turning concrete and steel into dust? Does the hole that was in the Pentagon match the size of a commercial airliner? 9/11 was used for evil purposes, during and after the fact. Those evil purposes continue to this day. Its time to set the public record straight and hold people accountable. So much has happened since September 11th.
I was sitting outside the classroom waiting to go in, and I saw an airplane hit the tower the TV was obviously on. And I use to fly, myself, and I said, well, theres one terrible pilot. I said, it must have been a horrible

51

The Inside Job

accident. But I was whisked off there, I didnt have much time to think about it. George W. Bush We must speak the truth about terror. Let us never tolerate outrageous conspiracy theories concerning the attacks of September the 11th, malicious lies that attempt to shift blame away from the terrorists themselves, away from the guilty George W. Bush (before the UN general Assembly, November 10, 2001)

Mr. Bush, I couldnt have said it better myself.

It was clear that we were under attack. Why didnt the Secret Service whisk [Bush] out of that school?...(H)e is the commander-in-chief of the United States of America, our country was clearly under attack, it was after the second building was hit. I want to know why he sat there for 25 minutes. Kristen Breitweiser (9/11 widow and Activist, on the Phil Donahue Show, August 13th, 2002)

On May 16th, 2002, Condoleezza Rice told the press, I dont think anybody could have predicted that these people would take an airplane and slam it into the World Trade Center, take another one and slam it into the Pentagon; that they would try to use an airplane as a missile, a hijacked airplane as a missile. Yet during the five months leading up to the September 11th attacks, The FAA (Federal Aviation Administration) had fifty-two intelligence reports, from their own security branch that specifically named Osama bin Laden or al-Qaeda, warning of possible airline hijackings and suicide operations by alQaeda or bin Laden. The fifty-two intelligence reports were in a report from the 9/11 Commission, which approved of these findings before the commission disbanded in August. The Bush administration blocked the release of this crucial document for about five months. That gave them just enough time to ensure that the document would not be released before the 2004 Presidential Election. The administration cited national security as their reasoning for not releasing the document. Again, the timing of the release is suspicious. The document was quietly released after the 2004 election.

52

The 9/11 False Flag

Never, did in anybodys thought process about how to protect America did we ever think, that uh, the evil doers would fly not one but four commercial aircraft into precious US targets. Never. - George W. Bush (September 15, 2001)

George Bush clearly stated that he did not believe that anyone could have predicted that such a catastrophe could happen right here in America, he does not even think that his predecessor, Bill Clinton, could have predicted it either. Al Gore told Vanity Fair that Bush was warned on August 6, 2001 of an attack by al-Qaeda. Bin Laden Determined To Strike In US, said the intelligence community in a message so important that it was the headline of the Presidents daily briefing that day, five weeks before the attacksDidnt he see that clear warning?...Why were no questions asked, meetings called, evidence marshaled, clarification sought? On the day of 9/11 there were multiple War Games taking place by the United States Military. If certain people within certain government circles did not know that a scenario for flying a plane into a building was possible, then they must not have known about these war games leading up to 9/11, including one that the AP (Associated Press) knew about. (24) This story involved the NRO (National Reconnaissance Office) headquarters in Chantilly Virginia, near Dulles Airport.
Nobody in our government, at least, and I dont think the prior government could envision flying airplanes into buildings on such a massive scale. George W. Bush (April 13th, 2004)

Even the Department of Environmental Protection called it difficult to believe that a large Boeing 757 Aircraft [Flight 93] plunged into the ground with such force that the plane literally disintegrated and created a still smoldering crater. (25) Henry Kissinger was originally chosen to be Chairman of the 9/11 Commission. Bush signed it into law on November 27th 2002. Kissinger resigned, reportedly due to privacy issues, as he did not wish to disclose certain information about his clients or business associates. Infowars.com reported that Kissinger would go on to be a chief advisor to the Bush administration regarding the Iraq war. On This Week, hosted by George Stephanopoulos, January

53

The Inside Job

2009, Barack Obama told him, [I am] looking forward not backward, in regards to whether he would criminally prosecute George W. Bush. Obama said hed leave that to his Attorney General nominee to decide. Of course, the Attorney General works for and answers to Obama, so I guess the Attorney General would do what the President wants him to do. Falling We find evidence that the purpose of the 9/11 Commission was not to solve the case of 9/11.
Our aim has not been to assign individual blame. The 9/11 Commission Report, page Xvi

CIA Director George Tenet, testifying before Congress said, The system was blinking red. These facts and more have caused Mark Dice to announce to the public, May I have everybodys attention please? I come today with a message of information. 9/11 was an inside job. The Resistance Manifesto author was another shining light of truth that strengthened by confidence, allowing me to openly say the same thing. 9/11 was an inside job. In March of 2006, the actor Charlie Sheen went public with his claim, stating that he believes there is evidence to suggest that 9/11 was an inside job. I have some questions, Sheen told host Jimmy Kimmel. This was a major break-through for the 9/11 Truth Movement. Even some people heavily involved inside the political spectrum have gone public in claiming theres something wrong with the 9/11 Commission Report. Richard Gage of Architects & Engineers for 9/11 truth, Professor Stephen Jones, Willy Nelson, Jesse Ventura and Senator Paul Wellstone also voiced their opinions on the issue. There are many more to add to this growing list of people who question what happened on 9/11. Charlie Sheens opinion was blasted across CNN Headline News channel, in which Showbiz Tonight took the lead for mainstream

54

The 9/11 False Flag

news in analyzing what many 9/11 truth seekers believe. We didnt ask for much, only for our opinion to be heard. The place was Showbiz Tonight and the voice was Charlie Sheen. On the show they asked how many people agreed with Charlie Sheen. I am happy to say that of the 54,000 people who emailed their responses to A.J. Hammer of Showbiz Tonight, 83% of the e-mailers agreed with Mr. Sheen. Sheen first went public on my favorite radio show, the Alex Jones show. Alex Jones once said, I love giving it to the New World Order. Thats not because we love hurting people or even love hurting people who love hurting people. We want the truth to come out. Nothing can stop that now. The wheels are in motion. The Russian movie ZERO also explores the inside job theory of 9/11. There are many questions that have not been answered to this day. The White House refused an investigation for over one year. It took activism from the victims family members to get the ball rolling. Why? Why didnt Bush testify under oath? Why did he only agree to certain other terms such as He would only testify in the Oval Office, only with the Vice-President and without any tape recorders or transcripts? Any family members allowed to take notes had to submit the notes to security personnel. Why? According to NowPublic The US government withheld the actual passenger lists for yearsby not releasing these documents, the US Government actually encouraged speculation that the hijackers names did not show up on the passenger lists. A 2006 USA Today article claimed that no trace has been identified of 1,151 of the 2,749 people who died at the Trade Center. Eve Conant, writing for Newsweek, reported in early January 2009, Today, 1,126 of the 2,751 victims from the WTC and 5 individuals from the Pentagon have yet to be identified at all none of their remains and no traces of their DNA have been found. In Towers of Deception by Barry Zwicker, I learned there was concern that Mohammed Atta, the ring leader of the hijackers, once attended the International Officers School at Maxwell Gunter Air Force Base in Montgomery, Alabama. That is based on the verbal account by Air Force Spokesman Colonel Ken McClellan. As for the claim I have heard many times over and over in films such as Loose

55

The Inside Job

Change, (Final Cut), which claims that three of the hijackers (Ahmed Alnami, Ahmed Alghamdi, and Saeed Alghamdi) trained at Pensacola Naval Air Station? Pensacola News and The Washington Post have countered this allegation speculating that the hijackers stole the identities of Military trainees. Great counter-argument. Structures of Steel On February 13th, 1975, there was a three-alarm fire between the and 14th floor of the World Trade Center North Tower. This led to the installation of the sprinkler systems inside the WTC towers. Governor Jesse Ventura pointed out on 9/11 the priority is with removal of everything not investigating it. (26) On February 23rd, 1991, the Waun Meridian Plaza, a 38 story skyscraper in Philadelphia burned for 18 hours across eight floors and did not collapse. For Willie Nelson, Its not a clear cut situation; never was to meis there a reason to investigate?...Hell yeah. Those buildings were blown up internally. Im not a smart guy, but I can see that. On October 17th, 2004, a 56 story skyscraper in Caracas Venezuela, built in 1976, burned for 17 hours and spread across 26 floorsit did not collapse. 9th
Anyone who accepts the official theory about 9/11 is accepting a conspiracy theory, according to which all the conspirators were Muslim Arabs. David Ray Griffin

On September 11th, 2001, two 110 story skyscrapers, completed in 1973, burned for 56 minutes across 8 floors and 103 minutes over five floors (respectively) before collapsing to the ground. At 9:59 a.m., the South Tower fell in just ten seconds. 29 minutes later, the North Tower fell in about ten seconds. Later that same day at 5:20 p.m., World Trade Center Building 7, a 47 story skyscraper, collapsed into itself in seven seconds. According to firefighters at Ground Zero, there were at least two small pools of molten metal found under the rubble of Ground Zero. The fires would not be fully extinguished until December 13th, 2001 making it the longest building structural fire in history.

56

The 9/11 False Flag

Director of the New York Department of Design and Construction Kenneth Holden said, Underground, it was still so hot that molten metal dripped down the sides of the wall from Building 6. Something created those pools of molten metal. Its not been proven how structural damage from an airplane could create a pool of molten metal that wouldnt be extinguished until early December of 2001. The Inside/Outside Job George Bush Sr. was supposedly at The White House the morning of September 11th. He may have had a meeting with the Carlyle Group. According to eyewitnesses there were three or four Israeli students citizens videotaping as the towers burned. They were arrested by local police and later released. Later, a few Israeli students went on Israeli TV and explained how they were in New York on September 11th to document the event. A white van was found near the base of Ground Zero, possibly filled with explosives. 60 Israelis were detained and most likely released. To find out why they were detained, wed have to ask the State Department. Whatever happened to that mysterious white plane seen around the White House and around Ground Zero near WTC Building 5? Taking all of this into account, we find many more holes in the official story. The Thermate Science Dr. Allison Geyh, (as reported in the Magazine of John Hopkins, 2001), reported that in some pockets now being uncovered, they are finding molten steel. Dr. Geyh was on the scene of Ground Zero with a team of Public Health investigators shortly after 9/11. Thermite is a mixture of aluminum powder and iron oxide. Enough thermite (at 4500 degrees Fahrenheit) would prove hot enough to melt and perhaps evaporate any steel it comes into contact with. When you mix sulfur with thermite, you accelerate the melting effect and get thermate. The FEMA report claims sulfidation was observed in steel

57

The Inside Job

samples from WTC Building 7 and one of the Trade Center towers. How did sulfur get there? (27) According to the FEMA report, The specifics of the fires in WTC 7 and how they caused the building to collapse remain unknown at this time. Although the total diesel fuel on the premises contained massive potential energy, the best hypothesis [a collapse caused by diesel-fuel fed fire plus damage from debris] has only a low probability of occurrence. Further research, investigations, and analyses are needed to resolve this issue. Another mystery revolves around the way the building fell. A New York Times article pointed out Videos of the north towers collapse appear to show that its television antenna began to drop a fraction of a second before the rest of the building. The observations suggest that the buildings steel core somehow gave way first. (28) Building 7 is the strangest of events on 9/11/2001. Its hard to believe that in less than seven hours, WTC Building 7 was rigged to be pulled, and brought down in what looks like a controlled demolition. The preparations usually take weeks, but not on this day. Section 5. Aftermath of 9/11
You know what I notice thats interesting? You notice its young people that always wear the investigate 9-11 shirts. Im trying to figure out why they dont trust the explanation they got. Wise beyond their years, I think. Jesse Ventura

After 9/11, the former official at the U.S. consular office in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, Michael Springman explained that his office was used by the CIA to bring recruits into America for training during the 1980s. This same office in Jeddah is where the majority of the 9/11 hijackers obtained their visas to enter the United States. Nawaf alHamzi and Khalid al-Mihdhar were supposedly being monitored by the CIA prior to 9/11. They may have been known al-Qaeda operatives by the CIA. Yet they were allowed to enter the United States under their real names and neither the FBI nor the State Department was told by the CIA. The CIA claims they lost them somewhere in Thailand, after an al-Qaeda meeting. It is assumed that under normal circumstances, that

58

The 9/11 False Flag

is, standard operating procedure, the FBI and State Department should have been notified about this by the CIA. The 9/11 Commission accepted the CIAs explanation. These same two guys, Hamzi and Mihdhar, may have been assisted by someone who was under FBI surveillance for alleged connections to terrorist groups. These same two men may have also rented a house from an FBI informant. The FBI says they were not aware of the two men. However the two men were listed in the phone book under their real names (I think this is in San Diego). Former Assistant Secretary of Defense Frank Gaffney on Hardball with Chris Mathews shocked my ears with his cold-hearted snake mentality. He told Softball Mathews, My position is it is regrettable that any Americans died. It is regrettable that they had to die, but I believe they did have to die. The threat we knew about was the chemical capability that Saddam Hussein had used against his own people. The potential for biological agents were real. There was evidence that there was an ongoing nuclear program, we had been surprised at how far advanced it was before. The danger was inaction could have resulted in the death of a great many more Americans than 4,000. And thats the reason Im still delighted that we did what we did. (29) Steve Watson, writing for Infowars.com, then clarifies what Mathews hasnt said, Gaffney is the founder and president of the think tank Center for Security Policy, whose stated mission is to assess near and long range threats, devise appropriate actions, and then promote those ideas within the government, Capitol Hill, newspapers, radio, the internet, and television. As far as the responsibility of the government is concerned, Governor Jesse Ventura said on Larry King (July 2009), that the government spent a hundred million dollars to discover Bill Clinton cheated on Hillary, when on 9/11 they only allocated four million to find out who killed 3,000 people.

59

The Inside Job

9/11 Body Parts After more than five years, in the surrounding area of the World Trade Center Twin Towers, human body parts were still being recovered from building tops. (30) The medical examiners office said 18 pieces of remains were found Sunday. The bones found thus far range from tiny fragments to recognizable bones from skulls, torsos, feet and hands. Some are as large as whole arm and leg bones. (31) So how does at least one of the family members feel about this news story? In this same article, they choose to ask one family member. Their actions say remains are not a priority, theyre secondary to the rebuilding, said Charles Wolf, who lost his wife and has never received any of her identified remains. This is bringing up all the gnawing, gut-wrenching stuff inside us again. According to this story in the AP newswire, the active search for the dead ended at the site in 2002 after a massive cleanup of 1.5 million tons of debris. Furthermore it is estimated that somewhere near 20,000 untraceable pieces of human remains were found, in 2002, a year after the worst incident in American history. Asking President Carter We Are Change Ohio attended a book signing, around 2009, by the former President in Chicago. Carter was asked, I was just wondering if youd support the victims family members that want a new investigation into 9/11. Carter clarifies the question before responding, Yeah, I dont have anything to do with it but I certainly wouldit would be nice. Back in October of 2004, President Carter told the London

60

The 9/11 False Flag

Guardian newspaper that our country suffered, in 9/11, a terrible and shocking attackand George Bush has been adroit at exploiting that attack, and he has elevated himself, in the consciousness of many Americans, to a heroic commander-in-chief, fighting a global threat against America...Hes repeatedly played that card, and to some degree quite successfully. I think that success has dissipated. Carter adds to what Bush and Rumsfeld said about the 9/11 attacks presenting opportunity. Carter just adds to this new found opportunity by saying that Bush was exploiting that attack. NYC CAN

Buildingwhat.org 2010

Just before the 8th anniversary of 9/11, Alex Jones had Manny Badillo on his show. Manny was on to talk about the organization he is involved in, NYC CAN (New York City Coalition for Accountability

61

The Inside Job

Now). On October 9, 2009, the following message was put on the NYC CAN website: On a dark day for democracy, the patriotic call for answers by hundreds of 9/11 families, first responders and survivors has been stifled, and the will of the people of New York City once again denied. Judge Lehner ruled that modifying the petition to make it legally permissible would result in it being inconsistent with the law sought by the signatories of the Petition despite the fact that all 80,000 signatories agreed by signing the Petition that If any provision of this law is held to be unconstitutional or invalid for any reason, the remaining provisions shall be in no manner affected thereby but shall remain in full force and effect. The deadline for inclusion on the ballot falls just before the election, making it possible to appeal Judge Lehners decision. NYC CAN is weighing all options and will make an announcement early next week on this issue, as well as on how it will be moving forward on other fronts. Regardless of the outcome in court, the quest for answers continues full throttle. This fight is only the beginning. (32)

So, here we are. The government has provided their official investigation and official account of 9/11. They have a theory about 9/11/2001so do we. We dont need to prove a connection between George W. Bush and Osama bin Laden. We dont need to uncover CIA documents that explain Osama bin Laden has been a CIA asset by the name of Tim Osman since the early 1980s. We dont even have to point to the fact that the BBC has located and interviewed at least 2 of the hijackers after 9/11 in Egypt and Saudi Arabia. Further, we do not need to prove that Osama bin Laden is or isnt responsible for 9/11.The FBI has already admitted it. FBI Director Robert Mueller has publicly stated that there is no hard evidence linking Osama bin Laden to these crimes. Osama has yet to be charged for this

62

The 9/11 False Flag

crime by the FBI. Forget the BBC interview of Osama bin Laden denying responsibility for 9/11 just days after this massacre. In the photograph on the next page, you can clearly see that when WTC 1 & 2 collapsed, there is collateral damage done to the surrounding WTC buildings. Building 6 appears to have a big hole in the middle of it. Building 3 looks like its completely gone. Building 4 & 5 seems to have suffered the least structural damage of the 7 (after Building 7 falls). It seems strange that Building 7 would fall considering its on a different side of Vesey Street. Furthermore, forget the fact that on August 15th, 2001 top leaders of the Taliban were in Houston negotiating contracts with Unocal Oil for the rights of Unocal to build pipelines through Afghanistan.

(available at Infowars.com/shop)

63

The 9/11 False Flag

Building What.org copyright

65

The Inside Job

Copyright 2010 BuildingWhat.org

Building 7 As It Implodes Pay no attention to the fact that George W. Bush says he saw the first plane hit the World Trade Center before he went into the Florida classroombefore. Who cares if he saw this and then went into the classroom? So what, right? Yeah, so what if former Mayor Willie Brown, author Salmon Rushdie and Attorney General John Ashcroft were warned NOT to fly that day! Willie Brown was informed by Condi Rice, but eh. And eyewitnesses? Ha! So what if all footage of what hit the Pentagon was taken away within 15 minutes of the crash, by the FBI. Who knows what the people working at the hotel Sheraton and a local gas station saw that terrified them so much. No worries. It should be of no concern that the Bush administration blocked an investigation into 9/11 until November 2002, over a year later. To prove that the government has not told us the truth about this catastrophe, all we have to do is disprove their theory. There is

66

The 9/11 False Flag

more than enough evidence to prove that the 9/11 Commission Report is a half-baked farce! One thing we should all agree on is that the 9/11 Commissions Final Report is inconclusive and should not be viewed as a truthful historical document.

Copyright 2010 BuildingWhat.org

World Trade Center Twin Towers & Building 7 By making people aware of the truth, we can wake up, ask questions, and get involved to put pressure on the government to create an independent investigation into 9/11 that includes who knew what and when did they know it. The 9/11 Commission Report is full of holes and gaps. One such hole happens to be the exclusion of World Trade Center Building 7. Remember, there were not one, not two, but three WTC buildings that fell that day. WTC Building 7 is not even mentioned in the 9/11 Commission Report. Why not?

67

The Inside Job

There are so many questions that have yet to be acknowledged. No wonder we have so many unanswered questions about 9/11. We the People have to force the questions to be asked! We have and will continue to do so. Once we acknowledge these questions, then we can begin the great debate of what really happened. As long as we remain in limbo, running in circles with the war on terror, we will never get to the root of this catastrophe. I should also point out that a large portion of the people asking for an investigation are the people who lost their loved ones that day and the firefighters and volunteers who continue to die from the asbestos in the air on 9/11. The asbestos problem and the lack of admission of deadly chemicals in the air is another issue.
Either the Bush administration had advance knowledge and let the attack happen, in order to justify their future agenda including going to war against Iraq, or they orchestrated the terror plot themselves. Jesse Ventura (American Conspiracies)

Are all classified documents classified for the sake of the country? Would it really be so bad if the people knew the truth? Regardless, every government needs oversight. Or else, they are free to do what they want to, with or without a FISA Courts approval. To limit and ultimately defeat the use of false flag operations, we must first pull back the curtain and see who is behind the power in the land of OZ. When more people become aware of false flag terrorism, when we collectively and commonly know what a false flag operation is and what clues to look for, we will see this military option fade away like the big Anthrax scare that brought terror to Capitol Hill not long after 9/11. That terror created fear and that fear created the Patriot Act (Hitler also had his own Patriot Act after the Reich Stag was burnt to the ground by a lone man who was quickly tried and executed). The Patriot Act then created a national dictatorship that hides behind the curtain in the land of OZ. So who is the Wizard of Oz? Mr. David Rockefeller? Is it someone from the Rothschild family? Is it really controlled under one man, family or faction? To understand this, it takes research or trust in someone who can present evidence to you. Then it is up to you to go and prove or disprove this evidence. It is being done. Every day people are waking up says Alex Jones, and I

68

The 9/11 False Flag

agree.
The hijackers also left no paper trail. In our investigation, we have not uncovered a single piece of paper either here is the US or in the treasure trove of information that has turned up in Afghanistan and elsewhere that mentioned any aspect of the September 11th plot. The hijackers had no computers, no laptops, and no storage media of any kind. They used hundreds of different pay phones and cell phones, often with prepaid calling cards that are extremely difficult to trace. And they made sure that all the money sent to them to fund their attacks was wired in small amounts to avoid detection F.B.I. Director Robert Mueller (33)

Two weeks after 9/11, the London tabloid Daily Mail ran a story on George W. Bush and his supposed ties to Osama bin Ladens half-brother Salem. In the late 1970s, Salem was perhaps an investor in a company called Arbusto Petroleum (an oil company based in Texas), so it can be assumed that he was a former business partner of George W. Bush. How well the two knew each other if at all, is anyones guess. (34) Salem bin Laden is a half-brother of Osama bin Laden. In the late 1970s he was an investor in Arbusto Petroleum. At this same time, George W. Bush was also an investor of this same company. Both men were present at the creation of Arbusto Energy, an oil company in Texas. According to various researchers, it is believed that Salem and a friend of George W. Bush, James Bath, had business ties of some sort. They allege that the $50,000 that Bath invested in Arbusto back in 1978 actually came from Salem bin Laden, to James Bath. Salem died in a plane crash in 1983. It is known that the Bin Ladens were benefactors of Harvard University. It is estimated that their familys endowed fellowships equaled around $2 million, which Harvard used for law and design schools. According to BBC Newsnight on November 6, 2001, some FBI agents were told to back off the bin Laden family. (35) This should be mainstream news in America. A False Flag operation is an easy tool to manipulate wars around the globe. Just like in the movie, Who Framed Roger Rabbit? A false flag operation works off the same basic principles. You commit a crime, blame someone else, then you present a pre-conceived solution. We live in a world where the bigger the crime

69

The Inside Job

is, the harder it is for people to accept the crime as a false flag operation orchestrated by people within and outside of our government. Like 9/11, the lie is so big, so vast, that people cannot wrap their head around this accusation. A false flag operation must be exposed for what it really is, treason. How do we expose them? Educate ourselves. Alternative media is not as censored as the corporate media. After all, if we choose to be, we are the alternative media. Its always up to us. Obamas campaign slogan talked about change we can count on. I dont count on that guy to change very much. I count on the average people like myself and others to create real change in this world. We cannot look to someone else to do it for us. I joined the activist group We Are Change because they understand we are all leaders. There is no leader of We Are Change. We will be the change we want to see in the world. Thats the difference between this type of movement and others. They can kill one, but there are many others out there who are doing the same thing. If they kill us all, then it calls our family and friends into actionthey become change. The message I subscribe to is, Dont tell me the truth, give me the information so I can rationally find my own truth. My friends, the evidence is overwhelming. We search and ask the people who were there. We look for video footage of what hit the Pentagon. We study audio footage of people being told to clear out of Ground Zero because explosives were going offthat is evidence. That is what matters. Ask William Rodriguez what he saw and heard that day. As a maintenance worker on 9/11, he heard multiple explosions on multiple levels of the tower, including the basement. I am encouraging young people to do some objective thinking. Together we can discover the truth. As John said in the Book of John 21:25, And there are also many other things that Jesus did, which if they were written one by one, I suppose that even the world itself could not contain the books that would be written. To a far lesser extent, I find this true about not only the events surrounding 9/11, but the surrounding factors and genesis of what is called the Shadow Government. Throughout the time of man, there

70

The 9/11 False Flag

have been clues, hidden in plain sight. On our dollar bill, we find such things. The ever watchful eye is on many corporate logos, whether it be by coincidence or not. That is not for me to say, like this book, it is one of many observations. Bob Baer, former CIA operative, in which the movie Syrianna was based on starring George Clooney and Matt Damon, has said that all the evidence points to an inside job. Hes not a nut job, whack job or a crack pot, and more importantly hes not alone.
If they tell you that theyre for this quote Family Values Larry, then that opens up the box of worms on em on the moral issues. I liked it better in the days of JFK. Now, people talk that he had affairs and this and that, but you know what? It wasnt brought out to the public. They stuck to the issues, they stuck to governing. Look at it this way Larry, they spent a hundred million dollars to discover Bill Clinton cheated on Hillary, when on 9/11 they only allocated four million to find out who killed 3,000 people. Jesse Ventura (Larry King - July 2009)

PNAC for Pearl Harbor Members of PNAC include Dick Cheney, Donald Rumsfeld, and Paul Wolfowitz. To be fair, the PNAC website lays out their aims for the future... The Project for the New American Century is a non-profit educational organization dedicated to a few fundamental pro-positions: that American leadership is good both for America and for the world; and that such leadership requires military strength, diplomatic energy and commitment to moral principle. The Project for the New American Century intends, through issue briefs, research papers, advocacy journalism, conferences, and seminars, to explain what American world leadership entails. It will also strive to rally support for a vigorous and principled policy of American international involvement and to stimulate useful public debate on foreign and defense policy and Americas role in the world. William Kristol, Chairman

71

The Inside Job

This is the same group that said in Section V of Rebuilding Americas Defenses, entitled Creating Tomorrows Dominant Force that the process of transformation, even if it brings revolutionary change, is likely to be a long one, absent some catastrophic and catalyzing event -- like a new Pearl Harbor. (35) Zbigniew Brzezinski, the Foreign Policy advisor to Bill Clinton and political advisor to Barack Obama wrote in his book, The Grand Chessboard, [The American public had] supported Americas engagement in World War II largely because of the shock effect of the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor. He is also the man who helped create and train the Mujahedeen, which would later become al-Qaeda. (36) At 13:55 on September 11th, Henry Kissinger told CNN that he agree[s] with Senator Dodd, this is comparable to an attack like Pearl Harbor, and we must have the same response. And the people who did it must have the same as the people who attacked Pearl Harbor. But it isnt just the people who did it; its the people who make it possible. (37 The quote, But it isnt just the people who did it, its the people who make it possible is all one needs to continue an unwinnable war. The people who make it possible could be anyone. It could be you. This is where the fear mongering comes into play. If we can be scared into believing that another terrorist attack is coming, then perhaps we would gleefully give up all of our rights so the government could protect us. The problem is the government has proven to us that they are incompetent when it comes to exposing and preventing false flag terror. As Dennis Kucinich said to Neel Kashkari, of the Treasury Department during the bailout fiasco of 2009 (in which the Treasury Department lied to congress about what the bailout money was going to be used for), I dont think anyone questions, Mr. Kashkari, that youre working hard. Our question is who are you working for. Its time we asked this same question to those in the presidents seat and to those whom we vote for and support. John Pilger is a journalist who interviewed Richard Pearle under the Reagan Administration. In his article he wrote: I interviewed Pearle when he was advising Reagan: and when he spoke about total war I mistakenly dismissed him as mad. He

72

The 9/11 False Flag

recently used the term again in describing Americas war on terror. No stagesthis is total war. We are fighting a variety of enemies. There are lots of them out there. All this talk about first we are going to do Afghanistan, then we will do IraqThis is entirely the wrong way to go about it. If we just let our vision of the world go forth, and we embrace it entirely and we dont try to piece together clever diplomacy, but just wage a total warour children will sing great songs about us years from now. (38) In March of 2003 Bushs memory of his own words, to find Osama dead or alive begin to fade. He goes from wanting to hunt down Osama dead or alive to, I dont know where [bin Laden] is...you know I just dont spend that much time on him. (39) This may be the strangest of all things and of all days. What is Bush doing if hes not looking for the alleged mastermind of 9/11? Does this seem a little suspicious to you as well? If that is how he really feels then he shouldnt have made threats of finding bin Laden dead or alive. He shouldnt have made the promise to find and hold those responsible who knocked down the WTC buildings. If that is the case, then what the heck are we doing in Iraq? Dont even get me started on Afghanistan. The strange case of 9/11 should have been solved by now, at least for the most part. There shouldnt be so many questions...and even if we accept that we have so many questions, should we accept the fact that some of the victims family members of 9/11 have not had their questions addressed? Dont we care? As a country, dont we see how fast we are falling straight down? We are doing what the stock market did the last few years; we are plummeting into the bowels of darkness. We do so blindly, for we trust that our government would not lead us into darkness unless they knew the way out. They know the way out, but that is not for us to find. It is for them to know, and for us to figure out...if we can.

73

The Inside Job

Wheres Osama? On June 27th, 2010, despite the fact that CIA Director Leon Panetta told ABC televisions This Week, We are engaged in the most aggressive operations in the history of the CIA in that part of the world, he also said that only 50 to 100 militants are operating in Afghanistan and that al-Qaeda is relying on operatives living in the US and those that have no criminal background. So I guess in order for the CIA to catch al-Qaeda operatives, theyll have to step up their domestic spying, terrorist accusations, and unconstitutional acts in general...all right here in America. How many troops do we have in Afghanistan now? How many troops does it take to handle 50 to 100 alQaeda militants? According to Panetta, the CIA has no good intelligence as to where Osama bin Laden is. This adds to the theory that Osama is actually dead and buried. Panetta claims al-Qaeda leadership is at an all time low, but many believe that the violence in Afghanistan is at an all time high. Panetta said the CIA has not had good intelligence on Osama bin Laden since the early 2000s. Henry Kissinger told The Financial Times that handing over responsibility to the propped up Afghanistan government in July 2011 will result in failure, adding that Americans should be prepared to be in Afghanistan for a long struggle.

In a 2007 speech, Presidential Candidate Barack Obama said, I will promise you this, that if we have not gotten our troops out by the time I am president, it is the first thing I will do. I will get our troops home, we will bring an end to this war. You can take that to the bank.

74

The 9/11 False Flag

Time to cash in that check America. Osama bin Laden is on the FBIs 10 Most Wanted List for multiple U.S. Embassy bombings back in 1998. He is the alleged leader of The Base, better known as al-Qaeda. Al-Qaeda stems from the self-proclaimed freedom fighters, the Mujahedeen. The Mujahedeen was made of loosely-aligned groups of Afghan opposition to the Soviet installed DRA (Democratic Republic of Afghanistan) back in the late 1970s. The DRA could not handle the rebellion on their own, and soon Soviet boots were on the ground, fighting an endless and needless war, just as America has found itself in today. The CIA not only funded the Mujahedeen, but they trained them as well, giving them RPGs (rocket-propelled grenades) to shoot down Soviet helicopters. The Soviet occupation ended in the late 1980s, just before the full collapse of the Soviet Union - about ten years later. Working for the CIA at the time, Zbignew Brzezinski (a campaign advisor for Barack Obama during the 2008 Presidential Election) understood the global chess game and how to win it. How could the CIA accomplish what the Soviet forces could not do, which was to conquer Afghanistan? How could the United States Government get the American people to go along with the invasion and occupation of Afghanistan? Brzezinski has been quoted saying, The public supported Americas engagement in World War II largely because of the shock effect of the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor. On September 11th, thats exactly what happened. People like me believed what our government told us about 9/11 blindly and accepted the invasion of Afghanistan; where the Taliban was harboring Osama bin Laden. With proof that Osama was responsible for the 9/11 attacks, the Taliban claimed they would hand him over to United States authorities. Unfortunately, any such proof could not be found, apparently not even by the FBI. Reports of Osama bin Laden being a CIA asset are not as far fetched as it seems, once you journey down the rabbit hole of conspiracies in America. Afghanistan not only has vast poppy fields, but it also has Lithium, which is used in just about every modern battery today. The New York Times recently reported that the Pentagon discovered nearly $1 trillion worth of mineral reserves in Afghanistan. So whereas

75

The Inside Job

oil was yesterdays war, is the battle to control all sources of Lithium todays new war? Bolivia has a lot of Lithium too, so lets see what happens to them in the next ten or twenty years. Things Change The Wall Street Journal reported (back in late 2001) that the Saudi Crown Prince Abdullah was considering cutting its ties to the American empire. The paper reported that Abdullah wrote a letter to George W. Bush in August 2001, saying that a time comes when peoples and nations part...it is time for the United States and Saudi Arabia to look at their separate interests. Those governments that dont feel the pulse of the people and respond to it will suffer the fate of the Shah of Iran. The last Shah of Iran was Mohammad-Reza Shah Pahlavi. He was the emperor of Iran from September 16th, 1941 to February 11th, 1979. He was overthrown by the Iranian Revolution, after being labeled a puppet of the U.S. Government. Brzezinski was President Jimmy Carters National Security advisor at the time. The Shah would be overthrown and sent into exile, until his death. After September 11th, some people began to wonder if, since most of the 9/11 hijackers were from Saudi Arabia, was this orchestrated as an effort to blackmail the Saudi Royal family into falling back in line with the global empire, as Webster Griffin Tarpley suggests in his book, 9/11 Synthetic Terror: Made in USA? According to Tarpley, if Saudi Arabia ever parts ways with the U.S. Empire, the empire will lose control over the Middle East region. The empire is not going to let that happen without a fight. A false flag would bring this fight to an end. The Saudis have been quiet ever since. As for bin Laden carrying out the attacks, whether its a hypocritical lie or not, even bin Laden knows that Islam strictly forbids acts such as September 11th. Osama is either one more hypocrite in a screed up world, not a true follower of Islam, or he did not orchestrate the attacks. The truth may be somewhere in the middle. Shortly after the 9/11 attacks, he was quoted in a Pakistani newspaper as saying, I had no

76

The 9/11 False Flag

knowledge of these attacks...Islam strictly forbids causing harm to innocent women, children and other people. Such a practice is forbidden even in the course of a battle. Of the United States bin Laden said, its friendship with the Muslim countries is just a show, rather deceitI have already said that we are against the American system, not against its people, whereas in the attacks, the common American people have been killed...the United States should try to trace the perpetrators of these attacks within itself; the people who are a part of the US system, but are dissenting against it. If They Really Wanted bin Laden Before the attacks of September 11th, 2001, the World Trade Center was bombed back in 1993. Maintenance worker William Rodriguez was also working at the World Trade Center in 1993. He would remember the 1993 incident years later, when he heard bombs in the building, on 9/11. This failed attempted false flag would be the prequel for 9/11. Though this story fell silent, or was simply forgotten, its important to refresh ourselves about false flag terror such as the WTC bombing of 1993. Paul Watson, once again, breaks down a summary of what led to green lighting this false flag operation. Once again, the information is nothing new: The first World Trade Center bombing was pro-vocateured by the government. In 1993 the FBI planted their informant, Emad A. Salem, within a radical Arab group in New York led by Ramzi Yousef. Salem was ordered to encourage the group to carry out a bombing targeting the World Trade Centers Twin Towers. Under the illusion that the project was a sting operation, Salem asked the FBI for harmless dummy explosives which he would use to assemble the bomb and then pass on to the group. At this point the FBI cut Salem out of the loop and provided the group with real explosives, leading to the attack on February 26 that killed six and injured over a thousand. The FBIs failure to prevent the bombing was reported on by

77

The Inside Job

the New York Times in October 1993. (40) If the United States really wanted to capture Osama bin Laden after the 1993 World Trade Center bombing (of which he was blamed for orchestrating back then) they had the perfect opportunity in March of 1996. Back then the Sudan Government offered to hand over bin Laden to the United States. Sudan did not want Osama in their country at the time, being described, as Webster Griffin Tarpley writes, as an embarrassment to the rulers of that country, General Bashir and Hassan Turabi. In his book, 9/11 Synthetic Terror: Made in USA, Webster Griffin Tarpley writes that when Sudan made Secretary of State Madeline Albright the offer to deliver Osama bin Laden to the United States, instead of gratefully accepting the extradition of the man who was already one of the worlds top terrorists, Secretary Albright chose this moment to provoke a new wave of tensions with Sudan, even contriving no doubt as a clever diversion to shut down the U.S. Embassy in Khartoum because of alleged terrorist threats. The deal was available to the United States until May 1996 when bin Laden left Sudan under growing pressure and entered Afghanistan. The Sudanese offer was documented by Barton Gellman in the Washington Post soon after 9/11, writes Tarpley. He paraphrases what Gellman wrote in the article, saying that through a back-channel from the Sudanese President to the CIA, Sudan offered to arrest Osama bin Laden and place him in Saudi custody, according to officials and former officials in all three countries. In the defense of the Clinton administration, Gellman adds, [The] Clinton administration struggled to find a way to accept the offer in secret contacts that stretched from a meeting at a Rosslyn hotel on March 3, 1996, to a fax that closed the door on the effort ten weeks later. Unable to persuade the Saudis to accept bin Laden, and lacking a case to indict him in US courts at the time, the Clinton administration finally gave up on the capture. (41)

78

The 9/11 False Flag

Vulgar Betrayal The following is a summary of the account of FBI Special Agent Robert Wright. He was muzzled by his superiors when he said that, Since August of 1999 Ive been working to legally expose the very real and foreseeable Middle Eastern terrorist threats to American citizens at home and abroad. From 1993 to 1999, I was assigned to the Chicago divisions Counter Terrorism Task Force. The successful investigation, which was codenamed, Vulgar Betrayal, led to the June 1998 seizure of one-point-four million dollars in Middle Eastern terrorist funding. These funds were linked directly to Saudi businessman Yassin Qadi. On October 12th 2001, Yassin Qadi was designated by the United States government as a financial supporter of Osama bin Laden. October 12th, 2001? Why would the U.S. be funding bin Laden supporters after 9/11? Judicial Watch reported that Wright said that the FBI continues to dodge accountability and cover-up its negligence and dereliction of duty in pursuing terrorists who pose a direct threat to the United States. Thats a big claim. Robert Wright wrote a book on the subject called Fatal Betrayals of the Intelligence Mission. So whats inside this 500 page manuscript that the FBI doesnt want the public to know? Well, for now we dont know much, aside from his public statements. Since 2001 he has been trying to get clearance from the FBI to publish his book. He submitted the manuscript to the FBI for prepublication review. Judicial Watch further makes it clear that [Special Agent] Wright is the only FBI agent to seize terrorist funds (over $1.4 million) from U.S.-based Middle Eastern terrorists using federal civil forfeiture statutes, prior to the September 11th attacks. The original source of the funds was Yassin Qadi, a Saudi business-man, who is reportedly a financier of Osama bin Laden. According to Judicial Watch, we know that Special Agent Robert Wright has repeatedly tried to lawfully expose the FBIs incompetence and dereliction: 1) through FBI and Justice Department channels, 2) through individual Congressmen and Senators, 3) to the Joint Congressional Intelligence Committee and, 4) at a press conference held by his legal counsel, Larry Klayman, the

79

The Inside Job

Chairman of Judicial Watch, Inc., and co-counsel, David Schippers, Esq., of Schippers and Bailey of Chicago, IL. And if you dont know, now you know. According to an investigation done by Fox News correspondent Carl Cameron, for Brit Humes television show on Fox News Channel, the FBI arrested or detained about 60 Israelis in the United States before September 11, 2001. A handful of active Israeli military were detained, according to investigators who say some of the detainees also failed polygraph questions when asked about alleged surveillance activities against and in the United States. He goes on to say that these investigators suspected these detainees may have gathered intelligence about the attacks in advance and not shared it. Interviewed for the Jason Bermas documentary, Fabled Enemies, Mike Rivero talks about how the FBI quickly unraveled the largest foreign spy ring ever uncovered inside the United States...even the Soviet Union had not been spying on the United States as much as the Israelis has been doing. Larry Klayman of Judicial Watch at a press conference said, [FBI Special Agent Robert Wright] wanted to come forward long before 9/11. We were taking those steps, beginning last summer, to do that. The FBI had 30 days to allow that to occur. They violated their own regulations. They covered it up. Carl Cameron, reporting for Fox News, goes on to say that the majority of those Israelis held and questioned stated they served in military intelligence, electronic surveillance, intercept and/or explosive ordinance units. What were they really doing there on 9/11? Mike Rivero, of WhatReallyHappened.com told Bermas, So the FBI started to round up these spies. They started to arrest them very quietly. And they were about half way through this process of rounding up this spy ring when 9/11 happened. I called the Attorney Generals office just days after 9/11, Mr. Klayman continued at the press conference, I said, Dave Schippers and I represent a Special Agent of the FBI Chicago field office, who has years of information about how the FBI did not do its job. Did not in any way investigate, in a meaningful way, money laundering in the United States. Youre now claiming you want to do this, Id like to make him available to you, Attorney General Ashcroft. And I was met

80

The 9/11 False Flag

with a response by Michael Chertoff, head of the criminal division, Were tired of conspiracy theories. Well Im tired of people lying about factual information that points to real conspiracy theories. Let the information speak for itself. Why would anyone who wants real answers say what Chertoff said? We sit back and act like we cant do anything, said Jason Bermas. He understands that inherently we have instincts, and I hope you too understand that some people prey on those instincts to control and manipulate us. So what do we do to combat all this tyranny we have faced over the course of hundreds, perhaps thousands of years? According to his latest book, American Conspiracies, Governor Jesse Ventura thinks we should start by demanding prosecution of the politicians who condoned torture on their lying road into Iraq. He doesnt stop there, saying that we also need a legitimate investigation into what happened on September 11th, a tragedy thats been used ever since to justify all the lies and undermine our democratic freedom. I agree with that. Its a good place to start and many have already taken up these causes; sacrificing everything they once thought the world was, in order to expose to others how the world really works, showing that this evil world is geared for certain people to rise and for certain people to make sure that others fail. I think by this point, its easy to understand that the Republic is not what it once was. Its time to wake up! This is our chance to take our country back, peacefully. Knowledge wakes the sleeping person up from a reality that resides with the matrix. Take the red pill! Knowledge, in the words of Jesse Ventura, forces us to wake up and realize that were on the brink of losing everything the founders of our country stood for.
I am not sure now that Muslim terrorists carried out [the 9/11] attacks. There is evidence that the attacks were staged...But whether real or staged, the 9/11 attacks have served the United States and Western countries well. They have an excuse to mount attacks on the Muslim world. - Tun Dr Mahathir Mohamad (former Prime Minister of Malaysia) (Asia One News)

The U.S. Government and high ranking officials claim there is no evidence of explosive devices used in the terror attack of 9/11. They refuse to look at the eyewitness testimony of firefighters, paramedics,

81

The Inside Job

and civilian employees like William Rodriguez who heard, saw, and were injured by explosions on multiple levels of the World Trade Center. Why did George W. Bush specifically mention explosive devices in the World Trade Center, during a Rose Garden speech in 2006? The first time I heard this speech, I took it out of context. Lets listen to what Bush said about plans to blow up the World Trade

Center. Bush told the crowd the information that the CIA has obtained by questioning men like Khalid Sheikh Mohammed has provided valuable information and has helped disrupt terrorist plots including strikes within the United States. For example, Khalid Sheikh Mohammed described the design of plane attacks on buildings inside the U.S. and how operatives were directed to carry em out. That is valuable information for those of us who had the responsibility to protect the American people. He told us the operatives had been instructed to ensure that the explosives went off at a high [point] a point that was high enough to prevent people trapped above from escaping. Bush claims Khalid Sheikh Mohammeds interrogation (torture) helped the CIA disrupt future plots including plane attacks on buildings. Yet he does not specifically mention the Twin Towers or 9/11. When he says that operatives had been instructed to ensure that the explosives went off at a high [point] a point that was high enough to prevent people trapped above from escaping, is he describing future plans to blow up buildings, or is he referring to what happened on 9/11? I am not sure. Is this a cryptic message of some sort?

82

The 9/11 False Flag

He clearly mentions plane attacks and explosives being used in buildings to keep people from getting out of the buildings, essentially trapping them inside. We do know that on 9/11 when the towers were struck, people exiting the buildings were told to go back to their offices. Barry Jennings was trapped inside Building 7 while bombs were going off all around him. He was trapped. Al-Qaeda Leader Dining At The Pentagon After 9/11 Based on an interview by the FBI that took place after the Fort Hood shooting in November 2009, Fox news is reporting they received exclusive documents that al-Qaeda leader, Anwar al-Awlaki, dined at the Pentagon just months after 9/11. (42) This is all according to documents obtained by Fox News. Consider the source? Yes. Consider everything, and that will help you separate facts from fiction, in an unbiased manner. What was he doing there? Who did Awlaki meet with? According to Fox News, he was brought to the Pentagon as part of a military outreach designed to be a push within the Defense Department to reach out to the Muslim community. After a current Defense Department employee heard Awlaki speak, condemning alQaeda and the terror attacks, he was vetted by the proper authorities. Awlaki was invited to and attended a luncheon at the Pentagon in the secretary of the Armys Office of Government Counsel. Was he really vetted? Of the vetting process, a former high ranking FBI agent said, They vetted people politically and showed indifference toward security and intelligence advice of others. Awlaki was reportedly interviewed by the FBI four times, within a week, after the 9/11 attacks. He allegedly had ties to three of the Flight 93 hijackers, Nawaf al-Hazmi, Khalid al-Mihdhar and Hani Hanjour. Yet, he would still be allowed to enter the Pentagon just months after the terror attacks that claimed over 3,000 lives and promoted a war in Afghanistan and eventually helped sway public opinion to illegally invade Iraq. Fox News reported, Former Army Secretary Tommy White,

83

The Inside Job

who led the Army in 2001, said he doesnt have any recollection of the luncheon or any contact with Awlaki. He adds that just because he didnt know about it, doesnt mean it didnt happen. As we may know, compartmentalization is a key factor in false flag terror. So how does a man who is on the CIA kill or capture list end up at the Pentagon months after 9/11? According to the report, The Pentagon has offered no explanation of how a man, now on the CIA kills or capture list, ended up at a special lunch for Muslim outreach. Army spokesman, Thomas Collins, told Fox News, The Army has found no evidence that the Army either sponsored or participated in the event described in this report. Collins also told them that the FBI documents that speak of the Office of Government Council should say the Office of General Council. Collins did say that he believed the meeting was sponsored by the office of the Secretary of Defense, under Secretary Donald Rumsfeld. Fox News then asked a spokeswoman from the Pentagon about this and was basically told, Well get back to you on that. The report concludes with a former high-ranking FBI agent telling Fox News, At the time Awlaki went to lunch at the Pentagon, there was tremendous arrogance about the vetting process at the Pentagon. This FBI investigation is on-going. What the FBI knows at this point, we do not fully know. Nor do we have any explanation from the Pentagon or the CIA. We should not expect one without a court order first. Paul Watson of Infowars.com takes it one step further, American-born cleric Awlakis role as a key figure in almost every recent terror plot targeting the United States and Canada, coupled with his visit to the Pentagon, only confirms our long stated position that Awlaki is a chief terrorist patsy-handler for the CIA he is the federal governments premier false flag agent. (43) Awlaki has been reportedly linked to a shooting spree in Fort Hood Texas (November 2009), the Christmas day bombing attempt (December 2009), and a failed bombing in Times Square, New York, in May 2010. According to Fox News, U.S. investigators say e-mails link him to the Army psychiatrist accused of last years shooting spree at the Fort Hood, Texas military base that killed 13 people. They also allege

84

The 9/11 False Flag

he helped prepare Nigerian Umar Farouk Abdulmutallab for the attempt to bomb an airliner over Detroit last Christmas and they link him to the failed bombing in New York Citys Times Square in May. (44) Following the Fort Hood shooting, writes Watson, it was also revealed that shooter Major Nidal Malik Hasan had been in contact with Awlaki before the rampage. Awlaki preached to both Hasan and the 9/11 hijackers at the Dar al-Hijrah mosque in Falls Church, Virginia in 2001. As for Awlaki being in contact with the Christmas day bomber? Watson explains that the Delta Flight 253 incident was staged from start to finish. The US State Department allowed Abdulmutallab to board the plane, aided by a well-dressed Indian man, despite the fact that he was on a terror watch list and had no passport. Awlaki has been charged in Yemen with plotting to kill foreigners and being a member of the terrorist group, al-Qaeda. Since hes a Yemini citizen, Yemen will keep him in their country and not hand him over to U.S. authorities. Is it a coincidence that Awlaki is being tried for the first time in Yemen around the same time as the breaking news that he dined at the Pentagon two months after 9/11? Every false flag operation usually ends the same, kill the patsy, the lacky, the scapegoat, or whoever can connect the dots that would lead to a criminal case in a court of law. Cover up foot prints, erase evidence, classify what you cant erase and above all else deny, deny, deny. As more evidence surfaces, all the skeptics who said there were no explosives used on 9/11 should redact those statements and join the 9/11 Truth Movements quest for truth. If truth is the mortal enemy of lies, what does that make truth-seekers? NIST has a lot of explaining to do. The 9/11 Commission Report is as inaccurate as the Warren Commission Report on JFKs assassination. Both of these reports have been thoroughly discredited, time and time again. Yet some people still believe the official stories. If they still believe the official stories after learning about all the evidence in this book, and elsewhere, thats their prerogative. I have been seeking truth my whole life and I will not stop until I am dead; and when I am dead, I shall know the complete truth. For now I am content to know that there is already a lot of proof that shows 9/11 was an inside job.

85

The Inside Job

Weve Only Just Begun In 2010, Jeff Becker ran for United States Senate in the state of West Virginia. Representing the Constitution Party, Becker was successful in spreading 9/11 truth during a live debate, aired on C-Span. Though later mocked and ridiculed by meaningless blogs, his heroic efforts to ask common sense questions about 9/11 will be a part of history. When asked about the troop build up in Afghanistan, Becker was able to inform the public of some serious issues involving Afghanistan and why we went to war there. We need to first take a look at what happened on 9/11. There were actually three buildings that collapsed on September 11th. Being part of a national debate has many advantages, especially for those who believe in 9/11 Truth. What is 9/11 Truth about? A big part of it is about questioning what happened on 9/11. Using logic and facts, the 9/11 Truth Movement has stood up against the lies of NIST, the 9/11 Commission Final Report, 9/11 gate-keepers, public officials, media personalities, and anyone who thinks that 9/11 happened the way our government told us it happened. Its a lie. Whether you believe our government did it on purpose or were accomplices after the fact is another issue. In order to prove that our government simply let it happen as opposed to making it happen one would have to show how al-Qaeda could get explosives into the World Trade Center Towers and Building 7. 9/11 Truth asks the questions that others will dare not ask. More so, we seek the truth about 9/11 not our version of it. The facts are clear. If one person within the United States Government helped al-Qaeda plant explosives into these buildings thats an inside job. So its not far-fetched to come to this conclusion. Some people within the 9/11 Truth Movement will not go beyond the scope of 9/11 and who caused it and why. They choose to stick to disproving the official story of 9/11. But where will that eventually lead them? It will lead them down the same road as people who understand that there is a New World Order a Shadow

86

The 9/11 False Flag

Government in the form of world elite, kings and queens, and international bankers. So those who choose not to go too far down the rabbit-hole will eventually join the rest of us truth seekers later. I dont understand what theyre waiting for. I wonder how viewers in the audience and viewers watching CSpan were thinking as Mr. Becker elaborated on what he meant when he said we have to first take a look at what happened on 9/11. Becker told the audience, Building 7 was two blocks away from the Twin Towers and thats important to consider because it was not rained on by any debris. It was just a 40-story building. And at 5 p.m. on 9/11, Jane Standley, reporter from the BBC was standing right in front, at Ground Zero, and reported that Building 7 had collapsed, when in fact you could see it over her shoulder. And then, 20 minutes later, it did collapse. This is foreknowledge, and it needs to be investigated. (45) Additionally, Becker continued, Larry Silverstein, the owner of World Trade Center 7 complex, before 9/11 had taken out a multibillion dollar insurance policy to protect his property against a terrorist attack. And then, in 2002, on a PBS station interview, he said that he gave the order to pull-it. Pull-it is a controlled demolition term, more evidence of foreknowledge. And these are facts, you can watch the interview, you can look at the BBC footage. How did the British know twenty minutes ahead of time that this was going to happen? This needs to be investigated; there is a preponderance of anomalies surrounding the events on 9/11. Over 1,000 degreed-and-licensed Architects and Engineers have looked at the information, and theres just too much information that doesnt make sense with the official story. The only way for the official story to make sense is if the laws of physics had changed on that day. And Im an engineer, and I can tell you that they did not. More information may become available in the future to shed light on the questions posed in this chapter and elsewhere with the Truth Movement. Recently, the Judy Woods question has come into play. This involves microwave type weapons. Of course, we should examine all possibilities, but we should always be open to separating what we can prove from what we believe. How does one prove microwave weapons were used to vaporize the Twin Towers and WTC

87

The 9/11 False Flag

7? Why didnt they just vaporize WTC 7 when the second tower fell? When people couldnt easily see WTC 7 fall? More specifically, if the buildings were vaporized why werent the last firefighters and William Rodriguez vaporized as well? The answer would have to include microwave or super weapons that could vaporize the towers but not people. Even then, why wait so long to do the same to WTC 7? Another question is if microwave tech used, why would the perpetrators spend so much time prepping the three buildings with explosives? Explosives that, if found, before the planes hit the Towers, would increase suspicion of an inside job. Seems like a big risk to take. Some think the masterminds behind 9/11 used both explosives and microwave technology. The pictures that raise the question of a super weapon obliterating the Twin Towers into dust in 10 seconds is supported by some pictures of melted cars far away from Ground Zero. Bu where these cars and buses were is where the dust covered in thermite or thermite was passing through New York City. Many people were lifted off the ground by the force of the asbestos covered dust clouds that floated through the streets on 9/11. Could the thermite or thermite have melted the cars? People were running out of the basement, with their skin melted, but this is before the towers collapsed. Could such a super weapon vaporize the towers in the same manner as they fell? Then later that evening vaporize WTC 7? According to eyewitness testimony, explosives were going off in WTC 1, 2, and 7. Thats a fact. We know explosives were used. It is not a proven fact that any type of microwave weapon was used. Its a theory that needs to be proven or disproven. I believe that day will come. Until then I will stick with what I can

prove and try to keep an open mind about alternative theories.

The JFK Inside Job

JFK: Murder, Trial, and Errors

It just so happens there is a CIA operative inside every state government. They are not in executive positions...but [are] permanent state employees. Jesse Ventura

National Security In 1937, The Brownlow Committee was appointed with examining the operations of the Executive branch of government. Created by President Roosevelt and named after its chairman, Lewis Brownlow, the committee eventually concluded that the President was understaffed, the President needs help. Some of the recommendations in the Brownlow Committees final report would be included when congress passed into law the Administrative Reorganization Act of 1939. This act gave the President more power, including the creation of the Executive Office. In 1947, the National Security Act was an expansion of the Executive Office, which created the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the National Security Council, and the official creation of the Central Intelligence Agency, formerly the Office of Strategic Service (OSS). They would all report directly to the President. The impact of these creations and the abuse that a commander-in-chief could succumb to would not be felt for years, but the ground work for tyranny was quietly created with the National Security Act. The CIA moved in stealth, sometimes against or without direct orders from the President of the United States. The Bay of Pigs incident is a clear example of the CIA operating without the Presidents approval. The U.S. House of Congress Ways and Means Committee (which includes legislation on Social Security, tax policy and health care) had a history of secrecy in 1960. Chaired by Wilbur

89

False Flags

Mills (Democrat of Arkansas), the committee held nearly 80% of their meetings behind closed doors, with no sub-committees.
We are on the verge of a global transformation. All we need is the right major crisis and the nations will accept the New World Order. David Rockefeller There exists a shadowy government with its own Air Force, its own Navy, its own fund-raising mechanism, and the ability to pursue its own ideas of the national interest, free from all checks and balances and free from the law itself. Senator Daniel K. Inouye (during the Iran-Contra scandal)

When a new CIA agent took the cover post for the CIA, Governor Jesse Ventura said he had to know who the new agent was. In an interview with Fox Sports Radio, Ventura said, If you work in government you will find out that everything is very compartmentalized - I wasnt sworn to secrecy about this, but only my chief of staff and I were allowed to know his identity...I still have no idea what theyre doing there. In a speech made to Columbia University on November 12, 1963, ten days before his assassination, President John Fitzgerald Kennedy told the people that the high office of the president has been used to foment a plot to destroy the Americans freedom and before I leave office, I must inform the citizens of the plight. Interviewed by Alex Jones, Willie Nelson told him the truth about JFK still hasnt come out...I dont know what happened, but we know a lot of investigations were stifled. But, like 9/11 well never know for sure. The following Executive Order 11110, was signed with the authority to basically strip the Federal Reserve of its power to loan money to the United States Federal Government at interest (a huge profit). President Kennedys plan was to put an end to the privately owned Federal Reserve Bank. Let me stress this, the Federal Reserve is a privately owned bank that distributes paper currency to the United States. This is completely unconstitutional. Then again, the entire Federal Reserve Act is unconstitutional. It is not a part of the Federal Government. The Christian Law Fellowship, as well as others, has researched this matter through the

90

The JFK Inside Job

Federal Register and Library of Congress. Executive Order 11110 has never been repealed, amended, or superseded by any other executive order. If that is true, then Kennedys executive order still stands. When President John Fitzgerald Kennedy signed this order, it returned to the Federal Government, specifically the Treasury Department, the constitutional power to create and issue currency (money) without going through the privately owned Federal Reserve Bank. Many believe this is why the President was assassinated. For every ounce of silver in the U.S. Treasurys vault, the government could introduce new money into circulation based on the silver bullion physically held there. Somewhere close to $4 billion in United States notes were brought into circulation in $2 and $5 denominations. This would have done what Ron Paul is continuously talking about, ending the Federal Reserve System. Executive Order 11110: Amendment of Executive Order No. 10289 as Amended, Relating to the Performance of Certain Functions Affecting the Department of the Treasury (June 4, 1963) By virtue of the authority vested in me by section 301 of title 3 of the United States Code, it is ordered as follows: SECTION 1. Executive Order No. 10289 of September 19, 1951, as amended, is hereby further amended -(a) By adding at the end of paragraph 1 thereof the following subparagraph (j): "(j) The authority vested in the President by paragraph (b) of section 43 of the Act of May 12, 1933, as amended (31 U.S.C. 821 (b)), to issue silver certificates against any silver bullion, silver, or standard silver dollars in the Treasury not then held for redemption of any outstanding silver certificates, to prescribe the denominations of such silver certificates, and to coin standard silver dollars and subsidiary silver currency for their redemption," and

91

False Flags

(b) By revoking subparagraphs (b) and (c) of paragraph 2 thereof. SEC. 2. The amendment made by this Order shall not affect any act done, or any right accruing or accrued or any suit or proceeding had or commenced in any civil or criminal cause prior to the date of this Order but all such liabilities shall continue and may be enforced as if said amendments had not been made. John F. Kennedy, The White House, June 4th, 1963

Executive Order 11110 was indeed never repealed, but as weve seen with the glorious U. S. Constitution and Bill of Rights, it has been flagrantly ignored. Following Kennedys signing that Executive Order, he was summarily dismissed from office, and after the 1964 commemorative Half-Dollar was issued, all U.S. Mint coins were debased permanently, first from 90% silver down to 40% silver, and then several years later, silver was eliminated from our coinage entirely. Eric N. Golub Ladies and gentlemen, the very word secrecy is repugnant in a free and open society. And we are as a people, inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths, and to secret proceedings. For we are opposed, around the world, by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covet means for expanding its sphere of influence on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice. It is a system which has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific, and political operations. Its preparations are concealed, not published. Its mistakes are buried, not headlined. Its dissenters are silenced, not praised. No expenditure is questioned. No secret is revealed. President John F. Kennedy

John F. Kennedy, after taking responsibility for the Bay of Pigs failure, turned to Clark Clifford, and said, Something very bad is going on within the CIA and I want to know what it is. I want to shred the CIA into a thousand pieces and scatter them to the four winds. President Woodrow Wilson is one of the many who spoke of a secret organization that seeks to control everything. Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the fields of commerce and

92

The JFK Inside Job

manufacture are afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it. The bright white words, CBS News Bulletin, appeared across every black and white television screen on November 1963, as the voice of Walter Cronkite spoke, The first reports say that President Kennedy has been seriously wounded by this shooting. A Man of Change In 1961, classified National Security Action memos 55, 56, 57 make their way to the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General Lyman Lemnitzer. Colonel Fletcher Prouty gives these classified documents to the general himself. Signed by President Kennedy, he informs General Limnitzer that the Joint Chiefs of Staff would be wholly responsible for all covert paramilitary action in peacetime. This would end the reign of the CIA. NATIONAL SECURITY ACTION MEMORANDUM NO. 55

Under the subject heading Relations of the Joint Chiefs of Staff to the President in Cold War Operations President Kennedys NSA memo #55 informed the Joint Chiefs of Staff as follows with
regard to my views of their relations to me in Cold War Operations: a. I regard the Joint Chiefs of Staff as my principal military advisor responsible both for initiating advice to me and for responding to requests for advice. I expect their advice to come to me direct and unfiltered. b. The Joint Chiefs of Staff have a responsibility for the defense of the nation in the Cold War similar to that which they have in conventional hostilities. They should know the military and paramilitary forces and

93

False Flags

resources available to the Department of Defense, verify their readiness, report on their accuracy, and make appropriate recommendations for their expansion and improvement. I look to the Chiefs to contribute dynamic and imaginative leadership in contributing to the success of the military and paramilitary aspects of Cold War programs. I expect the Joint Chiefs of Staff to present the military view- point in governmental councils in such a way as to assure that the military factors are clearly understood before decisions are reached. When only the Chairman or a single Chief is present, that officer must represent the Chiefs as a body, taking such preliminary and subsequent actions as may be necessary to assure that he does in fact represent the corporate judgement of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. d. While I look to the Chiefs to represent the military factor without reserve or hesitation, I regard them to be more than military men and expect their help in fitting military requirements into the over-all context of any situation, recognizing that the most difficult problem in Government is to combine all assets in a unified, effective pattern. [Signature of John Kennedy] I had never seen a paper like that from the White House before, USAF Colonel Fletcher Prouty told David Ratcliffe. (1) Kennedy wanted to emphasize by writing this letter directly to General Lemnitzer and saying, You are my advisor in peacetime as you would be in wartime. Colonel Prouty told Ratcliffe of the shockwaves that were felt throughout the Secretary of State, the Secretary of Defense, and particularly to the director of Central Intelligence. Because Allen Dulles, who was still the director, had just lived through the shambles of the Bay of Pigs, had sat through all the hearings that were presided over by Maxwell Taylor when they reviewed the Bay of

94

The JFK Inside Job

Pigs and now he finds out that what Kennedy does as a result of all this is to say that, you, General Lemnitzer, are to be my advisor. In other words, Im not going to depend on Allen Dulles and the CIA. That NSAM No. 55, Prouty continued, was more important during the Kennedy era than anything else except the assassination. In fact it may have caused a major move toward that deadly decision. Unlike some other presidents, John F. Kennedy served his country. In World War II, as Lieutenant of the Motor Torpedo boat, Kennedys PT-109 was rammed by the Japanese destroyer Amigari, killing two crew members on August 2, 1943. After 15 hours of desperation at sea, he and eleven other men swam to a nearby island. After help from some natives of the island, on August 7, Kennedy and the other survivors were rescued by a party of British scouts. From 1947 to 1953, Kennedy served in the United States Congress, in the 11th Congressional District. Kennedy was given a Pulitzer Prize award in 1955 for his biography, Profiles in Courage. He also served as a Massachusetts Senator from 1953 to 1960, where he remained a junior senator, while the senior senator was Leverett A. Saltonstall, who was somewhat of a moderate republican. On January 20, 1961, John F. Kennedy may have been the 35th President of the United States, but he was also a man of many firsts. He was the first president to be born in the 20th century. He was the first Catholic to be voted in as president. At age 43, he was the youngest president to be elected to office. He was also the first Irish American to become President of the United States. Still, in order to be an effective president, he would need the cooperation of the Republican Party to move any type of legislation dealing with civil rights and welfare issues through congress. In a 1962 Gallop Poll, an estimated 76% of the American people approved of President Kennedy. As 1963 approached, Kennedy introduced some radically necessary civil rights legislation. The television set brought home the racial violence of Mississippi and other cities, where police dogs and police officers were seen attacking innocent, non-violent marchers for freedom and equality. Fueled further by passionate speeches from Martin Luther King Jr., and a bombing at a Sunday school which killed four African American girls, it was time for another

95

False Flags

first...the first Civil Rights bill to pass legislation. The time was right; the chess pieces were all in place. Then came November 22, 1963, when the President of the United States was assassinated. It looked as if the Civil Rights bill died with him, but it was not so. Speaking on November 27, 1963, just days after Kennedy died, President Johnson told congress, The dream of education for all our children...the dream of care for our elderly...the dream of equal rights for all Americans, whatever their race or color...now these ideas and the ideals which he so nobly represented must and will be translated into effective action. The assassins might have killed Kennedy, but they could not destroy the ideals, which included civil rights legislation, ending the Vietnam War, and basically transferring power from the Federal Reserve back to the United States Treasury Department. Those ideals still exist today. Dr. Robert McClelland, at Parkland Hospital said the cause of death was a massive head and brain injury from a gunshot wound of the left temple. The temple is in the front of your head, so that would suggest that Kennedy was shot from in front, not from behind, where Oswald allegedly took a shot at the Presidential motorcade as it passed Elm Street. The signed admission note that the doctor wrote would also suggest that there was more than one gunman.
Once the jury accepted that the magic bullet could not create all seven different wounds in President Kennedy and Governor Connally, our strategy went, it would then have to conclude that there was a second rifleman and thus a conspiracy. Jim Garrison (On the Trail of the Assassins)

Zapruder Film In Reverse The FBI did give a copy of the film to the Warren Commission. However, as Garrison points out, two critical frames had been mysteriously reversed to create the false impression that a rifle shot to Kennedys head had been fired from behind. J. Edgar Hoover blamed an inadvertent printing error when asked why frame 314 and 315 were altered to make it seem like Kennedys head was falling forward. When this error was fixed, it was clear that frame 314 and 315 actually show

96

The JFK Inside Job

Kennedys head falling backwards. Why was the Zapruder film reversed to make it look like the kill-shot came from the rear instead of the front? How difficult would it be to create this printing error? Even the Warren Commission did not believe the altered film was real, and made sure the film was returned to its original form. Who would want to change the film so that it conveniently matched the official story? These are the questions I ask. The answers are what I am still seeking.

The Warren Commission: includes Gerald Ford (far left) and Allen Dulles (far right)

The Warren Commission concluded that three bullets were fired. The first bullet missed the motorcade entirely. The second shot was the magic bullet, as Arlen Specter is credited with creating; and it hit Kennedy, entering in his back, exiting his throat area. Then the same bullet entered Connallys right shoulder (near the armpit), exiting his chest, it then entered and exited Connallys right wrist, and punctured his left thigh. The third shot was the fatal shot that killed our president; an image that still haunts us today.
I think we found the real facts. Certainly no one in the intervening 25 years has disproved our basic conclusions. Arlen Specter (creator of the Magic Bullet theory)

The Magic Bullet theory claimed that one bullet went through both President Kennedy and Texas Governor John Connally in a zigzag motion that can only be described as magic. Like with 9/11, on this one day, and one day only, the laws of physics and logic were thrown away and replaced by a magical theory; a theory which was echoed throughout the corporate media. The magic bullet itself would later be found in pristine condition on the governors hospital

97

False Flags

stretcher at Parkland Hospital. How many shots were fired is open to speculation. Nellie Connally, Governor John Connallys wife, claimed in her book, From Love Field: Our Final Hours, her husband was shot by a different bullet than the two that hit the president. I dont necessarily believe everything put forth in Oliver Stones version of what happened on that day, but if the choice is between the film JFK, and the Warren Commission, I feel confident that Mr. Stones version is much closer to the truth than the Warren Commissions investigation. In order to pull off this type of assassination, you would need a stateless hit team and a believable cover story. The Warren Commission provided the cover story. Former CIA Director Allen Dulles nudged his way into the Warren Commission, where he could monitor the investigation and see the evidence firsthand. This is a conflict of interest on his part, as Allen Dulles was fired from his position as CIA director by Kennedy after the failed Bay of Pigs incident. Allen Dulles was not originally sought out to be on the Warren Commission. The purpose of the Warren Commission was set up by Lyndon Johnson to ascertain, evaluate and report upon the facts relating to the assassination of the late President John F. Kennedy. At the head of the Warren Commission was Chief Justice Earl Warren. The other six men were Allen W. Dulles, Richard B. Russell, John J. McCloy, John S. Cooper, Thomas H. Boggs, and future President of the United States, Gerald Ford. Warren Commission Conclusion The Warren Commission Report was published on October, 1964. It concluded that: (Archives.gov) (1) The shots which killed President Kennedy and wounded Governor Connally were fired from the sixth floor window at the southeast corner of the Texas School Book Depository. (2) The weight of the evidence indicates that there were three shots fired.

98

The JFK Inside Job

(3) Although it is not necessary to any essential findings of the Commission to determine just which shot hit Governor Connally, there is very persuasive evidence from the experts to indicate that the same bullet which pierced the Presidents throat also caused Governor Connallys wounds. However, Governor Connallys testimony and certain other factors have given rise to some difference of opinion as to this probability but there is no question in the mind of any member of the Commission that all the shots which caused the Presidents and Governor Connallys wounds were fired from the sixth floor window of the Texas School Book Depository. (4) The shots which killed President Kennedy and wounded Governor Connally were fired by Lee Harvey Oswald. (5) Oswald killed Dallas Police Patrolman J. D. Tippit approximately 45 minutes after the assassination. (6) Within 80 minutes of the assassination and 35 minutes of the Tippit killing Oswald resisted arrest at the theater by attempting to shoot another Dallas police officer. (7) The Commission has found no evidence that either Lee Harvey Oswald or Jack Ruby was part of any conspiracy, domestic or foreign, to assassinate President Kennedy. (8) In its entire investigation the Commission has found no evidence of conspiracy, subversion, or disloyalty to the U.S. Government by any Federal, State, or local official. (9) On the basis of the evidence before the Commission it concludes that, Oswald acted alone. Assassination Records Review Board As the days, months, and years went by, more speculation would emerge. The Review Boards experience leaves little doubt that the federal government needlessly and wastefully classified and then withheld from public access countless important records that did not require such treatment, reports the Final Report of the Assassination

99

False Flags

Records Review Board, Recommendations. The committee believes, on the basis of the evidence available to it, that President John F. Kennedy was probably assassinated as a result of a conspiracy. The committee was unable to identify the other gunmen or the extent of the conspiracy. (US House Select Committee on Assassinations, HSCA 1979) The Committee further concluded that it was probable that: four shots were fired. the third shot came from a second assassin located on the grassy knoll, but missed. They concluded that it missed due to the lack of physical evidence of an actual bullet. Of course this investigation took place almost sixteen years after the crime. The HSCA agreed with the single bullet theory, but concluded that it occurred at a time point during the assassination that differed from any of the several time points the Warren Commission theorized it occurred. Thus, they discredited the Warren Commission Report and their one-sided conclusions about one of the most significant incidents in our countrys history. Still, by agreeing with the Magic Bullet Theory, we can see the HSCA is just another gate-keeper trying to deflect from the real truth of the assassination. Gate-keepers always provide a half-truth and mix in some of the official story. The Department of Justice, FBI, CIA, and the Warren Commission were all criticized for deficient job performance in their subsequent investigations, deficient in revealing to the Warren Commission information available in 1964, and the Secret Service was called deficient in their protection of the President. (US House Select Committee on Assassinations, HSCA 1979) Yet the Magic Bullet theory still remained? I am asking your help in the tremendous task of informing and altering the American people. Confident in your help, man will be what he was born to be, free and independent. JFK

100

The JFK Inside Job

Its never too late to not be too late. THE JFK TRIAL
I never believed that Oswald acted alone, although I can accept the fact that he pulled the trigger. President Lyndon B. Johnson (2) I do not believe that Lee Harvey Oswald killed John F. Kennedy. Not alone. I dont believe it. Ive studied it for twenty years. Governor Jesse Ventura

Richard Nixon referred to the Warren Commission and its handling of the assassination investigation as the greatest hoax that has ever been perpetrated. If I told you what I really know, said FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover, it would be very dangerous to this country. Our whole political system could be disrupted. Jesse Ventura brought to light this piece of information in his book, American Conspiracies, After the House Assassinations Committee concluded late in 1978 that the president was probably assassinated as a result of a conspiracy, the New York Times buried the story...on page 37, right alongside the classified ads. Those newspapers have a strange way of reporting their version of the truth, and placing factual truths as far away from the front page as possible. But what if they had to confront the front page news story of a parade route change? As we will see in the section below, the CIA was on top of that. No need to worry. The Parade Route Change
If it can be simply shown how the mob changed the route of the motorcade on the morning of the assassination just that one single, simple, item I could accept at least the possibility that the mob killed President Kennedy. Jim Garrison

Jim Garrison asked Lou Ivon who could change the parade route on such short notice? Garrison thought the Mayor of Dallas at the

101

False Flags

time could have authorized this change in plans, creating the nightmare on Elm Street known as the JFK assassination. Had this parade route not been changed, there would have been no cross-triangulation for the suspected snipers, a cross triangulation that was necessary to ensure that Kennedy would not survive the assassination attempt. The Mayor of Dallas was Earle Cabell. Garrison raised an eyebrow when he discovered that the mayors brother was Charles Cabell, who was fired as deputy director of the CIA by Kennedy after the Bay of Pigs incident. The more Garrison dug into the rabbit hole of mysteries, the more he came to realize that everything kept coming back to Cuba and the Bay of Pigs and the CIA. The front page of the Dallas Morning News, dated November 22, 1963, showed a diagram of the parade route that Kennedys motorcade would take that day. In Garrisons book Lou Ivon is shown that the route was supposed to continue on Main Street through the center of Dealey Plaza without even leaving Main. So the fatal turn down Elm Street must have been changed at the last moment. To do that, Garrison said there had to be cooperation between the city administration and the federal government. So who could change the route at the last minute? Who could approve it? The front page of the Dallas Morning News, dated November 22, 1963 was presented as an exhibit to the Warren Commission. However, this version of the paper had one major change in it. Where the diagram of the motorcade should have been, the area is filled with a square of solid gray. The next page shows a very detailed picture of the motorcade route towards Elm Street. Its easy to see why the version of the photo given to the Warren Commission was altered. Take a look

102

The JFK Inside Job

www.willamette.edu/.../JFK/lho_murder.jpg Its the clearest example of a cover-up. They grayed out the route Kennedy should have taken, which was down Main Street. His

103

False Flags

motorcade should have stayed on Main. How would Oswald know that the route would be changed? He would have to have inside knowledge. That points to an inside job, whether you believe he fired any shots or not. How did Oswald know the route would be changed, who changed it, and why? Those questions need to be answered and presented for the public record, for our history books, and for the sake of the nation. This nation cannot truly move forward until we get some type of closure on this matter. That means no more lone gunman theories on the History Channel and elsewhere.

It means we have to reconstruct our history books to reflect the facts, not the official theory about JFKs assassination. This was the day Dick Gregory began to believe in conspiracy. On the alleged assassin, Lee Harvey Oswald, Mr. Gregory pointed out one of the strongest pieces of evidence of a conspiracy, evidence that raised Jim Garrisons eyebrows. Garrison wrote, The car the president was riding in went down Elm Street in Dallas. But that was not the original plan and the car was rerouted to go down Elm Street only thirty minutes before the

104

The JFK Inside Job

shooting. So how did Oswald know about the route change if he was acting alone? He started his job at the book depository one month before the shooting. The presidents route through Dallas was clearly changed to put President Kennedy in front of that book depository where Oswald worked. Elm Street is very important here, because the corner where he was shot is so sharp that you have to slow down to less than thirty miles per hour to make the turn. At this slow pace, how hard would it be to take a shot at the president? How hard would it be for the Secret Service to have taken notice of that possibility? In the picture on the previous page, you can clearly see people running towards the grassy knoll, where they heard shots, saw smoke behind the grassy knoll fence, and saw one or more people running from the scene. Is it possible that this many people could be delusional, all at the same time, giving the same eyewitness accounts? These witnesses included a police officer who chased a man who identified himself as a Secret Service agent. Many photographs show where the kill-shot in the crosstriangulation may have come from. Had the limousine route never been changed to go down Elm Street instead of Main, perhaps President Kennedy would not have died that day. On a side-note dealing with Malcolm X, one more piece of evidence Dick Gregory pointed out was the similarity of deaths between Malcolm X and Lee Harvey Oswald. They were both shot in the chest and both found with air bubbles in their lungs. In his Book, Callus On My Soul, Mr. Gregory writes, It is fatal to give a person mouth to mouth when they have chest wounds, because you pull air bubbles into the lungs. Both autopsy reports would quietly point out this strange similarity.

105

False Flags

New Orleans District Attorney Jim Garriosn

Im going to break this case and let the public know the truth. Jim Garrison (Playboy interview, 1967)

Jim Garrison served his country during World War II. He joined the United States Army one year before the attack on Pearl Harbor. When the war ended, he went to law school in New Orleans, but it wasnt long before he found himself as a Special Agent, working for the FBI in Tacoma and Seattle. He returned to New Orleans, where he was the Assistant District Attorney from 1954 to 1958. After a few years as a trial attorney, he ran for New Orleans District Attorney in 1961. He wasnt shy in vocalizing his disdain for Mayor Victor Schiro. A little more than a year into his new job of New Orleans District Attorney in 1963, President Kennedy was murdered.

David Ferrie

Three days later, David Ferrie found himself being arrested,

106

The JFK Inside Job

under the orders of D.A. Jim Garrison, for his possible association with Lee Harvey Oswald. Garrison was particularly curious when Herman Kohlman, assistant D.A., gave Garrison information about Ferrie going to Texas on the same day the president was assassinated. Garrison, writing in his book, On The Trail of the Assassins, provides evidence that while at a skating ring in Houston, Ferrie had never put on ice skates but had spent all of his time at a pay telephone, making and receiving calls. Garrison was not satisfied with Ferries inaccurate statements. Having Ferrie booked and jailed, Garrison then turned the investigation over to the FBI. The FBI soon released Ferrie, in Garrisons words, with surprised swiftness. Then the FBI made it clear that they did not have anything to do with the arrest of David Ferrie. They placed that solely on Jim Garrison. Garrison was beginning to think that all government officials were not on the same side. He brushed off the incident with David Ferrie and went back to prosecuting local crimes. In 1966, after a conversation with Russell Long, U.S. Senator from Louisiana, Garrison decided to re-open the investigation, based on the belief that Oswald could not have acted alone. Senator Long, whom Garrison highly respected, told him that the Warren Commissions conclusions were dead wrong. Garrison began to wake up and question the assassination of John F. Kennedy for the first time. During his eventual investigation, Garrison made a connection that would lead to the only criminal trial in the history of the United States that would accuse someone of conspiring to assassinate President Kennedy. He found a strange connection between Oswald, David Ferrie, Guy Bannister, and Clay Shaw. Oswald was stationed at the El Toro Marine Base in California from November 1958 to September 1959. At the base, Marine Nelson Delgado lived closest to Oswald for about 11 months. During this time, Delgado said under oath, Oswald never talked about Marxism. More so, according to Delgado, Oswald showed no particular aspects of being a sharpshooter. On the range, according to Delgados testimony, Oswald was terrible and had a lot of misses, but he didnt give a darn. So what did Oswald do that Delgado noticed? He was mostly a thinker, a reader. He read quite a bit. During questioning from Warren Commission attorney Wesley Liebeler, Delgado stated that Oswald

107

False Flags

would discuss his ideas, but not anything against our government.

David Ferrie (far left) & Lee Oswald (far right)

Oswald was frequently seen in Guy Bannisters office, where he supposedly worked in the summer of 1963. Guy Bannister had ties to the O.N.I. and the FBI.

Guy Bannister

Its speculated his association with Cuban guerrillas put him in association with at least some elements of the CIA. Oswald was seen with Clay Shaw and David Ferrie in Clinton and New Orleans, Louisiana. Garrison single-handedly changed the course of history, and re-opened the rounds of speculations, when in March 1967, he charged

108

The JFK Inside Job

New Orleans International Trade Mart Director Clay Shaw with complicity in the murder of President Kennedy. Who is Clay Shaw? Clay Lavergne Shaw was born on March 17, 1913, in Kentwood Louisiana. While taking courses at Columbia University in 1935, he was also a district manager for Western Union in New York City. He served in the U.S. Army from 1941-1946. After retiring from the Army in 1946, he became manager and director for the International Trade Mart, located in New Orleans in 1962. He remained there until 1965. Also between 1962 and 1963 he was a member of the World Trade Development Committee, as well as the International House in New Orleans. He was formally charged, then arrested on March 1, 1967 for conspiring to assassinate President Kennedy. He sat as witness testimony put him in direct contact with Oswald and Ferrie two months before the assassination.

Clay Shaw

Vernon Bundy was a prominent witness, testifying he saw Shaw and Oswald together at Lake Pontchartrain in New Orleans July of 1963. He testified that he witnessed money being exchanged from Shaw to Oswald. Another witness, Perry Russo, testified that Shaw, Oswald, and Ferrie were all present at a party in Ferries New Orleans apartment in September of 1963. Perry alleges that the men openly discussed how to kill John F. Kennedy by using a crossfire-

109

False Flags

triangulation technique, with multiple shooters. Perry was labeled as a drug addict, which was supposed to discredit his testimony. Oswald, Shaw & Ferrie Together David Ferrie trained guerrillas for the Bay of Pig invasion, which was a CIA operation. Around September 1963, many eyewitnesses would place Lee Oswald, David Ferrie, and Clay Shaw at a voter registration drive in the deep south. Garrison took note that for the first time in history, a major voter registration drive supported by the federal government was underway. Oswalds presence in the voter registration line was seen as suspicious. The African-Americans were suspicious of some Caucasians trying to prevent them from voting. Caucasians, on the other hand, were on the look-out for outsiders trying to encourage African-Americans to vote. So everyone was watching everyone; perhaps thats why Oswald, the only Caucasian standing in the line was so noticeable. Not only did the people notice Oswald, but they noticed the two men accompanying him. The witnesses described seeing a man who had painted eyebrows, which we can assume was David Ferrie; Ferrie drew in his eye brows due to health issues. The other man was identified by his white hair, along with his chain-smoking, and was driving the car parked in front of the voter registration line. Its believed Clay Shaw was the second man with Oswald. Ferrie and Shaw mostly stayed in the car, which was described as a large black limousine. A town marshal ran the license plate of the limousine and found it registered to the International Trade Mart, where Clay Shaw was a manager. There is another piece of evidence linking Oswald to Clay Shaw. When Oswald left New Orleans to defect to the Soviet Union, he would travel by ship to Europe. The steamship ticket was obtained at the Lykes office of the New Orleans International Trade Mart, where Clay Shaw worked. Then theres Perry Russo. After passing several tests to prove to the D.A. that he was telling the truth, Russo was called to the stand at Shaws preliminary hearing. (Russo passed both tests; hypnosis and

110

The JFK Inside Job

Sodium Pentothal under close medical supervision.) He was specifically asked about a gathering at David Ferries house, where he saw Clay Shaw for the second time, though Ferrie introduced Shaw as Clem Bertrand. As the gathering died down, only Russo, Ferrie, Shaw, a young quiet man, and some Cubans remained present. Russo witnessed the discussion of possibly assassinating Fidel Castro. The conversation became heated, according to Russo, when the topic of an embargo came up. The embargo was established by the Kennedy administration to stop arms being passed into South Africa. The men wondered if Cuba would be next. But the conversation didnt end there. It soon moved from the removal of Castro to the removal of President Kennedy, according to Russo. During this time, there were only four men present; Russo, Ferrie, Clay, and a quiet man who was introduced to Russo as Leon Oswald. Ferrie began to talk about how they might not be able to get Castro, but they could get Kennedy. Russo recalled Ferrie saying they could blame Kennedys assassination on Castro. Ferrie stressed that triangulation of crossfire was how it could be done. The assassins would shoot at Kennedy from three different directions in order to ensure that Kennedy would not survive. Jim Garrison made it clear this did not mean that David Ferrie was in on the plan necessarily. Did Ferrie think up this triangulation of crossfire theory all by himself? Was he echoing the plan of someone else? Was it a coincidence? It sure does raise some questions. There is a lot of evidence to suggest that a triangulation of crossfire was exactly what happened on November 22, 1963. This evidence not only puts Ferrie, Shaw, and Oswald at the same place, but it puts them there discussing the assassination of the President of the United States. At the very least, its an eerie coincidence. Perry Russo claims to have seen Clay Shaw once before that as well. When President Kennedy was in New Orleans for the dedication of the Nashville Street Wharf, Russo noticed a tall, white haired man, whom he would later identify as Clay Shaw, observing the crowd. While everyone else was focused on the president, the white haired man was scanning the crowd, as if he were a Secret Service agent.

111

False Flags

During the trial of Clay Shaw, Garrison did not mention the CIA connection with Clay Shaw because he did not have enough evidence at the time, and the CIA would not acknowledge that Shaw was an informer or at least a part-time contact of theirs. However, in 1979, Richard Helms (CIA deputy director for Plans Covert Operations) testified under oath that Shaw was one of the part-time contacts of the Domestic Contact Division, the people that talked to businessmen, professors, and so forth, and who traveled in and out of the country. Helms would again confirm his own statement in 1984, when he responded, If it says here I did make [the statement about Shaw] under oath, I guess I did. Jim Garrison wondered if the jury knew about the CIA-Shaw connection, would the verdict have been different? Well, as long as the facts are made public, the people can make an intelligent opinion on the subject...should they choose to. The Critics Mrs. Jesse Parker was a hostess at the V.I.P. room of the New Orleans International Airport. She saw Clay Shaw sign the rooms guest register as Clay Bertrand on December 1966. She pointed Shaw out as the man who signed as Clay Bertrand. Garrison then called to the witness stand Mrs. Elizabeth McCarthy, who was a handwriting expert located in Boston. After studying the V.I.P. room signature of Clay Bertrand, and comparing it to Clay Shaws signature, she testified that it is highly probable that Clay Shaw signed the signature. So what did Jim Garrison say about the assumption that the CIA may have orchestrated the assassination of John F. Kennedy? Speaking to an interviewer for Playboy, before the trial of Clay Shaw officially began, As far as we have been able to determine, [the plotters of the assassination] were not in the pay of the CIA at the time of the assassination...from the moment Kennedys heart stopped beating, the Agency attempted to sweep the whole conspiracy under the rug. The CIA has spared neither time nor the taxpayers money in its efforts to hide the truth about the assassination from the American people. In this respect, it has become an accessory after the fact in the

112

The JFK Inside Job

assassination. (3) More so, Garrison made it very clear that most of the attorneys for the hostile witnesses and defendants were hired by the CIA. What about the recruitment of Oswald? We do have proof that Oswald was recruited by the CIA in his Marine Corps days, when he was mysteriously schooled in Russian and allowed to subscribe to Pravda. And shortly before his trip to the Soviet Union, we have learned, Oswald was trained as an intelligence agent at the CIA installation at Japans Atsugi Air Force Base, which may explain why no disciplinary action was taken against him when he returned to the U.S. from the Soviet Union, even though he had supposedly defected with top-secret information about our radar networks. The money he used to return to the U.S., incidentally, was advanced to him by the State Department.

(Oswald being shot by Jack Ruby. Note the man (left) backing away from Oswald.)

What did the CIA know about the assassination? The CIA was very much aware of Oswalds activities well before the Presidents murder. In a notarized affidavit, State Department officer James D. Crowley states, The first time I remember learning of Oswalds existence was when I received copies of a telegraphic message from the Central Intelligence Agency dated October 10, 1963, which contained

113

False Flags

information pertaining to his current activities. It would certainly be interesting to know what the CIA knew about Oswald six weeks before the assassination, but the contents of this particular message never reached the Warren Commission and remain a complete mystery. The Documents Garrison revealed there are also 51 CIA documents classified top secret in the National Archives pertaining to Lee Oswald and Jack Ruby. Technically, the members of the Commission had access to them; but in practice, any document the CIA wanted classified was shunted into the Archives without examination...Twenty-nine of these files are of particular interest, because their titles alone indicate that the CIA had extensive information on Oswald and Ruby before the assassination. A few of these documents are: CD 347, Activity of Oswald in Mexico City; CD 1054, Information on Jack Ruby and Associates; CD 692, Reproduction of Official CIA Dossier on Oswald; CD 1551, Conversations Between Cuban President and Ambassador; CD 698, Reports of Travel and Activities of Oswald; CD 943, Allegations of Pfc. Eugene Dinkin re Assassination Plot; and CD 971, Telephone Calls to U.S. Embassy, Canberra, Australia, re Planned Assassination. Garrison explains, One of the top-secret files that most intrigues me is CD 931, which is entitled Oswalds Access to Information About the U-2. I have 24 years of military experience behind me, on active duty and in the reserves, and Ive never had any access to the U-2; in fact, Ive never seen one. But apparently this selfproclaimed Marxist, Lee Harvey Oswald, who were assured had no ties to any government agency, had access to information about the nations most secret high-altitude reconnaissance plane. Interview Jim Garrison explained to the interviewer for Playboy

114

The JFK Inside Job

Magazine why there has been a smear campaign put forth by the National Broadcasting Company, Newsweek, the New Orleans Metropolitan Crime Commission and former investigative aide William Gurvich, accusing Garrison of criminal conspiracy, intimidating witnesses, and bribery (among other baseless accusations). Mr. Garrison responded by saying that these attacks were intended to place our office on the defensive and make us waste valuable time answering allegations that have no basis in fact. He explained that for those who dont want the truth to be known, by simply accusing him of such allegations over and over again, this could have a psychological effect on the people; casting doubt on Jims credibility. The people might, at first glance, assume that where theres smoke, theres fire. How long did the attacks persist? They still do to this day, even after he passed away. But at that time, in 1967 he told the magazine, For months now, the establishments artillery units have been pounding away at the two themes NBC focused on, that my office uses improper methods with regard to witnesses and that we dont really have a case against Mr. Shaw and he should never be brought to trial. At the time, Mr. Garrison couldnt defend himself against these accusations, because the only way I could convince them of the strength of my case is to throw open our files and let them examine the testimony of all our witnesses...it could get our whole case thrown out of court on the grounds that we had prejudiced the defendants rights by pretrial publicity. So I wont fall into that particular trap, whatever the provocation. Mr. Garrison explained to the interviewer that as the New Orleans D.A. he took unusual steps to ensure that Mr. Shaw be given a fair trial. Among them was the treatment of the witnesses Garrison was to present before the court. He said the witnesses underwent independent verifying tests which included polygraphs, truth serums, and hypnosis. Of course the media jumped all over him and his office for this. Some critics claimed, or hinted, that these tests would make the witnesses testify falsely. Next, Mr. Garrison filed a motion for a preliminary hearing something usually done by the defense, not the prosecution. According to Garrison, preliminary hearings operate in the defendants favor. As

115

False Flags

the prosecutor, Garrison could have bypassed this procedure, as is his right to charge the defendant without an evaluation by a judge. A three-judge panel heard the evidence against Mr. Shaw. Then they heard the rebuttal from Mr. Shaws attorney. After hearing both sides, the three-judge panel ordered that Clay Shaw be indicted for conspiring to assassinate the President. A grand jury also concluded that Mr. Shaw be indicted. If this grand jury had failed to indict Mr. Shaw, Garrison continued, our case would have been dead as a doornail. But the grand jury, composed of 12 eminent New Orleans citizens, heard our evidence and indicted the defendant for participation in a conspiracy to assassinate John Kennedy. The obvious media bias was brought to light when Garrison made the point, It appears that certain elements of the mass media have an active interest in preventing this case from ever coming to trial at all. The Witnesses
Julia Ann Mercer saw a man with a rifle in a case exit a pick-up truck on the curb of Elm Street and walk up the grassy knoll. She reported this not only to the Dallas Sheriffs office but also to the local FBI office in the same city. The Warren Commission never questioned her. O.V. Campbell, the president of the Book Depository, claims the shooting came from the grassy knoll area. He heard shots being fired near the railroad tracks, which were behind the grassy knoll. Lee Bowers, switchman for railroad yard behind grassy knoll area, noticed two men standing behind the picket fence on top of the grassy knoll just before the shooting. J.C. Price told the Sheriffs office that following the shots, he saw one man run towards the passenger cars on the railroad siding. The man carried what Price suspected might have been a head piece. Police officer Joseph Smith is one of many people

116

The JFK Inside Job

who ran towards the grassy knoll after the shooting. Many people thought they saw smoke rising from the knoll area into the trees above. S.M. Holland said, A puff of smoke came out about six or eight feet above the ground right out from under those trees...I have no doubt about seeing that puff of smoke come out from under those trees. James Tague was struck in the face by what might have been a bullet fragment, or a ricochet from a bullet. He first thought someone was throwing firecrackers from the picket fence area along the top of the grassy knoll. The police were running up to it. When Secret Service agent Forrest Sorrells, head of the local division, heard something too loud to be firecrackers, he turned to where he thought the noise was coming from, which was, once again, the grassy knoll area. I thought the shot had come from the garden directly behind me, said William Newman, a Dallas design engineer. He and his family were located in front of the picket fence of the grassy knoll when they hit the ground, assuming they were in the direct line of fire between the murderers and the president. This is just one more eyewitness account that the shots came from atop the grassy knoll. Referring to the picket fence once again, L.C. Smith of the Sheriffs office ran to the scene, where a woman told him the president had been shot and the shots came from the fence on the north side of Elm. All the people started running up the terrace, said Malcolm Summers, who owned a local mailing service. Everybody was just running towards the railroad tracks. Jean Hill gave chase to one of the suspected grassy knoll shooters, who fled the scene toward the railroad tracks to the west. Even the now famous Abraham Zapruder thought the shots were coming from in back of him, which would be the grassy knoll. The Zapruder film was kept locked away from the

117

False Flags

public eyes for more than five years. This footage may be the most damning evidence against the Warren Commissions absurd conclusions about what happened on November 22, 1963.

Police officer running towards grassy knoll where the alleged kill shot came from.

After a cloud of smoke rose up into the trees, Patrolman Joe Smith ran to the grassy knoll, with dozens of others. His gun was drawn briefly, but he realized he didnt even know who he was running after and holstered the gun; but not before a man claiming to be a Secret Service agent flashed a badge at Patrol-man Smith. Smith remembered the man had dirty hands, but a clean collared shirt. He admitted later that he regretted being so trustworthy of the man. It came out later that all the Secret Service agents were accounted for, and no one knew of any agents near the parking lot behind the picket fence of the grassy knoll. Who was this unnamed agent? Richard Carr was told to keep his mouth shut by FBI agents when he witnessed four men running out of the Book Depository. According to his testimony, three of the men climbed into a Nash Rambler that was parked facing north of Houston Street, then drove off

118

The JFK Inside Job

in the opposite direction of the traffic. The other man walked away. Was that Oswald? According to Jim Garrison, Helen Markhams testimony about Oswald shooting Dallas police officer J.D. Tippit was the totality of the witness testimony identifying Lee Oswald as Tippits murderer. Her testimony was inconclusive. All the other witnesses said Tippit died instantly. Yet Markham said she was trying to talk to him for 20 minutes before the ambulance arrived. To Mark Lane, a critic of the governments investigation of the JFK assassination, Helen Markham said the killer was stocky and had bushy hair. When asked by Warren Commission attorney whether she recognized anyone in a line-up to identify the killer, she said no. She didnt recognize Oswald as being there when Tippit was shot. She told the commission she didnt recognize any of the faces from the line-up. When pressed, the attorney seemed to lead the witness into getting the answer he wanted. He asked, You recognized [Oswald] from his appearance? She responded, I asked I looked at him. When I saw this man I wasnt sure, but I had cold chills just run over me. That hardly sounds like an eyewitness account of identifying Oswald at the scene. Most other witnesses would claim they saw two men, one short and stocky and the other tall and thin. The clothing of both men did not match what Oswald was wearing that day. Mr. and Mrs. Hughes lived across the street from where the officer was killed. T.F. Bowley used the police officers car microphone to radio for help. The ambulance driver could clarify the time of death and which witnesses were there. Yet none of them were called before the Warren Commission to testify. Why not? Basically, no one really saw Oswald shoot Tippit. Tippit was shot about a half hour after JFK, in the suburb of Oak Park; which was near where Oswald was living at the time. The Dallas Homicide division and the Warren Commission came to the same conclusion, Oswald had killed Officer Tippit. The Warren Commission would take this a step further as proof that Oswald killed Kennedy, stating, How do we know that Lee Oswald killed President Kennedy? Because he killed Officer Tippit. Yet their case for Oswald shooting Tippit was weak. Julia Ann Mercer testified she saw a man climbing the side of the grassy knoll

119

False Flags

with a rifle, while three police officers stood on the overpass bridge, above her, oblivious to the man with the rifle. She first saw this young man get out of a truck on Elm, the driver she would identify as Jack Ruby the next day when Ruby shot Oswald live on television. He was only a few feet away from me, she told Garrison, how could I not recognize Jack Ruby when I saw him shoot Oswald on television? When Garrison showed her the statements she made to the FBI, she said the statements were clearly altered. After she identified Jack Ruby as the driver of the truck to the FBI, her statement did not reflect it. She told Garrison that the FBI, in her statements, had her saying the opposite of what she really said. Why would the FBI do this unless they were trying to cover up something? In order to make it appear that Mercers altered statements were her own; her name was signed in a sworn affidavit by the Dallas Sheriffs office to reflect that she did not positively identify Jack Ruby as the driver of the truck. Since Mercer would clearly recognize her own signature, she was able to prove to Garrison that the signature was not her own. She then showed him that she signed her name with a big A, which did not match the Sheriffs office sworn affidavit. It was a forgery. There are just too many witnesses to conclude without a doubt that the Warren Commission Report was accurate; which is what the JFK official talking-point is based on! There is little doubt, and a lot of evidence, that someone at the highest level of government was controlling everything that the members of the Warren Commission investigated and concluded on. Many believe Allen Dulles, the fired CIA director, was leading the Warren Commission to a pre-conceived conclusion about JFKs assassination. After all the research of public information on the assassination, I am one of those people. Tramps & Hobos After the shooting of JFK, Hobos were escorted to the police station in Dallas, and subsequently released without any record of their arrest.

120

The JFK Inside Job

Fort Worth Star-Telegram Special Collections Division, University of Texas at Arlington Libraries

Just as the freight train was taking off, Lee Bowers, who worked at the train station, was ordered to stop the train so police could check the box cars. The photos were taken by news photographers Joe Smith (Fort Worth Star) and William Allen (Dallas Times Herald). The officers seemed to be escorting these men, rather than arresting them; none of the hobos or transients were handcuffed. The officers had some distance between themselves and the hobos. The officers guns were not fixed on the transients. Rather, one shotgun is pointing towards the ground, while the other officers gun is pointing towards the sky, in total escort fashion. In the pictures, which are a part of public record, neither officer has their hands on the trigger. The officer who is trailing the transients, being brought to the police station for questioning, has very loose pants on. Maybe he lost a lot of weight in the preceding weeks? What we can assume from these photos is that the two officers did not view the three transients as a threat.

121

False Flags

Why is this officer escorting them into custody? No one is hand-cuffed. Photo: William Allen, Dallas Times Herald

The transients are very clean, nice trimmed hair, clean hands, well groomed. They must shave more often than I do. It was these men that were seen in photographs, as pointed out by Richard C. Sprague (computer consultant), running from the grassy knoll area, towards the rail station. These photos and those taken by Jack Bears (Dallas Morning News) eventually wound up in the archives of Western New England College, in Springfield, Massachusetts.

122

The JFK Inside Job

While reviewing the testimony of Lee Bowers to Warren Commission attorney Joseph A. Bell, Jim Garrison found it odd that when Bowers spoke of the transients that were taken off of a train,

123

False Flags

Bowers said, I held off the trains until they could be examined, and there was some transients taken on at least one train. The train had to be stopped so that the transients could be taken off, but that didnt interest Mr. Bell. In On The Trail Of The Assassins, Garrison states that at this point in Bowers testimony, Bell cut off further discussion of the accommodating train departure of these unknown men. Sergeant D.V. Harkness was in charge of searching the departing trains. While answering questions by Warren Commission counsel David Belin, Harkness testified that he was ordered to search the trains, which were already in motion, trying to leave the rail station. According to his testimony, Inspector Sawyer had Sergeant Harkness search all freight cars that were leaving the yard. He told Belin that we pulled some people off of there and took them to the station. Harkness told him the people they took to the station for questioning were tramps and hobos that were in a long freight car. Mr. Belin asked him, Do you know whether or not anyone found any suspicious people of any kind or nature down there in the railroad yard? To which Sergeant Harkness relied, Yes, sir. We made some arrests. The suspicious tramps and hobos were taken to the police station and questioned, according to the testimony by Sergeant Harkness. After he tells Warren Commission counsel David Belin that no guns were found on those questioned, Mr. Belin changes the subject of questioning. Mr. Garrison later concluded that neither the Dallas Police Department nor the Sheriffs office had any kind of record of the transients who were arrested or questioned. The entire questioning of Sergeant Harkness, though there is record of it transpiring, never made it into the final report of the Warren Commission. In the 26 volumes of the commission report, there is no mention of these transients. Any clues that these transients may have provided to get closer to the truth of the assassination case were never followed up on. Garrison said that the Dallas Police closed its books on the [JFK assassination] case almost immediately.

124

The JFK Inside Job

Where Was Oswald? 12:15 p.m. - Wanting to see the parade, a secretary at the book depository, Carolyn Arnold, saw Oswald in the snack room on the second floor. According to Arnold, Oswald was having lunch by himself. 12:15 p.m. to 12:20 p.m. - Bonnie Ray Williams is on the 6th floor, having lunch and doesnt see anyone else on the floor. Questioning Oswald According to the Warren Commission hearings, Oswald was questioned for 12 hours without a lawyer present and no recording was made of the questioning. Jim Garrison said, As a prosecutor, I knew that recording of questioning is routine even in minor felony cases. Within weeks, the FBI concluded its investigation; Lee Oswald was the lone assassin. Garrison wasnt buying it. In his book, Garrison came to his own conclusion that the official government investigations of the assassination had systematically ignored any evidence that might lead to a conclusion other than that Lee Oswald was the lone assassin. Adding fuel to his conclusion, he would learn that on the day when Oswald was arrested, he was given a nitrate test in order to prove he had fired any rifle in the past 24 hours. The test showed that Oswald had not. This information remained secret for the next 10 months by both the Dallas police and the federal government. Again, there is little evidence that Oswald fired any shots at Kennedy. FBI Raid Guy Bannister During the early stages of the unofficial investigation by Garrison and his team, he was handed a dated newspaper by Frank Klein, whom Garrison made chief assistant D.A. Front page news of the Times-Picayune on Thursday, August 1, 1963, ran a story titled

125

False Flags

CACHE OF MATERIAL FOR BOMBS SEIZED. Garrison, still not impressed by the headline, read on: More than a ton of dynamite, 20 bomb casings three feet long, napalm material and other devices were seized Wednesday by Federal Bureau of Investigation agents in a resort area in St. Tammany Parish, between Mandeville and Lacombe. According to the special agent in charge of the New Orleans FBI office, bomb casings, dynamite and other materials were seized when an investigation dealing with someone or some group of people who were trying to carry out a military operation against a country with which the United States is at peace. The article makes it very clear that this type of act is in violation of Title 18, Section 960 of the U.S. Code. This article did not mention any arrests, or any links to Cubans. The front page for the next day, August 2, had a story with the title - BOMB CACHE COTTAGE LOANED TO NEWLYARRIVED REFUGEE. The wife of the owner of the cottage, where the weapons cache was seized in an FBI raid, did not know weapons were being stored there until her husband was questioned and the weapons were seized. So who was living in the cottage? According to the news story, it was loaned to a Cuban the couple knew as Jose Juarez. It was loaned to Juarez as a favor to their friends in Cuba. The first paragraph of the story read: The wife of the owner of a cottage on the north shore of Lake Pontchartrain where a large quantity of explosives and war materials were seized said Thursday that the house was loaned to a newly-arrived Cuban refugee three weeks ago. It was at this point that Frank Klein reminded Garrison that they had raided Davids Ferries apartment three years ago, and found rifles and army equipment, along with other munitions. Mr. Ferrie also had a

126

The JFK Inside Job

large map of Cuba pinned to his wall. Klein tried to connect this raid with David Ferrie and Guy Bannister. It was in the summer of 1963 that Jack Martin, a private investigator working in Guy Bannisters office, saw strange activity involving Cubans, heavy artillery munitions being loaded and unloaded around the office. Jack Martin placed Oswald, Bannister, and Ferrie all in direct communication at Bannisters office on 544 Camp Street. He claims Oswald and Bannister would sometimes meet with the door shut. Sometimes Oswald would converse with Ferrie in the office. Delphine Roberts, who was Bannisters secretary later admitted that Bannister and Oswald had closed door meetings and that Bannister gave Oswald a room on the third floor.

Lee Harvey Oswald

On August 9, 1963, when Oswald was handing out Fair Play For Cuba leaflets in the streets, he stamped an address on the leaflets that read, 544 Camp Street. Later, that address would be removed from the leaflets. Jim Garrison became suspicious. Guy Bannister died June 6, 1964. His widow agreed to speak about what she knew, which was not much. After her husbands death, she was in his office and saw leftover leaflets Oswald was passing out in the summer of 1963. She said that within an hour or two of Guys

127

False Flags

death, the FBI seized his locked filing cabinets. Yet state police did not arrive until after she did. State police seized some index cards that the FBI did not cart away. Garrison was able to get ahold of the index lists, which proved to Garrison that Guy Bannisters office was not only a private detective agency, it was also something else. The index list read as follows: American Central Intelligence Agency 20-10 Ammunition and Arms 32-1 Anti-Soviet Underground 25-1 B-70 Manned Bomber Force 15-16 Civil Rights Program of J.F.K. 8-41 Dismantling of Ballistic Missile System 15-16 Dismantling of Defenses, U.S. 15-16 Fair Play for Cuba Committee 23-7 International Trade Mart 23-14 *(bold added) Italy, U.S. Bases Dismantled in General Assembly of the United Nations 15-16 Latin America 23-1 Missile Bases Dismantled Turkey and Italy 15-16 (*Clay Shaw connection? The international Trade Mart may have been a front for the CIA.) Jack Martin also connected the Times-Picayune stories to Guy Bannisters operations. After reading the whole story Martin shook his head at Jim Garrison before saying, It doesnt say anything about the main raid. And it doesnt say a damn thing about all the Cubans who were arrested. The raid was a direct result of President Kennedy trying to get the FBI to stop the CIAs unending violations of the Neutrality Act. Bannisters operation was part of a supply-line between Dallas, New Orleans, and Miami, moving explosives and arms for the coming attack on Cuba. Garrison suspected that this was a show raid, the apparent intended effect of the FBIs public pronouncements about the raid was to protect and continue to conceal the curious activities at Bannisters office.

128

The JFK Inside Job

Small amounts of arms were kept at Bannisters office each time. Further in his book, Garrison explains, Bannisters operation also included the processing and handling of anti-Castro trainees passing through the city. Garrison suspected that the raid of where Jose Juarez was staying may have been highly publicized to please President Kennedy. He said the FBI was going through the motions...while its heart continued to belong to the missions being carried out by Guy Bannister. The Secret Service did an investigation of 544 Camp Street, where Bannisters office was located. Their synopsis of the report, dated December 9, 1963, was that no one had ever seen Oswald there, despite the fact that the Fair Play For Cuba leaflets once had 544 Camp Street stamped on them. The Secret Service synopsis read, Extensive investigation conducted thus far has failed to establish that the Fail Play For Cuba Committee had offices at 544 Camp Street, New Orleans. It has likewise been impossible to find anyone who recalls ever seeing Lee Harvey Oswald at this address. We did not yet realize it, said Garrison in his book, but we were encountering the first signs that there was a force in this country that no matter what the cost wanted the Cold War, and the hot war in Vietnam, to continue. The shadow government was looming in the air like a dark cloud ready to bring thunder and pouring rain onto the world. Garrison could see the invisible government working its evil across America. At times, he would bravely look the invisible government in their face, shrug, and present facts to support their secretive existence. I knew by now that when a group of individuals gravitated toward one another for no apparent reason, or a group of individuals inexplicably headed in the same direction as if drawn by a magnetic field, or coincidence piled on coincidence too many times, as often as not the shadowy outlines of a covert intelligence operation were somehow becoming visible.

129

False Flags

The Presidents Brain The brain of the President of the United States is still missing to this day. After a military autopsy, the brain simply disappeared. This is significant because of what the brain could have revealed...which direction the shots to the head came from. Hardened by formalin, the brain could have put speculation to rest. Even the x-rays and photographs that were taken of the brain were of no concern to the Warren Commission. They didnt bother to look at them. Why not? Why It Couldnt be the Mafia at the Head of the Table There are many theories about the Mafias involvement in the murder of one of our greatest presidents. Yet the mafias role seems that of a baseball player, not a baseball commissioner. Is it possible that the mafia was involved? Yes. Is there a connection between David Ferrie and the mob? Yes. According to Carl Oglesby, David Ferrie was the one who picked up Carlos Marcello in Guatemala after Marcello was deported there by Robert Kennedy, Attorney General to President Kennedy. Its also speculated that Ferrie was a pilot for the CIA, on a contractual basis, around the same time as the Bay of Pigs fiasco. Jack Ruby and the mob? Yes. Oswald and the mob? Yes. However, is there a connection between these three men and the CIA...of course. So who was pulling the strings? The mafia or the CIA? Or the shadow government? In the book by G. Robert Blakey and Richard Billings, they lay out a one-sided argument that the mafia carried out the hit on Kennedy. During the late 1970s, Blakey was chief counsel for the House Select Committee on Assassinations, while Billings was a senior staff writer. They take the emphasis off of the intelligence community and place it on their patsies, the mafia. Thus, the trail towards the truth narrows. Furthermore, they go to great lengths to smear Jim Garrison, and dont give him credit for his investigation and prosecution. They claim Garrison was in it for the publicity. Yet it wasnt Garrison who went into the spotlight. Rather, the media attacked him

130

The JFK Inside Job

and forced him into the spotlight, before Clay Shaw had even gone to trial, before they knew the evidence that Garrison had. Then they manipulated the evidence - the Zapruder film and the second shooter from the grassy knoll to fit their lone gunman theory. Blakey and the Final Report of the House Select Committee on Assassinations both would admit to a shooter from the grassy knoll, but said the shooter missed. They also concluded that the second shooter could or could not have been associated with Oswald at the time of the shooting. Are you serious bro? So they still have two random lone-nuts that might have had the same idea, on the same day. They dont discuss who changed the parade route that day, creating the nightmare on Elm Street. The parade route being changed points to a person at a high level of local government, something that counters the theory of a lone mafia hit. Garrison couldnt find a link between the mob and the changing of the parade route. Such a move pointed to the government, local and federal. In the Warren Commission Report, a news article about the change of parade routing was essentially blacked out. Could the mob do that? Could organized crime, Garrison asked in his book, have insured that the version of the front page of the Dallas Morning News offered to the Warren Commission as evidence no longer showed the originally scheduled route of the motorcade? He asks if the mob could have removed Governor Connallys clothes, and have them dry-cleaned immediately after the assassination? Could the mafia, without government help, remove evidence from such a historical crime? Could they illegally take Kennedys body from Texas before a legal and local autopsy could be done in that state? Do they have power to override local authorities? Could they make newspapers in foreign countries saying Kennedy has already been killed? With Oswald as the lone gunman, all before it happened? Its so similar to the Jane Standley BBC WTC 7 foreknowledge. It was a script and not a very good one. A script created by people within the federal government. Could the mafia get rid of the presidents brain? Could they order pathologists not to probe the neck wound lest a bullet from the front be found lodged in the spine? Could they place an Army General, who was not a physician, in charge of the autopsy? Could they

131

False Flags

order the chief pathologist to burn his original notes on the autopsy? The CIA moves in stealth, and this murder has their finger prints all over it. There should be no doubt about the mafias motive or involvement, but at what level of the conspiracy did they play a part? The evidence is clear, so I leave that up to you. Closing Argument Of Jim Garrison
Having told the world for so many years how wonderful we all are, here in the greatest country in the world, the media people were not willing to admit that our national leader could be removed in such brutal fashion in order to change government policy. That would put the lie to American democracy. Jim Garrison

On February 28, 1969, closing arguments were made by both the Prosecution and the Defense attorney. Prosecutor James Alcock gave his closing argument first. Alcock reiterated the nuts and bolts of the testimony and evidence presented at trial. He spoke for an hour and twenty five minutes. (4) Another prosecutor Alvin Oser then gave his closing argument. Oser spoke for just over an hour and a half, summarizing the Dallas and Dealey Plaza evidence which supported conspiracy and was heavily critical of the Warren Report. Unfortunately for Defense Attorney Irvin Dymond, he couldnt give a rebuttal to the prosecutors closing arguments, since Louisiana law did not permit it. After Dymond gave his closing argument, the two prosecutors were allowed to rebut his speech, spending close to 45 minutes doing so. Clay Shaws Defense Attorney, Irvin Dymond then gave his closing argument. Dymond concentrated on the tenuous link between the events in Dallas and the actions of his client in New Orleans. Dymond said he still believed in the integrity of the United States government, claiming that a conspiracy at the level Garrison suggested is inconceivable. Then last of all, District Attorney Jim Garrison gave his closing argument, which would be the last word before the jury would decide Clay Shaws fate.

132

The JFK Inside Job

Clay Shaw or Clay Bertrand? As we all know, it is a crime to lie under oath. According to former District Attorney Jim Garrison, and others, thats exactly what Shaw did when he answered, No, to the question asking if he had any aliases (other names). Besides many eyewitnesses who knew Clay Shaw as Clay Bertrand around the New Orleans nightlife, when Shaw was arrested and booked for allegedly conspiring to assassinate President Kennedy, Shaw gave the booking officer an alias of Clay Bertrand. This piece of evidence was ruled inadmissible by the judge. Of course, this same judge said, after the case, that he too believed there was a conspiracy. However, the judge felt there was insufficient proof to link Shaw to the conspiracy. The jurors of this case came to the logical conclusion that there was a real conspiracy aimed at assassinating President Kennedy. However, they also felt that the evidence to prove Clay Shaws involvement was missing. If the jury was allowed to hear this piece of evidence during Shaws trial, would it have meant more than perjury for the suspect? Clay Shaw and Clay Bertrand would have become the same person in the jurys eyes, and it would have strengthened, if not totally proven, the case Jim Garrison was making. The Test of Time for Truth
Americans have been so thoroughly brainwashed by such disinformation, paid for by their own taxes, that many of them today are only able to sigh mournfully to one another that they probably never will know the truth. Jim Garrison

On September 4, 1967 Chief Justice Earl Warren said Garrison had no proof that would contradict the Warren Commission Report. Speaking in Tokyo, Japan at the Foreign Correspondents Club of Japan, he said he hadnt heard anything that would contradict the commissions conclusion that Lee Oswald was the lone gunman. As Garrison makes clear, at this point in time, the first juror hadnt been

133

False Flags

selected. So how would Warren know what evidence Garrison had? What an unbiased judge he is. Still, by going public with that statement, Warren set the bar for the coming trial. Garrison understood the purpose of such a blind statement, No witness was going to be eager, in front of all the world, to make the Chief Justice appear to be a liar, or at least mistaken. The investigation itself is historical for many reasons. It was also reassuring to the D.A. that he had so many supporters, as he wrote in his book, public skepticism about the Warren Commissions official story was far deeper and more wide spread than I had realized. The mere fact that I, as an elected official, shared that skepticism and was willing to act on it had sparked a public response the like of which I had never seen. Garrison was re-elected as District Attorney of New Orleans in 1969, in the first primary election. Up until that point in time, no District Attorney had ever been re-elected in New Orleans. The House Select Committee on Assassinations, in 1979, not only concluded that President John F. Kennedy was probably assassinated as the result of a conspiracy, but they also recognized that one of the possible conspiracies involved Lee Oswalds association with David Ferrie. They also recommended that the Justice Department investigate further. In the movie, JKF, Jim Garrison came to a shocking conclusion, based on the evidence he found as a prosecutor. The assassination reduced the president to a transient official. His job, his assignment, is to speak as often as possible of this nations desire for peace, while he acts as a business agent in the congress for the military and their hardware manufacturers.
It was clear to me from the jurors reaction that our presentation of the evidence of a conspiracy in Dallas had made a deep impression. Jim Garrison

It still is to this day... Governor Ventura was suspicious of the rushed investigation by authorities, and the handling of the crime scene. That limo shouldnt have been touched until investigators went through it with a fine-

134

The JFK Inside Job

toothed combThats what causes, for me, a light to go onBecause when they start doing a crime investigation the exact opposite of the way its supposed to be done, that tells you that theres ulterior forces involved here. Even if we discount most of the information in this chapter and focus solely on the Zapruder film, we are forced to conclude that there is no way Oswald could have shot Kennedy the way the warren Commission said. If Oswald really shot Kennedy in the back of the head, Kennedys head would have been blown forward. Instead the video shows Kennedys head violently fall backwards and to the left. Based on the Zapruder film alone, Kennedy was shot from someone in front of him, not behind him where Oswald allegedly was. I did not have time to put everything in this chapter that I wanted to. There is so much more information on the JFK assassination that has been covered in length and detail, but what I chose to focus on was first the reasons why a shadow government killed JFK and then the details of the conspiracy trial by Jim Garrison of Clay Shaw. Had garrison never tried Shaw, most of the facts about JFK would not be public today. Garrison accomplished a huge victory for truth, freedom and the American way. JFK was a victim of a false flag operation. Before the shadow government blew up three buildings in New York City, I believe they killed President Kennedy because he defied orders from the shadow government. In the next chapter we will discuss this shadow government and the facts we know about them. Fritz Springmeier believes JFKs murder was a satanic sacrifice by the Illuminati. Springmeier names both the Kennedy family and the Onassis family as part of the Bloodlines of the Illuminati. His book, Bloodlines of the Illuminati, provides evidence to his claim. The JFK conspiracy lives on, until we have some clarifying answers to the many questions that remain. To look at it from a prosecution stand-point, research Jim Garrison, the only person to ever try to prosecute someone for the murder of John F. Kennedy. If the president becomes a problem, the real powers that be already have a way to deface or eliminate our head of state. The lone gunman theory can only hold true if the evidence can stand up in the court of public

135

False Flags

opinion. Like 9/11, we know that the evidence to prove Oswald acted alone does not stand up against evidence that proves otherwise. History should reflect this. Thanks to many books like this one, it has, will, and will continue to do so! We may never know the full story until we are dead, but we should recognize that, as my favorite Governor, Jesse Ventura says, Theres ulterior forces involved here. Ventura has been very vocal about his views on JFK and 9/11. More so, he has evidence to back it up! I do not believe that Lee Harvey Oswald killed John F. Kennedy. Not alone. I dont believe it. Ive studied it for twenty years and I also raise 9/11 today. And I do that because theres questions that I am not getting answers to when I ask them. And theres also they doth protest too much when you ask them. If its [true] what they told us happened, they should have no problem defending it. They should have no problem giving you an answer to it. And its simple questions. Like, how did the buildings fall at the rate of gravity? They fell in ten seconds; both, in the 9/11 Report, and you can stop-watch it. How can that be if youve studied physics? In physics, when a movable object hits one thats not moving, its gonna slow everything down. Its that simple, people. And yet these buildings were on the ground in ten seconds. If you took a billiard ball and dropped it in a vacuum, from the height of the World Trade Center, it would take 9.3 seconds to hit the ground. How could these buildings of steel and concrete land within 7/10th of a second of a free-falling billiard ball? Gulf Of Tonkin
In 2004 when I was teaching at Harvard, McNamara came through. And of course he now admitted the Gulf of Tonkin incident never happened...the Gulf on Tonkin incident was what happened that got us into the Vietnam War, where they told us that the Vietnamese fired at two of our ships, which is a declaration of war. McNamara then admitted it never happened. Well 58,000 of my generation was killed in the Vietnam war. Probably a million Vietnamese killed. All over an incident that was made up? Jesse Ventura (Fox Sports Radio)

136

The JFK Inside Job

In 1965, Lyndon Johnson commented: For all I know, our Navy was shooting at whales out there. Aaron Dykes, writing for Jones Report on March 27, 2007 points out that President Johnson utilized this staged event to expand dramatically the scale of the Vietnam War by ushering in the Gulf of Tonkin Resolution, as well as to rope in much needed domestic support with the Congress and public. Dykes continues, The Gulf of Tonkin Resolution could be considered by some as a silent declaration of war against North Vietnam. The resolution easily passed congress on August 7th 1964. The only no votes were cast by two senators, Wayne Morse of Oregon and Ernest Gruening of Alaska. With the stage set, President Johnson had what he needed to continue the war, under the guise of self-defense. In 1995, General Vo Nguyen Giap, commander-in-chief of North Vietnamese forces, admitted that back in 1964, he was involved with the August 2nd attack. However he denied being part of the August 4th attack. Greg Mitchell writes in his book, So Wrong For So Long, Thirty years later, Americans are still asking why we went to war in Vietnam and stayed at war. Of course, the American presidents gave answers at that time and we are still looking for better answers. Had Kennedy not been assassinated, he had plans to end the war in Vietnam, get rid of or limit the power the CIA, revive Silver bullion within the American economy limiting the Federal Reserve and, quite possibly, end the Cold War; bringing back national sovereignty to the global stage. Would he have succeeded? All indications point to yes. The motive was there for many hands to take part in the assassination of President John F. Kennedy. Those who benefited from his death are still benefiting from the cover-up that surrounds the JFK murder. Those who covered it up are part of the inside job, part of the false flag operation. Jim Garrison got as close to the truth as possible, with the limited resources he had available. The critics can say what they want about Garrison, but they didnt have the courage, the elected position, or the moral responsibility to speak out against the lies of Kennedys murder. Had Garrison done nothing, as many elected officials did on 9/11, our

137

False Flags

country would still be waiting for the Zapruder film to be released, just as we are waiting for the Pentagon footage of 9/11 to be released. Garrison has been a giant stepping-stone for the JFK Truth movement in general. From this trial came documented eye-witness testimony, the Zapruder film (locked away before trial), pictures of the hobos who may have been working for the CIA, and the inconsistencies of the Warren Commission Report. We also learned about the many enemies JKF had, as well as some loyal Americans who could tell the difference between lies and reality, and were not afraid to express those opinions publicly. Fletcher Prouty has written two great books about the JFK conspiracy and the military industrial complex. I found Mark Lanes book, Plausible Denial, very insightful. Combined with Jim Garrisons book, On the Trail of the Assassins, part of the ultimate conspiracy has revealed. The silent hand may be some global bank cartels that hide in the shadows and fund the war-profiteering operations. Above them may be the Illuminati. Above the Illuminati may be the devil. The full conspiracy is so big that it would need the mafias, the Cuban guerrillas, CIA assets and agents, the FBI, local Dallas and New Orleans officials, police, secret service agents, military personnel, and global elitists to pull off the assassination of Kennedy. We know a lot more than people knew in 1963. Yet there is still much more to know. What we can say for sure is that John F. Kennedy was killed as the result of a conspiracy and this is a vast conspiracy of global proportions. I will never stop searching for the truth. Never.

138

The JFK Inside Job

139

And Now For A

NEW WORLD ORDER

I come to Berlin as so many of my countrymen have come before. Tonight, I speak to you not as a candidate for President, but as a citizen a proud citizen of the United States, and a fellow citizen of the worldYes, there have been differences between America and Europe. No doubt, there will be differences in the future. But the burdens of global citizenship continue to bind us together. A change of leadership in Washington will not lift this burden. In this new century, Americans and Europeans alike will be required to do more not less. Partnership and cooperation among nations is not a choice; it is the one way, the only way, to protect our common security and advance our common humanity. Barack Obama (Berlin 2009) In 1945, at the end of the war, through 1989 and the end of the cold war, we had a world view, Republican and Democratic presidents alike, from Harry Truman to George Bush, [that] stood for freedomafter 1989 president Bush said, a phrase that I also used myself, we need a new world order and instead it looks like we have a lot of disorder. Bill Clinton, speaking at the Kennedy Center in Washington D.C., 2009 (1) The extraordinary impact of the President-elect on the imagination of humanity is an important element in shaping a new world order. But it defines an opportunity, not a policy. The ultimate challenge is to shape the common concern of most countries and all major ones regarding the economic crisis, together with a common fear of jihadist terrorism, into a strategy reinforced by the realization that the new issues like proliferation, energy and climate change permit no national or regional solution. Henry Kissinger (2)

In 1976, Congressman Larry P. McDonald understood that the drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a one world government combining super capitalism and Communism under the same tent, all under their control...Do I mean conspiracy? Yes I do. I am convinced there is such a plot, inter-national in scope, generations old in planning, and incredibly evil in intent. On September 1, 1983, he was aboard the Korean Airlines Flight 007; which was shot down by the Soviets during the Cold War. Suspicion surrounds his death. In 1979, he also sponsored H.R. 555: A bill to require the Comptroller

False Flags

General of the United States to audit annually the gold held by the United States on the first day of each fiscal year and to report his findings to Congress. McDonald brought forth the same House Resolution to the floor in 1980, but was unable to get any co-sponsors for it. (3) Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) member James Warburg told the Senate Foreign Relations Committee on February 17th, l950, We shall have world government whether or not you like it, by conquest or consent.
Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as internationalists and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structureone world, if you will. If thats the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it David Rockefeller

During the annual Bilderberg meeting, where the elites discuss global affairs among other things, David Rockefeller spoke in Baden, Germany, June 1991. We are grateful to The Washington Post, The New York Times, Time magazine, and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected their promise of discretion for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subject to the bright lights of publicity during those years. But the world is now more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government. The super national sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination practiced in past centuriesWe are on the verge of a global transformation. All we need is the right major crisis and the nations will accept the New World Order. (4)
To achieve world government, it is necessary to remove from the minds of men their individualism, loyalty to family traditions, national patriotism, and religious dogmas. Brock Adams (Director UN Health Organization)

141

New World Order

A world government can intervene militarily in the internal affairs of any nation when it disapproves of their activities. Kofi Annan (U.N. Secretary General) No one will enter the New World Order unless he or she will make a pledge to worship Lucifer. No one will enter the New Age unless he will take a Luciferian Initiation. David Spangler (Director of Planetary Initiative, United Nations) I think [Barack Obamas] task will be to develop an overall strategy for America, in this period when really, a new world order can be created. Its a great opportunity in such a crisis. Henry Kissinger (CNBC 2009) In March, 1915, the J.P. Morgan interests, the steel, ship building, and powder interest, and their subsidiary organizations, got together, 12 men high up in the newspaper world, and employed them to select the most influential newspapers in the United States and a sufficient number of them to control generally the policy of the daily press...They found it was only necessary to purchase the control of 25 of the greatest papersAn agreement was reached; the policy of the papers was bought, to be paid for by the month; an editor was furnished for each paper to properly supervise and edit information regarding the questions of preparedness, militarism, financial policies, and other things of national and international nature considered vital to the interests of the purchasers. U.S. Congressman Oscar Callaway (1917) The world can therefore seize the opportunity [Persian Gulf crisis] to fulfill the long-held promise of a New World Order where diverse nations are drawn together in common cause to achieve the universal aspirations of mankind. George Herbert Walker Bush In the next century, nations as we know it will be obsolete; all states will recognize a single, global authority. National sovereignty wasnt such a great idea after all. Strobe Talbot (President Clintons Deputy Secretary of State) (5) The world is governed by very different personages from what is imagined by those who are not behind the scenes. Benjamin Disraeli (first Prime Minister of England) (6)

142

False Flags

The governments of the present day have to deal not merely with other governments, with emperors, kings and ministers, but also with the secret societies which have everywhere their unscrupulous agents, and can at the last moment upset all the governments plans. British Prime Minister Benjamin Disraeli (1876) Since I entered politics, I have chiefly had mens views confided to me privately. Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of commerce and manufacture, are afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it. Woodrow Wilson (7) The real menace of our republic is this invisible government which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy length over city, state and nation. Like the octopus of real life, it operates under cover of a self created screen...At the head of this octopus are the Rockefeller Standard Oil interests and a small group of powerful banking houses generally referred to as international bankers. The little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run the United States government for their own selfish purposes. They practically control both political parties. New York City Mayor John F. Hylan (1922)

In 1922, Winston Churchill stated to the London Press, From the days of Spartacus, Wieskhopf, Karl Marx, Trotsky, Rosa Luxemberg, and Emma Goldman, this world conspiracy has been steadily growing. This conspiracy played a definite recognizable role in the tragedy of the French revolution. It has been the mainspring of every subversive movement during the 19th century. And now at last this band of extraordinary personalities from the underworld of the great cities of Europe and America have gripped the Russian people by the hair of their head and have become the undisputed masters of that enormous empire.

143

New World Order

The government of the Western nations, whether monarchical or republican, had passed into the invisible hands of a plutocracy, international in power and grasp. It was, I venture to suggest, this semi occult power which...pushed the mass of the American people into the cauldron of World War I. British military historian Major General J.F.C. Fuller (l941)

The real truth of the matter is, President Franklin D. Roosevelt wrote to Colonel Edward Mandell House, November 21st, l933, as you and I know, that a financial element in the larger centers has owned the government ever since the days of Andrew Jackson. Joseph Kennedy, father of future President John F. Kennedy, has been reported to say in the July 26th, l936 issue of The New York Times, Fifty men have run America, and thats a high figure. Likewise, in 1952, Supreme Court Justice Felix Frankfurter made his feelings clear that the real rulers in Washington are invisible, and exercise power from behind the scenes. Senator William Jenner, in 1954, also knew of the coming world order by a shadow government. Today the path of total dictatorship in the United States can be laid by strictly legal means, unseen and unheard by the Congress, the President, or the people. Outwardly we have a Constitutional government. We have operating within our government and political system, another body representing another form of government - bureaucratic elite. It seems a lot of people knew about the shadow government, the new world order and the elite power cabal since before Bush Sr.s new world order speech in 1991, when this term became common knowledge among citizens, even though the existence of such an elite group would be shrouded in mystery for many more years. This includes U.S. Senator Barry Goldwater, who wrote, The Trilateral Commission is intended to be the vehicle for multinational consolidation of the commercial and banking interests by seizing control of the political government of the United States. The Trilateral Commission represents a skillful, coordinated effort to seize control and consolidate the four centers of power political, monetary, intellectual and ecclesiastical. What the Trilateral Commission intends is to create a worldwide economic power superior to the political governments of the nation states involved. As managers and creators of the system, they will rule the future. (8)

144

False Flags

The spirit of the times may alter, will alter. Our rulers will become corrupt, our people careless. A single zealot may commence persecution, and better men be his victims. It can never be too often repeated, that the time for fixing every essential right on a legal basis is while our rulers are honest and ourselves united. From the conclusion of this war (Revolutionary War) we shall be going downhill. It will not then be necessary to resort every moment to the people for support. They will be forgotten, therefore, and their rights disregarded. They will forget themselves, but in the sole faculty of making money, and will never think of uniting to effect a due respect for their rights. The shackles, therefore, which shall not be knocked off at the conclusion of this war, will remain on us long, will be made heavier and heavier, till our rights shall revive or expire in a convulsion. Thomas Jefferson (9) Our job is to give people not what they want, but what we decide they ought to have. Richard Salant (former president of CBS News)

GLOBAL ORDER

Are we united in this global struggle we face world-wide? We are not united to fight the terrorists because we cannot agree on who the real terrorists are. The real terrorists, in my opinion, are those who do not respect sovereign nations, those who seek to destroy freedom, freewill, create false flags, murder, kill, pillage and plunder! Jesse Ventura told Alex Jones, It seems that any country that nationalizes their oil and nationalizes their natural resources, and doesnt let our corporations go in there and for lack of better terms rape and pillage them, well, we then call that person a communist, a dictator, and we start working to oust them. L. Fletcher Prouty has basically described what we call today, among other names, the global order as a One World growth of a

145

New World Order

power elite of international bankers and industrial giants who totally disregard the sovereignty of nations and the individual rights of man. (JFK by L. Fletcher Prouty)

Photograph by Ilya Petushkov

Many states are turning to the 10th Amendment of the U.S. Constitution, which states: The powers not delegated to the United States by the constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people. The Constitution is clear, federal law does not override States rights as given by the constitution. This is not interpretation, this is a clear fact. Even a provision in the Articles of Confederation stated that each state retains its sovereignty, freedom, and independence, and every power, jurisdiction, and right, which is not by this Confederation expressly delegated to the United States, in Congress assembled. The Tenth Amendment of the United States Constitution was ratified on December 15, 1791 and states, The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people. Amendment Nine of the Constitution, Ratified on December 15th, 1791 states, The enumeration in the Constitution, of certain rights, shall not be construed to deny or disparage others retained by the people. The Declaration of Independence states: Governments are instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed, that whenever any form of government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the right of the people to alter or to

146

False Flags

abolish it, and to institute new government. Senator Barry Goldwater tried to warn us about the destruction of U.S. sovereignty thirty years ago. In his book With No Apologies (1979), he wrote: Where I differ from [then Governor Nelson Rockefeller] is in the suggestion implicit throughout his [1962 lectures at Harvard University] thatthe United States must submerge its national identity and surrender substantial matters of sovereignty to a new political order. The implications in Governor Rockefellers presentation have become concrete proposals advanced by David Rockefellers newest international cabal, the Trilateral Commission. Whereas the Council on Foreign Relations is distinctly national in membership, the Trilateral Commission is internationalIt is intended to be the vehicle for multinational consolidation of the commercial and banking interests by seizing control of the political government of the United States. Zbigniew Brzezinski and David Rockefeller screened and selected every individual who was invited to participate in shaping and administering the proposed new world order. (10)

David Rockefeller and Zbigniew Brzezinski have been rumored to be a part of the global empire for a long time. The Rockefellers are linked to the Bilderberg Group. The Bilderberg Group has been trying to end our countrys sovereignty for a long time. Through stealth, they have been able to dictate policy in the United States and in other countries. This is the world elite in action. They do the planning, and then use their puppets to
implement their plans. Mr. Goldwater further explains what the Trilaterals want, as instructed by David Rockefeller: What the Trilaterals truly intend is the creation of a worldwide economic power superior to the political governments of the national-states involvedAs managers and creators of the system they will rule the future. (11) I once thought that voting for Bill Clinton was voting against the New World Order. That was then, this is nowI read Bill Clintons book My Life. In Chapter 24, he writes: I ended 1987 with my third speech of the decade at the Florida Democratic conventionI told the Florida Democrats, We have to do nothing less than create a new world economic order and secure the place of the American people

147

New World Order

within it. The central arguments I made were Weve got to pay the price today to secure tomorrow and Were all in it together. We are in this together, but what Mr. Clinton does not understand, or express, is that a free and democratic society, under a Republic, has to be achieved voluntarily, not through force. John Perkins talks extensively about this in his book, Confessions of an Economic Hit Man. Creating a new world economic order means taking the resources of other countries, mostly smaller ones, and using those resources for the benefit of the Global World Order. NAFTA and CAFTA have achieved this. Not only does it outsource jobs to other countries for a huge profit, it also hurts our economy with job losses and creates dependence on other countries for products that could, and should, be made in the USA. In order for a New World Order to emerge, you have to break down as many countries as possible, forcing them to become dependent on the New World Order. In short, you create a problem, the people panic and look for an answer, an answer which you have already created the one world answer. Then the people are forced to run to you for help and will praise you willingly for saving their lives. Its the ultimate false flag. This can also bring to light the prophecy in the book of Revelations, where everyone will be forced to have a microchip implanted in them in order tolive.

148

The Global Empire

The Global Empire

For some time I have been disturbed by the way the CIA has been diverted from its original assignment. It has become an operational and at times a policy-making arm of the governmentI never had any thought that when I set up the CIA that it would be injected into peacetime cloak and dagger operations. President Harry Truman (December 22, 1963) (1) If the CIA had control over media companies decades ago what do you think their role is now during the communication revolution? Luke Rudkowski How can a person declare that 9/11 was an inside job with an inside voice? Saman Mohammadi In the early ages of the world, according to the scripture chronology, there were no kings; the consequence of which was, there were no wars; it is the pride of kings which throw mankind into confusion. Thomas Paine (2) If a criminal group can kill 3,000 of us in broad daylight, and suspend the laws of physics, and sell this to the people, and launch illegal wars and kill over a million Iraqis and lie about [Weapons of Mass Destruction] in a premeditated fashion none of us are safe; because this same system is still in control, whether we have George Bush, Barack Obama, or somebody like Rick Perry in three years in the White House. Sarah Palin isnt gonna save us. Joe Biden isnt going to save you. You are going to save this country, and this planet. Alex Jones Though the wars we fight are now unconstitutional, the military is endlessly praised for defending our liberties and constitution. Ron Paul (3)

Ron Paul wrote in his book, Liberty Defined, that its preposterous to think that the United States can cut government and maintain the empire at the same time. Paul understands that an empire, which requires perpetual war and preparation for war, is incompatible with a free society. (4)

149

Shadow Government

Since 1954, the Bilderbergers have represented the elite and the absolute wealth of all Western nations, financiers, industrialists, bankers, politicians, business leaders or multinational corporations, presidents, prime ministers, finance ministers, state secretaries, World Bank and International Monetary Fund representatives, presidents of world media conglomerates, and military leaders. Daniel Estulin (5)

The first Bilderberg Group meeting took place in 1954. Orchestrated by Prince Bernhard, at his Bilderberg Hotel (where the name the Bilderberg Group came from) in Oosterbeek, Holland, the list of attendees included the young banker named David Rockefeller. The Rockefeller name is everywhere. The problem most Americans have with the Bilderbergers is that the American representatives are meeting there annually to set national and world policy, which is illegal in the United States. Under the 1799 Logan Act its treason for unauthorized United States citizens to negotiate with foreign governments: Any citizen of the United States, wherever he may be, who, without authority of the United States, directly or indirectly commences or carries on any correspondence or intercourse with any foreign government or any officer or agent thereof, with intent to influence the measures or conduct of any foreign government or of any officer or agent thereof, in relation to any disputes or controversies with the United States, or to defeat the measures of the United States, shall be fined under this title or imprisoned not more than three years, or both. February 15th 1957 was the first time that a Bilderberg Group conference was held on United States soil. It was here, at the King and Prince Hotel on St. Simons Island, Georgia, that syndicated columnist Westbrook Pegler exposed that something very mysterious is going on when a strange assortment of 67 self-qualified, polygot designers and arbiters of the economic and political fate of our Western world go into a secret huddle on an island off Brunswick, Ga., and not a word gets into the popular press beyond a little routine AP story. These gumshoe super-state schemers were drawn from all the NATO countries. Later in October 1957, the London Sunday Times tried to downplay the role of the Bilderberg Group a group accused of dictating world policy-making behind the scenes of world politics. The paper announced that the point of the Bilderberg meeting was that

150

The Global Empire

members should be able to discuss problems of interest on both sides of the Atlantic without committing their Governments. All the members were speaking as private individuals. Yet who were these members representing and how did their representation affect the citizens of each country? As long as the secrecy of the Bilderberg Group remains intact, there will be no debate in the court of public opinion as to whether the actions of the Bilderberg Group are illegal. Today such secrecy is fading, thanks to great investigative journalists, reporters, radio personalities, and the free citizens of the world. Every year, for the past 30 years or so, after every annual Bilderberg weekend conference, information about the group is leaked to Jim Tucker about the world agenda set by the members. What Tucker is told generally turns out to be true. As veteran investigative-journalists Jim Tucker and Daniel Estulin have uncovered, the agenda of the Bilderberg is deciding World Policy that affects every sovereign nation on the globe. Jim Tucker has been covering the Bilderberg Group for over 30 years. Both he and Estulin have inside sources that give them information about Bilderberg meeting agendas and attendees. What we can deduce on the most general terms is that every human being is possibly being controlled and manipulated through the results of the annual Bilderberg meeting. Year after year, the awareness of the group has increased. The 2011 Bilderberg meeting was held from June 9th to 12th in St. Moritz, Switzerland. Outside of the meeting, the area was filled with independent media, mainstream media, and many concerned citizens, who traveled across the world to catch a glimpse of whos attending the Bilderberg meeting. In 2009, Tucker told Alex Jones that President Obamas U.S. Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner would be present at that years Bilderberg meeting in Athens, Greece. Kurt Nimmo wrote on May 2009 that Geithner recently announced while addressing the Council on Foreign Relations that he supported a proposal to replace the dollar as the worlds reserve currency with a composite of currencies that would be managed by the International Monetary Fund. Paul Watson added that Geithner, who has overseen Obamas bailout agenda since taking over from Hank Paulson, is the perfect

151

Shadow Government

stooge to implement the global financial regulatory systems that elitists have called for in the aftermath of the financial downturn. Geithners presence at Bilderberg is noteworthy, not only because Bernanke attended immediately before the economic crisis last year, but also because Bilderbergs agenda for 2009 is heavily weighted towards the financial crisis. (6) Roger Boyes and John Carr writing for Times Online added that US Treasury Secretary Tim Geithners public schedule is mysteriously empty for the next two days. The 2009 Infowars.com report adds that the years Bilderberg meeting was protected from a relatively tiny gathering of independent reporters and protesters by a joint effort on behalf of hundreds of police, navy commandos, coast guard speedboats and two F-16 fighter planes, according to a rare AP report. In his book, The Bilderberg Conspiracy, H. Paul Jeffers writes that success of the Bilderberg Groups rule of silence was ensured by two aspects of human nature: the desire to be an insider who is entrusted with secrets. The allure of being among the worlds elite and allowed to rub elbows, chat at cocktail parties, dine in splendor, and play cards or golf with royalty, prime ministers, presidents, statesmen, millionaires, intellectuals, and celebrity journalists in a five-star hotel guaranteed compliance. (7)
What we are truly watching is an effort on the part of a group of elites, worldwide, who wish to bring about a One World Order. It may not be particularly a new world order since the effort has been underway for some time. Lou Dobbs (8)

The Bilderberg members are friends of globalization. Some members mask it behind a veil of world peace. Even if most people are told that globalization is meant to bring equality to poorer nations, using prosperous nations to pay the way for such equality, what it really does is take the resources and power structure from every nation and give it to a shadow empire by letting the empire control economic, political, and social influence. This is exactly what John Perkins talks about in his best-selling book Confessions of an Economic Hit Man. There is a power structure that starves out every nation, third-world nations first of course. Who is squeezed first is decided by resources of a country, and what the shadow government decides it will control first.

152

The Global Empire

It is because the world is not black-and-white that this group, or groups, of global conspirators has been able to cast a veil over their true intentions. Nelson Rockefeller, unelected vice-president under President Gerald Ford was groomed to hold the highest office in the United States. Rockefeller had been an advocate of interdependence of nations under the guise of take from the rich and give to the poor. Fortunately for him and his family, the Rockefellers have many tax exempt foundations, like other wealthy people who know how to work the crooked tax system. After all, some of them helped create it. In 1962 Barry Goldwater spoke about Nelson Rockefellers point of view on the United States dependency upon other nations. We are dependent on other nations for raw materials and for markets. It is necessary to have defense alliances with other nations in order to balance the military power of those who would destroy us. Where I differ from Rockefeller is in the suggestion that to achieve this new federalism, the United States must submerge its national identity and surrender substantial matters of sovereignty to a new political order. (9) Gary Allen writes in his book, The Rockefeller File, that by 1976, the Rockefellers controlled 37 of the nations top 100 industrials, 9 of the top 20 transportation firms, the nations number one utility, 3 of the 4 largest insurance companies, plus scores of smaller companies engaged in manufacturing, distribution, retail sales, loans, or investments. Mr. Allen warns that once the Rockefeller thoughtcontrollers convince the citizens of the United States to surrender U.S. sovereignty to the United Nations, we will witness the arrival of the World Government. With our president by-passing congress on the Libya situation, we can see this is happening. In many ways, we are in a world government, where the world is dependent on global decisions, instead of national sovereignty. This is why many of us will tell you that there is a shadow government. Yet what stalks us in the shadows will one day emerge from the darkness and violently attack its prey. CFR member Cord Meyer Jr., the first president of the United World Federalists (one world advocates intertwined with the CFR), wrote in his book Peace and Anarchy, that as soon as a one world government could dominate the world, no one could secede or revolt. If any dare try, with the atom bomb in its possession, the Federal

153

Shadow Government

[World] Government would blow that nation off the face of the earth. After stepping down as the UWF president, Meyer began working for the CIA. A strong arm of the Shadow Government is the Federal Reserve. The New York branch of the non-federal Federal Reserve Bank is one of 12 regional Federal Reserve banks and the one charged with monitoring capital markets. It is also managing $1.7 trillion of emergency lending programs. While the Feds Washington-based Board of Governors is a federal agency subject to the Freedom of Information Act and other government rules, the New York Fed and other regional banks maintain they are separate institutions, owned by their member banks, and not subject to federal restrictions. (10) Our Friends, Our Enemies We claim we spread democracy but our allies are not democratic. Saudi Arabia, a close ally of the United States has been known to prohibit demonstrations under the kings law. So while the United States is allegedly spreading democracy around the globe, we are aligned with many non-democratic countries. Its hard to believe that the United States is spreading any kind of democracy worldwide when there are so many unconstitutional practices inside America. Obama has no problem with bypassing congress and going to the United Nations for permission to put military soldiers in Libya. What type of democracy is that? The fake kind.
Then it came out...right before Bush left office, MSNBC, Sy Hersh, as well [as] New Yorker Magazine, that Cheney, indeed, in the White House, had proposed creating fake gun boats, PT boats, blue Iranian boats to have them attack a US Destroyer as a pretext to launch a war against Iran. And Cheney doesnt get in any trouble. Alex Jones

For as long as Ive been listening to Infowars.com, Alex Jones has always said the global empire want to break our will and to capture the United States as an engine of global domination. For anyone whos studied history; when you have an empire, a regional empire or a global

154

The Global Empire

empire take Rome 2,000 years ago the most oppressed people in that system are those living in the heart of the empire. They use our primitive instincts, to be threatened by outsiders, to sell us on primitively turning off our thinking process and going along with this evil. But in the final equation, it is a life and death situation and there couldnt be a more serious issue to face than an empire who writes policy reports for PNAC, Dick Cheney and others...Zbigniew Brzezinski running much of the policies for Obama, writing two books, one of them, The Grand Chess Board, saying, If we dont have a large Pearl Harbor event, were not going to be able to mobilize our people to launch all of these new wars for this Pax Americana. Under the shield of democracy, in the name of the American people, America is being dragged into a global system. Therefore, distractions are needed. Charlie Sheen has called Obama, A coward in a cheap suit. Before you dismiss him as not credible remember Sheen was one of the people who called for a new investigation into 9/11, telling Headline News he had questions about the official story. Also he has never backed down from that claim. It takes courage for someone in his position to go public with questions about 9/11. Then he took it one step further and posted a YouTube clip, Twenty Minutes with the President. His right to privacy, regardless of celebrity status, should still be protected, as the constitution requires.

155

Shadow Government

(Photo by Shane Caraway. Posted on Facebook)

Alex Jones has rightfully said, the entire system is focused on activists; anti-war activists, anti-GMO food activists, Second Amendment activists, Libertarians, returning veterans, former police. Anyone that has any skills is targeted by this secret police network that the system is attempting to roll out against us. Many would agree that

156

The Global Empire

there is an awakening happening. Others will tell you the movement is dead. I guess it all depends on each persons own point of view; and what you see, read, and hear about in your daily life. Circumstances dictate emotions. Emotions drive passion. Passion creates intelligently formed opinions...of course, thats just my opinion too. This man had the #1 TV show in America, Two and A Half Men, and had nothing to gain and everything to lose by continuing to question 9/11.The questions he has about 9/11 are shared by many people, and as more information is spread about the lies of 9/11, many more people are asking the same questions. If youve never read Sheens 20 questions for the president, this is a good time to check it out. You may be surprised how much you both have in common when it comes to September 11th. You may be lumped in the same category as people who doubt the official story of September 11th. Those lies will expose the global empires intentions, beginning with global dominance and ending with mass destruction. Still there will always be people to record history as it happens, as it was, or as it never was. That information will be used by future generations to debate the facts about what truly happened. The information in this book and other books about similar subjects will one day be required reading for those who wish to debate false flags such as 9/11, real global conspiracies, natural and unnatural catastrophes, and what they can do to prevent these events from happening in the future. Population Reduction After becoming chairman of the Commission on Population Growth and the American Future, John D. Rockefeller III is quoted as saying, The average citizen doesnt appreciate the social and economic implications of population growth and what it does to the quality of all our lives. Rather than think of population control as a negative thing, we should see that it can be enriching. The Commission on Population Growth and the American Future would conclude in 1974 that population growth was a bad thing and that people should be educated on how to avoid unwanted

157

Shadow Government

fertility. Created under President Richard Nixon, John D. Rockefeller III was appointed the chairman of the commission. Rockefeller concluded in a 1974 letter to the president and congress, After two years of concentrated effort, we have concluded that, in the long run, no substantial benefits will result from further growth of the Nations population, rather that the gradual stabilization of our population through voluntary means would contribute significantly to the Nations ability to solve its problems. (11) So Mr. Rockefeller, of whom the AP once reported, a long time ago in a galaxy far away, that John D. III was the worlds leading advocate of family planning changed his position sometime around the early 1970s. Rockefellers letter to Nixon and congress explained that we have looked for, and have not found, any convincing economic argument for continued population growth. The health of our country does not depend on it, nor does the vitality of business nor the welfare of the average person. The recommendations offered by this Commission are directed towards increasing public knowledge of the causes and consequences of population change, facilitating and guiding the processes of population movement, maximizing information about human reproduction and its consequences for the family, and enabling individuals to avoid unwanted fertility. The attack on fertility picked up steam as Planned Parenthood in New York City opened its first large scale abortion center in 1971, according to Gary Allen. (12) Mr. Allen also writes that the abortion center, which would have the possibility of performing over 10,000 abortions a year for an average fee of $80, with funds provided in many cases by Medicaid, got its initial funding, a $200,000 pledge, from none other than the Rockefeller Brothers Fund. Not only did the Rockefellers see a need for populations to stop growing, Mr. Allen writes that in 1972 alone, one year after the NYC abortion mill opened, 700,000 innocent babies were killed in the United States. Mr. Allen wrote that sometime around 1975-1976, so you can imagine those statistics today. He also warned that the number of abortions could increase to 1.6 million a year. Bill Gates and Ted Turner may boast about population control but to understand who is controlling the actual reduction of populations,

158

The Global Empire

follow the Rockefeller trail. Their tentacles are everywhere. Funny Money
The only hope for a central bank was to disguise it and have it put through by the Democrats as a measure to strip Wall Street of its power. Gary Allen (13) During the period between the 15th and 19th Century, New empires emerged and again waged war for supremacy. The nobility, as well as the thriving merchant class were financed by a handful of private banks. Many of the great money houses hedged their bets and financed both sides of the war. Sophisticated intelligence-gathering networks gave the financiers a clear edge over the governments they were slowly gaining control of. Alex Jones (Endgame) (14) Permit me to issue and control the money of a nation, and I care not who makes its laws. Mayer A. Rothschild (Rothschild Banking Family)

Napoleon Bonaparte crowned himself Emperor in 1804, after his armies conquered much of Europe. In 1812 Napoleon was forced to retreat from Russia, after foolishly trying to invade the country and force the Russian Tsar Alexander I to remain part of the Continental forces that opposed Great Britain. Alexander had previously declared war on the British in 1807. The Russian army was able to stop Bonaparte from reaching the capitol of Russia, St. Petersburg. After the Battle of Borodino, on September 7th, 1812 the bloodiest battle that claimed over 70,000 lives the French forces eventually won control of the battlefield, which was close to Moscow. Even so, the French did not defeat the Russian army. As they did so many times before, the Russians would pick their battles using guerrilla tactics; retreat and regroup to fight again, stronger than before. The Russians tireless efforts saved their country. Napoleon entered Moscow on September 14th, but was unsuccessful at negotiating peace-talks with the Tsar of Russia. While Russian forces regrouped in October, Napoleon, in need

159

Shadow Government

of food and supplies, was forced to retreat from Moscow entirely. The Russian Army went on the offensive, blocking the roads French troops hoped to use to resupply their forces. Napoleon then left his army to return to Paris. The French soldiers who were not dead or captured by the Russians left Russia in December, and returned to French controlled territory with about 27,000 soldiers; leaving close to 400,000 men dead, or missing, with another 100,00 captured by Russian forces. It was around this time, in 1813, that Nathan Rothschild, founder of the Rothschild banking family of England in 1789, became the main financier of the British war against the French from 18041815. Field Marshal of the British Army at that time was Arthur Wellesley, better known as the Duke of Wellington. Field Marshall was ranked higher than general. The Rothschild bank provided Wellingtons forces bullion (funding) all across Europe, to help the Field Marshall defeat Napoleon. In the final year of the war, 1815, the Rothschild bank provided huge lumps of subsidy loans to Britains continental allies. With the war between Britain and France raging to its conclusion Nathan Rothschild was about to seize control over Great Britain, and my extension, the world. Alex Jones Endgame says it best; that on June 18th, 1815, Agents of the British-arm of the Rothschild family looked on as Emperor Napoleon Bonaparte fought desperately to save his army from the jaws of a British-Prussian-Panzer attack. A Rothschild agent was able to get the news of Napoleons defeat at the hands of Lord Wellington to Nathan Rothschild a full twenty hours before the news reached London. Nathan, the head of the British-arm of the Rothschild family put out the rumor to the London Stock Exchange that Napoleon had won the war. Stocks plunged by 98%. Rothschild was then able to buy up the entire British economy, for pennies on the pound. Frederick Morton relays the story a little differently, suggesting that Rothschild did tell the British government of Napoleons defeat but his news was not believed, writes Morton. (15) Then he proceeded to the Stock Exchange. Regardless, Nathan did dump his consuls on the market he began selling off his consuls (bonds), which caused the market to be flooded, resulting in devaluation of consuls. At this lowered rate, Rothschild would swoop in and buy the consuls, gaining

160

The Global Empire

leverage over Britain in the process. As Mayer Rothschild once said, Permit me to issue and control the money of a nation, and I care not who makes its laws. A November 27th New York Times article states Nathan was in Paris when he learned privately that Napoleon had been defeated at Waterloo, He posted to London in hot haste and arrived at the Stock Exchange next morning, worn, weary and travel stained. At the Stock Exchange, claims the report, the rumor going around was that Wellington had been worsened, which of course would send stocks plummeting. Why the rumor held so such clout could be explained by what Morton writes about whispers that Rothschild knows---Waterloo is lost. This suggests that through such rumors, Rothschild already had control over the sway of the London Stock Exchange. So if he indeed knew that Napoleon had lost at Waterloo, he also knew he could use it to his advantage. The New York Times article states that Rothschild could have stopped the misinformation with a single word announcing Napoleons defeat. The article refers to a book, The Romance of the Rothschilds, written by Everleigh Nash, which also claims Nathan Rothschild knowingly withheld news of Wellingtons victory at the battle of Waterloo to buy up all the consuls (British bonds) they could. Even back then, the Rothschilds had a continental network of their own spies, double-agents (sometimes triple-agents), shippers and couriers transporting information, gold, and other resources across Europe. Their empire has grown steadily since that time. A Global Empire as such is not good for the rest of the world, as the idea is to control the world as they see fit. Well, what if groups like this decide one day they dont want you and me to exist anymore? So in 1912, the Rothschilds tried to get a legal injunction against Nash, which would stop the book from being published. Under the heading, Rothschilds Sue To Suppress Book, the New York Times story explained that the judge dismissed the application for an injunction after hearing the Rothschild lawyers argument. It had been over a 100 years since Waterloo. Whatever the lawyer said, the judge was not swayed. (16) The article adds that the story of Nathan Rothschilds

161

Shadow Government

Waterloo coup can be found in your Encyclopedia Britannica. A German produced play, The Five Frankfurters was also rumored to be nixed by the stroke of the Rothschild family. This was a fictional play that seemed to mirror the Rothschild family. Mayer had five sons and was born in the Judengasse (ghetto) of Frankfurt, Germany in 1744; Mayer was one of eight children. There were hurdles to jump through in getting a license for The Five Frankfurters play, which did very well on opening night at the Lyric Theater in New York, being hailed as a great success. (17 The play was well-received, which left some baffled about its short existence in America. In the records of history, the Waterloo coup, as labeled in the Encyclopedia Britannica, was one more thing the Rothschild family hoped would remain hidden from public scrutiny. When the news of Napoleons defeat finally arrived, Alex Jones narrates in Endgame, stocks soared. Thus the British Empire was now the most powerful empire in the world. The empire moved across the globe. All this was accomplished, financed, by the Rothschild bank of England. How would Britain maintain a global presence without the financial backing of the Rothschilds? The bond between English royalty and Rothschild interests still live on, and in many ways, it has evolved. The financial problems we see today might not exist if the central banking of nations did not exist.
Britain was now the undisputed ruler of Europe and Rothschild ruled England. Alex Jones

Just as the British did while fighting Napoleons French army, when any government borrows money from a creditor, the creditor or banker is given something as collateral. This collateral can come in many forms, including control over government policies; polices that could help or hurt the creditor. As Gary Allen points out, the main advantage that such a creditor would have over a government is that if the ruler gets out of line, the banker can finance his enemy or rival. Therefore, if you want to stay in the lucrative king-financing business, it is wise to have an enemy or rival waiting in the wings to unseat every king or president to whom you lend. If the king doesnt have an enemy,

162

The Global Empire

you must create one. (18) The French revolution brought the Rothschilds unrivaled financial power in the London Stock Exchange and brought global clout once Napoleon was defeated. The British Empire marched on; royalty and global banking strolling hand-in-hand. Thats bloody disgusting.
If you will look back at every war in Europe during the Nineteenth Century, you will see that they always ended with the establishment of a balance of power. With every reshuffling there was a balance of power in a new grouping around the House of Rothschild in England, France, or Austria. They grouped nations so that if any king got out of line a war would break out and the war would be decided by which way the financing went. Professor Stuart Crane (19)

A centralized world government needs a centralized world bank. The Federal Reserve is a good model for the future of a Global Empire. After all it is the New York branch of the Federal Reserve that dictates what happens on Wall Street; and what happens on Wall Street affects the world. The blue prints for the Federal Reserve System were created at Jekyll Island, Georgia, in 1910. An island of the coast of Georgia, it was here that Senator Nelson Aldrich invited some of the worlds most powerful bankers to discuss and help create the final recommendations of the Monetary Commission Report. The commission, chaired by Senator Nelson Aldrich, was created after the Panic of 1907, when the New York Stock Exchange plummeted after a lack of confidence and behind-the-scenes maneuvers manipulated the Stock Market, causing depositors to pull their money out of stocks, which quickly caused the chain of events that ended with the Stock Market panic of 1907. Historian Frederick Lewis Allen said in Life Magazine that certain chroniclers concluded that Morgan interests took advantage of the unsettled conditions during the autumn of 1907 to precipitate the panic, guiding it shrewdly as it progressed so that it would kill off rival banks and consolidate the preeminence of the banks within the Morgan orbit. (20) The bank panic of 1907 set the stage for a central bank, the Federal Reserve. What was decided at Jekyll Island was that a central

163

Shadow Government

banking system was needed to allegedly prevent a panic like the one in 1907 from ever happening again. It is reported that every person who attended the Jekyll Island conference in 1910 agreed that a central bank was needed. Frank Vanderlip, then President of National City Bank, (owned by the Rockefellers) told the Sunday Evening Post in 1934, that at Jekyll Island, the Federal Reserve was created, Near the close of 1910I was as secretiveindeed, as furtiveas any conspiratorI do not feel it is any exaggeration to speak of our secret expedition to Jekyll Island as the occasion of the actual conception of what eventually became the Federal Reserve SystemWe were told to leave our last names behind us. We were told, further, that we should avoid dining together on the night of our departure. We were instructed to come one at a time and as unobtrusively as possible to the railroad terminal on the New Jersey littoral of the Hudson, where Senator Aldrichs private car would be in readiness, attached to the rear end of a train for the South...Once aboard the private car we began to observe the taboo that had been fixed on last names. If they were discovered by the media and the public all our time and effort would be wasted. (21) Why would this group be so secretive about the creation a central government? A central government has been criticized by President Thomas Jefferson, when he said I believe that banking institutions are more dangerous to our liberties than standing armies. If the American people ever allow private banks to control the issue of their currency, first by inflation, then by deflation, the banks and corporations that will grow up around the banks will deprive the people of all property until their children wake-up homeless on the continent their fathers conquered. In a quote from his memoirs Frank Vanderlip again spoke of the secrecy of the Jekyll Island conference of 1910, where they would be discussing central banking system in the United States, in secret. He stated our secret expedition to Jekyll Island was the actual conception of what eventually became the Federal Reserve System. (22) The Monetary Commission Report suggested a central government be created in the name of a regional reserve, with the New York branch at the head of the system. What came from the Monetary Commission Report, created at Jekyll Island, turned into the Aldrich

164

The Global Empire

Bill. With Aldrichs name on the bill, it was doomed to fail. His ties to J.P. Morgan and John D. Rockefeller II would be the end to the Aldrich Bill, for the time being. The bill would return in another form known as the Federal Reserve Act. Years later, Vanderlip would admit that the central government plan created at Jekyll Island was essentially the same as what was signed into law December 22nd, 1913, as the Federal Reserve Act. The Federal Reserve Act passed both the House (298-60) and Senate (43-25) with ease. Following the vote, it was clear that Congressman Charles A. Lindbergh Sr. and other congressmen understood exactly what the Federal Reserve Act would do to the country. It would put the people at the mercy of the Federal Reserve Bank. Lindbergh observed, The new law will create inflation whenever the trusts want inflation. Thats the key point. Its always about control. This is why bog government as a whole is not good for a free and open society, as Jefferson wrote that a government big enough to give you everything you want, is big enough to take away everything you have. The Federal Reserve Act, passed in 1913, continued the decline of America, replacing the constitution, just as the Federal Reserve Bank replaced the United States Congresss power over money supply and interest rates. The bank now controls the economy. They can create chain events that can raise Wall Street up and bring Wall Street crashing down at will. Today, we are at the mercy of the Federal Reserve Bank.
It is incumbent on every generation to pay its own debts as it goes. A principle which if acted on would save one-half the wars of the world. Thomas Jefferson

The very first bank ever in the United States was created during the Revolutionary War against the British Empire, in 1791. Chartered by the U.S. Congress, it was created to handle the finances of the newly created United States. Instantly, there were fears that a central bank would split the nation, perhaps just as some had hoped. Since the southern states saw no need for a central bank, they were suspicious of it. Their suspicions were put to rest when the charter expired in 1811. The United States House of Representatives bill to re-charter the bank

165

Shadow Government

was struck down by one vote, in January 1811. In 1816, President Madison created the Second Bank of the United States, citing war debts from the war with the British in 1812. All this set the precedent for centralized banking from big government. From what Thomas Jefferson read about history convinces me that most bad government results from too much government. We can look at the problems that the creation of the Federal Reserve Act has caused since 1913. The Federal Reserve was supposed to stop a great depression from happening. It did not. It was supposed to keep the country out of debt. It did not. Since the creation of the Constitution of the United States, the piece of paper expected that the United States Treasury would control the issuance of currency. Today, it does not. Today there is a Shadow Government that controls the world through various means. We dont always see this control with our own eyes, but like a cold gush of wind, at times we sure do feel it. The information is not my own. All I can do is share with you the information and hope you take it seriously. I believe we are living in the land of the Global Empire. September 11th was a big part of the agenda to create enough fear that the global arms of the United States military, alongside of powerful banking interests, can stretch further, faster, and under the legality of the international system known as the United Nations. The Military Industrial Complex is here. The only question left is, what are we going to do about it? I dont expect you to agree with me, but I thank you for reading.

166

False Flag Terror Storm

False Flag Terror Storm

Since September, the Eleventh

Bush On 9/11
I was sitting outside the classroom waiting to go in, and I saw an airplane hit the tower the TV was obviously on. And I use to fly, myself, and I said, well, theres one terrible pilot. I said, it must have been a horrible accident. But I was whisked off there, I didnt have much time to think about it. George W. Bush, White House, December 4, 2001

(Steel columns in the center of WTC Towers)

167

False Flags

Today, the United States is in a state of emergency. A state of emergency was declared by our president at that time, George W. Bush. Three days later, the declaration was made official, by putting it in writing. As Washingtons Blog makes perfectly clear in the news article, Yes, America is Still in an Official State of Emergency, yes, America is still in an official state of emergency. Since September 14th, 2001, America has been under an official state of emergency: A national emergency exists by reason of the terrorist attacks at the World Trade Center, New York, New York, and the Pentagon, and the continuing and immediate threat of further attacks on the United States. NOW, THEREFORE, I, GEORGE W. BUSH, President of the United States of America, by virtue of the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States, I hereby declare that the national emergency has existed since September 11, 2001. (1) How many people know that? Washingtons Blog slapped me upside my head with this next sentence, On September 10 2009, President Obama continued the state of emergency. What? Did I read that right? How do they know? Well, Washingtons Blog quotes President Obama, on September 10, 2009 making it very clear that he is continuing the state of emergency.
The terrorist threat that led to the declaration on September 14th, 2001, of a national emergency continues. For this reason, I have determined that it is necessary to continue in effect after September 14, 2009, the national emergency with respect to the terrorist threat. President Obama

No matter what your opinion of President Obama is, this is a fact: the new boss is staying the course of the old boss. As we all know, thats not what he promised in his campaign. Alex Jones told his radio audience, Just the Obama Deception, republicans will watch it because they hate Obama. Then they find out that its really about exposing George Bush as a New World Order puppet and shattering the LeftRight paradigm and showing Obama as a puppet. Its deprogramming people. Praise God this is exciting! I mean no wonder I got the Secret Service and FBI showing up here and I got the Pentagon following me around. Its been declassified in mainstream news that people inside the

168

False Flag Terror Storm

army sent me the secret document. Thats how it ended up being mainstream news; because the people in the army are patriots and dont like having to follow me around all day. Follow me to the grocery store and follow me homewere having an effect. Were engaging the new world order. This is incredible success to have them on my buttwhen theyre on your tail, man that means if you got bogies, that means youre doin a good jobthey killed JFK, they killed Martin Luther King, they killed a lot of other people. The good news is Im nothing near that level. But Ive always tried to make it about the activist, about the listener, about you the Info-warriorsbecause they cant stop us if its an ideaan idea is eternal. Ideas cant be stopped when theyre based on the truth...Kill the messenger but you cant kill the messageideas are bulletproof. (2) On April, 23, 2009, U.S. Rep. Ron Paul spoke at Wake Forest University; which was organized by the Wake Forest Young Americans for Liberty and the Wake Forest College Republicans. If we dont clean up this mess, big government will take away our liberty...The bailout is as bad as the financial bubble. If you look at our political system compared to the founding of this country, you see that back then they had more than two parties. In fact, you could have a president and vice president from two separate parties. Now it has become a standard barrier to have two puppets at both sides of the aisle. Why have we fallen so far in less than 240 years? If we fall down, we are still able to pick ourselves up and try, try again. Terror In Germany Three Germans arrested on suspicion of throwing explosives at an EU office in Kosovo were intelligence officers... Days after Kosovan leadership rejected a U.N. plan, created by U.N. Secretary General Ban Ki-moon, calling for the deployment of 2,000 European Union police and others, someone threw a bomb at an EU office in Kosovo.

169

False Flags

Germany declined to comment on Saturday on reports that three Germans arrested on suspicion of throwing explosives at an EU office in Kosovo were intelligence officersthe explosive charge was thrown on Nov. 14 at the International Civilian Office (ICO), the office of EU Special Representative Pieter Feith, who oversees Kosovos governance. (Reuters) (3) The three German men may belong to the BND (intell-igence officers, perhaps Germanys equivalent of the United States Secret Service). A Kosovoan judge ordered the men be held another 30 days so prosecution lawyers may seek terrorism charges, which could carry a maximum of 20 years in prison. The 3 men were not on official business in Kosovo. So what were they doing there? Did they go rogue? Or were they ordered to throw the explosive material at the EU office?
The alleged presence of covert intelligence operatives has led to a deterioration in the cordial relations between Germany and the newly independent Kosovo. The German foreign ministry confirmed that 3 German citizens had been detained in Kosovo. The BND had no comment. The European Voice (4)

The German secret service, the BND, has allegedly infiltrated extremist groups and has used them for their own political means. If this is the case, then it is but one more example of false flag terror. Its either that or three lone gunmen. Since at least the days of Hitler, Germany has known about false flag terror. February 27th, 1933 someone set fire to the German Parliament (Reichstag fire) three days prior to Germanys federal election. This caused outrage among German citizens. This was the pretext the Nazis needed in order to silence their opposition. This is what a false flag operation does. You start the fire, then blame your enemies and get the people to back you against the ones you blamed. As Alex Joness Jones Report of 2006 states: Historians later documented that the fire had been authorized by right-wing Nazis, where Hitler used the event to declare a state of emergency and pressured the German President, Hindenburg, to sign a decree abolishing most of the human rights provisions of the

170

False Flag Terror Storm

Constitution. Recently, on August 29th 2006, Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld recounted what he called the lessons of history, including the failed efforts to appease the right-wing Adolf Hitler regime of the 1930s. I recount this history because once again we face the same kind of challenges in efforts to confront the rising threat of a new type of fascism, said Rumsfeld. (5) As a senior media critic, Barry Zwicker strongly recommends that all media people indeed follow Rumsfelds suggestions in learning the lessons of Nazi history. He points to researching Hitlers rise to power and how he created a fascist state where there was suppression of the opposition through secrecy, terror, torture and censorship, all justified under nationalism and patriotism. He also believes that journalists should research and publish more about how Hitlers Nazis manipulated the German population into wars, using psychological manipulation and behavior modification by inducing trauma and fear in others, a process of trauma-based mind control referred to in the now declassified CIA files of MK ULTRA. (6) Zwicker believes that the media must investigate and report on whether these fear-based psychological manipulation techniques have been or are being put into application by US leaders in our post 9/11 world, as they appear to be. 9/11 caused much trauma and fear. Revelations about a shadowy right-wing group called Ergenekon participating with Turkish military and intelligence elements in false flag terrorist attacks in order to bring down the Turkish government are nothing new and are, in fact, a normal tactic used by intelligence services. However, the term false flag has been irresponsibly relegated to the arena of conspiracy theories by a corporate media answering to their own hidden agendas. Wayne Madsen (7) Walking up the escalator at the Clorox building in Oakland was the first time I even considered that bombs may have been in the World Trade Center buildings. I was doing my rounds as a security guard, walking through the City Center in the downtown area. I was listening

171

False Flags

to the Mike Malloy Show when a caller asked about bombs in the buildings, mentioned a movie called Loose Change and listened as Mike Malloy casually agreed with the caller. This was in 2003 or 2004. I asked myself, What do I know about 9/11/2001? My answer was, Only what I was told by the newspapers and cable news. When the approval and popularity of the Iraq War was at an all time low, more strange quest-ions were being asked. From the 16 words of George Bush, to the truth told by Joseph Wilson that Saddam Hussein did not have weapons of mass destruction, the lies became even more questionable. The truth seemed so far away. It would take research and a lot of critical thinking for me to try to begin to understand what was happening in my country and why. Ever since that cold night at the City Center, I have been asking the same questions. Is it possible that people within our own government could have secretly pulled off 9/11 as an inside job? Every day I ask myself this question. If it is true, as I believe, then it opens up more questions about false flag terror in this country. When I wiped the grease from my glasses I began to see that false flag terror, government sponsored terror against their own people could have been happening since well before I was born. Some evidence can be found in our own history books at high school. I encourage all young people to look into this, as I am, and continue to do. This is not about the new world order vs. Alex Jones. Its not the government vs. Greg Fernandez Jr. either. This is about revealing the truth, exposing the lies and allowing people to make their own decisions based on evidence, facts and peaceful, healthy debates. We cannot accept the official story of 9/11 any more than we should take it at face value when our parents tell us Santa Claus exists. We have to see it and discover it for ourselves. That means we have to be given the choice to do so, not a false choice, as in two candidates who are owned by the same system (global government, banksters). Knowledge of false flag terror will help expose those who wish to use this tool as well as those who might see it as an option in the future. False flag terror is treason. Anyone caught should be tried and punished.

172

False Flag Terror Storm

Mumbai, India Attacks Dawood Ibrahim may have had something to do with the Mumbai, India attack. He may be the underworld head of the organization known as D-Company. Its been reported he has ties to ISI, Pakistans Inter-Services Intelligence; as well as the CIA. He was also, reportedly, initially characterized as the brains behind the attacks. The surviving terrorist to be captured alive in the Mumbai attacks, Azam Amir Kasab, may have originally said that Dawood Ibrahim was the mastermind, then recanted it and said that Zakiur Rehman Lakhvi was the mastermind. An intercepted call to Yusuf Muzammil (also known as Abu Yusuf, Abu Hurrera) on November 18th put the Indian Navy and the Coast Guard on high alert. Kasab told interrogators that the terrorist came from Karachi, Pakistan on a ship called the MV Alpha. This ship may belong to Dawood Ibrahim. Then the terrorists hijacked the Kuber, an Indian fishing boat, to pass through Indian territorial waters in order to do mass harm in Mumbai. (8) Posse Comitatus Section 1385 of the Posse Comitatus Act states, Whoever, except in cases and under circumstances expressly authorized by the Constitution or Act of Congress, willfully uses any part of the Army or the Air Force as a Posse Comitatus or otherwise to execute the laws shall be fined under this title or imprisoned not more than two years, or both. United States soldiers will be training in the USA? According to Steve Watson and Paul Watson of Infowars.net, [Ret.] Lt. Col. Nathan Freir, a Senior Fellow in the International Security Program at the Center for Strategic and International Studies...joined the think tank in April 2008 after retiring from the U.S. Army after 20 years as a lieutenant colonel. In his role at CSIS he rubs shoulders with a whole host of globalist luminaries including Zbigniew Brzezinski, Henry Kissinger, Brent Scowcroft and Richard Armitage.

173

False Flags

Lt. Col. Freir then writes that, Widespread civil violence inside the United States would force the defense establishment to reorient priorities in extremis to defend basic domestic order and human security...Deliberate employment of weapons of mass destruction or other catastrophic capabilities, unforeseen economic collapse, loss of functioning political and legal order, purposeful domestic resistance or insurgency, pervasive public health emergencies, and catastrophic natural and human disasters are all paths to disruptive domestic shock...[the Department of Defense] might be forced by circumstances to put its broad resources at the disposal of civil authorities to contain and reverse violent threats to domestic tranquility. Under the most extreme circumstances, this might include use of military force against hostile groups inside the United States. This is startling to say the least. How can this be happening right here in America? Beyond that, the CHP (California Highway Patrol) was doing checkpoints in California with the help of U.S. Military soldiers, though they declined to tell where these checkpoints would be at. The more important question is why any city or state in the USA (who respects the constitution) would allow this illegal action. There is a reason why military and police should remain separate. It takes the movement of a mass population to bring about change. We dont need to overthrow our government, its already been overthrown by the shadow elite. What we need to do is restore the constitution, then work hard to ensure that it stays that way. We dont need mavericks or patriots. In the USA we just need people who will abide by the constitution, not necessarily by the peoples in government. We should only vote for those who respect and honor the constitution. Then we get back to the politicians chasing our vote, instead of us chasing the lesser evil. My So-Called Diary It is two hours until January 20th, 2009, when Barack Obama will be sworn in as the new President of the United States. As I write

174

False Flag Terror Storm

this, I am wondering what the next four years will be like. It cant be any worse than the last eight years right? But then again what can? And just because it cant be any worse doesnt excuse any wrongful actions this new president may do. We need to hold our elected officials responsible for their actions. That goes for past and present presidents. The movement for voting third party seems to increase every year. Almost two million votes in 2008 went to third party candidates. I am looking forward to 2012, especially if Jesse Ventura throws his hat into the ring. I wont hold my breath but if he did, it would be a real threat to the elite establishment, who I believe are running the country into the ground. Im not sure where I stand on Obama. I want him to pull the troops out and get rid of the 14 permanent bases that are in Iraq. I understand these permanent bases are like small cities. It has been speculated that even if and when Obama pulls our troops out, he wont pull all of them out. It will mostly likely be a draw-down of troops, gradually, and then it will disappear from the news media. If something were to happen to one of those bases, say a major terrorist attack, it would be enough reason to station more troops back into Iraq. Our troops will be like bait on a hook for anyone who wishes to keep us in Iraq and for those who wish to do us harm. That is just one scenario and I hope I am wrong. Whatever happens, it is up to the people to be the last check and balance of the government, because in the end, as it was intended to be, we the people are the government. The country is in serious trouble. If we as a nation do not come together and start supporting each other through economic and political means, we will all suffer the consequences together. If any person hates this country, they may set out destroy it in secret. Using the art of deception, false flag operations are often a desired tool to get what they want. We must stand up against all forms of tyranny, speak out against oppression and support small businesses in order to generate money to the states. Thus, we move towards a healthy economy. Cheap foreign labor and weak product materials will only hurt the economy. If we cant take care of ourselves, how can we help other countries in need?

175

False Flags

Zbigniew Brzezinski was Jimmy Carters presidential adviser. He actually set up the Mujahideen with their so-called freedom fighters six weeks before the Russian even invaded them; and thats where Osama bin Laden came from. The Mujahideen, the Taliban; and you could say he basically set up Osama bin Laden. Luke Rudkowski

Zbigniew Brzezinski was recently an adviser to Barack Obama during his 2008 presidential campaign. As I watched the beginning of the inauguration of the 44th President of the United States, in front of maybe 2 million people, I wondered what Barack Obama must have been feeling. Before he made his entrance to the ceremony, the 43rd President was introduced to a flurry of boos from the crowd. Though one commentator thought the boos inappropriate, I myself found it very appropriate and very fitting to show this president that he may have thought he was a good president, but there are a lot of people who disagree; and with good reason too. If certain commentators want to be fake and just move forward, thats their prerogative. For me, I see the only way we will truly move forward is when we deal with the past and hold certain people accountable for the last horrible eight years. The personal trauma I have felt is minimal to other Americans, Afghans, Iraqis and others inside and outside of this country. From false flag injustice to secret wire-taps, we have felt the breath of Big Brother breathing down the back of our necks. We begin a new presidential reign today. I hope for the sake of this country that the freedoms that were taken away from us in the last eight years will be given back to us by the new president. (Get rid of the unconstitutional Patriot Act.) If not, then we must fight to get back those rights, through peaceful means (as I always suggest). The rights given to the American people in the constitution cannot be taken away by anyone, unless we should be taken over by a dictator. Once a dictator is in place, and we see this as a violation of the constitution, we must move to impeach this person. Since this is where we failed with Bush, I fear we will fail even more so with Obama. If we cant hold Bush responsible, with the lowest presidential approval rating in history, how are we going to hold Obama responsible, should he continue Bushs violations of the constitution or infringe on the rights of the people?

176

False Flag Terror Storm

The precedent has been set by Bush. The office of the president today is not what it once was, and has been used to usurp the checks and balances of the other two branches of government (the judicial and legislative branches). This was never intended by the founding fathers and is not representative of the America I know and love.

Alex Jones (photograph by David Burrows)

The real truth of the matter is, as you and I know, that a financial element in the larger centers has owned the government ever since the days of Andrew Jackson. President Franklin D. Roosevelt (written to Colonel House, November 21st, l933)

177

False Flags

RON PAUL: THE AUDIT We dont have the Audit bill. Alex Jones interviewed Congressman Ron Paul on July 1st, 2010. Congressman Ron Paul, 20 something years ago in congress, he couldnt get one co-sponsor...the House votes by two thirds to pass your bill to truly audit the quasi-governmental banking holding company, Federal Reserve, that took over in 1913...which is the right thing to do, but it never passed the Senate properly. And then now, [the House of Representatives are] back, giving the Federal Reserve even more power, outside of government and congress to regulate themselves. Tell us about your new amendment, Alex says to Paul. Well, it tells you about the hypocrisy of this whole place and how it works and how powerful the Fed is. Youre right, we passed it in the Financial Services committee, the Audit the Fed bill...then it came to the House floor and they kept it in...so the House floor supported it. We have 324 co-sponsors. Then it goes to the conference with the Senate and they drop it. They put some things in there to look less bad, which are slightly helpful. But they get rid of the true audit. So when the bill comes back to the House, guess what? We dont have the Audit bill provision in there. So I was able to offer an amendment which was a re-commitment amendment to send it back to committee and put back in the true audit. And we had an up and down vote on that and we lost it, by a significant amount. 324 co-sponsors and we lost it. 114 people who were co-sponsors of this bill switched and voted against the bill that they were co-sponsors of. Now theyve got the Feds sicked on Campaign for Liberty and every other organization so that you cant tell the public that they flipflopped, says Alex Jones.

178

World Wide Caution

World Wide Caution

Once Osama bin Laden was pronounced dead to the world the U.S. Department of State issued a world-wide caution alert to all United States citizens. Due to the alleged death of Osama bin Laden, U.S. government facilities worldwide remain at a heightened state of alert. (1) Just as real terrorists would hope for. (1) Fear is a real tactic used by real terrorists. The question is who are the real terrorists? America was already on a heightened state of alert before announcing bin Ladens death. Now that Osama is gone, we are told the threat of terrorism has increased. Some would call that terrorism. Through fear, the government is trying to maintain their own conspiracy theory about September 11th. It was July 26th, 2011 that the State Department issued a global warning that U.S. citizens should maintain a high level of vigilance and to take appropriate steps to increase their security awareness. With September 11th right around the corner, the message is meant to reinforce the fictitious danger we face from al-Qaeda and affiliated groups. Who created al-Qaeda? Who trained al-Qaeda? The answer is the United States. This reminder will also keep some from considering an alternative theory about what happened on September 11th, 2001. In short, the message to the world from our government is to be afraid, be very afraid. The Department of State believes there is an enhanced potential for anti-American violence given the death of Osama Bin Laden in May 2011. Current information suggests that Al-Qaida and affiliated organizations continue to plan terrorist attacks against U.S. interests in multiple regions, including Europe, Asia, Africa, and the Middle East...Extremists may elect to use conventional or nonconventional weapons, and target both official and private interests.

179

False Flags

There is a strong connection between official and private interests. Yet the terrorists potential targets range from residential areas such as your own home or your church, high-profile sporting events, places of business, restaurants, hotels, clubs, and other tourist destinations both in the United States and abroad where U.S. citizens gather in large numbers, including during holidays. That about covers everywhere, inside and outside the United States, and anywhere any American citizen travels. So what do they base this new enhanced potential for anti-American violence on? Like the death of bin Laden, we are reminded to trust the government and take them at their word. I would assume that this current and credible information came about from the Abbottabad, Pakistan raid, where Osama bin Laden allegedly died in a firefight with U.S. forces. Current information suggests that Al-Qaida and affiliated organizations continue to plan terrorist attacks against U.S. and Western interests in Europe...Credible information indicates terrorist groups also seek to continue attacks against U.S. interests in the Middle East and North Africa. The potential for terrorists to attack public transportation systems and other tourist infrastructure is a fear tactic used to scare people into giving up more rights, specifically when on any and all public transportation systems. What TSA is doing at airports will be done with all transportation systems if we dont demonstrate, speak our mind, make our opinions heard, and resist through civil disobedience. We are warned not to participate in demonstrations abroad. I wonder how long it will take for this threat abroad to become a threat inside the United States. In some cases, and rapidly expanding, it is becoming more and more difficult to peacefully demonstrate inside the United States. One only needs to research free-speech zones to understand how demonstrations in general are frowned upon, and seen as a threat to the establishment. We the people are the threat to those who are trying to control the world. U.S. citizens are warned that demonstrations intended to be peaceful can escalate into violent clashes. U.S. citizens are reminded that demonstrations and riots can occur with little or no

180

World Wide Caution

warning. U.S. citizens are urged to avoid areas of demonstrations if possible and to exercise caution if within the vicinity of a demonstration. To put it into proper context, the State Department is referring to threats abroad, for now. The events of the last few months in many countries in the Middle East, including Egypt, Libya, Yemen, Bahrain, and Syria, have resulted in civil unrest and large-scale protests and demonstrations. Subconsciously one might read that and think Yes, this warning is for traveling, but what if theres civil unrest in America? This may cause some people to avoid or condemn demonstrations at home too. When the voice of the people is silenced, only the government speaks. It is strange that in a message about threats world-wide we are strongly encouraged to maintain a high level of vigilance, be aware of local events, and take the appropriate steps to bolster their personal security. Local events dont happen overseas...this warning is for home and abroad. So hows that Iraq war going? Have we made it safer for those over there so we dont have to fight terrorists over here? Iraq remains dangerous and unpredictable. Attacks against military and civilian targets throughout Iraq continue. Methods of attack have included roadside improvised explosive devices, mortars, and shootings; kidnappings still occur as well. Wasnt this happening right after we occupied the country? Has the United States made anything in this world safer? Continue to make your voice heard. Public demonstrations are working, or there would be no need for the tyrannical government to spread propaganda against peaceful demonstrations. The department warns of the civil unrest in Libya while the Obama administration is arming those who have allegedly spontaneously created civil unrest against the Libyan dictator.

181

False Flags

Congress vs. TSA

We will have spent nearly 500 million dollars on AIT machines (Advanced Imaging Technology)...by the time we get to the year 2013...were also concerned that these AIT machines, or whole body imaging machines, wouldve not found some of the weapons that were attempted to be used on December, in the December 2009 [Underwear bomber] incident, and the list goes on. TSA has spent millions and millions of dollars on technology that has not worked. Remember the 207 puffer machines, after spending 30 million dollars and having those deployed, those were put back on the shelf...a lot of what we have been participating [in] here, my personal opinion, has been security theater, and has not truly done the job to secure airports to the degree that we need to. Rep. Jason Chaffetz (July 13th)

TSA charged Congressional Representative Jason Chaffetz (RUtah) with violating federal law by informing the media and the public of the 25,000 security breaches made by TSA over the last ten years. In a July 20th, 2011 letter to the congressman, Department of Homeland Security Deputy Counsel Joseph B. Maher wrote that sensitive security information, given to Chaffetzs subcommittee which disclosed to the press the 25,000 TSA violations, provided clear notice that unauthorized disclosures of the document violated federal law. Representative Chaffetz is listed as the chairman of the subcommittee on National Security, Homeland Defense and Foreign Operations. That subcommittee is part of the committee on Government & Oversight Reform. (2) The problem with DHSs claim of federal law violation in the disclosure is repeated by Rep. Darrell Issa (R-CA), who chairs the House Oversight Committee. He responded by directly sending correspondence to DHS Secretary Janet Napolitano. In his letter Issa told Napolitano that aside from the accusation against Rep. Chaffetz being meritless, he reminded the secretary that information revealed to the media was non-classified. Mr. Issa added that the accusation against Chaffetz was a threat to the entire legislative branch that this administration will seek retribution when non-classified information is shared with the public. Congressmen generally dont appreciate being

182

World Wide Caution

threatened. This is especially true since its the job of congress to inform the public about TSA deficiencies. Before telling Napolitano that he would open his own investigation into how and why the DHS charged a congressman with such a federal violation, he wrote that the fact that the information in question was transmitted to the committee via an open e-mail over an open and non-secured network only underscores that this was not national security sensitive information. The TSA should practice what they preach. After all, TSA has also been found guilty of violating federal law; so said a 3-judge panel for the D.C. Circuit Court of Appeals, on July 15th. Even so, this ruling hasnt stopped TSA from continuing to radiate people. Steve Watson writes that TSA violated federal law when they approved the use of body-scanners without debate. His July 15th, 2011 story explains the TSAs actions violated the Administrative Procedure Act, which requires federal agencies to provide notice and opportunity for comment when implementing a rule that affects the rights of the public. (3) Still this same panel decided since we are not persuaded by any of the statutory or constitutional arguments, the scanners did not violate the Fourth Amendment of the Constitution, which demands that The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures, shall not be violated, and no Warrants shall issue, but upon probable cause, supported by Oath or affirmation, and particularly describing the place to be searched, and the persons or things to be seized. I dont feel secure at airports due to TSA groping. Do you? Are you ready to stand in line and helplessly watch your loved ones be groped by TSA agents? Who watches the watchers? The American people do. Its our responsibility to point out abuses and acts of tyranny the presumption that everyone who enters an airport run by TSA is guilty until proven innocent. They decide who the criminals are, even though theyre not sufficiently trained to do so. Still theyre given more rights to search than police officers. Just wait until TSA has the power to arrest and prosecute us too! All this because of 9/11. All this because of lies.

183

False Flags

Who Are You Working For? An April 20th, 2011 article raised a few eye-brows when Washington Times reported even though there was possible links between al-Qaeda and Libyan rebels, the Obama administration has notified Congress it is providing $25 million in nonlethal aid to the rebels effort to drive Col. Moammar Gadhafis regime from power. (4) In a letter from the White House to the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, the non-lethal aid was described as ambulances, fuel trucks and other vehicles, medical equipment, binoculars, protective vests, and non-secure radios. As the letter went out, Britain said they would send military advisers to help the rebels. Under the guise of protecting deliveries of humanitarian aid, the European Union decided to send an armed force into Libya. At this point, many say its just a matter of time before Obama sends in grounds troops into Libya. Of course, the Obama administration is probably hoping that their CIA boys on the ground can get the job done of overthrowing Gadhafi without that happening. The bigger question is Do U.S. jets bombing the crap out of Libya equal US military intervention? Yes. It may not be boots on the ground, but it sure is boots in the air; and what goes up must come down. As Bush did with Saddam Hussein, Obama demanded Gadhafi, who was brought to power by the help of the US, step down as the leader of Libya. Here is the international police force in action even though technically, one does not exist. Of course, before there was the CIA, there was the CIA it was just called the OSS. Today, what we once called military action is now kinetic military action. This is an information war and he who controls the information, controls the war. In late February, al-Qaeda in North Africa offered to help the Libyan rebels fight against Gadhafi. Its said the terrorist group speaks favorably of the sudden uprisings of Egypt, Algeria and Tunisia. Even though Gadhafi is blaming al-Qaeda for his problems, this has not slowed the Obama administration in working with the rebels on the ground. Before any type of military intervention its important for the United States to know who theyre

184

World Wide Caution

working with as well as who is working against us. Is the CIA is already on the ground in Libya, illegally manipulating the situation to their advantage, just as we have accused al-Qaeda of doing? (5) On March 28th, 2011, President Obama said he would not send troops into Libya. I guess air-strikes and enforcement of the no-fly zone will not be conducted by US military pilots? Of course it will. This is just another lie. While the president still downplays any possibility of boots on the ground, he did order warships into the Mediterranean Sea. Obama also said we took a series of swift steps in a matter of days to answer Gadhafis aggression. We froze more than $33 billion of Gadhafis regimes assets. Joining with other nations at the United Nations Security Council, we broadened our sanctions, imposed an arms embargo, and enabled Gadhafi and those around him to be held accountable for their crimes. I made it clear that Gadhafi had lost the confidence of his people and the legitimacy to lead, and I said that he needed to step down from power...The Libyan opposition and the Arab League appealed to the world to save lives in Libya. And so at my direction, America led an effort with our allies at the United Nations Security Council to pass a historic resolution that authorized a no-fly zone to stop the regimes attacks from the air, and further authorized all necessary measures to protect the Libyan people. All necessary measures is a vague term in this case. What is not necessary today could be necessary tomorrow. Hence, while we do not have a large military presence in Libya now, tomorrow circumstances may arise to where we will. To be clearer, Obama has said there will be no ground forces in Libya. So air forces are just fine without congressional approval. If need be, will ground forces get the green-light to go into Libya, without congressional approval as well? Sure looks like it. So his March 21st speech was filled with all the evil acts Gadhafi has done, and how oppressive he is towards his people, never acknowledging the long history America had with Gadhafi personally, or the private business relations we have in Libya, or the oil thats there. I said that Americas role would be limited; that we would not put ground troops into Libya; that we would focus our unique capabilities on the front end of the operation and that we would transfer

185

False Flags

responsibility to our allies and partners. Tonight, we are fulfilling that pledge. This president has changed the definition of military intervention, but he couldnt have gotten away with it so easily had he gone through congress for approval. Our most effective alliance, NATO, has taken command of the enforcement of the arms embargo and the no-fly zone. Last night, NATO decided to take on the additional responsibility of protecting Libyan civilians. This transfer from the United States to NATO will take place on Wednesday. This would imply that up until this point, the United States was responsible for protecting Libyan civilians. That would be a complete violation of the Constitution and the War Powers Act, as so many have pointed out. Its hard to believe he did the right thing, but went about it in the wrong way. Obama is a constitutional lawyer; an honest person should know better. Going forward, the lead in enforcing the no-fly zone and protecting civilians on the ground will transition to our allies and partners, and I am fully confident that our coalition will keep the pressure on Gadhafis remaining forces. In that effort, the United States will play a supporting role - including intelligence, logistical support, search and rescue assistance, and capabilities to jam regime communications. Because of this transition to a broader, NATO-based coalition, the risk and cost of this operation - to our military and to American taxpayers - will be reduced significantly. (6) Noman Benotman, in 2000, broke all ties with al-Qaeda. He believes theres 1,000 jihadists in Libya at this point. NATO commander Admiral James Stavridis said that so far, theres no detail sufficient to say that theres a significant al-Qaeda presence in Libya. Now check his words, he does not dispute the claim of al-Qaeda working with rebels and possibly CIA operatives in Libya, he only says theres no significant presence. Washington Times reported that Outside observers generally estimate the number of trained Libyan fighters to be about 1,000. That would fit nicely with Noman Benotmans assessment of 1,000 freelance jihadists who may be in Libya. Washington Times also added, Last week, Libyan rebel leader Abdel-Hakim al-Hasidi told the Italian newspaper Il Sole 24 Ore that he had recruited 25 Islamic fighters in

186

World Wide Caution

Dernaa and gave his view that al-Qaeda members were good Muslims. And this is the leadership we are supporting? This would only make sense if al-Qaeda had ties to the United States. Some evidence suggests that the US created al-Qaeda, calling al-Qaeda nothing more than a database. The confusion has only forced NATO and its allies to step up the overthrow of Gadhafi before anyone realizes who the real friends and allies are. The National Transitional Council is supposed to be the future of Libya, once Gadhafi is gone. There seems to be confusion about whether they are pro-democratic, but one defense official told the Washington Times that the opposition to Gadhafi does include Islamists with pro-terrorism views who are masking their true intentions. Other critics of the NTC have questions about some of the members. So remember...

...and thats giving him the benefit of the doubt.

187

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

OSAMA BIN LADEN IS DEAD

Our government has told us Osama bin Laden is dead...no, theres no proof. We are expected to simply trust the United States Governments claim that Osama bin Laden is dead. They may have lied about September 11th, Weapons of Mass Destruction in Iraq, and the connection between al-Qaeda and Saddam Hussein, but on the bin Laden issue, we should simply trust their story; a story with no physical evidence given to tax-paying Americans. All we have is the word of our president and our responsibility to be informed. A responsible republic has an obligation to question the government in an intelligent and meaningful way. So when the story of our government changes, or theyre caught in lies, it is up to the common folk reveal the truth, based on facts. Our president can get on a podium in his nice suit and tell the nation anything he wants, but it doesnt make it true. If the president believes the American people will trust him to tell the truth, then Obama can take to the stage and tell us all Osama bin Laden is dead, without providing any physical evidence. The U.S. Constitution itself is an anti-government warning, to protect against a tyrannical government, not to concede to it. Whats the point of having a constitution if we dont follow it? When people are mocked for questioning the president about the alleged death of Osama bin Laden, we either stand up against this mockery with truth, or succumb to it with a guilty conscience. Lets think about this, if President Bush had said this to America, would we trust that he was telling the truth? Some would argue that Bush has been caught lying to the American public, whereas Obama has not. Without examining details of this assumption, at first glance they would appear to be correct. Yet when the facts of what Obama has done since becoming president do not live up to his promises before he was president, do we dare call him a liar too?

188

But When, Where, And How?

Weve got a philosophical difference which weve debated repeatedly, and that is that Senator Clinton believes the only way to achieve universal health care is to force everybody to purchase it, and my belief is the reason that people dont have it is not because they dont want it, but because they cant afford it. Barack Obama (Feb. 2008) (1)

Lets not forget Obamas promise to bring the troops home. This is the same man who told Chicago radio broadcaster and journalist, Roland Martin, in early 2008, We will call in the Joint Chiefs of Staff. I will give them a new assignment and that is to bring our troops home in a careful, responsible way, but to end this occupation in Iraq. I will call in my Secretary of State and initiate the diplomacy thats needed to make sure that exit is accompanied by negotiations between the Shiites, Sunnis and Kurds. Even before that, on June 22nd, 2007 on the campaign trail in New Hampshire, the future president made more campaign promises. When there is a bill that ends up on my desk as the president, you the public will have five days to look on-line and find out whats in it before I sign it. We could go on and on with Mr. Obamas promises, "When there is a bill that ends up on my desk as the president, you the public will have five days to look online and find out what's in it before I sign it. World Net Daily then reported, Obama signed his first bill, the Lilly Ledbetter Fair Pay Restoration Act, on Jan. 20 only two days after its passage. He signed a second bill expanding the State Childrens Health Insurance Program just three hours after Congress passed it. Again, on Feb. 17, Obama signed his 1,000-page $787 billion stimulus aimed at jolting the declining U.S. economy. He did so only one business day after it passed through Congress without allowing for five days of public comment. (2) Lying to the American people before he gets in office is nothing new for a President of the United States. How long have Americans been conditioned to accept that all politicians lie to get into office? Is it normal behavior? Is it acceptable behavior as well? If theres no punishment by the American people for lies like this, why should candidates stop? Those were campaign promises, yes. Yet, even after he was in office didnt he continue to lie to the public?

189

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

Lets look at the Obama Healthcare bill that was bullied into legislation. It was not announced that this would be forced health care insurance, with penalties for those who could not afford it and did not qualify for wavers.
I will not sign a plan that adds one dime to our deficits-either now or in the future. President Obama (speech to a joint session of Congress, September 9, 2009) (3)

By May 2010, the Congressional Budget Office (CBO) revealed that federal discretionary spending would increase by 115 billion as a result of the new health care insurance law. That would add 115 billion to the growing deficit. More so, despite the Presidents promise in 2009 For us to say that youve got to take a responsibility to get health insurance is absolutely not a tax increase, it turns out it is a tax increase, according to the United States Senate Republican Policy Committee. (4) Questions arose about the constitutionality of the responsibility to get health care insurance. The Obama Administration recently filed a brief justifying the mandate on the grounds that it is in fact a tax increase. So the Obama administration admits his healthcare bill will mean a tax increase. The report then adds that the mandate will raise tax revenues, speculating that the tax increases will be a large one. Paul Watson wrote on February 9th, 2011, The penalty Americans would face for refusing to pay fines imposed as a result of mandatory health care was made clear when Joint Committee on Taxation Chief of Staff Tom Barthold confirmed to Sen. John Ensign (R-Nev.) that those who refused to pay the $1,900 fee for not buying health insurance could be charged with a misdemeanor and could face up to a year in jail or a $25,000 penalty. (5) So again, Obama was correct when he said that my belief is the reason that people dont have [health care] is not because they dont want it, but because they cant afford it. So much for standing up for what you believe in. This is just one more piece of stone chipped away from the golden image of Barack Obama. By itself, it seems minuscule, but taken as a whole, this image is slowly chipped away, until theres nothing but dust left.

190

But When, Where, And How?

Bin Laden Is Dead... But When?

May 2, 2011 Paul Craig Roberts wonders if this is an April Fools joke that came one month late. No body, no video, no pictures given to the citizens of America. Yet when Saddam was hanged, it was on every media outlet available. Certainly something stinks here. Roberts states this has the odor of a staged event. The smell reeks. The day after bin Laden was killed, John Brennan (Chief Counter-Terrorism Adviser to U.S. President Barack Obama) was at the first press conference to answer questions about the operation. The first question asked of him was about the specific goal of the raid. Did the US Government target him for death, or would they try and take him alive if they could? Absolutely, Brennon said during the press conference on May 2nd. It was to prepare for all contingencies. If we had the opportunity to take bin Laden alive, if he didnt present any threat, the individuals involved were able and prepared to do that. We had discussed that extensively at a number of meetings in the White House and with the president. The concern was that bin Laden would oppose any type of capture operation. Indeed he did. It was a firefight. He, therefore, was killed in that firefight, and thats when the remains were removed. But we certainly were planning for the possibility [of taking bin Laden alive], which we thought was going to be remote, given that he would likely resist arrest, but that we would be able to capture him. Paul Roberts points out that President Obama is in desperate need of a victory. He committed the fools error of restarting the war in Afghanistan, and now after a decade of fighting the US faces stalemate, if not defeat. The wars of the Bush/Obama regimes have bankrupted the US, leaving huge deficits and a declining dollar in their wake. And re-

191

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

election time is approaching. (6) What was it like in the situation room? Chief counter-terrorism advisor Brennan explained, When the operation did get underway, then the president rejoined the group and we were able to monitor in a real-time basis the progress of the operation from its commencement, to its time on target, to the extraction of the remains, and to the then the egress off of the target. It was probably one of the most anxiety-filled periods of time, I think, in the lives of the people who were assembled here yesterday. Minutes passed like days and the president was very concerned about the security of our personnel...it was clearly very tense. Was this before or after the real time-feed cut out on them? There was a fair degree of silence as it progressed, as we would get the updates. Updates? I thought you were watching it in real time. Maybe to Mr. Brennan watching in real time is getting updates, and when we finally were informed that those individuals who were able to go in that compound and found an individual that they believed was bin Laden there was a tremendous sigh of relief that what we believed and who we believed was in that compound actually was in that compound and was found, and the president was relieved once we had our people and those remains off target. Brennan said believe three times in one sentence. What proof is there that the man they shot and killed was actually Osama bin Laden? Where is the evidence, where is the body? The body was dumped out in the sea somewhere. With physical evidence removed, all we have to go on now is the Presidents word. Based on the lies he had already told us, his credibility in the matter is not very high. Brennan refused to go into details about what they were able to see in real time as opposed to being fed updates, but specified that it gave us the ability to actually track it on an on-going basis. But when the live-feed fails, as Leon Panetta states later, all they would be left with were updates and the trust and belief that Osama was dead, because someone told them so. Panetta explained that there were about twenty five minutes where the live-feed cut out, and nobody knew what was happening on the ground in Abbottabad, Pakistan. Its possible everyone in the control room was duped, or played along with the

192

But When, Where, And How?

storyline. I say these things are possible because theyre provable. Whatever the truth is, it will be revealed in time. For now we are left with the official line...
He was engaged and he was killed in the process, but if we had the opportunity to take him alive we would have done that. - John Brennan (May 2, 2011)

Mr. Brennans statement will later turn out to be false, and no one will be held accountable. He then makes a curious statement that has me wondering how much Pakistan knew about the Abbottabad raid, and I think he confirms that U.S. military jets were indeed a part of the operation, At that time the Pakistanis were reacting to an incident that they knew was taking place in Abbottabad. Therefore they were scrambling some of their assets. Clearly we were concerned that if the Pakistanis decided to scramble jets or whatever else, they didnt know who were on those jets. They had no idea about who might have been on there, whether it be US or somebody else. More than likely certain factions of Pakistan Intelligence did know about the operation, while other factions were left in the dark. Would Pakistani airspace see these jets or are they stealth too? So we were watching and making sure that the, our people and our aircraft were able to get out of Pakistani airspace and thankfully there was no engagement with Pakistani forces. Brennan went on to say that the last time that we had actionable, and [what] we thought was very credible, information about where Osama bin Laden was located, was in Tora Bora. Yet we all know how that incident turned out. In the mountains of Tora Bora, Osama bin Laden was cornered by U.S. forces. There is evidence that suggests Osama was allowed to flee the mountain region, and that U.S. forces were ordered to not pursue him. If true, its the smoking gun that proves Osama bin Laden was an asset for the United States, particularly under the wing of elements within the CIA. The truth will one day be revealed. For now, for the government, their proof relies on our trust.

193

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

Bin Laden Shield Farce

All eyes were on Mr. Brennan on May 2nd. As we will see, as the days pass, and the story changes, less and less people will be paying attention to the changing narrative of the official story about the death of Osama bin Laden. Here is bin Laden...living in this million dollarplus compoundhiding behind women, who were put in front of him as a shield. I think it really just speaks to just how false the narrative has been over the years. The same could be said of your narrative Mr. Brennan. Psychological Perpetrators On Tuesday, May 4th, the Wall Street Journal reported that a resident in Abbottabad, Pakistan, said American and Pakistani commandos landed in the area at 1:10 a.m., local time, and raided a house. A half hour of explosions and fighting ensued. Asked if bin Laden may have been living in the house under the protection of the ISI, former director of its Osama bin Laden unit Micheal Scheuer told Wall Street Journal.com its a given. Certainly he says, at least part of the ISI or Pakistani military were harboring bin Laden. (7) Just two days earlier, Obama told the nation, Its important to note that our counter-terrorism cooperation with Pakistan helped lead us to bin Laden and the compound where he was hiding. So here we have reports that some within the Pakistani ISI or military were helping harbor Osama bin Laden. While at the same time, Pakistani forces were participating in the raid to capture Osama. Does this make sense? The official story, at this point, goes something like this...a small helicopter-borne strike team entered the compound where Osama bin Laden was hiding, and completed their mission within 40 minutes. When they located bin Laden, he did resist the assault force and as a result was shot in the face, died and, after being positively identified by

194

But When, Where, And How?

both the strike force and bin Ladens family members, was transported with the strike team out of Pakistan. He was then buried at sea. Islamic tradition requires that the body be buried within 24 hours of death. So in order to respect the custom, the decision was made to bury the body in the sea. Is this really in accordance with Islamic tradition? (8) Also on May 2nd former Pakistan General Hamid Gul asked Alex Jones, Why dont they show the body and have a descent Islamic burial. Why hasnt this been done? Regardless of your personal feelings or bias, shooting an unarmed person is murder. Executions are sometimes used to silence a patsy, informers, accomplices, or whistle-blowers. Killing Osama means no trial necessary. The governments official story continues as is. According to the L.A. Times, May 3rd, Osama was given an opportunity to surrender before troops opened fire on him, at least one time shooting him in the head. As proof, a photo of his face was transmitted to analysts, who confirmed the identification. (9) Later images would surface on the Internet, claiming to be the photos of a deceased Osama bin Laden. They would turn out to be fakes.

Obama Got Osama?

Today, at my direction, the United States launched a targeted operation against that compound in Abbottabad, Pakistan. A small team of Americans carried out the operation with extraordinary courage and capability. No Americans were harmed. They took care to avoid civilian casualties. After a firefight, they killed Osama bin Laden and took custody of his body. President Barack Obama (May 1, 2011)

On the night that we were told Obama got Osama, the President walked out to the White House podium, were the world awaited to hear about the fate of the worlds most wanted terrorist. We are reminded about the official story of September 11th, a story which conveniently

195

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

excludes World Trade Center Building 7. The Presidents speech also reminds us how we quickly learned that the 9/11 attacks were carried out by al-Qaeda, an organization headed by Osama bin Laden, which had openly declared war on the United States and was committed to killing innocents in our country and around the globe. And so we went to war against al-Qaeda to protect our citizens, our friends, and our allies. So quickly did we assume Osama was the mastermind that we forgot about presenting evidence to the people, and the FBI forgot to add September 11th to the long list of terror attacks Osama is responsible for? Where have we heard this story before? The more hes in office, the more President Obama carries on what Bush started. During the Libya conflict, Obama bypassed congress and went to the United Nations to get permission to bombard Libya with air-strikes and possibly put troops on the ground there. There is little doubt that CIA handlers and such are already slithering around in Libya. The strange thing about Libya is that - not only are we allegedly fighting in the war against al-Qaeda - but we are also fighting alongside of al-Qaeda. If Bush was our president would we put up with such treason? Then we get the real message. Whereas most people would assume that capturing or killing Osama would be the end of the war on terror, Obama made clear that his death does not mark the end of our effort. Theres no doubt that al-Qaeda will continue to pursue attacks against us. We must and we will remain vigilant at home and abroad. So goes the never-ending war. When the threat of terrorism is everywhere, so too, must our rights be stripped, everywhere in order to protect us against the terrorists who hate that we have our rights. There is no logic in this type of thinking. So after September 11th, the Patriot Act allowed the government to take away more of our basic constitutional rights and suspend the constitution, just as the terrorists would want. The ultimate question is, Why would our government want to help the terrorists take away our rights? The fight against al-Qaeda has taken a deadly turn, where alQaeda operatives could be anywhere, everywhere, anyone, or everyone as far as the authorities are concerned. The land of suspicion has replaced the home of the brave. Or so the culprits think. The next phase

196

But When, Where, And How?

has now been complete. This is not a war against Islam. The United States is not and never will be at war with Islam, the President reminds the world. This is not a war against Muslims, as Bin Laden was not a Muslim leader; he was a mass murderer of Muslims. Indeed, al-Qaeda has slaughtered scores of Muslims in many countries, including our own. So his demise should be welcomed by all who believe in peace and human dignity. (10) Pakistan is not off the hook either, according to President Obama. It is essential that Pakistan continue to join us in the fight against al-Qaeda and its affiliates. With the death of Osama bin Laden, the war is not over...it has only just begun. At the end of his speech Obama tells America the cause of securing our country is not complete. Likewise President Bush got a chance to remark on the death of Osama, The fight against terror goes on, but tonight America has sent an unmistakable message: No matter how long it takes, justice will be done.
And on nights like this one, we can say to those families who have lost loved ones to al-Qaedas terror: Justice has been done. - President Obama (May 1, 2011)

Who gave these two presidents the same talking points? Real justice is coming. History reveals the truth...

Live From D.C.! The Abbottabad Raid!

...Kinda. The CIA-led operation to capture or kill Osama bin Laden is hailed as a huge mile-stone in the war on terror. Its big enough to give the people their constitutional rights back, but for the propaganda

197

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

machines and its benefactors, this is a great day in corporatist America and off-shore banking worldwide. Newly crowned CIA Director Leon Panetta watched the raid live! from the 7th floor of CIA Headquarters in Langley, Virginia. Midday on Sunday, May 1st, 2011 Panetta gave the order to capture or kill the al-Qaeda leader. The May 2nd article in the LA Times reported on an unnamed US official who claims that bin Laden was shooting back at the strike force that entered the Abbottabad compound. He was shot while shooting back, the official reported. This same official told the LA Times that the purpose of the mission was not to execute bin Laden. If [bin Laden] decided to lay down his arms, he would have been taken captive. Its easy to believe that taking Osama alive would be almost impossible and highly unlikely. Yet we will hear of claims that what helped capture Osama was torturing alleged captured terrorists. I dont believe torture works and I do think that U.S. sponsored torture will put all American forces in danger of torture, should any be captured anywhere across the world. With around 200 military bases worldwide, and terrorists supposedly everywhere, the threat of enemy combatants and other types of criminals torturing U.S. soldiers, operatives, and agents in retaliation for U.S. sanctioned torture is increased. America should never torture, under any circumstances. Torture does not work. It only puts all American citizens in more danger. The LA Times report gives the official a platform to say that torture is good and does get results. This is very, very dangerous propaganda designed to psychologically get people to believe that torture is fine as long as the Americans are the ones torturing others. If the roles were reversed, Americans would be outraged to learn our soldiers were tortured in a similar manner as what happened at Abu Ghraib and other places. Torture should never be a part of American society. The official tells LA Times crucial information about the trusted courier who owned the compound came years ago from CIA interrogations of 9-11 mastermind Khalid Shaikh Mohamed. Mohamed was tortured, subject to water-boarding and other brutal interrogation methods. And all of a sudden, water-boarding is cool

198

But When, Where, And How?

again? I dont think so. I also have faith that many people across the world would agree that torture is cruel and inhumane punishment. (11) On May 3rd, Infowars.com reported, During an interview with Imtiaz Tyab of Aljazeera, a man who lives in the Abbottabad neighborhood where Osama was supposedly killed said he never saw him. If somebody new comes on your street, the man said, you always know. He said he never saw the six foot four Saudi and does not believe he lived there. (12)

Bin Ladens Been Dead

I found out through my sources that he had had kidney disease. And as a physician, I knew that he had to have two dialysis machines and he was dying, Steve Pieczenick (13)

A December 2001, Fox News report stated that, according to the Pakistan Observer, a Taliban leader was at the funeral of Osama bin Laden in mid-December of that year. Their Taliban source cited lung complications as to the reason bin Laden died and was buried in the vicinity of the Tora Bora mountains in December of 2001. About 30 close associates of bin Laden in Al Qaeda, including his most trusted and personal bodyguards, his family members and some Taliban friends, attended the funeral rites. (14) An article by Kurt Nimmo and Alex Jones of Infowars.com reads, In 2003, former Secretary of State Madeleine Albright told Fox News Channel analyst Morton Kondracke she suspected Bush knew the whereabouts of Osama bin Laden and was waiting for the most politically expedient moment to announce his capture. (15) Le Fargo, a French newspaper, reported on November 1st, 2001, that two months before September 11th, Osama bin Laden flew to Dubai, one of the seven emirates of the United Arab Emirates, for

199

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

treatment at an American hospital. The American hospital and the Bush White House denied the claim. While reportedly being treated in the Urology Depart-ment, bin Laden was visited by family members, Saudi notables, and two CIA agents. The 10 day stay adds speculation to bin Ladens kidney complications. If bin Laden was being treated for kidney dialysis back in 2001, skeptics point out it is highly unlikely that bin Laden would still be alive in 2011. (16) Also on May 2nd, 2011 The Corbett Report ran a story titled, Osama Bin Laden Pronounced Dead...For the Ninth Time. The pronouncements have come from various political figures throughout the years. Pakistani President Pervez Musharraf said in January 2002 he thought bin Laden was dead. Dale Watson was the FBI Counterterrorism chief, before retiring in 2002. While speaking at a conference in July 2002, he asked the law enforcement officials in the audience if bin Laden was dead. Watsons view was, I personally think he is probably not with us anymore but I have no evidence to support that.
(17)

Likewise, the President of Afghanistan, Hamid Karzai was interviewed in October 2002 by CNN, where he told them he thought bin Laden was probably dead. (18) In 2005 Senator Harry Reid (D-NV) said he was told that bin Laden might have died during a 2005 October earthquake in Pakistan. (19) A year later French intelligence leaked a report that suggested bin Laden died in Pakistan. (20) In 2007, Benazir Bhutto, former Pakistani Prime Minister, told David Frost of Al-Jazeera that Omar Sheikh had killed Osama. (21) Then in 2009, Pakistani President Asif Ali Zardari didnt think Osama was alive, claimed he hadnt heard chatter about Osama through his sources in US intelligence agencies in over seven years. (22) Add to this list Barack Obama on May 1st, 2011. Like the others, he offers no proof beyond blind trust in American intelligence.

200

But When, Where, And How?

Osama Was Unarmed

By May 3rd, the back-tracking of the official story begins. One day after we are told that Osama was armed when US Navy Seals stormed his compound, the story suddenly changes. Now we are told by White House spokesperson James Carney that Osama was not armed. Carney added that bin Laden was shot and killed when his wife rushed the Seal team. Again the question is asked, if Obama and high level administration officials were watching the raid in real-time, why would the official story be replaced within a day? Is this a distraction so people debate whether he did or did not have a gun instead of debating the bigger issues...did the Seal team really kill Osama? The distractions are many, but the truth always seeps out. The source of such found truth must be discredited, or given the illusion of suspicion. Once seeds of doubt are planted, its hard for that tree not to grow. Still the question is asked, how can one find truth if they do not recognize lies? So we are told that bin Laden was unarmed but his wife fought back by running at men with guns, unarmed, and as a result, both were shot and killed. But according to Laura Rozen of The Envoy, A U.S. official told The Envoy Tuesday that Bin Ladens injured wife was left at the compound by the U.S. team, along with several other women and children. At least one woman on the first floor of the compound was shot and killed. Rozen adds that the New York Times reported that one of bin Ladens wives actually identified bin Laden. A former senior U.S. intelligence official told the Times it was his understanding that it was the wife shot in the leg at the scene who identified bin Laden. (23) As for the governments official response to this confusion? It was a simple mix up because of reports of two women being shot and the information was only hours old. Yet that didnt stop them from making a public announcement about Osama bin Laden. For twenty minutes no one watching on the monitors knew what was happening in the Abbottabad complex. That information will also be revealed later as time goes by. So as time goes by, the people will eventually learn the

201

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

truth about the raid, if Osama was actually killed, and if theres proof to back up the claim. What proof do we have? To add more to the smoke screen of mystery, the courier question comes up. Who was the courier that led the United States to Osama? This propaganda is an attempt to erase the question of how long were the CIA and ISI monitoring Osama? What did they know and for how long did they know it? (24) Instead of asking that question, the general population will debate about if there was one courier or two. Is this confusion part of the plan?

Take A Picture, Itll Last Longer

On May 4th, it is revealed that pictures of a dead Osama bin Laden do exist. While critics wait to see the pictures themselves, main stream media acts like this is the proof that will silence skeptics. Of course, as is standard procedure in any cover-up, these pictures were ordered to be sealed from the public, including the media who is hyping the authenticity of the pictures, by President Obama. Now the debate becomes whether or not to release the grisly photographs to the public. Or is the President correct in telling 60 Minutes thats not who we are, as in we dont release such photos? Yet when Saddam Hussein was killed some of the footage was shown, so that people could have comfort in closure. Do the 9/11 victims family members get closure from the release of such photos? Probably not. Such photos would not be without scrutiny. So the smoke and mirrors illusion grows even stronger. Confusion spreads like a black cloud over a morning sunrise. Who can say the sun rose if no one saw it? Likewise, how can we be sure that Osama is dead if there is no evidence? No body? Theres no credible proof Osama masterminded the events of 9/11 besides the governments

202

But When, Where, And How?

trust and faith in the 9/11 Commission. Anyone who has read False Flags should find evidence that 9/11 was an inside job. (25) More so, just looking at WTC Building 7 and how it fell on September 11th proves the official story of 9/11 is truly a half-baked farce. The credibility of the photos that are now sealed from public view is another farce orchestrated by our government. How long these photographs will be sealed for remains to be seen. Will they eventually be dumped in the ocean next to bin Ladens body? To keep the dead bin Laden theory alive, White House Press Secretary James Carney tells the public that they cant see the photographs that depict parts of bin Ladens skull blown away, due to a gunshot wound around his left eye. Theres a gruesome image that makes people thirst for more. Not releasing the photos will certainly keep the conspiracy theorists busy and possibly distracted, while also making sure those who do not want to address conspiracy theories run further away from the possibility. Its a double-edged sword. Many will argue that releasing the photographs will incite violence from al-Qaeda operatives and terrorists, but it would also force them out of the shadows, where they could become targets. Many thought that once Osama bin Laden was killed, the war on al-Qaeda would be over. Yet now that Osama is dead, we are told that al-Qaeda is an even bigger threat than before. So maybe we should not have allegedly killed Osama, especially if he was unarmed. Was it necessary to kill him, regardless of the fact that it may have been illegal? What information could Osama provide about future terrorist attacks? Still, this all assumes that one buys into the governments story that Osama was indeed killed in May of 2011; nearly ten years after the 9/11 terror attacks happened. The result of the 9/11 attacks, from my point of view, stripped the people of our constitutional rights, mislead the people about facts and the physics of 9/11, got us into two neverending wars, and now here we are, closer than ever to the final phase of the New World Order. The One World ruler, but the rule is only temporary. For now, while we are alive, truth is the answer to exposing the lies. In truth we find what lies are. There are no available facts to the

203

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

American people that our government is telling the truth when they say that they killed Osama bin Laden. We should simply trust them, even though they have lied to us, as their story changes over and over. Those who were only paying attention to the alleged death of Osama when the information was first made public may never know about what was later retracted and what lies were exposed; thus the government was forced to change its story over and over but by this time most of the public had moved on to other things. All part of the dis-information plan. Press Secretary Carney then said he wasnt going to provide any more details about the 40 minute operation that killed bin Laden. This adds to more speculation about the truth of the matter. Is that part of the plan? Now we hear that bin Laden was unarmed but still resisted, resulting in his death. Within three days the story changed three times. How can we get beyond story to fact when the government cant get their own story straight? This obviously leads to questions about cover-ups, which could be a part of the smoke and mirrors campaign presented to us. Helmut Schmidt is the West German Chancellor who told the German public that the operation is a violation of international law. CIA Director Leon Panetta would tell PBS Newshour he did not think bin Laden was armed. The director further stated that the reason why Osama was shot was because of threatening moves that were enough to warrant shooting bin Laden. Thats the reason they fired. The Middle East news channel, Al-Arabiya, reported that someone in Pakistani security claims bin Ladens 12 year old daughter said that U.S. forces captured, then killed her father in front of family members. This claim too, will be scrutinized while the bigger issue is ignored by some. (26) As noted before the picture of Osama was not released because President Obama felt they were too gruesome, as he told 60 Minutes days after the raid. Obama made sure, early on, to tell 60 Minutes Steve Kroft that they are certain that Osama is dead. He even adds, Weve done DNA, uh, uh, sampling and testing and so there is no doubt we killed Osama bin Laden. This statement is transmitted

204

But When, Where, And How?

subconsciously, first and foremost, to his strongest supporters; who will remember and repeat his talking points to others who would dare question his claim of Osamas death at the Pakistan compound. Obama described the photos as very graphic depicting a dead bin Laden shot in the head. Until the photos are released, we can only take the president at his word. Knowing he has lied in the past about serious events, such as bringing our troops home should be re-elected, I cannot trust his word alone.

Real Time Lies

So just to recap, on Monday May 2nd, 2011, Counter Terrorism Chief John Brennan told the world that President Obama and certain government officials were able to monitor the raid in real-time. He told the news-watching public that Obama could monitor the progress from its commencement to its time on target to the extraction of the remains and to the egress off the target. According to Brennan on that Monday, we were able to monitor the situation in real time and were able to have regular updates and to ensure that we had real-time visibility into the progress of the operation. While, understandably, he wouldnt elaborate on the technical specifics of the monitoring feeds and such, he did make it clear that it gave us the ability to actually track it on an ongoing basis. Yet this could contradict what will be revealed that there was a 20 minute black-out period where no one watching the monitors knew what was going on inside the compound. On Tuesday, May 3rd, the next day, White House Press Secretary James Carney still claimed that the monitors were giving updates minute-by-minute. Of course, on that same Tuesday, CIA Director Leon Panetta told PBS once those teams went into the compound, I can tell you that there was a time period of almost 20 or 25 minutes that we really didnt know just exactly what was going on. Of course, Panetta could have been strictly talking about his feed at CIA headquarters in Langley Virginia.

205

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

Panetta then adds that obviously, under the rules of engagement, if he had in fact thrown up his hands, surrendered and didnt appear to be representing any kind of threat, then they were to capture him. But they had full authority to kill him. (27) But by Wednesday Carney was telling reporters Weve been as forthcoming with facts as we can be. A lot of information came out quickly. When we needed to clarify some of the information that we had as more information came in, weve provided that. But in terms of further details of the operation, I dont have any for you. How about at least clarifying the contradicting stories? Why so much confusion Carney? Doesnt the left hand know what the right hand is doing? Whats really going on here? The lies continue as what was first reported as a million dollar mansion Osama was hiding is, is later corrected into a house worth about $250,000. Anyone who has seen any of the supposed footage of inside the compound will easily see no signs of luxury. Looks like a glorified crack house to me, but thats from my perspective. What do you see inside? Does this look like a million dollar estate to you? Before you wonder what a million dollar estate would look like in Pakistan, check around a few other places. Then compare those million dollar estates to this $250,000 compound. There are so many holes in the conflicting stories that some may throw their hands in the air and give up on searching for the truth. THIS may be the original intent of the confusion, as I believe. It is a distraction from the bigger truth that there is no hard evidence given to the American people to conclude that Osama bin Laden was killed in a raid in Abadabad Pakistan on May 1st, 2011, May-Day. Yet many will blindly accept the Presidents word on the matter; and some will do so out of fear of being labeled a conspiracy theorist. Others could care less either way. This is America. The land of smoke and mirrors, or secrets and disinformation, presented and withheld purposely for the benefit of those who wish to rule the world and create a one world government. It is up to you and me to stop this. Nothing is beyond the hope of redemption, including America. We now know that President Obama was first aware of the

206

But When, Where, And How?

death of bin Laden when he heard Geronimo, which meant that Osama bin Laden was killed. I would like to know what the code-word would have been if they had captured bin Laden; truthfully I just want to know there actually was a code-word assigned in case the Seal team was able to capture Osama. If there was no such code-word it would add to the treason accusations that this was an assassination attempt on Osama bin Laden, with no orders, or very vague orders, to capture him alive. (28) Allegedly the DNA of Osama bin Laden was taken during the 40 minute raid in Abbottabad, Pakistan and compared against DNA samples from bin Ladens mother and three sons. (29) On Friday, May 6th, al-Qaeda allegedly claimed to have a tape of bin Laden, made weeks before his death. Reuters then reported the group will release the audio tape soon. Its strange that these terrorists arent as skeptical about bin Ladens death as many Americans. Why? The answer goes back to the al-Qaeda leader who dined at the Pentagon two weeks after September 11th. Shouldnt al-Qaeda deny the death until proof is presented? Why was al-Qaeda so quick to jump the gun and agree with the United States that Osama bin Laden is dead? (30) Why is al-Qaeda so trusting of the Unites States Government? What proof has the world been given that Osama was killed the way the government says he was? All we have is their word. Is that all we should need? (31) United States Senator Saxby Chambliss hoped the Navy Seals entered the compound hoping to kill, not capture, Osama bin Laden. According to Political Insider with Jim Galloway, Chambliss told Galloway that as bin Laden poked his head out of a room on the third floor, Seals shot and missed, as the alleged 911 Mastermind went back into the room. Chambliss has no problem telling Galloway what the real purpose of the mission was all along. We needed to take this guy out. And I know thats what the executive order said. Compare that to what Mr. Brennan told us the day after the raid. (32) Chambliss also claimed to have seen the dead photograph of Osama. He said it looks like what you would expect from somebody whos been shot in the head. Of course that was Wednesday morning. By Wednesday evening we learned his story changed as well.

207

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

Eventually Chambliss admitted that the photo he saw was not official. It was shown to him on an electronic device. He had no idea where the photograph came from. Sometimes, when you ask the right questions, you discover more lies. A freshman Republican on the Armed Services Committee, Senator Kelly Ayotte (R-NH) also saw the photo of a dead bin Laden with a facial wound. She is in favor of releasing the photographs to the public. Like Chambliss, she was shown the photo on an electronic device and doesnt know if its authentic. Senator Scott Brown (R-MA) told reporters he didnt know if the photo he was shown was real or not. Later he would clarify that the photograph he saw and that a lot of other people saw is not authentic. (33) The disinformation campaign is picking up steam, doing exactly as it was designed to do, cast on a shadow of fog on the truth.

I Cant Believe Its Not Osama !

(Infowars.com)

On Saturday, May 7th, 2011, Paul Watson writes a story about newly released dubious Bin Laden home movies purportedly seized from his compound during the raid on Sunday night showing Bin Laden on camera in 2010, but the tapes are almost identical to footage released almost four years ago by a notorious Pentagon front group that acts as a conduit for US intelligence by regularly releasing fake al-

208

But When, Where, And How?

Qaeda videos. Watson explains that the only moment in which the cameraman zooms in on the TV so that you can clearly see the picture is when it either shows Bin Laden, Obama, or both of them in a still shot together. (34) Can you believe its Osama? What proof would convince you that the governments story is real? Perhaps if they stuck to the same story from the beginning? What photographic or video evidence were certain senators shown that led them to believe that Osama was indeed dead? (That was just covered in the last chapter) Was it the same that the White House saw? The pictures and/or video that the senators saw turned out to be fakes, or at least not authentic...

I would like to learn more about photograph the White House and members of congress saw. Was it the same fake photos where Osamas eye appears to be missing and the rest of his face is bruised and bloodied? Look above.

209

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

I am not convinced that the above picture, from video released by the Department of State, is Osama bin Laden. The other videos would need to be compared to this one and see if its the same room. This room looks smaller than what we have seen in other videos of the Abbottabad compound. Also, the man in the video does not resemble Osama bin Laden in my opinion.
At the end of the day, this was still a 55/45 situation. I mean, we could not say definitively that bin Laden was there. Had he not been there, then there would have been significant consequences. Barack Obama (60 Minutes interview) (35)

In Abbottabad Pakistan, a northwestern city known to heavily include Pakistani ex-miliatary, and training facilities for the military academy, there is disbelief that the United States Government has told the truth about the alleged death of Osama bin Laden. While some in America were quick to trust the governments word of what happened in the raid, even though that story changed several times, the residents on the ground seem to tell a different story. To be fair, if Osama bin Laden was living next to me here in America I wouldnt know it. So, why are some in Abbottabad convinced that Osama was never at the compound? One man who has lived here all my life does not believe Osama was in the compound. We are a closed net community. At least we would have seen him once. It still seems logical that if Osama was hiding in the compound that no one would know he was there except for Pakistani forces, and by de-facto, American agents such as the CIA. The resident then adds that if its true that Osama was killed in Pakistan, the Pakistani Army should have conducted this operation. Sovereignty has been replaced by a rush for forced democracy around the world in the name of America and its global allies. Most locals in the Pakistani northwestern city thought that this was a big hoax by the American government. We are not fools, another resident told CCTV News about the alleged death of bin Laden. Whenever they want to take control of an area, they act this way. Osama was never here. That last sentence is a bold statement to make

210

But When, Where, And How?

considering that this person has never been inside the house. It seems no one has and no reporters have asked that question as far as I can find. Some early questionable reports suggest that bin Laden and his wife had not left the compound in five years. I believe the compound is only about 6 years old? The resident adds that America wants to destroy the image of the Pakistan Army. Is Abbottabad air-space a restricted area as one local contractor states? 130 kilometers from the federal capitol, near a military academy, the contractor, Jahangir (may be incorrect name) was shocked when he heard on the news that Osama bin Laden was captured in the town where hes lived his whole life. He says that new residents would have to show an ID card before theyre allowed to move into the area. Of course this may be true for regular citizens of Pakistan, but I dont think this would be the case for someone like bin Laden; especially if hes a CIA or ISI asset. Osama is not the bird who can fly inside the compound, Jahangir told the reporter in Abbottabad. Around 1 a.m. Pakistan time, Jahangir and his wife became scared at what they heard and saw. In the pitch black, he claims to have seen an Apache helicopter over the compound. Jahangir lives a few minutes away from the compound. He went to the roof of his house and in pitch black he heard shooting for about two minutes, followed by a few minutes firing. He returned to his house with his wife. Then, at about 1:15 a.m., We hear an explosion, like, big noise. The noise scared them right out of their house, where they scanned the area to see what was going on. Then I hear the people was crying there, or somewhere. Then we run there, because my cousin is living there, right? Its a five minute walk if I run from my house to there. Whats not clear is that this same person said he owned the house next to Osamas alleged compound. So when he says, my cousin is living there I dont think he means the compound itself, but next door to the compound. When he and his brother and a few other people run to the scene, which was encompassed in fire, thats when the Pakistan Army arrived and took over the compound. He says he remained on the scene until 4 a.m. Who can prove that Osama bin Laden was really at this compound? Seems only the United States Government can be trusted in

211

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

the eyes of mainstream media. Yet after this event, alternative media searches soared to new heights, as people look for real information, not satisfied with the corporate news versions of events; especially when those turn out to be fabricated or greatly over-exaggerated. I am living here all my life, Jahangir continued, and you know that if somebody new comes in your street, in your area, you always know. Like, somebody is, you can see the movement. I [have] never seen anything like that. I cant believe that. He then confirms that every night he walks from his own house to the house next to where Osama allegedly was hiding. The next house is my other house, which I rent to my cousins friend. And every day in the evening we went there by walk, with my wife, for the, just, walk. I [have] never seen anything like that. I cant believe that, and to be honest, its not true. Of course before he said his cousin was living there. He also said it was a five minute walk if he runs from his house to there, but this could all be a language problem. This man is described as some type of contractor, I assume for Pakistan. The President of Pakistan said Pakistan didnt know bin Laden was there. That may be true as a whole, but were there some who knew bin Laden was there? Did no one in the U.S. Government or CIA notify Pakistan of this? The Pakistani Anti- terrorist Squad could not confirm Osama bin Ladens death. (36) Still some people around the world are convinced, I cant believe its not Osama.

Osama Escaped From Tora Bora

The CIA field commander was on the ground in Tora Bora when hundreds of alleged al-Qaeda and Taliban members were fleeing from the area around December 2001. The field commander told

212

But When, Where, And How?

Newsweek, He was there, referring to Osama bin Laden. In his book Jawbreaker Gary Bernstein says there were intelligence operatives tracking bin Laden in Tora Bora. Bin laden was holed up in the Tora Bora Mountains, Bernstein told Newsweek. He and other U.S. commanders had definitive intelligence that bin Laden was there and could have been caught. Mr. Bernstein does not agree with Former CENTCOM commander General Tommy Franks, when the general said, Bin Laden was never within our grasp in an op-ed for the New York Times, October 19th, 2004. Bernstein disputed the quote, telling Newsweek that General Franks was not on the ground out there. I was. (37) Author Ron Suskind wrote that CIA briefer Henry Crumpton cautioned President Bush that bin Laden was in a position to escape from Tora Bora. (38) This goes back to the theory that bin Laden is being used as a prop to take away our rights in America, and was previously used by President Bush to win the 2004 Presidential election. The Times reported that Buzzy Krongard retired from the CIA in 2004 said that the United States may be better off with bin Laden at large, acknowledging that bin Ladens capture might prove counterproductive. Krongard was the number three in the chain of command at the CIA in 2004. The same article adds that several US officials privately admitted it may be better to keep bin Laden alive, trapped between the border of Pakistan and Afghanistan rather than make him a martyr or put him on trial. (39) What exactly is the end game to this type of mentality? Putting bin Laden on trial can only be a good thing. Thats what one does with a criminal when given the chance of capture. What type of martyr would bin Laden be if he was guilty of the events of 9/11? What disgusting type of human being would want to follow those footsteps? Innocent people were ruthlessly murdered, and some of our own citizens think this man could become a martyr? Osama bin Laden will never be a martyr for the peaceful people of this world. Anyone who sees him as a martyr doesnt understand what a martyr is. I think this is an excuse for people who dont want to capture bin laden; for where will that trail lead? Most suspect it will lead deep down a rabbit hole to a shadow

213

Osama Bin Laden Is Dead

force that pulled off 9/11. Well we dont need to journey down the rabbit hole anymore. The shadows have come out of the hole now, and are taking control of every aspect of our lives, if we sit down and let them. The more lies are revealed about 9/11 the more light is shone on these shadow forces. Once these creatures are forced out of the shadows, we see them for what they truly are, and suddenly, their mystique and illusions of smoke and mirrors fades away, and they dont look so scary anymore.

214

Obama Drama

Obama Drama
Lies Conceal Truth
We are in an information war and we are losing that war. Hillary Clinton (0)

Today is September 11th, 2011, ten years after the worst attack on American soil, perhaps the worst in the history of this nation and the modern world. So today we examine what Obama said about Bush and how it is ironic. In June 2007 Obama said the Bush administration also puts forward a false choice between the liberties we cherish and the security we provide. I will provide our intelligence and law enforcement agencies with the tools they need to track and take out the terrorists, without under-mining our constitution and our freedom. That means no more illegal wire-tapping of American citizens. No more national security letters to spy on citizens who are not suspected of a crime. No more tracking citizens who do nothing more than protest a misguided war. No more ignoring the law when it is inconvenient. That is not who we are. Its not what is necessary to defeat the terrorists. The FISA Court works. The separation of powers works. Our Constitution works. We will again set an example for the world that the law is not subject to the whims of stubborn rulers and that justice is not arbitrary. This administration acts like violating civil liberties is the way to enhance our security. It is not. There are no short cuts to protecting America. Four years later, Obama is continuing Bushs policy and expanding on them, all because of the lies of 9/11.

215

Lies Conceal Truth

Im aware that theres still some who would question or even justify the events of 9/11, but let us be clear. Al Qaeda killed nearly 3,000 people on that day. The victims were innocent men, women, and children from America, and many other nations who had done nothing to harm anybody. Yet Al Qaeda chose to ruthlessly murder these people, claimed credit for the attacks, and even now states their determination to kill on a massive scale. They have affiliates in many countries and are trying to expand their reach. These are not opinions to be debated. These are facts to be dealt with. President Barack Obama (Egypt, Cairo June 4th 2009) (00)

Still there are facts the president wont deal with, such as WTC 7 and the witnesses who saw, felt, and heard multiple explosions on 9/11. Although al-Qaeda took credit for this attack, the group would gladly take credit for any terror attack they could, whether true or not. Why is our government so sure that al-Qaeda is telling the truth? This is especially baffling when you consider that there is information to suggest that al-Qaeda could no have carried out the attacks without some type of inside help. Why would our government believe al-Qaeda over people like Steven Jones, Richard Gage, and others who have pointed out the scientific flaws in the 9/11 Commissions Final Report?

9/11: Ten Years Later In The Global Empire

The terrorist threat to the homeland is in many ways at its most heightened state since 9/11. Janet Napolitano, 2011 (1)

By 9:30 am, on September 11th, minutes before the Pentagon attack, and a half-hour before the South Tower collapses, CNN spreads the word that Osama bin Laden may be involved in the attacks. John King, CNN senior White House correspondent tells us an unnamed

216

Obama Drama

administration official said obviously the operating assumption here is terrorism...that this had something to do, or at least they were looking into any possible connection with Osama Bin Laden. The administration recently released a warning that they thought Osama Bin Laden might strike out against U.S. Targets. Yet later Bush, Condoleezza Rice and White House Press Secretary Ari Fleischer would all claim that they received no warnings about Osama attempting to fly planes into buildings on US soil. (2) Thursday September 20th, 2001, addressing congress, Bush publicly took advantage of the attacks, putting the world on notice, Every nation, in every region, now has a decision to make. Either you are with us, or you are with the terrorists. Although he said, well remember the moment the news came, where we were and what we were doing, it not clear what he saw, what he was doing. Later during a speech, Bush would claim he was sitting in a classroom in Florida. Many people remember Chief of Staff Andrew Card whispering into Bushs ears, captured on home video after the second plane hit the South Tower of the World Trade Center. So there was little doubt that he was sitting inside the classroom when the second plane hit. What about when the first plane hit? Of course no one saw the first plane hit the World Trade Center on live TV. So more speculation arose about the inconsistent story, and wonder if Bush meant he saw the first plane hit the tower when he said, I was sitting outside the classroom waiting to go in and I saw an airplane hit the tower...the TV was obviously on and I, I used to fly myself, and I said, Well theres one terrible pilot. In this same sentence, he then reverts back to his original story of sitting in the classroom. I was sitting in the classroom and Andy Card, my chief of staff...walked in and said, a second plane has hit the tower, America is under attack. Thats three times the story changes in less than one minute. He also told the press, when asked about foreknowledge of such an event as the 9/11 terror attacks, Never in anybodys thought process---about how to protect America did we ever think the evil doers would fly not one but four commercial aircraft into precious US targets---Never. So when it became known that there was evidence of fore-

217

Lies Conceal Truth

knowledge, Bush just claimed ignorance. Everyone had the memos (warnings) but only some read them; or the memos were read and the threats were purposely not followed up on. Perhaps Bush should have said, Never in my thought process did I think this would happen. Its obvious Cheney wanted the issue to die when he told democrats to be very cautious not to seek political advantage by making incendiary suggestions...that the White House had advance information that would have prevented the tragic attacks of 9/11. Some might take that as a cryptic threat from the Vice President. Was this message only meant for Democrats? Could Republicans seek political advantage from this too? National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice has stated, I dont think that anybody could have predicted that these people would take an airplane and slam it into the World Trade Center, take another one and slam it into the Pentagon, that they would try to use an airplane as a missile...even in retrospect there was nothing to suggest that. Even in retrospect? Even in retrospect some wont admit that there were no weapons of mass destruction in Iraq in September 2001. Even in retrospect, there is no evidence that Osama could have carried out 9/11 without help from within the United States, as is evident in what happened with WTC 7, and the scientific impossibility of why and how the Twin Towers fell. We were lied to. It happened. Thats reality. Theres real retrospect from a high school student. Even worse, the White House wanted Henry Kissinger to lead the 9/11 Commission, tasked with investigating 9/11, but mostly focused on how to prevent another 9/11 attack. Yet to do that, you would have to examine the facts, not just some of them. You would have to investigate Building 7. You would have to investigate eyewitness claims of explosives being used inside the towers and WTC 7. Just as Allen Dulles controlled the sway of the Warren Commission during the JFK investigation, Henry Kissinger was to steer the path for the 9/11 Commission and make sure the good old boys get the story right. This raised many red flags for early skeptics and seemed odd since, among other incidents like Watergate, this man had been associated with the CIA-backed coup that took place in Chile on

218

Obama Drama

September 11th, 1973. Hes a member of the Bilderberg Group, and wrote a paper on population control, how to keep the populations down. Coincidences, in general, surround the events of 9/11 from all angles. This may very well be just another coincidence stacked on top of others. Like the coincidence that a BBC reporter would report Building 7 had fallen moments before it actually fell, Kissingers nomination might just be another strange coincidence. Forced to reveal past associations, Kissinger declined this position. Kissinger has been filmed at the annual Bilderberg meetings as well, where global governance is the key issue discussed. He has also gone public with the promotion of a new world order, saying that Obama can use events to bring about a new world order. (3) Shadow forces are hard at work to make this a reality. Richard Clarke has stated that on the evening of September 11th at the White House, the topic of discussion involving Rumsfeld and Wolfowitz was not about capturing or killing Osama bin Laden. Rather, it was about overthrowing Saddam Hussein. Clark wrote in his book, Against All Enemies, that since Bush took office the administration had been pressing for a war with Iraq. (3.1) According to Clarke, the following day, Bush asked him to find any links between 9/11 and Saddam Hussein, any shred of proof. As time went on, Bush would become less concerned with Osama bin Laden (the alleged mastermind of 9/11 attacks) and be consumed with overthrowing Saddam Hussein, a man whom the United States helped become the leader of the Middle Eastern country. It only took Bush about six months to publicly shift focus from Osama to Saddam. Claiming bin Ladens host-government has been destroyed (4) during a press conference six months after 9/11, Bush told the press, I dont know where [Osama] is...I just dont spend that much time on it, to really be honest with you. One man who did spend a lot of time on Osama bin Laden was counter-terrorism expert, John ONeill. He resigned from the FBI when the White House had stopped investigations into al-Qaeda, to prevent embarrassment to Bushs Saudi friends, according to the book, Forbidden Truth. But if Bush and his friends had nothing to hide, why block investigations into known terrorists who allegedly were responsible for several attacks on foreign

219

Lies Conceal Truth

soil? The Smoking Building 7 Gun of 9/11 Asked about Building 7 and why it collapsed, though no plane hit it, on the Mancow radio show, former Secretary Donald Rumsfeld responded, What is Building 7? Asked again about the mysterious Building 7, Rumsfeld simply added, I have no idea, Ive never heard that. To that, giggles and laughs were heard before the topic was changed. Before the subject changed, however, Mancow told him to do a talk radio show and, youll hear it.
This was a CIA, state-federal command base with the Army, Defense Intelligence, FBI the command center for that entire area of the East Coast. Theyre running a drill of [The World Trade Center] being attacked that day. Thats why they moved the command centers out on the pier. The mobile command centers. Thats ABC News reporting that. Alex Jones

What really upset me about this so-called investigation, Bob Mcllvaine told Jesse Ventura on the Conspiracy Theory cable television show, my sons murder, all these family members, their murder...people had said within that commission, were not here to place blame...Most people dont know WTC 7 came down. These people are lying to us. Mr. Mcllvaine lost his son on 9/11, and all he is asking is why? Which led to a judge asking, Building what?! when the subject of Building 7 came up in court.
A fellow walked over to me and said, You know, Im a mainline conservative but you woke me up. My dad didnt believe in 9/11 being an inside job but I showed him the footage of Building 7 imploding, he was a Navy Seal/UDT, his dad...said, Thats a controlled demolition, yeah, they blew it. Alex Jones (5)

220

Obama Drama

The 9/11 Commission Report did not mention WTC Building 7 at all.

WTC 7 Falls At 5:20 pm On September 11th, 2001, at 5 p.m., New York time, BBC reporter Phil Hayden updates viewers on a third building, the Solomon Brothers building, which collapsed just moments ago. He describes the building as being a few hundred yards from the WTC towers. Why did he not refer to the building as part of the World Trade Center? I have to admit, before briefly watching a clip of WTC 7 collapsing into its own foot print on CBS September 11th evening, I had never heard of Building 7 or the Salomon Brothers building. It would be about three years before I would hear of them again. The BBC reporter Phil Hayden tells the viewers that the third

221

Lies Conceal Truth

building has fallen because it was weakened, then takes us to Jane Stanley who is standing-by in New York City, with the smoking World Trade Center area in the background. Of course, even more curious, there is nothing Jane Stanley can add to what Mr. Hayden already knows which is apparently nothing about the Salomon Brothers building or WTC 7. Seems to me he has the best view of Building 7, sitting at his cool little news desk. Jane then reports that details are sketchy, but the whole downtown area is sealed off, except for rescue workers. She adds that part of another hotel, the Marriott Hotel, also had partial collapse. Yet WTC 7 fell straight down. Of course Jane doesnt know this yet because WTC Building 7 is right over her shoulder, still standing. Hayden then asks about how many people were in the Salomon Brothers building when it collapsed and if there were fears of other buildings collapsing. To which Jane explains the area has been completely evacuated. As she does so, the text screen under her reads The 47 storey Salomon Brothers building close to the World Trade Center has also collapsed. All this, as the building stands behind Jane. This building is where Salomon Smith Bailey is so maybe thats why they refer to it as the Salomon Brothers building, as the awesome YouTube clip suggests. (7) Soon after this her feed is lost, Phil Hayden goes back to other news and life goes on for most. Still the truth can only hide for so long.

222

Obama Drama

Who gave Jane Stanley her orders to say that WTC Building 7 had collapsed? Barry Jennings was trapped inside Building 7 for hours with one other person. He describes explosions going off in the building. While being rescued from the building, Jennings has stated that he was told not to look down. He would go on to say that the reason he was told not to look down was that he was walking over dead bodies. Dead bodies in Building 7? What was going on in WTC 7 from the time Jennings said the building was empty to the time he was being rescued from WTC 7? If he wasnt missing we could ask him. Years later, Jane Stanley was asked about her early reporting of WTC 7 collapsing
Its just very unfortunate that this whole conspiracy...has grown out of whats really a very small, a very honest mistake. Jane Stanley (8)

223

Lies Conceal Truth

(Jane Stanley reports WTC Building 7 has fallen, even though its standing behind her. Who exactly gave her this talking point is unconfirmed, but I have no doubt it came to her from someone within the BBC. Following that trail would lead down a very interesting rabbit-hole, I am sure.) Look in the upper right corner of the above photo and you can see WTC Building 7 in clear view over her shoulder.
The only way for the official story to make sense is if the laws of physics had changed on that day. And Im an engineer, and I can tell you that they did not. Jeff Becker (Constitution Party)

WTC 7 is the smoking gun, and for good reason. Initially, NIST and the 9/11 Commission did not address Building 7. Why not? In order to believe the governments official story, the government would have to explain why Building 7 fell on the same day and in the same manner

224

Obama Drama

as the Twin Towers. Instead, they have ignored the question altogether. Yet, the more the government, NIST, and the commissioners ignore the question of Building 7, the more they should realize this issue is not going away.

FOX News host, Geraldo Rivera, when presented evidence about Building 7, had suspicions about how it fell down. He told Judge Andrew Napolitano, of the Freedom Watch cable news show, I think that it is highly unlikely that our government would do anything nefarious on a scale of this epic nature. However, the building does come down in a way that is reminiscent of a controlled demolition. Geraldo once told Alex Jones and We Are Change members, during a live broadcast in New York, Get a life, for vocalizing that 9/11 is an inside job, disrupting Geraldos show. Well if the mainstream media wont present the question to us, well have to take it to their doorstep. Of course, what really opened up Geraldos eyes were the victims family members who still have questions, as well as the 1,300 Architects and Engineers who publicly dispute the official story of 9/11 as told by the 9/11 Commission. Napolitano then asked Geraldo, Could the most obnoxious protesters in recent years be right if explosives were there, and the government didnt cause, didnt know about it, but wont tell us about it?

225

Lies Conceal Truth

Could is a very, very big word, Geraldo answered. But if indeed explosives were involved, then yes, those loathsome 9/11 was an inside job protesters maybe have some reason to have adherence of people more mainstream, more responsible that than. Well he still doesnt like 9/11 truth activists but cannot deny the laws of physics and the strange manner in which Building 7 imploded into its own footprint, without any plane hitting it, and limited fires on a few floors.
(9)

As we head into the 10th anniversary of the 9/11 attacks, the Truth Movement is picking up steam each day. More research and activism is being done as a result of the absurd conclusions of the 9/11 Commission Report. The world is asking questions about the endless wars around the world and the banker cartels that have bankrupted America, intent on bringing about a global empire. They think they have succeeded, but thats not the truth. The Truth Movement is alive and kicking. Message to the New World Order: Weve only just begun...

Blow The Whistle

[President Obama has] doubled down on a lot of things, going back to education ... the idea that were testing kids and were tying teachers salaries to how kids are performing on tests, that kind of mechanized thinking has nothing to do with higher order. Were training them, not teaching them. Matt Damon (10)

Check out Infowars.com for the truth! X-Pac Sean Waltman And now for a brief message from the former WWF-WWEWCW-TNA wrestling superstar/professional wrestler, X-Pac Sean Waltman. The voice of truth reaches all walks of life, as long as youre willing to listen to someone, anyone! This was his first blog on Myspace and what a shocking blog it was! I think lots of people will listen to X-Pac and take his word seriously, whether they agree with the

226

Obama Drama

following statement or not. Hey man, wrestlers seek truth too! X-Pac was a part of the fictional pro-wrestling faction known as the New World Order; under both Pro Wrestling promotions, World Championship Wrestling and World Wrestling Entertainment (known back then as the World Wrestling Federation).
I am really paying attention to whats going on in our world. We are losing our freedoms and civil liberties right before our eyes. I dont believe the governments official story of 911. I no longer believe in the false leftright paradigm. The Democrats and Republicans have sold us the fuck out to the Federal Reserve and International bankers. The Federal Reserve isnt even !@#$ing federal. No more than Federal Express. If you give a !@#$ about what Im talking about please check out Alex Jones website, Infowars.com. Check out his documentaries on YouTube. Check out the movie Loose Change on YouTube. Learn for yourselves. OK, Ill get off my soap box now. XPac, Sean Waltman (2009) (11)

Today we have another pro wrestler who is spreading truth with his own radio show, Dan Bidondi. This man is spreading awareness! So tune in and listen. The more people we have talking about these issues, the easier it will be to see the truth. Hence, the name

On January 16th, 2009, just five days before President Obamas inauguration, the Justice Department dropped all charges against 9/11 whistle blower Susan Lindauer. I am disgusted by this case. They think that they have defeated me by denying my day in court. It could not be more wrong. If we cant have a criminal trial, were going to have a civil trial for damages.(12)

227

Lies Conceal Truth

Under the U.S. Patriot Act she was accused of being an Iraqi Agent for speaking out against the coming invasion of Iraq. She warned her second cousin, White House Chief of Staff Andrew Card, and then Secretary of State Colin Powell of the catastrophic effects an invasion of Iraq would cause. Its been reported that Lindauer had given Card eleven letters revealing Iraq was ready to resume U.N. weapons inspections. Her warning fell on deaf ears. She warned Carr that if the United States did invade Iraq, Osama bin Laden will triumph, rising from his grave or seclusion. She also warned that this would create a new wave of terrorists that would want to strike at the United States and their interests around the world something that Osama could not have done on his own. In essence, the Iraq invasion would not make America safer; it would make America, its soldiers, and businesses around the world more vulnerable than before. This too would aid, not hurt, Osama and other terrorists, as we have seen. After 9/11 and before the Iraq invasion, a blue ribbon commission was set up by President Bush to evaluate the pre-war intelligence that the United States had on Iraq. Around late February, 2004 Lindauer contacted the offices of two commission members, Sen. McCain (R-AZ) and Trent Lott (R-MS), informing them she would be willing to testify under oath about pre-war intelligence. Instead of being allowed to testify, she was arrested. She spent one year in a federal prison on Carswell Air Force Base in Fort Worth, Texas without a trial or hearing. Her incarceration was allegedly due to the presumption that it needed to be evaluated whether or not she was unfit to stand trial. The accusations were absurd, as no one could find any evidence that she was mentally unfit to stand trial. For the time being, real intelligence assessments of 9/11 foreknowledge would have to wait to be at the forefront of mainstream media. Her indictment, thanks to the Patriot Act, was allowed to be filled with secret evidence based on secret charges. Among others, Lindauer let the truth be known that our government had been warned in the months leading up to the 9/11 attacks. Yet the shadowy forces that control the government were hard at work, attempting to make an example out of her, and discourage others like her from stepping forward to tell the truth about foreknowledge of the 9/11 attacks, preventing them from speaking out

228

Obama Drama

against waging war on Iraq. Finally on January 16th, 2009, Susan Lindauer was cleared of all charges.

The Patriot Act

When Obama came to power, he brought more of the same. Hope and Change were political words used to trick good-hearted people into voting for another corporate president in Barack Obama. After the shameful acts of George W. Bush, the country thought it could do no worse. The only thing worse than Bush remaining in power was the fact that the most controversial things Bush did during his presidency would be continued under Obama. Thats Obamas political idea of hope and change? An advocacy group, Electronic Frontier Foundation (EFF), attempted to challenge the National Security Agencys unconstitutional use of warrant-less wiretapping, stating Obamas continuation of this policy goes two steps further than Bush did. EFFs case against the NSA was dismissed, and the reasons were similar to those under the Bush administration. A writer for EFF, Tim Jones, explained the NSAs arguments that the state secrets privilege requires the court to dismiss the issue out of hand. They argue that simply allowing the case to continue would cause exceptionally grave harm to national security. More so, the Department of Justice claimed the U.S. Government is immune from being punished for illegal spying and that the Government can never be sued for surveillance that violates federal privacy statutes. Well, at least they admit that this does violate federal privacy statues. Either Im reading this wrong or that is an admission of guilt on the governments part. (13) Phillip Giraldi is a former CIA officer who told Press TV in early 2011, The Patriot Act was similar to legislation carried out by the Nazis because, essentially, it was using terrorism in both cases as an excuse to strip civil liberties that were enjoyed in both countries; in the United States and Germany. When terrorism is orchestrated by a

229

Lies Conceal Truth

government to spread fear among its own citizens that is a false flag operation. The follow-up question people usually ask is why? Why would they do this to their own people? Well whoever said they see the rest of the citizens of this country as their people? Its just always been assumed that this is the case. Its hard for good people to grasp the idea of a false flag, especially one that hits so close to home. Yet as we have seen throughout history, false flag operations are a part of real life. Therefore, we should treat it as such and expose it by shining such a bright light on the problem that the cockroaches remain hidden under the refrigerator. Giraldi added, Governments have been willing to use fear, such as fear of terrorism, and fear of the enemy, as a way to get the people lined up in support of government policies. Very often these policies are essentially bad for the people because they take away many of their rights. (14) The Patriot Act: A Can Of Worms On October 23, 2001, Congress passed the Patriot Act in just about forty eight hours, in some cases, without the congressmen reading it beforehand. Less than a handful of members of congress would vote against it or simply not vote (abstain). The Patriot Act would officially contradict and attempt to override the United States Constitution. No longer would the constitution be propped up as the law of the land. Now the Patriot Act would replace it. Oh, but it doesnt end there. No way, Jose.

230

Obama Drama

Dreamstime.com, CAN OF WORMS

A few weeks before the Patriot Act was set to expire, after a year on the shelf, Ron Paul spoke directly to his supporters and members of Campaign For Liberty in order to get everyone up-to-date on whats the latest with the Patriot Act. Last year (2010) the Patriot Act was scheduled to be renewed. There was a disagreement between the Senate and the House, and they didnt extend it, but they agreed that this year they would do it. How are they going to get this act, passed under Bush, to be permanent without exposing that at the highest levels, the democrats and republicans are essentially in favor of making the Patriot Act permanent? Paul went on to express his feelings about the Patriot Act issue, I think the scheme is, theyre gonna pass it as quietly as possible. At the top of this pyramid there is bi-partisan support amongst the two-party system. Aside from Republicans like Chuck Grassley, Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell, and Intelligence Committee Ranking Republican Saxby Chambliss, one of the ranking democrats, Senator Patrick Leahy apparently sees nothing wrong with the Patriot Act as a whole. Though it has been noted that this new legislation would reform and limit the governments power to violate United States citizens rights, it seems Ron Paul is in the minority when expressing that the Patriot Act is an absolute unconstitutional piece of legislation. I agree with Mr. Paul when he states that the Patriot Act shouldnt be extended, it shouldnt be made worse, it actually should be repealed in its entirety and wed all be better off for it. Why does Paul call it a scheme to pass this law quietly? Theyre not anxious to have open hearings. Theyre not anxious to have a new debate. They consider that opening a can of worms. Chuck Grassley expressed why he feels the renewal of the Patriot Act has to be made permanent, Having this debate year after year offers little certainty to agents utilizing these provisions to keep the nation safe. Yet there is no evidence to prove that these provisions have kept the country safe. In fact, our military presence throughout the world puts American in more

231

Lies Conceal Truth

danger than if we removed our bases from other countries. There is a difference between a visitor and an occupier. Its time for America to come home. Grassley sounded like he wasnt sure if the provisions were necessary, stating, If these provisions are necessary, we should provide more certainty rather than simply revisiting the law year after year, given the indefinite threat we face from acts of terrorism, and that looks like decades ahead. We should permanently reauthorize the three expiring provisions. What a great way to twist the truth. The provisions are not necessary Mr. Grassley. Its a can of worms, said Ron Paul, that needs to be open because it affects all of us as Americans, and all of us who believe in liberty and believe in the rule of law have to be concerned about the Patriot Act. In what seems like a last-ditch effort to make the Patriot Act permanent, Patrick Leahy is trying to rush this through the legislative process, minimizing any debates, with Grassley basically fearmongering that we need the Patriot Act to protect those that are protecting the citizens of the United States. Leahy stated, These are going to expire in a couple weeks so I would hope that all senators in both parties who have interest in that will meet with me and Sen. Grassley. None of us want to play politics on national security and we should get moving on this. Aside from Ron Paul, who in congress is addressing the real problem here? The real problem is the Patriot Act itself. The Patriot Act only serves to make things that are illegal appear to be legal. Still, any law that violates the Constitution of the United States is an illegal an unconstitutional law. Though Paul recognizes that individual liberty ought to be protected, he doesnt necessarily let the people of this country off the hook. This is especially true when you consider that a lot of people vote along party lines, instead of looking at who voted for the Patriot Act and why no one should vote for a congressional representative or senator who does so. Why would I ever vote for someone who thinks the Patriot Act is good for America? If congressmen knew that they would lose an election if they voted for the Patriot Act it may put pressure on them to do the will of their constituents. Yet they realize that most people arent paying

232

Obama Drama

attention to what is happening on Capitol Hill, so they have essentially sold out their morals and belief systems for the cheese that the shadow global elite dangle over their heads. The rat takes the cheese, the rat takes the cheese. According to Paul, the Patriot Act is a perfect example of how, we, as individuals and Americans, have been willing to sacrifice their liberty for so-called security. (15) And the rat takes the cheese...

RAT AND CHEESE, Eduard Kachan (16)

Attack on Ron Paul In a shocking act of mass public deception, Fox News attempted to skew Ron Pauls 2011 CPAC straw poll win by dubbing a chorus of boos over the real audio of cheers for Ron Pauls second straight victory in the poll. Usually, the nominee who wins the CPAC poll goes on to become the Republican nominee for the President of the United States. The continuing dirty tricks being waged against Paul by the establishment media only make people pay attention to Ron Paul

233

Lies Conceal Truth

more. (17) When one researches his consistent voting record, one sees that this Paul votes by the constitution. When asked if he could confront Obama on the campaign slogan of change Paul made it clear that he would probably not do this directly to Obama, but rather to Obamas supporters. Change means nothing...its a clich, just to repeat it has no meaning. You have to say, what are you gong to change? And I would argue, you offer no change. You have the same foreign policy [as President Bush]. You want more troops in Afghanistan. Youre not talking about only going to war with a declaration. You dont want to deal with the monetary financial crisis in this country. You want to keep the system together for the benefit of the banks and the big corporations and the politicians. Paul went on to say that Obama doesnt want change, just the status quo. (18) I dont consider any tax break as a subsidy. That was not a spending bill. That was not a grant...I never vote to increase any taxes. I vote to always give tax credits and I always cut spending. Ive never voted for a real spending bill. So I dont think that is in the category of what I would consider a spending bill. When asked what he thinks would be the proper income tax rate, Paul responded, Well the best would be zero. I mean we lived most of our history with zero income tax. But youd have to have a proper size government. Youd have to have the proper role for government. You cant be the policemen of the world and not have an income tax. So I would not have all my troops around the world. Id bring the troops home and I wouldnt have a military industrial complex that demands so much; but I wouldnt have a welfare state either. And under those conditions you dont need an income tax. But we have to raise money right? The host essentially asks. So how do we raise money with zero percent income tax? To which Ron Paul responds, Well how did they raise it before 1913? They had excise taxes and some import taxes, but it wasnt the matter of how you raise the money, it was who was demanding the money. But theres an endless demand when you concede so much to the military industrial complex and a militaristic foreign policy and you say that you have to redistribute wealth from cradle to grave and take care of people.

234

Obama Drama

I think when people take money from you and give it to somebody else, thats equivalent to stealing from you. I dont want to take any of your money. I want you to invest it and create jobs...who gets all the benefits when you run a system...where youre pretending to redistribute wealth? You serve the special interest and the powerful corporations. Then when you get into trouble who gets bailed out? They get bailed out, Wall Street, the banks get bailed out, and who gets stuck? Its the tax payers. Thats why you need income tax, so you take care of the wealthy. The host mentioned that its not 1913. Apparently he had not idea that Paul was alluding to the Federal Reserve Act, created in 1913. Paul then clarified the difference between defense spending and military spending. Saying he would not cut defense spending. He described military spending, saying what if we put troops in Libya this week or next week, thats serving our national defense? No, its going to cost a lot of money but it wont serve our defense, its just military spending. (19) As Major-General Smedley Butler titled his book about the military-industrial complex, War Is A Racket.

Bin Laden Meets CIA Before 9/11

Once I started researching 9/11, I had no idea how many facts and strange news reports I would find hidden in plain sight. This one seems to be one of the more serious reports about Osama bin Laden having contact with the CIA months before September 11th, 2001. Written by Alexandra Richard and translated by Tiphaine Dickson, the French newspaper Le Fargo ran a story one month after the World Trade Center attacks with the headline: The CIA met Bin Laden while undergoing treatment at an American Hospital last July in Dubai, by Alexandra Richard. (20) The October 11th, 2001 Le Fargo article claims that while receiving medical care in an American hospital in Dubai, part of the

235

Lies Conceal Truth

United Arab Emirates (UAE), Osama bin Laden met with local CIA agents in July 2001. The claim is made by A partner of the administration of the American Hospital in Dubai who says bin Laden was there between July 4th and 14th, 2001. The report says bin Laden started this journey to Dubai from an airport in Quetta, Pakistan. Once in Dubai, bin Laden was admitted to the American hospital with his personal physician, bodyguards and others. The report continues, Osama bin Laden was admitted to the well-respected urology department run by Terry Callaway, gallstone and infertility specialist. Dr. Callaway declined to respond to our questions despite several phone calls. Alexandra Richard, the writer of the article, points out that back in March of 2000, Asia Week ran a story about the declining health of Osama bin Laden. Suffering from a kidney infection that is propagating itself to the liver that requires specialized treatment, we are given a motive for Osama to go to the Dubai hospital, a hospital fully equipped with VIP suites. Richard goes on, According to our sources, bin Ladens travels for health reasons have taken place before. Between 1996 and 1998, bin Laden made several trips to Dubai on business. Two weeks after the attacks of 9/11, the United States would pressure the Central Bank of the Arab Emirates to freeze assets and investments of 26 people or organizations suspected of having on-going contact with bin Ladens organization. The local CIA agent reportedly bragged about meeting with bin Laden. The day after Osama left the hospital, the wellknown agent who bragged about the encounter to locals in Dubai was called back to headquarters in the United States. According to Arab diplomatic sources as well as French intelligence, Writes Richard, very specific information was transmitted to the CIA about possible terror attacks inside and outside of the United States. A DST report dated 7 September enumerates all the intelligence, and specifies that the order to attack was to come from Afghanistan. An emergency meeting between the French foreign intelligence service, the DGSE, and senior United States officials was then held in August 2001 at the U.S. Embassy in Paris. Richard reports that the Americans were extremely worried, and requested very specific information from the French about Algerian activists, without advising

236

Obama Drama

their counterparts about the reasons for their requests. To the question what do you fear in the coming days? the Americans kept a difficultto-fathom silence. (21)

Warnings
Republican congressman Curt Weldon and Colonel Anthony Shaffer went public in 2005 about a Pentagon intelligence team that identified the future alleged hijackers Atta and Marwan al-Shehhi in 2000. Its been reported that the 9/11 Commission was told about this information but still concluded that Atta was not identified by authorities in the Unites States before 9/11. Once again, there is a direct contradiction to the 9/11 Commissions Final Report. On February 26th, 2004, the 9/11 Commission investigators were given the transcript of the OIG, Office of the Inspector General, interview with Mr. Behrooz Sarshar. Sarshar was a translator for the FBI when an informant told two agents about a coming attack inside the United States that involved Osama bin Laden and a plan to fly airplanes into tall buildings, planes possibly loaded with explosives. The FBI agents filled out a report for an on-going criminal investigation using 302 forms. These forms are specifically used, says Sarshar, by agents to report information gathered from the Bureaus assets and or informants. FBI case titled Kamikaze Pilots February 2004, gave the 9/11 Commissioners information about a key FBI asset/informant related to case. These people whom Sarshar referred to where never questioned by the 9/11 Commission; and the story was sent down the memory holeuntil now. Sarshar says that in April, 2001, I was asked to accompany two special agents from the FBI-WFO, Tony and John, to a meeting arranged with this informant. At this meeting Sarshar recounts what the informant told the three of them. This was during a criminal investigation that was about turn into a court case. The informant had vital information on this coming case, having played an extremely

237

Lies Conceal Truth

important role in building the case. The informant, through translation by Sarshar, told the two agents that two extremely reliable and long-term sources one from Afghanistan and one on the Afghanistan-Pakistan border notified me that an active Mujahideen group led by Bin Laden had issued an order to attack certain targets in the United States, and were planning the attack as we spoke. The informant continued, According to my guys, Bin Ladens group is planning a massive terrorist attack in the United States. The order has been issued. They are targeting major cities, big metropolitan cities; they think four or five cities; New York City, Chicago, Washington DC, and San Francisco; possibly Los Angeles or Las Vegas. They will use airplanes to carry out the attacks. They said that some of the individuals involved in carrying this out are already in the United States. They are here in the U.S.; living among us, and I believe some in U.S. Government already know about all of this. Sarshar notes that he assumed [the informant] meant the CIA or the White House. The news alarmed the two agents, who then instructed Sarshar to have the informant repeat what he had just said. After doing so, the two agents began to take notes of their own. One agent, Tony, asked if there was a specific date for this coming attack. Although the informant was not given an exact date, the attack was coming very soon, possibly within the next three months. This was April 2001. The informant also mentioned that they may use bombs; planting bombs inside these planes, maybe the cargo, then have them blown up over the populated cities. Sibel Edmonds wrote that Behrooz Sarshar worked as a GS 12 language specialist with Top Secret Clearance at the FBI Washington Field Office. After leaving the FBI in 2002, he provided his testimony on Kamikaze Pilots to several Congressional offices and investigators, including staff of the Senate Judiciary Committee and the Committees leading Democrat at the time, Senator Patrick Leahy, and the Justice Departments Inspector General Office. We thought he was a pretty credible guy, said former Senate Judiciary Committee investigator Kris Kolesnik, who interviewed Sarshar nearly two years ago as an investigator for a Washington public-interest law firm

238

Obama Drama

handling federal whistleblower cases. Edmonds says, The 9/11 Commissioners had initially refused to interview Mr. Sarshar. He was one of several witnesses from the intelligence and law enforcement organizations with relevant testimonies and reports who were denied access to the commission (the ones that we know of). It was only after pressure from members of the 9/11 Family Steering Committee and memorandums from the congressional offices that the commission reluctantly agreed to interview Mr. Sarshar. However, his entire testimony was omitted from their final report. According to a Chicago Tribune investigative reporter even FBI Director Mueller appeared baffled by the Commissions lack of inquiry into this particular case: FBI Director Robert Mueller, who expected to be asked about the case during an appearance before the commission in April, was surprised when the commissioners never raised the question, according to aides. Edmonds then adds, During my short tenure with the Bureau, I was briefed about this case by not only Mr. Sarshar but other firsthand witnesses, and I saw the actual 302 forms filed with the units squad supervisor (FBI language specialists get to keep a copy of their reports/forms). Edmonds believes that that there never was any real investigation into this horrific event used in reshaping not only our country, but the entire world. (22) The Last Warnings If I were you guys, Id take this extremely seriously, the informant tells Sarshar. If I had the same position I had in SAVAK, Id put all my men on this around the clock. I can vouch for my sources; their reliability. Make sure you put this in the hands of the top guys in Counter-terrorism. After a few months Sarshar found himself translating information from the same informant to the same FBI agents. This time, the informant mentioned tall buildings as a possible target. He once again stressed that the FBI should get more information from Pakistans ISI, stating that after all, they are your guys and they already know all about this. Here, it seems, he was talking about

239

Lies Conceal Truth

Pakistans ISI being your guys and the ones who already know all about this. Then 9/11 happenedSarshar went on to explain, That morning, we heard the news, and all of us ran out to the next unit to watch the CNN footage on the TV screens installed out there. As soon as I saw the planes hitting those buildings I said to myself: Oh my God, oh dear God; we were warned about this; we were told about this; very specifically I almost fainted; I kept hearing the informants words; I kept hearing his last warnings begging us to do something fast. And we had done NOTHING. Now it was already way too late. I felt nauseous; I felt sick. Yet it wasnt just he who felt sick. When he locked eyes with one of the two agents that the informer warned about an airplane attack orchestrated by bin Laden, the agent told him, We fucked this up. The bureau fucked our country. Why?! Later, while going over another assignment with the same two agents, Sarshar asked them what they were going to do about the situation. He said the agents avoided eye contact at first. Tony finally told him, Listen; Frields called us into his office and gave us an order; an absolute order. I asked them what the order was. He said we never got any warnings. Those conversations never existed; it never happened; period. He said this is very sensitiveand that no one should ever mention a word about this case; period. Sarshar worked in foreign counter intelligence and counterterrorism as a contract linguist and then a language specialist employee. He testified during MEK prosecutions in California and was involved in an FBI raid that was covered by Fox News. (23) He believes Sibel might have seen him as some sort of father figure. He was classmates with her father in Tehran, Iran. Edmonds continues, [Sarshar] wanted the Commission to know about an asset debriefing he attended with {blank} and another agent whose name he could not rememberHe said he hesitated to bring it forward because he did not think anything had been done deliberately. He thinks if the FBI had known about the plot they would have stopped it. He provided us the code name and name of the asset. From memorandum for the record declassified.

240

Obama Drama

When asked the reason why he did not come forward, he said he didnt want to cause problems for the FBI. Sibel adds, Sarshar also thought the FBI knew about information regarding a kamikaze pilot. Sarshar passed on the kamikaze information, in a letter he wrote to FBI Director Robert Mueller. (24) Behrooz Sarshar once asked the FBI agent, referred to as Tony, if sharing this information with other agencies wasnt a bad idea. Tony reportedly told him it is not up to them, adding his superior Frields is obligated to submit what he got, everything he gets under Counterterrorism, to the HQ guys in charge of White House National Security Briefings. He always does. So, the White House and other agencies have already heard about this. Did the 9/11 Commission sit on this request? If so then it is similar to the informants warning he yelled in Farsi to Sarshar, Why dont you discuss it with the CIA? They know. Tell the White House. Dont let them sit on this until it is too late. To leave this information out of the 9/11 report raises many questions about complicity of a cover-up. The history books will need to be corrected some day to reflect the lingering questions and unresolved crimes of September 11th. On September 12th, 2001, Izvestia, a Russian newspaper, ran a story with a source who stated Russian intelligence agents know the organizers and executors of these terrorist attacks. More so, Moscow warned Washington a few weeks in advance. These are just a few warnings that went ignored, for whatever reason. (25) The Daily Telegraph adds that two senior Mossad experts were sent to Washington in August 2001 to alert the CIA and FBI, and passed two specific names to the US. Wouldnt we love to know who hose two names were? (26) Bush Tells the 9/11 Commission Bush told the 9/11 Commission the reason he didnt go after bin Laden before 9/11 was there were no good options for special military operations against Bin Laden. Another reason was there were no suitable bases in neighboring countries...and, even if the U.S. forces

241

Lies Conceal Truth

were sent in, it was not clear where they would go to find Bin Laden. President Bush told us that before 9/11 there was an appetite in the government for killing bin Laden, not for war...The problem, he said, would have been how to do that if there had not been another attack on America...Both civilian and military officials of the Defense Department state flatly that neither Congress nor the American public would have supported large-scale military operations in Afghanistan before the shock of 9/11. So without a crisis, such as 9/11, there would no reason for large-scale military operations in Afghanistan. (27) According to several reports, seven days before 9/11, Pakistan General Mahmoud Ahmad was in Washington for a series of meetings. Brian Ross, ABC chief investigator, has stated Federal authorities have told ABC News that theyve now tracked more than $100,000 from banks in Pakistan to...suspected hijack ringleader Mohamed Atta. (28) Times of India reported that U.S. authorities confirmed $100,000 was wired to WTC hijacker Mohammed Atta from Pakistan at the instance of General Mahmoud. Senior government sources have confirmed that India contributed significantly to establishing the link between the money transfer and the role played by the dismissed ISI Chief...including [Ahmad Umar Syed] Shiekhs mobile phone number, [helping] the FBI in tracing and establishing the link. Syed Shiekh had a degree at the London School of Economics. He was jailed in Pakistan just months before 9/11, and was accused of murdering Daniel Pearl, a journalist who worked for the Wall Street Journal. Pearl had been following this money trail, just as any good journalist would do. (29) General Mahmoud would quietly retire, but not before the Times of India reported that the real reason why the general retired was due to evidence of this wire transfer, which India used to link the general to Mohammed Atta. (30) As more evidence came out, more lies were exposed, and more questions were asked. Former CIA analyst Bill Christison wrote an email to friends, August 2006, I spent the first four and a half years since September 11 utterly unwilling to consider seriously the conspiracy theories surrounding the attacks of that day, but in the last half year and after considerable agony, Ive changed my mind. In 2006, Thom Hartman asked Robert Baer, retired CIA agent, if Baer thought there was an

242

Obama Drama

aspect of inside job to 9/11 within the U.S. Government? Baer responded, There is that possibility, the evidence points at it. The movie Syriana is based on the life of Robert Baer. (31) People will believe what they want to believe; but when shown facts that differ from what they believe, and vice-versa, change happens. Aside from the Le Fargo report that in July 2001 bin Laden was at an American hospital in Dubai, receiving some kind of treatment for his kidney, as well as being visited by a local CIA station chief CBS News reported that bin Laden was in a hospital in Pakistan on September 10th, 2001. Pakistan intelligence sources tell CBS News that bin Laden was spirited into a military hospital in Rawalpindi for kidney dialysis treatment. (32) Ron Suskind has said there were dozens of reports generated inside the Defense and State Departments about a possible invasion of Iraq aimed around the spring or summer of 2001, just before September 11th, 2001. (33) LA Times reports in July 2001, both US and Italian officials were warned about a plot to kill President Bush and other leaders by crashing an airliner into the Genoa Summit of industrialized nations. The threat was serious enough for Italian officials to take extraordinary precautions...including closing the airspace over Genoa and stationing antiaircraft guns at the citys airport. Sounds serious to me. (34) USA Today had a story about the North American Aerospace Command, Norad, simulating attacks of airliners being hijacked then crashed into targets with the intent on mass casualties. These drills, ongoing two years before September 2001, could have been taking place on September 11th. What if a drill went live? As part of these drills, one of the targets was the World Trade Center. This just adds to the evidence of foreknowledge of such attacks. No wonder Bush did want to testify under oath and only with Dick Cheney by his side. What does he know? More so, what does he not know? (35) US Attorney General under Bush, John Ashcroft was advised to only fly by private jet for the remainder of his term, according to a CBS report, dated July 26th, 2001, about two months before the attacks. The Justice Department said the advice was based on a threat assessment

243

Lies Conceal Truth

made by the FBI. (36) Someone within the FB had foreknowledge of some type of aerial attack. Who else got this same warning...and who didnt? Bushs Presidential Daily Briefing On Osama In 2004 after hitting roadblocks from the White House, the 9/11 Commission obtained the PDB (Presidential Daily Briefing) for August 6th with the title, Bin Laden Determined to Strike in US. In it is more proof that the White House was again warned about bin Laden flying airplanes into buildings. Also the PDB for August 4th states that FBI information since the time indicates patterns of suspicious activity in this country consistent with preparations for hijackings or other types of attacks, including recent surveillance of federal buildings in New York. The FBI is conducting approximately 70 full field investigations throughout the US that it considers Bin Laden-related. (37) There is a specific mention of Federal buildings in New York. When did Bush receive and read these two daily briefing? Regardless, its a lie that Bush was not warned. FBI spokesman Ed Coggswell has disputed the 70 full field investigations claim, which we later learned was added to the PDB by a CIA analyst at Cofer Blacks counterterrorism center. (38) The commission was able to compare Bushs PDB to the SEIB version, which would have been prepared for top FBI officials and others. The SEIB (Senior Executive Intelligence Brief) version for this same date did not contain the reference to hijackings, the alert in New York, the alleged casing of buildings in New York, the threat phoned in to the embassy, or the fact that the FBI had approximately 70 ongoing bin Laden-related investigations. (39) Why were those who received the SEIB out of the loop? Who didnt want to warn them and why? So we have one version where something was added without the FBIs knowledge, according to FBI spokesman Ed Coggswell, and in the SEIB that top FBI managers may have received and read, information was omitted. Clearly, the left hand doesnt know what the right hand is doing and vice-versa. See no evil, report no evil. Colleen

244

Obama Drama

Rowley, FBI Special Agent, wrote in a 2002 memo, [FBI] HQ personnel never disclosed to the Minneapolis agents that the Phoenix Division had, only approximately three weeks earlier, warned of AlQaeda operatives in flight schools seeking flight training for terrorist purposes! (40) Her story never made it into the 9/11 Commissions Final Report. Tenet told 9/11 Commission that at that time, no connection between Moussaoui, the alleged 20th hijacker, and Al-Qaeda was apparent to him. (41) Later Tenet would remark, We knew who Moussaoui was all the time. (42) From April 2001 to September 10th, the FAA received 52 warnings that mentioned Al Qaeda. According to a Washington Post story in 2005, The Federal Aviation Administration received repeated warnings in the months before Sept. 11, 2001, that alQaeda hoped to attack airlines, according to a previously undisclosed report by the commission that investigated the terrorist attacks. The report detailed 52 such warnings to FAA leaders between April 1st and September 10th, 2001, about the terrorist organization and its leader, Osama bin Laden. (43)
The hole didnt appear to be big enough for the 757. I dont know the scientific theory that was created to justify it being a hole created by a 757. What we need to consider is how did the plane go thru the building with all that heat and not burn us (those on the inside) to a crisp? We need to consider, how did the plane break up so to the point it created a perfectly round hole considering the rate of impact? I didnt know it was a plane until I was informed at the hospital. If I wasnt informed I would have never believed it. I walked through that place to try to get out before everything collapsed on us . . . surely we should have seen something. April Gallop

Pentagon Blues April Gallop worked at the Pentagon, an administrative specialist (with a Top Secret with SCI clearance) with the U.S. Army. While I worked at the Pentagon, at random times, there would be drill exercises utilizing an alarm for us to evacuate the building. Yet on that particular day no alarm. [This is] especially [odd] considering the fact

245

Lies Conceal Truth

of what had already taken place at the World Trade Center. Asked if the Pentagons anti-aircraft batteries would have automatically fired against any incoming aircraft that did not transmit the appropriate friend or foe signal, April agreed. She then gave her statement of what happened to her at the Pentagon on 9/11. I was located at the E ring. From my inside perspective, with no knowledge of what had actually happened on the outside, it did sound like a bomb. And we had to escape the building before the floors, debris etc., collapsed on us. And I dont recall at anytime seeing any plane debris. Again, I dont know what plane debris would look like after hitting a building. But I would have recalled unusual looking pieces similar to plane parts. I have many flashbacks being inside the mouth of death. The images from being inside that building on that day are forever etched in my mind. (44) Norman Minettas testimony indicates that Cheney gave the order not to shoot down the coming aircraft. If the purpose the 9/11 Commission was as Hamilton and Kean claim, to provide the fullest possible account of the events surrounding 9/11, then why was Minettas testimony left out of the final report? One could ask the same about WTC Building 7 and William Rodriguezs testimony about hearing explosions on multiple levels of the World Trade Center towers, including the basement levels. There is no justification for this cover-up. Was Osama With Us? Osama equals Tim Osman. Did Osama receive training in the USA under the alias Tim Osman, as Steve Kolls book, Ghost Wars, points out? (45) General Hamid Gul (then the ISI boss) says bin Laden was fondly nurtured by the CIA adding that the CIA admired him. Bin Laden was always invited to garden parties at the embassy.

246

Obama Drama

In the mid-1980s, al-Qaeda was a database located in a computer and dedicated to the communications of the Islamic Conferences secretariat. Al-Qaeda remained the database of the Islamic Conference. When Osama bin laden was an American agent in Afghanistan, the al-Qaeda Intranet was a good communication system through coded or covert messages. Al-Qaeda was neither a terrorist group nor Osama bin Ladens personal property. - PierreHenry Bunel (former French military intelligence agent, 2004)

Bunel adds, The truth is, there is no Islamic army or terrorist group called Al Qaida. And any informed intelligence officer knows this. But there is a propaganda campaign to make the public believe in the presence of an identified entity representing the devil only in order to drive the TV watcher to accept a unified international leadership for a war against terrorism. The country behind this propaganda is the US and the lobbyists for the US war on terrorism are only interested in making money. (46) The 9/11 Commission stated that there was a CIA unit assigned to bin Laden well before the events of 9/11. This units staff would rise from a dozen staff, according to Ian Henshalls 9/11 Revealed: The New Evidence & the 9/11 Commission Report, to forty or fifty people by 9/11. So what did the CIA know of bin Ladens plot to fly airplanes into buildings? (47) Almost 10 Years Later In Iraq Curveball is the Iraqi defector who claimed that Saddam Hussein had stashes of chemical and biological weapons hidden in his possession in Iraq. Almost ten years later the man code-named Curveball, for obvious reasons, finally admitted what most of the world already knew, that he lied about weapons of mass destruction in Iraq. Eight years since Colin Powell went before the United Nations to convince the world that Iraq had chemical and biological weapons, Curveball, Rafid Ahmed Alwan al-Janabi admitted to The Guardian he lied in hopes of ousting Saddam from power. They gave me this

247

Lies Conceal Truth

chance. Who is this they he is speaking of? The U.S. and U.K. I assume? I had the chance to fabricate something to topple the regime. I and my sons are proud of that and we are proud that we were the reason to give Iraq the margin of democracy. Yet it was all based on lies. Janabi told The Guardian he was satisfied that there is no dictator in Iraq anymore. Someone should remind him that the United States still runs the country that he loves, the country that he sold out, the country where millions have needlessly died because of his lies. This is what you did for your country, Rafid Ahmed Alwan al-Janabi and dont you ever forget it. (48) A Small Benefit From Terrorism Speculation surrounds the timing of the 2004 Bin Laden videos in which the boogeyman scares the United States into taking away citizens rights. Being released just before the November 2004 Presidential Election, even Walter Cronkite pokes fun at the strange happenings. Im a little inclined to think that Karl Rove, the political manager at the White House, who is a very clever man, he probably set up bin Laden to this thing, he tells Larry King. King talks of the double-edged sword Bush faces, the tapes could remind people of the threat of al-Qaeda, or it could remind people that we still have not caught bin Laden. 2004 would turn out to be a good year for Bush. (49) Its also been reported that after the release of the tape, Bush took a six point lead over John Kerry. The Telegraph reported that it was possible that Bush had his greatest enemy to thank for helping him secure another four years in the White House after the appearance of the video sparked a sharp final round of argument over which candidate can best defeat terrorism. The irony speaks for itself. The man who was supposed to be Americas greatest enemy was arguably helping Americas worst dictator. (50) Did terrorism help Bush get back into office? Terrorism also helped the Patriot Act get passed right after

248

Obama Drama

9/11. Resistance was met in congress to bypass the constitution and give Bush authority to wage war; it looked like the Patriot Act wasnt going to pass. Then came another terror attack, in the form of a chemical known as Anthrax. Soon, the Patriot Act was passed and it wasnt long before America went to war with Iraq. Afghanistan was no longer a high priority, even though Osama was allegedly responsible for 3,000 deaths. WTC Buildings
I believe that the building could probably sustain multiple impacts of jet liners because this structure is like the mosquito netting on your screen door this intense grid and the plane is just a pencil puncturing that screen netting. It really does nothing to the screen netting. Frank De Martini (51)

John Skilling was responsible for the structural design of Twin Towers did not think that an airplane, loaded with jet fuel could bring down one of the towers, the building structure would still be there. (52) This was said after the 1993 WTC bombing. Leslie Robertson, one of the chief structural engineers of the World Trade Center, agreed, stating clearly that the twin towers were designed to withstand the impact of a Boeing 707. (53) The fact that the buildings came down in ten seconds at free-fall speed needs to be investigated. Should history record the truth about September 11th, or just what we were told by our government? If there is evidence that contradicts the governments official conspiracy theory of 9/11, shouldnt we be allowed to ask questions and demand answers? If your loved ones perished in similar fashion, what would you do? Where would you go for answers? For help? The weird science of 9/11, as promoted by the United States Government and media is a fraud! To understand this all you have to do is look at the evidence. Visit AE911Truth.org for more information. The truth is rising. Susan Lindauer is telling her story to anyone who will listen. (54) Every day more people are listening. We are living in historic times, where the lies about 9/11 are being exposed and the truth about 9/11 is being exposed.

249

Lies Conceal Truth

9/11 Lies Lead To TSA Groping

CeNation. Morning sausage grabbin here at TSA. Word must be out that Im easy tough enough tonight at 8! Watch it or TSA will violate u! John Cena (Twitter@ JohnCena)

I grew up watching wrestling as a kid. To me it was just an endless universe of stories with comic book-like characters challenging each other to see who truly is the best in the world at what they do! Wrestlers travel world-wide depending on their schedules and like all other Americans, are randomly searched, without having committed a crime. TSA is sending the wrong type of message with these random groping. They are telling us we are all guilty until proven innocent by them. Im glad Mr. Cena could laugh and joke about his groping experience, but truly this is no laughing matter. Theres no need for jokes when a six year old girl is being patted down all over and treated like a criminal. (55) This is DISGUSTING! I am beyond outrage. How can I support flying when this is happening to the future of our world? Theyre being groped in front of our eyes. Still, some people wont care until its them who are violated. Who can tell me this is really fighting terrorism? If the terrorists hate us for our freedoms, why are we aiding them by taking more freedoms away? Police officers cannot randomly walk up to someone and grope them. Why can these idiots at TSA do it? How can any TSA agent who does this look themselves in the mirror? How shameful this is! Outrage does not begin to express how I truly feel. What if this was your daughter? Shes six years old man...and this is America? This is not our America. This is the New Worlds America. This lady runs her hands through the little girls hair, around her buttock, inside the leg area, on the front of her chest...I can barely report this without breaking down crying. That is disgusting! There are only two things that keep me going at this point, God and the fact that the Shadow Empire wants to break

250

Obama Drama

my will, my spirit, and my conscious! I must continue to fight this injustice. Just because Im not sure what I can do, I know I have to do something. ANYTHING! If you see nothing wrong with this, at first glance thats one thing. But of you watch this video and see nothing wrong with this, thats truly sick of you, shame on you! Shame, shame, shame! Wake Up! This is not going to protect America. Even worse is that when the parents protest to such searching of a child they are threatened by TSA. The dad told Good Morning America that their daughter was initially confused about what was going on. However, once the ordeal was over she broke down crying because she really didnt understand what she had done wrong. (56) This poor girl did nothing wrong, yet she is taught by TSA regulations that American citizens are guilty until proven innocent. One more way our government has helped the terrorists as a result of 9/11. Our government uses false flag operations, such as 9/11, to further their global agenda, not the agenda of the American people. For them, its important to break the will of each and every citizen through propaganda and other methods. For us, its important to see through the lies, past the smoke and mirrors, to the very root of the problem. The global agenda might not be the absolute root of the problem but without a global agenda, I doubt so much misinformation about 9/11 would exist. Theres no need to hide the truth if its on your side thats exactly why the Shadow Empire has to hide the truth, because if they dont theres a good chance theyll be criminally prosecuted, or at the very least their credibility will crumble to ashes. I believe we are very close to this happening. The mother did ask for alternatives, I asked for her to be rescanned. They just refused and said they were going to do what they were going to do...We struggle to teach our kids to protect themselves, to say no, its not ok to touch me in this way in this area. Yet here we are saying its ok for these people. Steve Watson points out that a TSA supervisor made it clear in a non verbal way that there would be trouble if the parents caused a fuss and refused to allow TSA agents complete the random pat-down on the child. This could happen to any

251

Lies Conceal Truth

of us. Just as it happened to an 8 year old boy after the story about the girl gained mainstream attention. After the second story came out, TSA said they changed their security procedure towards children. Steve Watson writes that a young boy was looking forward to the trip of a lifetime to Disneyland, but the fun was cut short at Portland International Airport in Oregon when a TSA agent pulled the child out of line and frisked him up and down in front of his stunned mother. (57) For TSA, what happened is standard operating procedure: A video taken of one of our officers patting down a six year-old has attracted quite a bit of attention. Some folks are asking if the proper procedures were followed. Yes. TSA has reviewed the incident and the security officer in the video followed the current standard operating procedures. (58) Arron Dykes points out that the TSA blog deceives the public over the perception that pat-downs only occur for passengers who optout of the scanners, writing, Only passengers who alarm a walk through metal detector or AIT machine or opt out of the AIT receive a pat-down. However, the girls parents revealed what the video did not show that their child had already been sent through the body scanners, and was then selected for a groping enhanced pat-down. Even those who comply with the radiating body scanners are still subject to be searched by TSA agents, violating our constitutional right to privacy. Totally disgusted by what he saw in the video of the six year old girl, Lou Dobbs had Jesse Ventura on his show, Lou Dobbs Tonight, to talk about TSA groping. Dobbs thanked Ventura for suing TSA for violating his 4th amendment rights. (59) Mr. Dobbs looked physically disturbed by the video of the girl. Its sad it takes this kind of video to wake most of us up myself included but watching this video is a lot different than someone telling you about TSA groping. The visuals really grab your soul, and internally, one should recognize that something stinks here this isnt right. Dobbs tells Ventura (who at this point has not seen the video) its outrageous. If it were his children or grandchildren in the video, Mr. Dobbs says, I wouldnt want to be responsible for what I would be saying or doing with those agents. Dobbs also couldnt believe that the people standing in line did nothing. Well Lou, the first time I told

252

Obama Drama

people about this, most of them seemed outraged; imagine if they see this video! How could they let TSA treat a kid like this? Dobbs basically asks. To which, Ventura responds that he just wants TSA to stop treating him like hes a criminal. Ventura can only sue on his behalf. Others will have to sue TSA individually if they are treated as such. This is the first time Ive seen someone who is interviewing Ventura do most of the talking. Mr. Dobbs could not explain enough to Ventura the shame of how TSA is being run with enhanced pat-downs. These enhanced pat-downs started about a year ago from this interview, says Jesse Ventura. The first time it was done to me I immediately went to my attorneys and said I want this stopped. I dont want any money, I just simply want them to cease and desist and stop treating me like Im a criminal. Lou Dobbs again echoes that how TSA treated this kid was just disgusting. Right on Lou! I couldnt agree more! Ventura reminds Dobbs that putting a child into the body scanners and taking a picture should be considered child pornography. People may disagree with that but if one of these scanner photos were to show up on the Internet, it would be considered child pornography. You cannot legally show naked pictures of children in this country, but as Dobbs and Ventura agree, this is not our country anymore. Not even the TSA agents are safe from the tyranny theyre directly or indirectly supporting. It turns out theyre the ones being radiated the most.

TSA CANCER RISE

Executive Director of the Electronic Privacy Information Center, Marc Rotenberg believes that Homeland Security has been hiding the truth about radiation risks from airport body scanners. The EPIC sued the Department of Homeland Security under the Freedom of Information Act, and obtained internal documents expressing concern about the rise of cancer in TSA workers at Boston Logan International Airport.

253

Lies Conceal Truth

According to the released documents, in an email, AJ Castilla, listed as President, A.F.G.E, Local 2617 (an East Boston Union) sent union members an e-mail stating he asked Deputy Federal Security Director (at Boston Logan International Airport) Heather Callahan to please ask TSA Hqs to issue every TSO a radiation monitoring dosimeter device that clips onto your uniform which would periodically be tested by a non-TSA third party medical facility which would track the results over a lengthy period of time and release those results to all of us whom work here. For all the members and co-workers working at Logan International Airport whom continue to report your concerns to A.F.G.E. HQs and to Local 2617 Mr. Castilla sent an e-mail to (DFSD) Heather Callahan. There were two concerns he wished to express. One was that TSA Boston was experiencing a growing number of TSOs working here that have thus far been diagnosed with cancer. The other was TSAs improperly non-monitored radiation threat facing both checkpoint and baggage assigned TSOs. (60) Milly Rodriguez is the occupational health and safety specialist at the American Federation of Government Employees; her union represents TSA workers. Back in December 2010 she said the union doesnt think TSA is sharing enough information. The USA Today reported that the CDC went to a dozen airports in 2003 and 2004 and discovered that 6 of the 281 machines used to screen checked luggage violated federal radiation standards. Some of the six machines had two or three times the radiation limit. (61) More so, TSA and its contractors apparently didnt notice the six machines emitting radiation above the standard level. Lets remember that this is just what the CDC found between 2003 and 2004. Considering theres still growing concerns about a continual rise in cancer diagnosis of TSOs in 2011, its pretty safe to assume that these six machines were not alone in emitting excessive radiation. Given that TSA didnt detect such radiation, the rise of cancer in TSA employees is a serious problem. Not only for TSA workers but everyone. Its in all of our interest to test the body-scanners, independently from TSA or DHS. They have failed in their duty to protect the public and their workers.

254

Obama Drama

Even back in 2008, when the CDCs study was completed and made public, it recommended TSA do something to prevent excessive exposures; still they said there was no direct hazard due to the body scanners but those who know more than me about radiation some of which is in my book Slow Kill have a good idea about low-level radiation exposure and the severity of the long-term effects. So the Boston union takes steps to address the growing concern of TSA workers being diagnosed with cancer and TSA still claims the body scanners are safe. In one of the last e-mails of the released PDF (see index #60) theres a message from Jill Segraves, CSP (Director, Office of occupational Safety, Health, and Environment) to someone whose name is blacked out. In it she tells the person that because TSA systems comply with Federal regulations, the increased risk of developing radiation-induced cancer later in life is extremely small, no greater than other risks people routinely accept in their daily lives. She admits that TSA uses several systems that either contain or produce ionizing radiation. Then she directs the unnamed e-mail recipient to a good reference source for radiation safety as it applies to TSA. She is referring to the OLC Course, Radiation Safety Awareness (SCR-ALLRADSAFETY-001). The course is basically a general overview of standard regulations and proper procedures. Where will this end? Groping and radiation exposure? Who could possibly stand up and do something in congress? Ill give you one guess.

Ron Paul vs. TSA

July 4th, 2011...as America celebrates its independence one man is using the Constitution to bring about awareness to the TSA issue. Its a big issue. You may not fully feel it today, but in the future, were all gonna feel something! Unless we stop them... On his weekly Straight Talk Update, Ron Paul announced he was introducing the American Traveler Dignity Act, which establishes that airport security screeners are not immune from any US law regarding physical contact with another person, making images of another person, or causing physical harm through the use of radiation

255

Lies Conceal Truth

emitting from machinery on another person. From the creation of TSA Ron Paul was opposing the federalization of airline security. An article back in 2001 explained why he thought this federalization was a bad idea. Congress should be privatizing rather than nationalizing airport security...Nuclear power plants, chemical plants, oil refineries, and armored money transport companies all employ private security forces that operate very effectively. No government agency will ever care about the bottom-line security and profitability of the airlines more than the airlines themselves. Airlines cannot make money if travelers and flight crews are afraid to fly...In the current regulatory environment, however, the airlines prefer to relinquish all responsibility for security to the government, so that they cannot be held accountable for lapses in the future. And thats the bottom line... ...of course that was back in 2001. This is what Paul said July 4th, 2011. The press reports are horrifying. 95 year old women humiliated, children molested, disabled people abused. Men and women subjected to unwarranted groping and touching of their most private areas, and in-voluntary radiation exposure...This is the sorry situation ten years after the creation of the Transportation Security Agency. The requirement that Americans be forced to undergo this appalling treatment, simply for the privilege of traveling in their own country reveals much about how the federal government feels about our liberties...Many Americans continue to fool themselves into accepting TSA abuse...they are giving up their liberties and NOT receiving security in return. Last week, for example, just days after an elderly cancer victim was forced to submit to a cruel and pointless TSA search, including removal of an adult diaper, a Nigerian immigrant somehow managed to stroll through TSA security checks and board a flight from New York to LA with a stolen expired boarding pass and an out of date student ID as his sole identification. He was detained and questioned, only to be released and do it again five days later. We have a big problem here, and unfortunately it all stems from the events that took place on September 11th. So if the official story of 9/11 is a lie, and TSA groping and body scanners are based on those lies like the Afghanistan and Iraq wars were based on lies one has to

256

Obama Drama

ask...why lie? What is the endgame? How does this TSA scenario play out? Same as 9/11, same as the wars...it all ends in death. The Shadow Empire, the Global Government, the New World Order, or whatever you choose to call it I call it the devil have plans to reduce the population and maintain what Henry Kissinger wrote about Population Control. This control is not meant for the wealthy by the way. We see it today with the destruction of the middle-class, and it is progressing in destroying sovereign nations, with the intent to bring about a one world system. A system designed to have masters and slaves. If youre reading this, chances are they consider you a slave too. Fortunately for us future slaves (laugh-out-loud) the truth is on our side, so we rise with the truth!

ARE WE WORKING WITH AL-QAEDA IN LIBYA?

On May 25th 2011, former congresswoman Cynthia McKinney reminded Alex Jones, Weve seen it over, and over, and over again. Individuals of wealth and resource, who are able to pull the levers on U.S. military and diplomatic policy, are able to arm a small group of people, give them the financial where-with-all to wreak havoc and terror on a population; and then all of a sudden presto, abracadabra youve got what is called in the media, a civil war. Well its not a civil war. Its a group of people whove decided that they want something that that particular area has. For example, in Sierra Leone, it was diamonds; and when the British Sandline mercenaries went into the home of Fute Sanko, what did they find there? A letter from Maurice Tempelsman proposing to do business. So, this is the kind of thing that motivates U.N. Policy, and I am certain that at the end of an investigation, were we to have one, we would find that there are certain individuals involved in this; and theyre able to dictate to the president [Barack Obama], to [British Prime Minister David] Cameron, to [President of the French Republic Nicolas] Sarkozy, to all of the NATO

257

Lies Conceal Truth

allies, theyre able to dictate them going to war. Al-Qaeda Is Working For US Alex then wonders How can the neo-con media call you [Cynthia McKinney] a traitor for being over there reporting the truth when its admitted that what Gadhafi said three months ago is true. That the main force this is now in The Wall Street Journal, the L.A. Times that is running all this is al-Qaeda. In fact the Al-Qaeda commander, under CIA payroll, admits that he killed U.S. soldiers, or commanded groups in Iraq. So, youre against people that killed US soldiers, and so youre bad. Cynthia McKinney will always remember what Robin Cook, the now-deceased foreign minister of the United Kingdom had to say about al-Qaeda. He just said [al-Qaeda] was the CIAs Rolodex...the situation that the United States is allied with al-Qaeda is not unusual. What is unusual is that they actually admit it.
For years now, weve been sending foreign aid to the very same Libyan government were now spending $10 million a day to fight. And it has been recently discovered that the Federal Reserves bank bailouts even benefited the Libyan National Bank. Now, were taxing the American people to bomb the very nation that we taxed them to prop up. This makes no sense at all. The Founding Fathers did not intend for the president to have the power to take our nation to war unilaterally without the approval of Congress. Its time for the president to obey the Constitution and put the American peoples national interest first. Ron Paul

On June 13th 2011, the United States House of Representatives voted 248 to 163 to invoke the War Powers Resolution, prohibiting funding of any U.S. military operations in Libya. By U.S. law Congress must authorize the president to send U.S. troops into combat. (62) Obama tried to bypass congresss authority with airstrikes over Libya. At the very least, what Obama should have done, if he had a good reason for putting any type of military soldiers into combat in Libya, was obtain a declaration of war from congress. Congressman Dan Burton has expressed his outrage that Obama has received no authorization whatsoever from the Congress of the United States and its in violation of the War Powers Act and the Constitution. (63) The congressman

258

Obama Drama

added that the president is not a king and he shouldnt act like a king. The War Powers Act does give Obama authority to send troops into combat without congressional approval, which seems ludicrous to me. Even so, within two days from sending troops into combat, the president must inform both the House of Representatives and the Senate, so they can vote within sixty days on whether or not the troops should remain in combat. Sixty days later, congress has not given Obama the approval, therefore, theres good reason to believe that what Obama is doing in Libya is in violation of the Constitution and the War Powers Act...its illegal. That never stopped presidents in the past, and this president is maintaining the continuation of illegal presidential activity. No one may be surprised, but are we conditioned to accept this behavior as normal? If so, what does that say about the standards expected of America? Just dont get caught. If It Walks Like A Duck Press TV reported that Obama has not swayed from his stance that Gadhafi must go. In my opinion, this is similar to Bush saying Saddam must go. Qaddafi and his regime need to understand that there will not be a let-up in the pressure that we are applying. Whos we? NATO? The United Nations? Is all of this being done for the credibility of the U.N.? Does this president hope to bypass congress to set a precedent that could lead to the US overthrowing countries as the administration sees fit? Lets be clear, Press TV reported that in early June 2011 Obama did send a letter to congressional leaders, asking for a resolution to back the military campaign. At this point, those who received the message loud and clear have not taken Obama up on his request. Examiner journalist Deborah Dupre writes that US led forces continue the mission to kill Libyas leader, Muammar Gaddafis and his loyal supporters. NATO fighting is also continuing at the oil refinery in Misurata where the US Navy cluster bombed, injuring and killing hundreds of civilians. Libyans are defending Zlitan, one of three

259

Lies Conceal Truth

towns separating Misurata from the capital Tripoli, Berber mountains southwest of Tripoli, in nearby Yafran, and Dafnia near Misurata. According to Al-Jazeera, the town of Brega claims its important oil refinery once operational, could supply the east of the country with much-needed fuel to produce electricity. (64) Back in late March 2011 fighter bombers and cruise missiles struck Libyan air defenses, enforcing a no-fly-zone. It was around this time that reports surfaced about ground forces in Libya, including tanks and various armored vehicles. Micheal Chossudovsky called this a war which has the objective of regime change. Paul Watson writes that while launching air strikes in support of so-called protesters who have commandeered fighter jets and tanks, the protesters that the United States, France, Canada and the UK are supporting are in fact Islamic fundamentalist al-Qaeda cells who want to impose sharia law in Libya. (65) He sums up what every citizen of the United States should know, that some of the very rebels now being funded and trained by western forces were part of the al-Qaeda cell that tried to kill Gaddafi on behalf of the United States and Britain 15 years ago. In March it seemed like the protesters we were helping were good people standing up against a tyrant in Gadhafi. In black and white terms one can see that point of view. Yet when you dig into the facts of the matter certain things do not make sense. Like why would we be helping al-Qaeda in Libya, yet fighting them in Afghanistan and Iraq? and all because of September 11th. So whats in Libya? Micheal Chossudovsky tells Russia Today its about oil, getting control of the oil in Libya which constitutes 3.5% of total oil reserves. The country has one of the largest national oil companies in the world, and the largest in Africa. Still, with new technologies and the oil dependency crisis at the forefront of public debate, I think its ultimately about something more than oil. Oil is a huge part of it, and theres tons of evidence to support that fact. But I am again reminded of John Perkins book, Confessions of an Economic Hit Man, where he talks about how countries are brought down by a shadow force that has control over the American government; enough control to topple a country and place a new leader as the head of a new regime. Its a pattern.

260

Obama Drama

Controlling the oil is not enough. There are those who control those who control the flow of oil in the modern world. They are the ones who send economic hit men into sovereign countries and oppress the people, starve them out with debt, until the United States steps in as a hero for the country, and gains full control of a once sovereign nation, tribe, or peoples. It happens over and over and over again, as history shows. However, history has never shown when this stopped happening. Is it then safe to assume its still happening? Is what is happening in Libya enough proof? We have soldiers dying in Afghanistan and Iraq fighting alQaeda. Now we are told that we may have soldiers in Libya fighting alongside suspected al-Qaeda members. Something stinks here...

Gadhafi
The March 20th report by Paul Watson, writing for Infowars.com, explains how In 2002 French intelligence experts revealed how western intelligence agencies bankrolled a Libyan Al-Qaeda cell controlled directly by Bin Laden to hatch a plot to kill Gaddafi that was foiled in March 1996. The cell was led by Anas al-Liby, who was with Bin Laden in Sudan before Bin Laden returned to Afghanistan. Indeed, it was Gaddafis Libya who put out the first Interpol warrant for Bin Ladens arrest in 1998. Western intelligence agencies blocked the warrant from being pursued, and allowed Bin Laden and Al-Qaeda to go on and kill more than 200 people in the truck bombings of US embassies in Kenya and Tanzania. (66) Why would the United States block a warrant for someone they claimed was responsible for the 1993 World Trade Center bombing? Perhaps they wanted to be the ones to capture bin Laden first? On March 29th Reuters reported that NATOs supreme allied commander for Europe and commander of U.S. European Command, reported flickers of potential al-Qaeda or Hezbollah affiliates found as part of the rebels that oppose Gadhafi. Admrial James Stavridis testified before the U.S. Senate, stating We are examining very closely the content, composition, the personalities, who are the leaders of these

261

Lies Conceal Truth

opposition forces...we have seen flickers in the intelligence of potential al-Qaeda, Hezbollah, weve seen different things. (67) Flickers? Infiltration at best, controlled opposition as worst. Either way, this is appearing to be one more worthless war where citizens will be sacrificed in the name of nothing. Nothing more than death will come from this. The death of the people of Libya will ignite a fire, spread resentment, and diminish peace throughout the world. No one will be safer. Just as with the Patriot Act, TSA regulations, the wars, the result is that the Constitution is further diminished, and the will of the people continues to bend...but not break. Steve Watson writes that the commander of the anti-Gadhafi rebel forces, Abdel-Hakim al-Hasidiadmitted that he had previously recruited fundamentalists to fight in Iraq, and said that the fighters are today are on the front lines in Adjabiya. (68) By March 26th Chris Adams, writing for McClatchy, reported on the new leader of the rebel opposition to Gadhafi, Khalifa Hifler. Khalifa Hifter was once a top military officer for Libyan leader Moammar Gadhafi, but after a disastrous military adventure in Chad in the late 1980s, Hifter switched to the anti-Gadhafi opposition. In the early 1990s, he moved to suburban Virginia, where he established a life but maintained ties to anti-Gadhafi groups. (69) Kurt Nimmo adds that Mr. Hifter is a CIA operative, which likely explains his lengthy stay in Virginia. In 1996, the Washington Post reported that a Col. Haftar (a variation on Hifter) had arrived in the United States and he was reported to be the leader of a contra-style group based in the U.S. called the Libyan National Army, the Wisdom Fund noted at the time. This group is supported by the U.S., and has been given training facilities in the U.S. Its a good presumption that Col. Haftars group operates in Libya with the blessings of our government. (70) An April 4th article by Webster Griffin Tarpley, Infowars.com, explains Turkish Prime Minister Erdogan has rightly warned against the NATO policy of arming the Libyan rebels, since this would be conducive to terrorism. Russian Foreign Minister Lavrov has also condemned any NATO arming of the rebels. Pope Benedict XVIs call for a cease-fire goes in the same direction. Russia, Turkey, China, and

262

Obama Drama

other governments must now formally demand explanations from the State Department as to why the US is providing the most dangerous international terrorists with modern weapons and training, while proposing to award them large chunks of the $32 billion of frozen Libyan government assets, plus a share in coming oil revenues. This is enough to make the Mediterranean, the Arab world, and southern Europe boil over with refugees, piracy, mayhem, and war. Tarpley describes four components that create this secret army that is commanding the rebel forces. The first is provided by the British, and consists of the monarchist and racist Harabi and Obeidat tribes of the Benghazi-Darna-Tobruk corridor, whose traditional culture is that of the obscurantist Senussi Order...Two ingredients come from the CIA. That would be al-Qaeda, founded as the CIAs own Arab Legion against the USSR by then CIA deputy director Robert Gates...in Afghanistan in 1981-82. Another product of the CIA would be Libyan National Salvation Front, based first in Sudan and then in Northern Virginia, which is supposedly sending the CIA asset Khalifa Hifter to lead the rebel military. The French are the fourth component of what Tarpley calls the Four Plagues of Libya. The French arranged the defection of top Qaddafi associate Nouri Mesmari last fall, as reported by Maghreb Confidential. A clique of generals around Mesmari helped foment the military mutinies against Qaddafi in northeast Libya. (71) A May 14th 2011 article by Global Research begins with a letter from Muammar Gadhafi sent to Barack Obama, We are fighting nothing other than al-Qaeda in what they call the Islamic Maghreb. Its an armed group that is fighting from Libya to Mauritania and through Algeria and Mali...If you had found them taking over American cities by the force of arms, tell me what you would do? (72) The article states that less than 2% of the entire Libyan population supports the socalled Libyan pro-democracy movement. As these rebels are armed and trained by the governments of France, the United Kingdom, and the United States, they are assisted by the Arab League in bombing targets in Tripoli, while the collateral damage is all a part of bombing Gadhafi out of his compound, to put a new government in place. Like in Iraq and Afghanistan, this government will not be representative of the

263

Lies Conceal Truth

people of the country, but of the shadow forces that control the heads of countries across the world. Its all part of the plan. Lets not forget what Former CIA officer Bruce Riedel told the Hindustan Times, There is no question that al-Qaedas Libyan franchise, Libyan Islamic Fighting Group, is a part of the opposition. It has always been Qaddafis biggest enemy and its stronghold is Benghazi. What is unclear is how much of the opposition is alQaeda/Libyan Islamic Fighting Group - 2 percent or 80 percent. (73) President Barack Obama told Early Show co-anchor Erica Hill on March 29th that the intervention against Libya has saved thousands of lives. The president said the no-fly zone would assure that Gadhafi is not using his air-power against his own people. In order to succeed in this global mission of ousting Gadhafi from power in Libya, President Obama said hes trying to mobilize the world community to put the squeeze on him so that at some point he makes a decision to leave. Straight out of an episode of the Sopranos; Tony puts the squeeze on his competition until theres nothing left to squeeze. Obama reiterates that at this point there has been no formal attempt to talk to Gadhafi or his loyals. Then he says something similar to what Bush said about Saddam; all Gadhafi has to do to implement a cease-fire is stop going on the offensive in certain areas. After a brief pause Obama continues, He knows steps he could take that would stop the constant bombardment that hes under. (74) So here we have the president admitting there is a constant bombardment of air-strikes over Libya. Of course what is not mentioned is how many innocent lives have been lost because of the bombings. He also doesnt expand on what Gadhafi has to do for a cease-fire, just saying that Gadhafi knows what he has to do. When one isnt being entirely forthcoming, its hard to be articulate. He says the rebels on the ground that weve met with are vetted. If theyve been vetted, how does Obama account for the flickers of al-Qaeda or Hezzbollah that Admiral Stavridis told congress about? How they vetted these people in such a short time is also highly questionable, leading to more speculation of plans previously put in motion, in my opinion. After being asked about the flicker of intelligence that al-

264

Obama Drama

Qaeda or Hezbollah may be part of this spontaneous rebel alliance against Gadhafi, Obama admits that among all the people who opposed Qaddafi, its possible there might be elements that are unfriendly to the United States and our interests. Obama cautioned against jumping into the internal Libyan war with both feet, but had no problem being on the same side as al-Qaeda in order to knock Gadhafi out of power. Obama has already committed so much towards ousting the leader, including trying to bypass congressional approval of airstrikes which include U.S. troops being sent into combat, regardless of the label kinetic action. It was March 21st when President Obama informed the congress that at my direction, U.S. military forces commenced operations to assist an international effort authorized by the United Nations (U.N.) Security Council. The Office of Legal Council, in an April 1st memo, gave the country a poor excuse for the no-fly zones, and why Obama went to the United Nations to receive authority to conduct military operations in Libya. We now know for sure this means troops on the ground, even though this was hidden for a long time from the public. Of course, most people had no idea that Obama would ever send troops into Libya. He had to go to the United Nations because, as we have seen, congress would not vote to authorize the continuation of U.S. soldiers in Libya. Who knows how long the CIA has been on the ground, both covertly and overtly. As Louis Fisher, writing for LAW.com explains, An April 1 memo by the Office of Legal Counsel states that Security Council Resolution 1973 imposed a no-fly zone and authorized the use of military force to protect civilians. Because Libya did not comply with the resolution, the OLC concluded that President Obama was justified in using military force against Libya to maintain the credibility of the United Nations Security Council and the effectiveness of its actions to promote international peace and security. (75) What about the credibility of the United States? Does this make us safer or does it increase the hatred towards the American government? As Obama told Erica Hill, the opposition forces to Gadhafi are saying the right things. Its just too bad our President isnt doing the right thing. For the last time, send our troops home.

265

Lies Conceal Truth

As Ron Paul told John King of CNN, Obama cant go to war without permission from the congress. (76) Paul calls it an insult to the American people and congress to suggest that the President doesnt need to tell anyone hes going to put military soldiers in Libya. In order to go to war in Libya, President Obama has suggested that all he needs to do so is get a U.N. (United Nations Resolution) and then use the force through NATO. NATO was set up to fight and stand up against the Communists. So theyre searching for a mission. Instead of now defending Europe, theyre starting wars.

266

False Flag Iraq

FALSE FLAG: IRAQ

Desert Storm To support the 1991 invasion of Iraq, our government would try and pull at the heart-strings of the good citizens of this country. Saddam Hussein was told that the United States would not intervene if he invaded Kuwait. As soon as he did, we warned him to leave the country of Kuwait. President George H.W. Bush pulled at our hearts with the testimony of a young teenage girl from Kuwait. Behind a curtain, she told a United States Congressional caucus that while she worked at the al-Adnan hospital in Kuwait City, she witnessed Iraqi troops taking premature babies out of incubators, throwing them onto the cold floor to die. It later turned out that this girl was the daughter of a Kuwaiti ambassador to the United States. The public relations firm, Hill & Knowlton were then accused of coaching this girl and several others. It has been reported that this firm received a multi-million dollar contract to help sell the war to the American people. Similarly, to sell the Iraq invasion to the people of the United States in 2003, the Downing Street Memo came into play. The Downing Street memo, (1) is the official briefing from, then head of MI6, Richard Dearlove to Prime Minister Tony Blair on July 23rd, 2002. This is well before the United States officially decided to invade Iraq in order to get rid of its weapons of mass-destruction program (WMD). This memo is significant because Dearlove explains, after meeting with members of the Bush administration, that intelligence and facts were being fixed to justify invading Iraq and the invasion would be

267

False Flags

justified by the conjunction of terrorism and WMD. happened just as they wanted. Plamegate

(2)

This is what

(I have since changed my mind about various views on Valerie Plame. If she does not see anything wrong with the official story of 9/11, I see everything is wrong with her!) What was Robert Novak hoping to accomplish when he wrote the newspaper column entitled Mission to Niger, published on July 14, 2003? More so, what did it accomplish? To understand the question, we have to understand what Joseph Wilson wrote in his op-ed piece entitled What I Didnt Find in Africa, published in the New York Times on July 6, 2003. (3) What Mr. Wilson didnt find in Africa were weapons of mass destruction. So why would the CIA, at the request of the White House, (presumably Karl Rove and Dick Cheney) send Mr. Wilson to find uranium yellow cake, then attack him and his wife, who was a NOC agent for the CIA, when no evidence of yellow cake sales to Iraq was found? NOC means Non-official cover. They didnt like what Mr. Wilson didnt find in Africa. Worse, Bushs 16 words speech were based on what Mr. Wilson didnt find. Though the information about the uranium in Niger was taken out of an earlier speech Bush made in Cincinnati, it would be put back in to Bushs State of the Union speech.
Facing clear evidence of peril, we cannot wait for the final proof, the smoking gun that could come in the form of a mushroom cloud George W. Bush, Cincinnati, Ohio October 2, 2002

If the yellow cake theory was not credible enough to be in a speech in Cincinnati, why was it credible enough to be in the State of the Union speech? Well, more people watch the State of the Union speech. Yet the evidence used to promote Bushs 16 words, The British government has learned that Saddam Hussein recently sought significant quantities of uranium from Africa, did not change between

268

False Flag Iraq

the two speeches. The White House would later admit that these sixteen words should never have been included. Then they blamed it all on the CIA. These were the words that led us into the war in Iraq. The war of lies. A classified 2002 National Intelligence Estimate report would be declassified in mid-2003. The report contained an opinion published by the U.S. Department of State that contradicted what the White House had been promoting to get us into the war of lies. State Departments intelligence agency analysts concluded that the connection between Niger, Africa and Saddam Hussein was highly suspect. This was based on the French consortium that had maintained close control over the Nigerien uranium industry for years. Joseph Wilson was sent to Niger in late 2002 based on inaccurate claims that Saddam Hussein was trying to buy yellow cake from Niger. He was sent because under George Bush Sr., Wilson was the Deputy Chief of Missions to the US Ambassador in Iraq in 1991. In the beginning of what became Operation Desert Storm, he was the last American diplomat to warn Saddam Hussein that he had to leave Kuwait. Saddam Hussein responded by sending a note to the U.S. Embassy in Iraq, threatening to kill anyone harboring foreigners in Iraq. Mr. Wilson held a press conference, with a noose around his neck, stating that if the choice is to allow American citizens to be taken hostage or to be executed, I will bring my own f---ing rope. Calling Husseins bluff, Wilson harbored more than 100 Americans at the embassy, before helping evacuate thousands of people, American and non-Americans, out of Iraq. He was hailed by George H.W. Bush for his heroism, being called a true American hero. From 1992 to 1995 Wilson was posted to African countries, where he served as US Ambassador to Gabon and So Tom and Prncipe. Before retiring in 1998 he was a special assistant to President Bill Clinton and a National Security Council Senior director for African Affairs, helping direct Africa policy. His credentials speak volumes to his credibility. So why didnt anyone listen to him when he found no evidence that Saddam was trying to purchase uranium from Africa? He told them what they didnt want to hear.

269

False Flags

For that, its speculated that Robert Novak did a hit piece on Joe Wilson, and outed Wilsons wife as a CIA agent. The July 14, 2003 piece Novak wrote claimed that Wilsons wife sent Wilson to Niger, without high level CIA approval. Novak claimed CIA Director George Tenet knew nothing of Wilsons trip to Niger. Novak wrote: Wilson never worked for the CIA, but his wife, Valerie Plame, is an agency operative on weapons of mass destruction. Two senior administration officials told me that Wilsons wife suggested sending him to Niger to investigate the Italian report. The CIA says its counter-proliferation officials selected Wilson and asked his wife to contact him. I will not answer any question about my wife, Wilson told me. (4) For years, Valerie Plame Wilson, Joes wife, couldnt defend herself without outing herself and endangering the lives of the people who she worked for and with. Robert Baer, retired CIA agent said that Novaks piece and those like it put many people in jeopardy overseas, some fleeing for their lives. The real operations of finding weapons of mass destruction had been compromised at that point. The media spun the story for years, claiming that Valerie was not a covert agent. It wasnt until Valerie Plame took the stand before congress and set the record straight; stating under oath that she was a covert agent, an undercover agent whose status was classified, and that her boss General Hayden confirmed it. On March 16, 2007, Valerie Plame was under oath to answer the question, Did you send your husband to Niger? Valerie looked at the congress, and stated, I did not recommend him. I did not suggest him. There was no nepotism involved. I did not have the authority. That didnt stop the media and congressional hitmen from continuing their assault on her. Some people still believe that Valerie Plame could send her husband to Niger without any higher-ups being involved...please. They tried to make her a scapegoat. James Knodell was the Director of the Office of Security at the White House. His appearance under oath was met with resistance by the White House until subpoenas were threatened. Knodell testified that as far as he knew, and his records showed, there was zero interest from the

270

False Flag Iraq

White House in investigating who leaked Valerie Plames CIA status anytime after she was outed. All of this chaos was caused because Joseph Wilson didnt keep his mouth shut about what he didnt find in Niger, Africa. When does telling the truth become a punishment? When the White House tries to create a war based on lies. This is why facts are so important. How many people are dying every day because of the 16 words that got us into this war? How many will continue to die because our president refuses to end this war? Who will be the last soldier to die in Iraq? Who will be the last Iraq war vet to kill themselves? Who will be the last soldier to have PPSD? Who will be the last soldier to awaken in a cold sweat, thinking they are back in Iraq, back in hell? Who will be the last person to be tortured in Iraq? Who will be the last innocent person to be killed in Iraq? Who will be the last person to be killed by friendly fire, an RPG missile, or an IED? That all depends on who will be the first United States President to send our troops home. Media? What Media?! Greg Mitchell, September 11, 2003 reported to the people, Now, how much can we blame the media for this woeful misinformation? Its not a minor question, since surveys also show that avenging the 9/11 attacks proved to be the single most important reason Americans backed President Bush in his war on Iraq earlier this year and continue to support our presence in that country...Somehow the public doesnt have its facts down yet, perhaps because many get most or perhaps all of their news from talk radio and gasbag TV shows that do little to promote the actual facts in this matter.
Our military has done everything that has been asked of them, the U.S. cannot accomplish anything further in Iraq militarily. It is time to bring them home. Rep. John Murtha (D-Pa.)

In an article for the New York Times, Mark Mazzetti wrote in 2006 that as details emerge about the killings of Iraqi civilians in

271

False Flags

Haditha and Hamandiyah, it seems increasingly clear that some American troops have come to see the population itself as the enemy. Imagine yourself living wherever you live now. Imagine a unit of combat soldiers who can kick in your door, search your private house and arrest anyone inside they deem a threat, or aiding the enemy. (5) How would your daily attitude be affected by such action? Especially if it happens on a routine basis, to you and your family, friends and associates. Understanding this scenario, you may understand why the United States is not welcome in foreign countries. No country wants to be occupied by another. No person wants their rights violated. When they are violated, people react and things happen. The senator from Nebraska Chuck Hagel told ABC in 2006 that the continuation of the Iraq War was helping bankrupt this country...We didnt think about any of that and not just the high cost of lives and the continuation of that, but our standing in the world. Around this same time, the New York Times said the Iraq debacle ought to serve as a humbling lesson for future generations of American leaders although, if our leaders were capable of being humbled, they could have simply looked back to Vietnam. John Murtha was a congressman in the U.S. House of Representatives (D-Pa.). He was a marine during the 1950s and served in Vietnam, earning a Bronze Star. When he spoke out against the Iraq war in November of 2005, Vice President Cheney wasted no time trying to attack him, basically saying that those who opposed the war were unpatriotic. Murtha responded by saying, I like guys who got five deferments and (have) never been there and send people to war, and then dont like to hear suggestions about what needs to be done. I was home watching this conference live. It seemed like a turning point after the war fever and fear-mongering wore off. Murtha seemed genuine in his speech, and I could detect the emotions of sorrow in his voice each time it cracked. Yet it was the eyes that grabbed me, for in them I could see the hurt. This man had been briefed on what was going on in Iraq, and whatever he was shown, he wasnt happy about it. He shared his feelings about President Bush, the president said its tough to win a war. You know, its tough to wage a war...to wage this war is where the problems been.

272

False Flag Iraq

At this point in my life, the war was so depressing, as I just couldnt shake the torturous feelings on both sides of the war. The people in Iraq, and the people in the military...their lives would never be the same. Their homes ruined, their people raped and tortured--American soldiers hands on the trigger, not knowing who the enemy is--every day and night fighting an endless war, with no clear objective. A war based on lies! I just couldnt stomach it anymore. Then Murtha spoke, and I knew that there were many people who felt the same way I did about the war...it was time to come home; before we lost more Americans than we lost on 9/11. Foolishly, people voted for Barack Obama, hoping he would bring us change. He did. He added more soldiers to a war he openly opposed. If that was Bush, there would have been outrage, but since it was the Democrats guy, since he was treated as a rock star that could do no wrong, no one cared that he was sending in more troops to die. Those who did care, those that do care, we just want our troops home, the permanent bases in Iraq closed, and the people who started this war prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law...so this never happens again. Murtha pointed out that as long as the war seemed distant, as long as it didnt affect the average person, nothing was going to change. This war needs to be personalized. As I said before, I have visited with the severely wounded of this war. They are suffering. Because we in congress are charged with sending our sons and daughters into battle, it is our responsibility, our obligation, to speak out for them...our military has done everything that has been asked of them, the U.S. cannot accomplish anything further in Iraq militarily. It is time to bring them home. Bill OReilly went on ABC and proved to the world that he was just another bullying chicken-hawk, who wouldnt let the facts influence his opinion. So much for fair and balanced. Perhaps Colbert was right to copyright the phrase, The No-Fact Zone, but theres little doubt the phrase was inspired by OReilly. The Fox entertainment host stuck his foot in his mouth when he said, If the Americans go in and overthrow Saddam Hussein and its clean, he has nothing, I will apologize to the nation, and I will not trust the Bush administration

273

False Flags

again, all right? Sounds good to me. Dont Forget On March 17, 2003, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein 48 hours to leave the country, taking his two sons with him. The day before, Vice President Dick Cheney told Meet the Press, We believe he has, in fact, reconstituted nuclear weapons. The invasion began March 20th, 2003; if you dont include the air strike on the Iraqi Presidential Palace on March 19th. Initially, there were four countries who invaded Iraq based on the lies of Bushs 16 words, The British Government has learned that Saddam Hussein recently sought significant quantities of uranium from Africa. The United States had an estimated 248,000 troops, while the United Kingdom had 45,000. Australia had 2,000 troops, and Poland had a whopping 194 soldiers ready to fight in the illegal war. Up until the time of this war, congress was the only governmental body who could officially declare war. By giving over the keys to the car to a dry drunk, President Bush, congress gave up their power, and ignored the constitution that they swore to uphold. Some congressional representatives did not support the war. Others would later agree that the war was a bad decision, but kept funding our troops to die anyways. That disgusted me then and it disgusts me now. There is no good reason to keep fighting a criminal war. If you think the war was, is, or will be a necessary war, get your butt over there and fight in it! Perhaps then you will learn why wise people are reluctant to go to war and the foolish rush into violence...or send others to fight a war for them. Washington fought for what he believed in. Bush never fought in a war. Ever.
It takes two to speak the truth. One to speak and the other to hear. Henry David Thoreau

274

False Flag Iraq

The Sellout of Our Nation Thanks Colin Powell for tricking me on national TV into thinking that Iraq was a threat that had to be dealt with immediately, or they were going to get us! Thanks for making me believe your phony drawings and paintings of trucks supposedly capable of carting WMDs across Iraq. I really appreciate the evil work you have done to my country. I hope you have to wake up every morning, look yourself in the mirror filled with shame. I hope you mentally feel every death, every injury, every rape, and every torture that has taken place since the invasion that you helped sponsor. I hope you are proud of the millions of lives you have helped ruin...for they are the millions of lives you could have helped save. Shame on you. Shame on anyone who supports this war. Shame on me for once supporting it blindly. Do you, Mr. Powell, now wish you could go back in time and change the past? Perhaps you cant time travel, but you can tell the truth. The whole truth, and nothing but the truth about Iraq...so help you God. How have we come to this? In the year 2000, Charley Hanley became a Pulitzer Prize winner. In late 2003, this special correspondent for the Associated Press wrote a piece that completely discredited Colin Powells presentation to the United Nations, which Powell presented in February of 2003. Hanley said, Powell said most United States experts believed aluminum tubes sought by Iraq were intended for use as centrifuge cylinders for enriching uranium for nuclear bombs. Hanley points out that this view, essentially created by the CIA, was not being shared by the State Department bureau and Energy Department experts. At two sites, wrote Hanley, Powell said trucks were decontamination vehicles associated with chemical weapons. When these allegations were checked into, they turned out to be false. Powells painting presentation convinced me, but only out of fear. When I examined the facts, that a painting is not proof of his allegations, I began to think differently. But at the time, I wanted to believe Mr. Powell. I trusted him. I have learned my lesson. After the invasion, Hanley continued, U.S. authorities said

275

False Flags

they found two such truck trailers in Iraq, and the CIA concluded they were part of a bio-weapons production line. But no trace of biological agents was found on them, Iraqis said the equipment made hydrogen for weather balloons. Basically, almost everything Powell told the U.N. turned out to be fabricated or exaggerated. The evidence to these claims just wasnt there, but it was good enough for the media to call Powells presentation a slam dunk. Excuse me? Did I miss something here? Hanley added that Powell said Our conservative estimate is that Iraq today has a stockpile of between 100 and 500 tons of chemical-weapons agent. To this day, theres been no report in Iraq of these allegations. Powell stepped down later. Perhaps it was the perfect opportunity to spend time with his family, as they say. Weapons of Mass Destruction The 60th annual black-and-tie dinner of the Radio and Television Correspondents Association took place on March 24th, 2004, at the Hilton Hotel. Bush was the main speaker in front of 1,500 people. At this point in time there were close to 500 American soldiers killed in his Iraq War. President Bush takes the stage and pokes fun of the reason that we had to get rid of Saddam Hussein, Those weapons of mass destruction have got to be somewhere. He checked the drapes nearby, looked under the papers on the podium, Nope, no weapons over there. Maybe under here? Though he couldnt find the weapons of mass destruction, he did find a photo of the Skull and Bones secret symbol. The joke was met with laughter by the media filled crowd. (6) As our soldiers continued to fight a war based on lies, our leaders back home were having a good dinner, a good laugh, and another American kiss-ass session in the history of our country. There is absolutely nothing funny about encouraging delusional antics. Overall, the tasteless jokes by Bush were inappropriate. More so, the people in the audience who responded with laughter should put themselves in the shoes of a fallen soldiers loved one. Our media has a responsibility to report real news. They have a

276

False Flag Iraq

responsibility to question trivial actions made by a United States President. Those in the media circles who laughed that night should be ashamed of themselves. Aside from the thousands of soldiers we lost at that time, what about the unnumbered amount of innocent Iraqis affected by our un-warranted invasion? Bush A delusional leader. In late October of 2006, Bush met with a group of conservative news columnists. During the meeting, Bush gave General John Abizaid credit for the propaganda slogan, If we leave [Iraq], they will follow us here. How many times have you heard this argument? If you were informed during the Vietnam War, this pattern might seem familiar. For me, when I first heard this slogan, I thought, Yeah that makes sense. Most propaganda does make sense in a simplistic way. Yet, when you analyze the consequences of leaving Iraq today, you may realize its not as simple as if we leave, they will follow us here. Somehow, with a straight face, Bush told the columnists, I believe when you get attacked and somebody declares war on you, you fight back. And thats what were doing. There was no counter to his statement. Not one of the columnists brought up the fact that Iraq did not attack us. We attacked them. Did these columnists feel the same way as Bush? Where was the factual data to suggest that Osama bin Laden and Saddam Hussein were working together? Osama allegedly attacks the United States of America, and America responds by attacking Iraq? But of course, Bush was the man who told a reporter he doesnt think too much about Osama or where he is. He was more concerned with Saddam Hussein and invading Iraq. Why? How To End This War? More than 300 U.S. soldiers have died in the war in Afghanistan since May 15, 2009, the day when the first major wave of

277

False Flags

new troops ordered by President Barack Obama arrived in the country, reads the opening paragraph for the article written by Edwin Mora. The article, titled, Third of All U.S. Casualties in Eight-Year Afghan War Have Occurred Since Obama Ordered Escalation, is an article that should be used as a weapon of words to remind people that we are still involved in a senseless war, even though we have a new president. What has really changed? When people voted Barack Obama into office, how much time were they planning on giving this man in order for him to show the United States that the old president is not like the new one? Mora, writing for CNS News, on February 24, 2010, in the article makes it known that of the 308 soldiers who have died since mid-May 2009, 287 were killed by enemy action. (7) I stand by the phrase I have heard echoed since the beginning of this war, One death is one too many. I also maintain that anyone who agrees that we should be over there in Iraq and Afghanistan should join up and fight the good cause; if they truly believe that. The most common argument I get is, well, we cant cut and run. To them I say, Then go sign up. Join in the war if you truly believe its the right thing to do, even if you believe that we have to stay there now. Now? How long is now to the soldiers who are over there fighting for nothing? Its an eternity to them. Its ridiculous. We cant bring them all home today? We can start bringing them home today. If a president can make an illegal executive order and push the Patriot Act through congress, he can make another executive order stating flatly, Our troops are coming home today. American patriots always claim that America can do whatever it wants, yet we cant bring our troops home from an illegal war? Or two? Im not buying that argument. Its easy to say, We cant cut and run from behind the warmth of America. Yet to say we have to leave Iraq puts one in an unpatriotic category with claims that we who want to leave Iraq are endangering our troops. They are in danger now! They will be in more danger every day they remain there. A war based on lies cannot be justified. So lets take them out of danger by bringing them home. To anyone who thinks we cant just leave Iraq, I spit out the Obama campaign slogan, Yes we can.

278

False Flag Iraq

When asked by CNN about Barack Obama and John S. McCain, during the 2008 presidential election, Congressman Ron Paul answered, Their foreign policies are identical...They want more troops in Afghanistan. They want to send more support to Georgia and protect the oil line there. Neither one says bring home the troops from Iraq from the bases you know the bases are going to stay there, the embassy as big as the Vatican, thats going to remain. So there foreign policies are exactly the same. Theyre both very, very aggressive with Iran. So I would say theres no difference. On September 2, 2008 Ron Paul spoke in front of a crowd of 15,000 people from all over the country at the Target Center in Minneapolis. The rally for the republic was made possible when Ron Paul was told that his access and participation in the Republican National Convention would be limited. I can come to the floor (of the RNC convention) but I cant bring my staff. I must be chaperoned by an RNC staff member at all times. Held as a counter convention to the RNC, the rally for the republic would remind me that it is time for America to return to its roots. Hearing Paul speak energized me. The fruits of your labor belong to you and not to the government, said Paul to a thunderous crowd. Naming a bill the Patriot Act and voting for it doesnt make you a patriot. Support our troops. Let them be able to speak their mind, whether officially in the military or not. The idea that we cant speak out against our president because hes our boss is (in my opinion) a very secretive form of brainwashing (we are to respect the Office of the President, not necessarily the man). It teaches our troops not to ask questions, to kill because you are told to, and to stand up for what the president thinks is right, not for what you think is right. What kind of support do we give our troops, not just in a time of war, or a real war (World War I and World War II), but also after they come home. Stop cutting the veterans benefits. That is supporting the troops. Stop having our troops train mercenaries like Black Water who once trained by US soldiers, take their jobs and get paid a whole lot more. Our troops protect these men, putting themselves in harms way, making only a third of what mercenaries and contractors make.

279

False Flags

Support our troops means nothing if it means Stay the course. I cannot speak for the soldiers in Iraq and I have never served in the military. I know some people who would say that I cannot have a knowledgeable opinion on these matters. To them I would say that I have never been to the moon, but after doing extensive research, I can understand the facts about the moon, what we know for certain and what we can speculate on. For 2 years now, the White House has not been forthcoming about the war in Iraq, says Rep. Diane Watson from California. She refers directly to Joe Wilson and the consequences of outing a CIA operative, the NOC agent, Valerie Plame. Her time quickly expires after her comments. Oh, I dont get five minutes? she seems a bit surprised at the short span of time given to her. She gets an additional four minutes after a short discussion. She points out how Bush said hed fire someone for leaking the name of Valerie Plame Wilson, only to change that statement to hed fire someone if someone is convicted. She then quotes Bush Sr. and his thoughts about someone who outs a CIA agent. Bush Sr. is not as forgiving as his son, though he wasnt put to the test so severely. This was one of the turning points for me. This was the pill that forced me to journey down the rabbit hole, never to return to the world I once knew. Anyone familiar with this story (Plamegate) knows what I am talking about. From the beginning, this was a controlled demolition of its own. Outing a CIA covert agent is a serious offense, for outing a CIA agent is treason. Ask former CIA agents and analysts like Ray McGovern (because those employed by The CIA cannot or will not speak up) how many lives were possibly lost when Valerie was outed? How many people were forced into hiding because of this ultimate smear campaign against her and her husband Joseph Wilson? What was Valerie Plame working on? What was her assignment? It was to find out about Weapons of Mass Destruction. Unfortunately, her husband did not find the information that Vice President Dick Cheney was looking for. For his efforts, Joe Wilson was smeared to death. Yet being the great

280

False Flag Iraq

American he is, he stood in the face of the smear campaign, and wrote the book, The Politics of Truth. After reading his book, I began to look behind the curtain and see who is pulling the strings of this country and the entire world. It changed my life forever. Joe Wilson stood up and sacrificed himself because he knew that the Bush Administration had lied about their reasoning for going to war with Iraq. 16 Words
The British Government has learned that Saddam Hussein recently sought significant quantities of Uranium from Africa. President George W. Bush, during his January 28th State of the Union Address.

The famous sixteen words will forever be placed in the history books, whether people wish to recognize this or not. Those words have killed over 4,000 of our troops, injured possibly hundreds of thousands and have caused the death of perhaps millions of Iraqi citizens who breathe the same air as we do. A straw man might perhaps be someone like Noam Chomsky. A man who acts like hes for the people, for freedom of speech and then calls conspiracy theorists out of touch. He may be there as a gate keeper, to keep the liberals in line, making sure they dont cross over to the side that also believes that JFK and RFK were not killed by a lone gunman. These are some of the most dangerous people and a continual threat to truth. Bill Clinton does not believe that 9/11 was an inside job. Fair enough. But he goes further to slander those who do. Thus a smear campaign has begun. Blind and loyal Clinton followers will do the same, turning Bill Clinton into an Icon; then those in love with the idea of Bill Clinton will never question the words he says. Therefore how easily it is for Clinton to lead the sheep as he wishes. For these same people would probably follow him if he were to say that 9/11 was an inside job. How dare you, Clinton said to someone who asked about 9/11 truth.

281

False Flags

How dare you sir. How dare you ignore the physical evidence that is backed up with science, physics, and eye-witness testimony from firefighters, maintenance workers, police, EMTs, and bystanders. That doesnt include the strange events surrounding the alleged 19 hijackers and the attacks at the Pentagon and in Shanksville Pennsylvania (Flight 93). Even more evidence is coming out as this book is being made. The international Center for 9/11 Studies sued NIST to get them to release four terabits of information that heavily include evidence that explosives were used on 9/11 to bring the WTC towers down. That information will only prove what you have read, and what you will read in the future. The truth is the truth. I just go where it takes me. Mr. Clinton has never presented any facts to prove the 9/11 Truth Movement wrong. Such an intellectual person should be able to have a real debate with someone from the 9/11 Truth Movement. So right here and now I am challenging Bill Clinton to debate me on 9/11. Any time, any place. I doubt he will. Then again I doubt he would debate anyone who represents the Truth Movement. Bill Clinton, I have a dream too. That one day you will be revealed for the real straw man you are. At the highest ranks, there is very little difference between democrats and republicans. I realize that now. Over the years, many people have tried to convince me of this. To those people I apologize. They are right; I was wrong, dead wrong. There is very little difference between a neocon (John McCain) and a neoliberal (Hillary Clinton). Once we see this fact, we will realize we need a third party. For in reality we have one party with many factions, faces and agendas that do not include the vast majority of the American people, or the good will towards mankind. So in addition to my challenge to Bill Clinton, I would also advocate the Independent Presidential Ticket should have Ron Paul and Jesse Ventura on it. These are two men who love this country and have been on the inside of government at state and national levels. They know what needs to be fixed, exposed, and abolished. Id like to see them run for President and Vice President in the 2012 Presidential Elections.

282

False Flag Iraq

Facing clear evidence of peril, we cannot wait for the final proof, the smoking gun that could come in the form of a mushroom cloud George W. Bush, Cincinnati, Ohio October 2, 2002

Joe Wilson is the guy who was sent to Niger, Africa through the CIA by someone in Vice Presidents Cheneys Office. If you are familiar with the name Scooter Libby, then you have probably already read Mr. Wilsons article from the New York Times. If not, Mr. Wilson, (who had been an Ambassador to Africa under President Clinton and was the last American to speak to Saddam Hussein before the Gulf War in the early 90s under George Bush Sr.), was sent to Niger to report his findings on the allegation that Saddam Hussein was trying to acquire the means to create weapons of mass destruction; basically, to create a nuclear bomb. So during the January 28th 2003 State of the Union address, President Bush told the nation, the world watching, that The British Government has learned that Saddam Hussein recently sought significant quantities of Uranium from Africa. These allegations later proved to be false; thanks to Mr. Wilson who was sent to investigate in Niger. Mr. Wilson already knew people in Africa and was welcomed when he arrived. He found nothing to prove Mr. Cheneys theory. In fact, he found evidence to prove the opposite. Still, his findings were used by the President of the United States to further stir up allegations against Saddam Hussein. Worst of all, the President lied to the American people on national television during his 2003 State of the Union Address. He said the famous 16 words in which he claimed Saddam Hussein was trying to buy Yellowcake Uranium (for WMDs) from Africa. He lied to us plain and simple, even after The CIA said to pull the 16 words out of the speech. The 16 words were not credible to the CIA. Yet when the smoke cleared it was the CIA who would be to blame along with Mr. Wilson and his wife, Valerie Plame Wilson, who worked as a Covert CIA agent, a NOC agent. Even worse is the fact that most people inside the United States dont know this. I hope you will research this now, or ask questions to whom you see as a credible person. Maybe they dont know either. Try

283

False Flags

doing a Google search on your computer. You may be very surprised at what you find. Start with Mr. Wilsons article in The New York Times titled, What I didnt find in Africa. Then go see the 2010 movie about this, Fair Game, starring Sean Penn and Naomi Watts.

Torture
Waterboarding is torture[no one is] above the lawwe need to look forward as opposed to looking backward. President-elect Obama told George Stephanopoulos, January 11, 2009 (8)

Lets understand why the president wants to move forward, Jesse Ventura beings to explain to Alex Jones, because the democrats

284

False Flag Iraq

are involved too. Now maybe they didnt order it, but in my opinion, they certainly knew what [was] going on and they didnt step forwardso they condoned it and went along with it. Thats why they dont wanna continue with it. Whenever the government tells you its time to move on, that means that both parties are involved and both of them did something wrong. They dont want you to know about it, so they want you to move onin light of the fact that its basically all democrats and republicans in the congress and everywhere out there, theyre gonna move on and well be left like we always are, yelling out, Wheres justice?
No good intelligence is going to come from abusive practices. I think history tells us that. I think the empirical evidence of the last five years, hard years, tells us that. Gen. John Kimmons (head of U.S. Army Intelligence, Sept. 6, 2006) (9)

To this, former CIA analyst Ray McGovern told Consortium News, (as reported on January 16, 2009) Chalk it up to my bias and my experience as an Army intelligence officer but Ill take Kimmonss word over any blue-suited desk jockey no matter how many stars on the shoulder of the latter. (10) Around 2009, National Intelligence Director Mike McConnell told Lawrence Wright of the New Yorker magazine, Whether it is torture by anybody elses definition, for me it would be tortureIf it is ever determined to be torture, there will be a huge penalty to be paid for anyone engaging in it. It is more difficult than I think a lot of people realizePart of the challenge that you have is that you have a bunch of folks that have been detained, many of whom may be very dangerous who have not been put on trial or have not gone through some adjudication. And some of the evidence against them may be tainted even though its true. And so how to balance creating a process that adheres to rule of law, habeas corpus, basic principles of Anglo-American legal system, by doing it in a way that doesnt result in releasing people who are intent on blowing us up. Barack Obama told Mary Bruce of ABC News as reported on January 12, 2009, when discussing why he wont immediately close Guantanamo Bay torture center, I mean, detention

285

False Flags

center for suspected terrorists. As long as activists like Cindy Sheehan, We are Change, Mark Dice (Resistance Manifesto) and other real watchdog groups keep putting pressure on our government to close this hell hole, we have not lost. Unfortunately, that means very little to the people inside the torture center; most of these people have not been formally charged with anything. It is us, the United States, who is breaking the rules of the Geneva Convention. Thus, by breaking these rules, the U.S. Government has put our troops in more danger, should they be caught behind enemy lines. Torture is very contagious. As one superpower uses it and feels no repercussions, why wouldnt other powers on the global stage feel the same way? Monkey see, monkey do.
For a long time the last refuge of scoundrels was Patriotism. Now its the war on terror. Norman Soloman (11)

For anyone to use the tragic events of September 11th for political means or as a tool for deception or propaganda is not only insulting to the victims, their families, the firefighters, the police, the first responders, and the brave people who tried to help others, but its very insulting to the intelligence of the country. It shows how little these shadow governments respect us normal human beings. Dont they see that everything in this world is temporary? Why dont they realize that there is more to life that power and destruction? We should pity these people to some degree. I know its easy for me to say that, but looking at it from a spiritual perspective I can only feel sorry for them. Its like the kid who gets beat up by his father his whole life. What does he do when he grows up? He beats on his kid, ad so on and so on. Well, somewhere down the family line, someone has to say enough is enough. America has been beat on and beat on. Now we turn around and force everyone else to feel the pain we are gong through, but at a much more brutal level than we did. Now we see false flags taking place all over the world. As we explore and research history, we find that this has been happening for quite some

286

False Flag Iraq

time, perhaps since the beginning of time. Well for me, its enough. I cannot cower in a corner and wait for the cavalry to arrive. We are the cavalry. We are the ones who must pick up the ball and run with it. Then we must pass it down to our children, ensuring they never forget what happened that day and what a false flag operation is and why it is wrong! If someone punches you, do you punch him back? Of course, its an instinct for survival. Still, just because you punch him back doesnt make you any less wrong than the person who punched you first. If you are a Christian, you should already know this. Its easy to say, but its hard to follow right? Just make sure that after you punch him back, and its days latermake sure that you recognize that punching someone in the face will change nothing. It only creates a problem on top of another problem. Pretty soon, no one knows where the problem began; thus, no one can solve the initial problem. We have piled feuds on top of feuds on top of feuds. So what do we have? More feuds being created as violence spreads across the world. Pretty soon, no one cares how the problem started; they just want to wipe out the other side. Any Christian who calls for, or tries to, justify the murder or death of anyone should be ashamed of themselves. That doesnt mean let someone kill you or hurt someone else. People cant tell me they follow Gods law (the Bible) and tell me how God interprets killing vs. murder. Thats for God to decide. They may have become the very thing they hate the most...for if the devil loves when we kill each other, who does a murderer serve? God or Satan? Seek wisdom by gaining knowledge, being merciful towards others, caring for others and doing for others. Dont worry about what other people think about you, you cant change that. Trust me; you will only spin your wheels in circles trying to convince someone of something they dont want to believe. Still, when they challenge you, stay strong, to the point, and carry the most important thing of allfactual evidence. The rest is in the eye of the beholder.

287

False Flags

Torture is what interrogators use when they desire a particular answer; its unreliable and therefore not recommended in cases where the truth is desired. Eric N. Golub

...Why were these men dressed as Mehdi Army? In 2004, President Jimmy Carter basically told the London Guardian newspaper that President Bush exploited the 9/11 attacks and that the press had not held him to account. The basic reason is that our country suffered, in 9/11, a terrible and shocking attack and George Bush has been adroit at exploiting that attack, and he has elevated himself, in the consciousness of many Americans, to a heroic commander in chief, fighting a global threat against America...Hes repeatedly played that card, and to some degree quite successfully. I think that success has dissipated. (12) Originally reported in the Times and other news outlets like The Socialist Worker Online (September 24, 2005, issue 1969), two British troops were caught and arrested by Iraqi police; accusing British Special Forces of planning a terrorist attack in the city of Basra, Iraq. The two soldiers were reportedly disguised as members of the Mehdi Army, a militia under the leadership of the Shia cleric, Moqtada alSadr. This according to what Sheikh Hassan al-Zarqani, a spokesperson for rebel Shia cleric Moqtada al-Sadr, told Socialist Worker: (13) We called a protest outside the mayors office on Monday demanding the Sheikh be released, Sheikh Hassan said. This protest was peaceful...But events in our city took a sinister turn when the police tried to stop two men dressed as members of the Mehdi Army driving near the protest. The men opened fire on the police and passers-by. After a car chase they were arrested...What our police found in their car was very disturbing weapons, explosives and a remote control detonator...These are the weapons of terrorists. We believe these soldiers were planning an attack on a market or other civilian targets, and thanks be to God they were stopped and countless lives were saved...The two men were taken to the police station to answer questions about their activities. That afternoon the British army came in tanks and armored cars demanding the two be released...The police refused as they [two British soldiers detained] were considered to be

288

False Flag Iraq

planning terrorist attacks, and as they were disguised as members of the Mehdi Army, the police wanted to know who their target was...Thousands of people gathered to defend the police station. British troops opened fire and the crowds responded with stones and firebombs... ...Why were these men dressed as Mehdi Army? Sheikh Hassan said. Why were they carrying explosives and where were they planning to detonate their bomb? he continued. Were they planning an outrage so that they could create tensions with other communities? Were they going to kill innocent people to put the blame on al-Qaeda, who do not have any support in our city...The soldiers drove a tank into the police station and threatened to kill the police officers if they did not hand over the two terrorists. It is only then, to save any further loss of life, that the men were released...We have only the warmest regards for the British people, who have protested in their tens of thousands against the occupation of our country. We fear that the British government plans to send more troops. We appeal to the British people to oppose this as it can only deepen our problems. (additional research from the book Towers of Deception by Barry Zwicker) I remember hearing this story briefly on the radio back in 2005. On October 15th, the British government formally apologized to the Iraqi government over mistakes made by their army unit which stormed the Basra police station. They never mentioned what became of the two SAS British soldiers. There has been no further investigation. It has been reported that British Army Colonel Frank Kitson is mostly responsible for creating what is known as the British Army counter-insurgency playbook. He led many subversive operations against the Mau-Mau in Kenya during the 1950s and is linked to false flag operations conducted through British SAS moles that were implanted into the Irish Republican Army in Ireland (IRA) during the 1970s. I had to reread the title before showing it to a friend, Two British Soldiers Busted Disguised As Terrorists. When I mentioned this false flag Iraq scenario to a U.S. veteran, Mathew Onstad who was stationed in Iraq, he was shocked. Hes the same guy I interviewed for this book. He probably thought I

289

False Flags

was full of crap until I showed him the story written in Barry Zwickers book, Towers of Deception, and how the British troops, with their tank, rammed the Iraq prison and got their soldiers back, and also freed a lot of other prisoners in the process. I encouraged him to Google the story. I dont know if he ever did. But I think he believes me. One day we will know more of the truth. All we need is the right people in the right offices of congress and high political places of power throughout this country. If there is a country wide movement, we may push a few blocks off of the secret vault that lives in the world of classified.
...Get the cabal who engineered 9/11 for imperialist and plutocratic reasons stopped before they do still more damage to our country and our planet. David Ray Griffin

If this story is accurate (false flag Iraq), then something should be done to ensure that this type of incident cannot happen again. We need to show that there will be consequences for such treasonous actions or it will continue to happen over and over. How each person chooses to fight will probably be different. Suicide Josh Barber was a former combat soldier, who committed suicide outside of an Army Hospital. Kelly Barber, Joshs wife, spoke out about her husbands tragic death saying, My husband fell through the cracksMy husbands death shouldnt go in vain. As I did my daily search for news, I came across this sad story that is becoming more common each year. As I read at Infowars.com, which picked up the story from USA TODAY: The Marine Corps reported 41 actual or suspected suicides in 2008, a 20% increase over 33 in 2007. In 2007, the Army counted 115 suicides, the most since tracking began in 1980. By October 2008, that record had been surpassed with 117 soldier suicides. Final numbers for 2008 have not been released. Suicides among Iraq and Afghanistan

290

False Flag Iraq

veterans doubled from 52 in 2004 to 110 in 2006, the latest statistics available, according to the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA). Theres things that go on over there youd never believe, Barber told one of his best friends, Justin Haelle, during a trip home in 2005, things Ill never be able to tell Kelly about. (14) Theres something wrong in America when we have two unjustified wars and force our troops to do our dirty work, while we sit behind a desk drinking coffee and wine. I feel so guilty right now. I know that on some level this is my fault. I feel it is all of our faults. We have lost our way in America. The economy is at an all time low. Gas is at an all time high, and yet soldiers like Mr. Barber fall through the cracks of society every day. What can I do to change this? As of this writing, it appears I can do nothing. That is, unless I pray and let God lead to me to wherever I should go. This information does not come across my desk so I can just ignore it or put it aside. There is always something I can do. Sometimes its as simple as spreading the word about information people should know about. Weve had people brought into the V.A., turned away, who have committed suicide after coming back from the war with posttraumatic stress disorder. Weve had people redeployed to Iraq, even after they were diagnosed with post-traumatic stress disorder. We have 300,000 Iraq and Afghanistan war veterans coming home with traumatic brain injury, physical brain damage. We have 300,000 Iraq and Afghanistan war veterans who have filed disability claims with the federal governmentOn every night, 200,000 people who have put on the uniform and served this country sleep homeless on the streets, Aaron Glantz, (a journalist who has been covering the stories of US military vets returning from Iraq and Afghanistan) tells Amy Goodman of Democracy Now. Maybe people dont want to know. Still, in my opinion, they should know. That does not mean that I can force this knowledge down peoples throats. I will wait for an opportunity to share this information, or any information, at the proper time and place. I will hold this information for those who want to know or seem interested in it. When I feel them shutting down (being extremely quiet or defensive) I will

291

False Flags

have to learn to stop at that point. It wont be easy, for I am not perfect. My flaws shine like the rays of the sun, for all to see. God has been good to me and has blessed me. That is why I feel guilty when I see those around me who are not as fortunate as I am. As God has shown love for me, I must in-turn show love to others. Frankly, the soldiers of our country deserve better treatment. As I discussed with Pavel Kulikov, soldiers returning from Iraq or anywhere else should have the resources they need to further their life once they have fulfilled their military obligations. Until Pavel said this, I thought it was common sense. Then I began to realize that he was saying this because we do not have the available resources for our veterans. Why not? What do we expect them to do when they return home? Its hard to believe that anyone going into the military will come out the same. For better or for worse, it is my opinion that the service changes you. Its just my opinion, but I plan on asking every soldier I can if they are different now that theyre out of the service. Of course, those who have seen combat and those who have not may have very different opinions on this subject. Well see.
Imagine that you come home from Iraq with post-traumatic stress disorder, a mental wound, or traumatic brain injury, physical brain damage often caused by a roadside bomb. The first thing that you have to do just to get in the door at the VA is to fill out a twenty-six-page form where you substantiate exactly how you were wounded, where you get letters of support from your battle buddies, from your commanders. You subpoena your own Army records, often with the help of your congress-person. And you present to the [Veterans Affairs] a gigantic claim folder, which they then sit on for an extended period of timejust to get in the door. So we take our veterans when theyre most wounded and most vulnerable and exploit them by making them fill out a mound of paperwork just to get in the door. Arron Glantz (on Democracy Now) (15)

The true number of incidences of suicides among military veterans is not known, according to a report in 2009 by the Congressional Research Service. Based on numbers from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the VA estimates that 18 veterans a

292

False Flag Iraq

day or 6,500 a year take their lives, but that number includes vets from all previous wars. (16) It just gets worse and worse every year. I was listening to the radio and it was mentioned that out of every 100,000 arrests (roughly) one of these people will die due to tazer use. They were using this statistic to promote the use of tazers. What a bizarre thing to do. As far am I am concerned, one death due to tazers is one too many. I feel the same about these soldiers dying, not only in time of war, but when they return home. They dont seem to be getting proper training on the transitional phase from military life into civilian life. How much longer are we going to let that be the case? As with most activism, its usually those who are most affected by the problem that take to the streets, knock on the doors of congress for help and support, and bring about change Its not a president. 18 veterans taking their life in one day should be grounds for some change in the way we take care of our soldiers when they return home. This problem cant be solved overnight, but it can be lessened we can at least try to lessen it, ok? I do not believe that George Bush and his supporters of this incredibly stupid war support the troops. I believe they support what the troops can do for them, in particular carrying on with the mission. They support the troops as a whole, as an object, but not individually. Individually, our government as a whole has shown little to no evidence that they support the people who they call troops. If they care about these people as individuals, then perhaps they wouldnt be so quick to jump into other countries and to falsely and illegally democratize other nations. To be blunter, you could view the relationship between the United States and the countries we have permanent bases in as you would view the relationship between a full glass of water and a straw. These other countries are the glass and America is the straw. What America does is suck all of the water out of the glass, and once its empty, we move on to the next cup, doing the same thing to another country. People who really support the troops know what the troops go through in a time of war and are hesitant to send our countrymen to

293

False Flags

invade another country. They realize the stress and shell-shock that our past veterans have suffered in the name of democracy and freedom and dont want future generations to go through that again. The reason why we have so many troops spread out across the world is because we have special interests all over this planet. The powers that be arent thinking of this country first, theyre thinking on a global scale; which is something George Washington and other founding fathers warned against in the early days of colonial America. Capitalism, stock markets and banks have always been a big threat to liberty and freedom. Suicide is a delicate issue and each person should have the freedom to have their own opinion on this issue. I think we all can agree that we dont want our soldiers, past, present and future, to commit suicide. I dont want anyone to commit suicide. In my opinion, real Christians, Muslims, Jewish, and other peoples of faith do not do such actions. If I want to make Muslims look bad, I dress up as Muslims, create a Radical sect of this religion and train pupils to blow themselves up. Thus, people are given a false perception of what a Christian or Muslim really is. The devil likes that. It aids evil. So we must try to be against it. Living for God, I can never take my own life. Its not for me to say what happens to someone who does, only God truly knows the answer (in my opinion). Cindy Sheehan I have always been a fan of Cindy Sheehan. I wish I could have moved to San Francisco just so I could vote for her when she ran against Nancy Pelosi in 2008. Anyone who wants to start a grassroots movement could learn a few tips from her. Cindy became an activist after a confrontation with George W. Bush. She wanted answers about the war and the reason why her son died. We all do. She has been called to activism and continues to do so, having successfully landed a Sunday radio show, Cindy Sheehans Soapbox here in the bay area and online. Cindy Sheehans Soapbox then landed a radio gig in Dallas Texas. Go,

294

False Flag Iraq

Cindy, go! I decided to write an email to her and ask her the question that was on my mind. Never did I expect an answer. Most people I write to, asking this question, either give me a pre-programmed response, or dont even bother to write back. She was the first to give a real response to my real question. Dear Cindy Sheehan, We here in the bay area are so excited that you did so well against Nancy Pelosi. As someone who has several cousins returning from Iraq, I share a lot of your concerns, not only for our state, but for our country. This is my question; do you believe that the official 9/11 Commission Report should be re-evaluated? Greg Fernandez Jr. Castro Valley, California Well, it didnt take long for Cindy to answer my question. She wrote back to me and then presented my question on-air during her debut show. Boy was I presently surprised. Dear Greg, I will answer your question on the radio and to you here. I have always called for a valid investigation into 9/11thanks for your question. Love & Peace Cindy On the first episode of Cindy Sheehans Soapbox on 960

295

False Flags

The Quake in the Bay Area, my question was picked as the question of the day. Her show aired Sundays at 2 p.m. and was sponsored by real people, making real donations; not corporations looking for favors. On air, her answer was very in depth and I encourage you to download her first show and listen for yourself. To have my question be on the first show of hers is an honor. To have her write me back is what I only expected from normal people who actually read their emails. Cindy asks more questions than most people. The way she responded to my question tells me she is very skeptical of the 9/11 Commission Report, as well as how Bush and Cheney handled the days after 9/11, or years rather (since it took over a year to put enough public pressure on Bush to investigate this crime). We will continue to call for a real investigation until we get one. Its that simple. It doesnt matter if it takes a hundred years, the truth will come out. The truth will be known one day. Until then, we keep moving forward, yet also looking back so we dont make the same mistakes again. In the last eight years this country has suffered unimaginable terror. Its more than enough and its time for it to stop. Activists like Cindy Sheehan have shown us that we the people do matter. If no one is watching the store, its only a matter of time before the cash register is robbed. So when Americans like Cindy ask questions to our elected officials, we should not smear her. We should respect her freedom to do so. Thats what makes this country great; we can be diverse and still respect each other. That is, if we choose to. So I thank you Cindy for your real patriotism and inspiration. It takes courage to pursue the truth. It takes strength to keep going. All she ever wanted from our president was an answer to why her son died in Iraq. In her shoes, wouldnt you want the same? Dont we deserve answers, even if we do not get any accountability out of this government? Shame on the president, shame on those who voted for us to go to war and shame on myself for not doing more to speak out against the war. In the beginning, I was for the war. Today, I am shamed. My country is lost. Where is the justification for going to war against Iraq? Where is the legal justification? Where is the moral justification? All I see is a bunch of cowards who dont want to fight,

296

False Flag Iraq

they just want to wipe out the rest of the world, and Im talking about this country! Our leadership wishes to wipe out the Muslim world. Why? Real Muslims would not do what the so-called Muslims did on 9/11. Real Muslims, like real Christians, simply do not kill themselves. When radical Christians attack buildings and blow things up, do we call them Christians? No they are not. Perhaps, they are doing evil acts to make Christians look bad. Ever think of that? Put yourself in the shoes of someone else, or one may be thrown your way; far, far away across the world, if an invading country bombs you, your children, your neighbor, what would you do? Would you denounce your religion and become a terrorist? Which group is more effective in the long run? Violent protesters or real peace activists? If we use Jesus Christ, Martin Luther King Jr., and Gandhi as examples, we can come to a clear understanding. If we want to stir the pot, we can find other examples of who stirs things up. Then we look at the messages of these two opposite sides and choose which side we would want to be associated with. Think of your children, sisters, brothers, nephews and nieceswho of these two groups (violent vs. peaceful) would you want them to be a part of? Torture Memos First Amendment speech and press rights may also be subordinated to the overriding need to wage war successfully. John Yoo, Former Bush Administration lawyer (wrote in one of the seven newly released torture memos) University of California, Berkeley School of Law. From 2001 to 2003 he worked in the United States Justice Departments office of Legal Counsel, assisting the Attorney General. He helped with the Patriot Act and was responsible for the torture memos that advised Bush how to torture and get away with it. Around the same time and day that the new Attorney General Eric Holder released the seven (what many call) torture memos we found out that the CIA had destroyed ninety-two interrogation tapes of Abu Zubaida

297

False Flags

and Abd al Rahim al Nashiri. It is claimed that they were victims of the torture known as waterboarding. Waterboarding, without getting too graphic, is simulated drowning. Try to breathe with a pillow case over your head while someone pours water on the pillow case that covers your head. It is a brutal procedure that has never been proven to work. If it was proven to work, I have no doubt that the CIA or government would gladly give us common folk evidence to boast about it. They forget, like we Americans forget, that in the USA, torture is illegal as in accordance to the Geneva Convention. The memo that authorized the CIA to waterboard suspected terrorists needs to be released or others may suffer the same torture method. Torture is wrong under any conditions. In one of these seven memos, Mr. Yoo said that the Justice Department would not enforce U.S. laws against torture, assault, maiming and stalking, in the detention and interrogation of enemy combatants. On October 6, 2008 and January 15, 2009, Steven Bradbury, the principal Deputy Assistant Attorney General in Bushs Department of Justice, issued disclaimer memos basically saying that what was written in those seven memos did not reflect the current views of this Office. Glenn Greenwald writes, The fact that John Yoo is a Professor of Law at Berkeley and is treated as a respectable, serious expert by our media institutions, reflects the complete destruction over the last eight years of whatever moral authority the United States possessedwere now a country that literally exempts our highest political officials from the rule of law, and have decided that there should be no consequences when they commit serious felonies. (17)
Gitmo, they call it, the base down in Cuba for alleged al-Qaeda terrorists. An internal report that I wrote about in a book I did years ago, an internal report made by the summer of 2002, estimated that at least half and possibly more of those people had nothing to do with actions against America. The intelligence we have is often very fragmentary, not very good. Seymour Hersh (on Democracy Now) (18)

On December 1, 2005 John Yoo, former Deputy Assistant

298

False Flag Iraq

Attorney General of the United States appeared in a debate in Chicago with Notre Dame. During the debate Yoo said the president has the authority to order interrogators to crush the testicles of children in order to get information from their parents. Heroes of our Country
Being out there and actually seeing it, as far as the progress and how the US carries themselves, how they interact with everybody, the whole outlook kind of brings it back to reality and you realize that you were being told one thingtheres more to the truth than how they sugarcoat it. Pavel Kulikov (U.S. Army, 1st and 25th Infantry Division in Washington) You have a technique called Recon By Fire which means you roll down a certain area and you fire at basically nothing, to try to draw fire, to try to find out where people are. Mathew Onstad (U.S. Army, 4th Infantry Division, Second Brigade, part of the 367 armored unit, stationed in Fort Hood Texas)

If we cant take care of our soldiers over here, how are we going to take care of them as they go over there? If the rights and freedoms they are fighting for us over there are stripped away over here, then what have they really accomplished?
At that point, where youve already done a Recon-By-Fire, your cover is blown. Everybody knows what youre doing and theyre just saying Roll down these streets and either fire first or get fired at so our tanks can come in and find the people that are firing at you. On multiple occasions, every time wed go down there theyd be firing at us. Mathew Onstad

The real heroes of this country are those who would stand up against all enemies, foreign and domestic to protect their country and other countries in need. Our soldiers are dying every day. The responsibility to take care of these brave men and women belong to us, the people of the United States. We cannot turn our backs on these people who would give up their lives in order for us to keep our freedom. Yes, in order for me to sit here and drink coffee, rant and rave

299

False Flags

about this and that, I have to thank the soldiers that have made this possible. For we live in what was once a great country. In many ways it still is, but in many ways it has changed. Not that you didnt already know that. Ive had the utmost respect for our soldiers since I was five years old, playing with G.I. Joes action figures. The first time I saw the movie First Blood, I didnt understand what I was watching. I thought I was watching an action movie. My interpretation now is that it was a movie about a soldier who fought for his country and came home to be spit on by people like me. American. I will not let that happen to the soldiers of Iraq and Afghanistan. Thankfully, I have not met anyone who would spit in a soldiers face, literally or figuratively. It shows that we are more supportive of our troops this time around. So if the troops believe we are fighting an endless war, an unwinnable war, maybe we should support that feeling as well. I do. I also support being honest with our troops when we tell them that there is a connection between Osama bin Laden and Saddam Hussein. There isnt. I support giving our troops the proper military equipment they need, including body armor. I support that our troops be used as military soldiers, not police officers in Iraq. I support that we take care of our soldiers, while in the battle field or 30 years later at a Veterans hospital; the fact that more soldiers are committing suicide in 2008 than in the last three or four years is ridiculous. The fact that this is not mainstream news is simply unacceptable to me. How do you feel about this? Last time I checked, a few months ago, there were over 6,000 suicides from soldiers since the beginning of the Iraq war. Not all were related to the Iraq war, but they did all have one thing in common. PPSD, Post Partum Depression Syndrome, or severe stress. All Im saying is that we have to take care of our soldiers. Its similar to those who think that abortion is wrong and every life counts (which I agree with), then turn around and cut social and educational programs that our children need. There is no reason that any child should be left behind. We shouldnt need a bill to tell us that. Even the no child left behind bill sounds good on paper, but has not met its objective. In short, they care about the unborn child, but dont seem to

300

False Flag Iraq

care as much once the child is born (then theyre on their own, its the parents problem). Some of us do the same to our soldiers. We care about them while they serve, but once they are out of the service or speak out against the mission, theyre mostly on their own. Teachers, police, firefighters, public servants and United States Military soldiers should have the highest paid jobs in this country. No veteran should have need for anything that relates to the basic needs of life. They should be taken care of for the rest of their life. Any hospital for Vets that needs money, staff or anything else should be priority one. Not priority some. They are heroes of this country. Lets treat them like such. Its not my problem. I have heard this line too much, by too many people. Theyre not my kids. How does that affect me? When a child is not properly cared for, grows up with nothing positive in their life and commits criminal acts, it becomes your problem. When a soldier, like Rambo (I understand hes not real), is trained to kill and then not trained how to return to civilian life, that may become your problem as well. As long as we all live in the same world, it does affect us all. Whether we choose to ignore it is a whole other issue. When a soldier believes that he is in Iraq fighting Osama bin Laden, I consider it my problem. I do not find it unpatriotic to let that soldier know that he is wrong. For anyone who still believes that there is a connection between Osama bin Laden and Saddam Hussein, they better double-check their facts. Even our former president was forced to admit that there is no connection. For the soldiers in Afghanistan who believe theyre hunting Osama bin Laden in a cave that cant be found, they should check the FBI website to see what the FBI says about Osama bin Laden and the events of September 11th. I had a chance to sit down with two soldiers and try to get a better understanding of how they feel Pavel Kulikov and Mathew Onstad; knowing what they know now, as opposed to what they knew then. Are these soldiers unpatriotic for questioning the Iraq war? Is a soldier not capable of thinking for themselves? Why are we so quick to condemn soldiers who have spoken out or disagree with this war? I dont want to create more Rambos who feel betrayed by their country.

301

False Flags

I want to promote that a real soldier should only fight a real war. According to the constitution, the Iraq and Afghanistan wars are not justifiable legal wars approved by congress. For only congress can declare war, as written in the constitution. Yet as a whole, congress gave up this right to the president. Will Obama get rid of the Patriot Act? We can only hope so, but time will tell. The first interview I did was with Pavel Kulikov. This young Iraq vet puts the cool in Kulikov. Hes so relaxed, so open and honest. Theres so much about the war scene I would like to know, yet I can see on his face that talking about Iraq is not on his to do list. War changes people, home and abroad. Life can never be the same. The one question I really wanted to ask him would end up being the last question I did ask (off the record). Do you believe that 9/11 was an inside job? If you have never thought of this question then it would seem that Im some conspiracy nut. In order to think that though, you would have to ask yourself if you are a conspiracy nut too. A conspiracy must be one or more persons who conspire to commit a crime. If you believe that 19 hijackers planned and executed the acts of September 11th, 2001, then you are a conspiracy theorist too. So before I ask, Is it an inside job? I should ask, Do you believe the official story? Every soldier I have talked to so far does not believe the official story. It is the soldiers who will need to stand up and tell the world this, not me. Who am I? Ive never served, so how can I know what Im talking about right? Well Ive never been to Mars but I could tell you a lot about itif youll listen. Lets begin with the interview of Pavel Kulikov. Okay, so how did you become a soldier? I began. Great question right. My journalism teacher Mr. Schwartz would have been proud. I was lost, didnt know what to do, where to go...kind of at a point where I didnt know what I wanted. Pavel was 18 at the time when he decided to join the army. Only 18 years old and already lost, I could definitely relate. I think a lot of people in this country can relate to Pavel as well. Who hasnt felt lost? Originally I walked in with my friendthey were given him

302

False Flag Iraq

the information and I ended up asking more questions than him, I ended up joining and he didnt...the military itself has a way of presenting the information. Im not saying that they lie, they just present the nicer things, traveling the world, and kind of paint a picture for you. They have a very good presentation? I asked. Yeah, but I mean once youve been in it and you get out [of the army], if I had to try to talk to [the army] now Id see right through them...now when I talk to all the recruiters I see all the gaps...its like, this is the good but they dont tell you what the bad is. I was 3rd Infantry Division in Korea, Pavel continued. 1st and th Infantry Division in Washington, thats the one I went to Iraq 25 with...I went from November 18th 2001 to December 31st 2005...so a little over 4 years, I got stop-loss for the last two months, month in a half. What is stop-loss exactly? I asked. Its when you get extended involuntarily, your contract expires, same with my brother, Pavels brother Andrey was stationed in Iraq at the time of this interview. He was suppose to get out in March but they stop-lossed him for another 8 months Basically, stop-loss is when they extend your military service without your permission. When I got out from Korea it was 2003...I went straight to Washington. Thats when they were mobilizing the new unit to go to Iraq. They kinda pumped it up like, Youre going to a mobilized unit, youre gonna get all these new toys, its a new unit that the army is trying to put together...their new attitude was...anything can happen anywhere in the world and well be there in 48 hoursthat was the concept of the unit I was in. He paused realizing he had gone off topic. I wanted to hear more about this new unit now. I asked the question again, Did you feel we were justified in going into Iraq? When I got to Washington, John McCain showed up [with] President Bush. I was like 15 feet from him, they were all giving the speech, were the good guys, theyre the bad guys. I think you get caught up in the momentSo I think my view at that time was yeah were doing the right thing out there, not excited to go out there, but

303

False Flags

you know what, let me go out there and do what I have to do. How did that view change? I think about two weeks, no more than a month of actually being in Iraq, and seeing how everything was unfolding in Iraq and how the US military was handling itself, the amount of professional level that they had in them. Which was a lot? A little? No it was really... trying to make it a big deal, everything a big deal...a lot of micro-managinga lot of unnecessary time spent, how can I put this, misuse. Misuse of time, misuse of finances. The amount of effort, the amount of time, the amount of energy that everybody was putting into it, it was like for what? There was no result. Everybodys all, its for the greater good, the greater good, but...there were no results we saw when we were over therethe focus kept switching from one thing to the next thing, to the next thing. What did they have you do over there? Ground surveillanceWe were the only combat MOS (Military Occupational Specialty), that saw action. That means we were able to go out there and do missions for them. It was more so of trying to find out where the enemy is at, analyzing, collecting information, using our equipment that we had out there to predict where the enemy is going to be at, where theyre movement is at, and reporting it up the chain of command. Did you ever see anything where soldiers went overboard? Anything illegal or immoral? As far as illegal and immoralyou see things, butif you just turn your head and say its not that big of a dealI compare it to when youre in the United States, driving. Its like, you know youre not supposed to speed, but if you go a little overboard, if you get caught, its not that big of a deal. So theres more of that kind of attitude. But to see somebody get killed for no reason and just walk away from it, I was never exposed to that. I never witnessed that. How has this war changed you? You kind of grow up a lot faster cause you see things that a normal 18-21 year old doesnt really see. Theyre not exposed to it. They dont have to think in those terms, as far as looking over your

304

False Flag Iraq

shoulder consistently. It did change me, but I cant say it was all bad. So joining the army made you a stronger person? I think it made me a really stronger person, compared to where I was before, as far as the amount of pressure, the amount of stress I could deal with. In that essence, its a positive thing but as far as being stressed out, over-analyzing things, thats the little downside to it. You think you over think things now? Uh, he said as he thought about that question, hopefully not over-analyzing it. Yet still analyzing it he said, To a point. I look for triggers. If I get upset, or if something gets to me, I look for triggers to see why did that happen? Once I locate triggers, then I just avoid whatever triggers it. Then he hit me with that little thing thats been bothering me since the first time I saw Rambo, First Blood. But it doesnt get taught when youre getting out of the military. They dont say, Hey, these are the issues youre going to be dealing with. This is how you deal with them. Its just like, oh youre out. So theres a lot of people, a lot of my friends, that are having DUI after DUI after DUI. Theyre unable to find a trigger. They dont know how to deal with certain things, you know? So I think theres a big misstep, as far as with the government, when it concerns people leaving the combat scene and just getting thrown into the civilian world where its completely different. How should they handle these soldiers coming back from the combat zone? There should be a lot more time going into the actual redeployment process. What that means is from the time that you touch down in the streets, there should be a lot more programs, a lot more educational programs dealing with yourself, self-being, letting [soldiers] know this is what youre going to be dealing with [now that youre out of military service]. You hear a lot of stories about people coming back from Iraq. Theyre just like, they come back & get out, they cant hack the civilian world, so you see that they kill themselves or they kill their families because they dont have any resources to get to. If they have a problem, they dont know who to talk to, or who to go

305

False Flags

see. What do we (America) need, more money? You cant say a lot more money needs to be invested in it, Pavel answered, just a lot more resources that troops and soldiers need to be aware of and have access to. They dont want to do anything to jeopardize the American view on the war. Its not a positive one right now, but if they get exposed to any kind of information like this, its gonna make it worse for them to handle. What about in a spiritual sense? How has this affected you? I think it made me a lot stronger. I just kind of braced myself, having the mentality of You know what, if something happens out there to me, its gonna happen. But obviously theres gonna be someone thats looking over me. Knowing when time gets tough, I could always turn to somebody & always say this is whats going on, I need help. So knowing God has helped out a lot? It gives you a resource, something you can fall back on. Somebody you can turn to when times are not the most joyful out there. And a lot of people that dont have that resource, they dont have anybody to turn to, it makes life for them a lot harder. Did you ever pray out there? Oh yeah, before I would leave for combat. It just puts you in the right state of mind. If I didnt do that, instead of doing my job, Id be more concerned about myself, my safety, looking out every which way, over-analyzing things and worrying about things. Is it hard to adjust from life in wartime, because were not legally at war, since only Congress can legally declare war, is it hard to adjust when you came back [from the Iraq war]? I think it was a really big difference. When I got out, relating to my friends that I hung out withnot being able to relate to them, whatever I valued they didnt value, there were different view points, even with small interactions. You grow up a lot maturity-wise. When I got out, certain view points that I had, certain things I was thinking about, they werent able to relate to because they were never put in that position. So it was tough. For the longest time they were thinking thats not normal (behavior), why am I thinking about this or worrying

306

False Flag Iraq

about that, but in reality a mature person would think about those things, or address those things. So because of what youve been through, you take life more seriously? Yeah. What did they (the army) tell you youre going to Iraq for? The greater good. You know, were doing this to protect everybody and this is the right thing to do and everybodys behind you, everybodys supporting you. Would you recommend the military to someone? When people approach me and say theyre thinking about joining the military, my reply to them is dont even think about going to the Army, the Marines or the Navy. I said if youre honestly gonna think about going, do something in the Air Force. Why? [In the] Air Force, you get a lot better treatment as far as the well being for the soldier. The Air Force, when theyre in Iraq and they see the living conditions for the army and theyre bad, the Air Force wont even put their troops in there. If they do force them to go in there, they get paid additional funds per month for just dealing with it, dealing with the environment. So as far as career-wise, its better education, more beneficial in that sense. I remember we had talked about, one day, you were passing out Ron Paul fliers to some of the soldiers and people at the V.A. hospitals. Now what inspired you to do that? I asked. Just hearing him talk and his viewpoints on it, said Pavel. Where did you hear him talk? On the internet, he answered. I think in just hearing his outlook, his philosophy on the economy, the government, the war in Iraq. Just hearing him mention those subjects, talking about them, I can really relate to his view points on it. The honesty, its just more logical thinking. Hearing him speak about it just kind of motivated me more because its something that I believe in, something that I believethis is how it should be. So you would definitely vote for Ron Paul? I asked. Yes, came a quick reply. If he was independent, third party,

307

False Flags

I dont care. Now, the first time you saw McCain as compared to how you see him now, the same? No, cause I saw Bush the first time too. Bush and McCain, when they talked, I think it was August of 2004 when they came up to Fort Luis Washington. Both of them talked. Even back then, I had a different viewpoint on Bush. Im like wow, this guy knows what hes talking about. I know nothing about Iraq. If this is what he says, thats how it is. The thing with McCain, when he came up and talked it was more a motivation for the troops to let them know that theyre fighting a good cause, a good just fight. But that view point changed within a couple months of being in Iraq. Seeing what theyre saying and seeing the reality aspect of it, I think people just get caught up in the moment, listening to them talk. An average person doesnt know whats going on out there. They cant put it into their head or imagine how it is out there. But being out there and actually seeing it, as far as the progress and how the US carries themselves, how they interact with everybody, the whole outlook kind of brings it back to reality and you realize that you were being told one thingtheres more to the truth than how they sugarcoat it. How did that make you feel? I asked. I even asked if he felt betrayed by his government. I cant say betrayed or anything like that because at this time in my life, I kind let it all run off my back. Its in the past. Theres no point in me dwelling on it. Its not something that I would walk around and...praise, its just kind of this is what happened. But I mean its something that I dont look at positively. Its negative. I dont let it affect me in my everyday life, you cant do that. But I mean...I dont feel good about it. The interview made me feel very sad for the soldiers who have and will continue to return from Iraq, Afghanistan, Korea, the former Nazi Germany (which we never left) and all over the world. If we cant take care of our soldiers over here, how are we going to take care of them as they go over there? Perhaps there is more to this than I am saying, but the point should be clear. These men and women have kept the freedom of the American people intact, or so they think. If the rights

308

False Flag Iraq

and freedoms they are fighting for us over there are stripped away over here, then what have they really accomplished? Has our attacks over there made us safer over here? Most people would say yes, we have not had a terrorist attack over here since 9/11. That statement would be wrong. Do not forget about the Anthrax terror attack that took place a short time after 9/11. A case which is still unsolved, just like the 9/11 attacks. The case has not been solved no matter how you look at it. If Osama bin Laden is the perpetrator of the attacks, then the case has not been solved, since he has not been brought to justice. If he is not responsible for 9/11, then the case is unsolved even more so. So what are our soldiers dying for, an illegal occupation by this country? We were to bring peace and prosperity to Iraq, yet we have brought more death than Saddam Hussein ever did. That makes us just as bad as him (as a country) if not worse. All awhile, we have put our brave men and women in the middle. Either you are with us, or you are with the terrorists, echoes Rudy Giuliani. How disgusting. Our troops are not to be used as political tools, or as a shield against the war on terror. We have been brain-washed, our soldiers have been used and our constitution has been ignored. After all the hard work that the founding fathers put into this country, we as a nation have destroyed it. So, we as a nation must take it back. Live free or die.
Thanks for writing Greg. Everything is going good, just trying to wrap this last deployment up. We got 69 days left before we are at the states. Thanks for your prayers and support. Take care. Andrey Kulikov

Its good to know there are good soldiers in the United States armed services. The second interview would be conducted in a very similar manner as the first. Matt Onstad... How did you come to be in the military? What made you sign that piece of paper? It was a time in my life where I had just lost my job, Matt began. I was working for a friend[s] mom. It had to do with the computer industry and when that whole dot.com thing fell off her

309

False Flags

business suffered from that. So I was basically out of work. She pretty much supported me, her son and a few other people. It was a down point, where I had nothing going on and it seemed like a door that could lead me into a good future. Cause I had nothing. I was going nowhere so I decided maybe this is a good way to build a base, get the experience, get the military behind me and build off that. This was what year? It was after 9/11, it was like late 2001. November or December is when I kind of decided, started talking to a recruiter and the earliest I could get in was March. And you joined the? The army. I went to the recruiter. I saw, I looked up online and said, hey, Im thinking about it. [The recruiter] gave me some options of whats out there, job aspects. And originally, I said I want to do something in the military that is a direct transfer into some kind of trade or job. Whatever it is, computers or whatever. After talking to the recruiter I said, you know, if Im going to join the military, why dont I do something thats military based, as far as combat goes. You wanted to get into the combat zone? I asked. Well yeah. It was like, well ok, I could do that, I could benefit from [seeking a trade or job after the service]. If Im gonna be in the army, I wanna do something that the army does. I dont wanna get out of the army and say I didnt really see or do anything cause I was a computer tech. I didnt want to do that. Like Oh you were in the army?, Yeah, but I didnt really do anything military-based. Cause I think thats kind of B.Sno, thats how the majority of the army is nowadays. The majority of [people that go into] the army is in there for job training, school and money. So I didnt want to do that. I originally wanted to do that and after thinking about it for a while, I was like I wanna get into a combat M.O.S. Reconnaissance work, its kind of by the book. Its like Double 0-7, (secret agent) sneaking in and nobody sees you and you report whats going on. Youre what they call the eyes and ears of the battlefield. Cause youre the ones out front who tell them this is whats going on, this is where theyre at. And so you were what division? I was 4th Infantry Division, Second Brigade, part of the 367

310

False Flag Iraq

armored unit, stationed in Fort Hood Texas; which is the largest army base in the world. Its mainly an armored unitso you have a lot of tanks and things like that, or in First Cavalry. First Cavalry, was huge in Vietnam and World War One, World War Two. Matt continued, They told us, Ok, were gonna be light, we have this many people; 18 people, six trucks, three man crews; you have your driver, your track commander and then your gunner. And then they start training you from there. He continued, So in Basic Training, you get the basics on how to shoot and do your obstacle courses and they get you into shape. And they teach you the rules and regulations of the military and once you get your unitits more geared towards your M.O.S. or job. Whats M.O.S.? M.O.S. is your Military Operations Specialty, I think. Basically it means thats your job title. Ill check it. Matt continued, Well when you first get in, youre on your best behavior and after quite a few months it wasnt like Basic Training anymore. Basic Training is like, by the book, the way its supposed to be. And then when you get to the unit, its differentits completely backwards. Then there was a lot of controversy when they said were gonna deploy in this month and this is how long were gonna be there, then it changes. Now its set back to this month or Oh we dont know how long were gonna be there. Theres a lot of confusion involved. Youre talking about a major change in someones lifestyle, a major commitment in what theyre about to do and theres notheres nothing set in concrete. So you cant plan for anything. You cant prepare for anything cause you dont know when or where or how its gonna happen. Did they make it clear you were going to war? Yeah, 95% clear that youre gonna go but theres no where, when, or how long - and of course not why, said Matt, laughing. No one can answer that. I wish they would. I also think that anyone who feels we are justified and its necessary to go or stay in Iraq should go to Iraq and fight their good fight. As Pavel mentioned before, going there is almost

311

False Flags

indescribable to someone who has never been there. Plain and simple, this war is a joke and only benefits private companies and off-shore global banker cartels. We deployed into Kuwait, Matt went on. We landed in the airport in Kuwait. Then we went to this place called Camp----. Which is basically a sand hole. Thats where you met up with your vehicles. And from that point, we didnt know what was next either. I think we spent two weeks there not knowing when we were gonna go into Iraq. When are we gonna cross the border and go up? I wanna talk about the time when you said you guys were ordered to drive down streets and get shot at. Ok, so when we were first deployed to Iraq we were about 45 minutes outside of Baquaba. So the downtown, the main part of Baquaba is about 45 miles outside of Baghdad. North-west I think. And then just north of that is where we were, had our first little, what they call, F.O.B., which is a Forward Operating Base. And it was our unit, 367, tanks and all the armor and head-quartersHeadquarters Division is like the scouts and the medics. We set up in this little lot that had predug dirt boundaries and our mission was to concentrate on an Iranian group who lived in Iraq, called the M-E-K. The M.E.K.? If you look it up youll find it. (I did, MEK stands for Mujahadeen-e-Khalq) And basically it was this military group of Iranians who lived in Iraq, who fought the Iranian government. At the time Matts unit was told that the MEK had been resisting the Iranian government for 20 something years. And Ive heard through people that they are the most intelligent military group in the world. Every single one of them has a college degree, as far as I know. Theyre all college educated. They have this place in Iraq thats probably 100 acres or so. And theyre fully operational inside of that. Inside of Iraq? I asked. Inside of their little compound in Iraq, theyre fully operational. Its a town. They have all their food; all their water needs are met. They had a Coca-Cola bottling plant in there. Theyre like an operational country inside of a little hundred acre place. And they had been fighting the Iranian government for years. And we were supposed

312

False Flag Iraq

to disarm these people. Cause they had tanks, they had vehicles, they had weapons, everything. So they said that we needed to disarm these people because they were a threat to us. They were on our topterror list. So our Colonel and some Special Forces went in and talked to the leader or leaders and said This is the thing, were suppose to disarm you cause youre a threat, in trade we will make sure [youre protected] The Iranians main issue was, If you disarm us, the Iranian government will find out and were all dead. These people could not go back to Iran to see their family because everybody knows who they are and theyd be killedso in trade we said we will take over all your positions, as far as guarding your compound and safe-holding your compound if you let us disarm you. So they said Ok, if you keep us safe, you can do what you wanna do. We pulled a lot of tanks out of there. I mean this is a military compound, they had buildings, everything was set up, they had toilets. Nowhere else had I been in Kuwait or Iraq where there was toilets. They had the whole nine yards. No toilets? I thought. How did they handle their business? In a tin cup? And at one point they had a party, kind of, Mathew continued. Where our whole unit basically went over there. They hosted us, they fed us. I was talking to this one group of guys who were pretty high up, they all spoke English. All the people there went to college, has all studied in Europe, Great Britain, England. So I said, whats the deal? You can tell me. Why are we here doing this to you? Cause I didnt understand. If theyre not a threat to us, why do we screw with them? And what I got out if it, he was telling me that when Clinton was working with the Iranian government, it was something to the fact of Clinton getting better prices or getting in on the oil trade. Clinton was trying make his way in and do whatever and the Iranian government said, as part of this agreement, if you put this group (M-EK) on your terrorist list, then well cut you a better deal. Kinda like an eye for an eye. The M-E-K? Thats their enemy. Its like a civil war thats going on. I think basically Clinton was like Never heard of them, never gonna run into

313

False Flags

them, whatever. If this makes the deal go over, if we get cheaper prices, lets do it. So when it came time, when the terror list came up, these people were on the list. Is that the true story? I dont know. I heard that from one of them, talking to an M-E-K member. Did they seem like a threat at all? No. Not to us. Theyre some of the kindest people I ever met. We used their internet facilities. They had no issue with it, the only issue they had Was taking their guns away? Yeah. We dont want you to disarm us, not because we think youre gonna overthrow us, but because Iran is gonna kill us all. We will be screwed if you leave us out in the open. What if something like that happens here? Like another country coming here and doing that? No, like our own country saying it. I was clearly baiting him into a scenario I see as very likely to happen in the future, lest we respect the constitution. Matt still wasnt exactly sure what I was getting at. Saying we think the NRA is a threat to us and we need to disarm you No, I tried to explain, Like for the peoples own safety, we have to take away you guns. Well, theyve done that with the automatic weapons laws, right? said Matt. It was like, for your safety, were gonna take away all assault rifles, so theyve already done it in California at least. It also goes with the constitution in our country. The right to bear arms is part of the constitution, you cant take that away. So what do you think of the constitution? He laughs. What do I think of the con-sti-tut-ion?...as far as I stand, Im not educated completely in the constitution. But you know the right to bear arms. I know the right to bear arms. Freedom of speech. Matt nods his head. Freedom of speech. I think there was a reason why that was put in place. There was a reason for it and its held this many years. What do you think about people who dont like the constitution?

314

False Flag Iraq

The rules and regulations were put forward at my own parttime job for a reason, said Matt. Not everybody agrees with them but they were put there for a reason, and in the long run it helps. Theres a lot of stuff in the constitution that benefits us all. What do you think about John McCain? War hero, tortured, I asked. You know what though, Matt answered, Ive heard conflicting reports about him while he was a P.O.W. Ive heard certain stories and things that I dont know 100% about, but I heard that as far as a P.O.W. goes, he wasnt your average P.O.W. Ive just heard things and I wont say anything in particular but, Ok, youre a P.O.W., but guess what, your P.O.W. history is in conflict. Theres something that happened during your time as a P.O.W. that wasnt heroic. And I think using the P.O.W. thing to get the presidency is f-n b-s, especially with this situation were in now. Its almost like youre using it as a crutch. Go look at the war, look at how you feel about your sons and daughters being over there. I was a P.O.W. I know how it was, And Im not saying that being a P.O.W. is not messed up. I give it to the guy, the guy survived being a prisoner of war. Im not gonna take anything away from him being a prisoner of war. But that doesnt mean he was a hero. No but the media and certain people try to make it seem like that, I said. Of course they do. Im screwed up on the whole president battle because I dont like the fact that either party is bashing the other to get ahead. Ive never liked that idea. Do you think that 9/11 was an inside job? I asked. He leans back, crutching his cigarette in one hand, and some type of cold drink in the other. I think that theres a lot of things that have come up since 9/11 that have shown that its questionable. Do you think the official government story Is 100% fact? No. Theres something wrong? Theres something wrong. Theres something missing, if not many things that are missing. Do you think they should re-investigate?

315

False Flags

I think that the right group of people, not a conspiracy group. I think that multiple people need to investigate. 3rd party, 4th party, 5th party people should investigate it and see what the majority of the people think, with whats been presented so far. So to get back to the original question, said Matt, I thought Id give you a rundown from when we got there. So the MEK is disarmed, friendly, no shooting. Theyre happy, were happy. They dont have to do anything. They dont stand guard of their compound. So to get back to the original F.O.B., it was swept for mines. They had found a couple of mines but the reason why there were mines there was that this dirt lot we were in is one of MEKs old dumps. They just dump stuff there. So in a combination of living in an old dump and the germs that are in the air and sand flees that everybody got bit by, everybody came down with dysentery. Which means you crap your brains out, diarrhea. Like youre always crapping? I asked. Like when you crap, you basically pee out of your butt. Nothing but liquid and it comes on quickly. I mean youre just walking around and you feel fine and all of a sudden you gotta crap. You got no time to get there. Theres no showers, theres nothing at this point. So weve basically been cleaning ourselves with baby wipes. So the MEK is disarmed, and they come to our scout team and say Hey, theres this dam, its labeled dam #1 as far as the United States is concerned. Its the lowest dam of the Tigris River. Its the most southern dam of the Tigris River and 2-8 Infantry has been guarding it. The reason why theyve been guarding it is because theres fear of somebody trying to blow this dam up and flooding out the reservoirs of lower Iraq. So you guys are to go and relieve them of their duty and you guys are gonna guard it for an unannounced amount of time. So what you do is you have your radio tower set up and you communicate with us through that and we bring you whats called a Log Pack or Logistics Pack, which is your daily needs, your food. Well, come to find out, guarding this dam is like summer camp. You go down to the Tigris River which is fresh water that you can see 15 feet into the water. Its so clear and you swim all day long. At first everybody was like, Oh my god, somebodys gonna

316

False Flag Iraq

bomb this, and after a week everybodys hanging out in their PT shorts and T-shirts. Theres guys diving off the dam, really like youre not even deployed. And you have radio guard, one hour every 17 hours you would have to watch the radio and it would rotate. You just have to monitor the radio if someone calls. Every once in a while they would get bored and they would pull some check points and search vehicles and take AKs (machine guns) from people. And so we started gathering AKs. So you were told to go out there and take away their guns? Not completely, at this point. If you see someone who is hostile you take away their weapon. How do you know if theyre hostile? Well maybe its not that theyre hostile. I cant remember correctly but there was a reason why they were taking away peoples guns. If somebody was driving around with a gun, you would take it from them. People drove around with guns? Oh yeah. Theres no law out there. So we guard this base for about a month. Then they call us and they say youre gonna be relieved by this certain unit. Youre off the dam duty. Nobody knew it was as chill as it was, cause when people would come around, we would tighten up and have our gear on. So we found an old looted out Iraqi training facility and thats where we wanna make our base, our F.O.B. (Forward Operating Base). Our Area of Operations, A.O., is gonna be the city of Baquaba and spread out around this area. Our unit ended up taking control around Baquaba and the surrounding area. It was basically the size of New Jersey, so we were spread out. So they said, we want the scout platoon, 6 trucks of hum-vees to escort the Sergeant Major, which is the highest ranking non-commission officer. We want you to escort him to this place so he can check it out and make the final decision on whether or not were gonna stay there. So on our way there [we saw] our first action. We got fired atsomebody fired, a civilian fired at us with an RPG, Rocket Propelled Grenade. Just one shot? One shot. It skimmed past one of the trucks, we all stopped, we all jumped out of the trucks and did a sweep of the area. We didnt

317

False Flags

see anything. So after that you move on to your destination. We roll into this place. Its an abandoned training facility. So its a couple brick buildings and a lot. So from there we started to set up. So in the set up procedure you take all the engineers, you build dirt walls around everything, you set up guard positions in the important parts. They basically put us in the front building and said, Youre gonna be the people that we go to the most, so you need to be ready to roll. And thats when we took on our A.O., we started patrolling the town. Patrolling the town, what do you mean? You give presence patrol. You roll up and down the streets. You let people know that the United States is here. Some people are smiling and laughing. Some people are throwing rocks at you. During this time, that first road that we rolled down was our in and outduring that in and out, we got shot at pretty much every time we rolled down the street. And there were these pine groves that were off the side of the road, like pine trees that grow out there, thats kind of their way to hide, like a little forest. And theres houses and we would get fired at and try to find people and we could never find people. So this is whenI dont know where it came from, but the rule came in where we need to disarm everybody of their weapons in these local towns except for one weapon in each household. Cause if you completely disarm a household, theyre screwed. You take out all the weapons except for one gun. There would be people in their backyards that would have weapons caches buried in the ground, like mortars and artillery rounds. We had to dig it up and take it from them. So wed been there for two months or so and were starting to do smaller raids. Raids as in going in the houses, searching the houses, making sure everythings ok. And local intelligence is rolling in. Now when you raid, whos giving the orders? Local intelligence and the intelligence they can put together. Local intelligence? Yeah, like Iraqis that come up to the gate and are like, Hey so and so that lives in this village is heading attacks. Hes a mastermind behind you guys getting shot at. So we would take that neighborhood and we would surround itwe go in through every household, take away every weapon they had and basically disarm the threat. Some

318

False Flag Iraq

people had no weapons, some people had two weapons. Some people had caches of bombs in their backyard. That was kind of a daily occurrence. Its basically what you see on TV, a row of guys outside of the building and you basically storm the building, kind of like SWAT. Every day youd do that. You go town to town, cleaning out all the threats that you can. We get this local intel one day that there was a guy who had a weapons cache who had sold it to somebody or told somebody where it was and this is where it was, and this is where hes gonna be around this time. So we go and we set up what they call O.P., Observation Point, and we watch the area. It was my truck, another scout truck and our units Major, with his crew. We watched it for three or four hours. Nothing happened. So we went over to the area where they said its supposed to be and couldnt find anything. And on our way back, we were fired upon. In this little town, on this little one way road, on the side of this canal. So theres a canal that ran down the middle of the city and then two one-way roads on each side. We were fired upon, we returned fire, and we looked for people. Then we called in to our unit, so they sent out tanks. And I think that original night, nothing turned up. They were gone. So thats where the idea came up, with what they would call Recon-By-Fire, in a reconnaissance platoon like we were. You have a technique called Recon-By-Fire which means you roll down a certain area and you fire at basically nothing, to try to draw fire, to try to find out where people are. Why? Doesnt that seem a little strange? I asked. Its a technique thats been around for a long time. RBF means you go through, you hose down the place and if theres somebody, you hit somebody or you find somebody or they fire back and then you can find out where theyre located. Sounds crazy, I said. Well, Matt responded, its an old school technique. The likelihood is, if theres two people hiding in the bushes ready to shoot at somebody, and six trucks unload big guns on them, the likelihood is youre gonna take much less damage than those people do, especially with the technology we have. And so, they decide to do a Recon-By-

319

False Flags

Fire and I was in the middle of switching positions in the platoon. In between becoming Platoons Sergeants driver, I was drawing the gunners position on the Platoon Sergeants truck that night. The lead truck, which the gunner was Sergeant Barry, he was suppose to fire first and once he fired at a certain position, everybody fired in that direction and we already knew where we were firing. Everybody knew the position where we were suppose to fire but he was supposed to fire first. And I think what happened was right before he fired, we got shot at. The tanks wereright there in the town waiting for this to happen, cause this was the deal. So they rolled up and they spotted somebody and there was this thing going on where they were firing back and we were firing back. We were pinpointing where these people were. The tanks had located where they were at. Then from there, I think there was a three week period where multiple missions were run where they wanted us to do these Recon-By-Fires. Well basically, what they were saying was go down there and draw fire. Thats what they were saying. At that point, where youve already done a Recon-By-Fire, your cover is blown. Everybody knows what youre doing and theyre just saying Roll down these streets and either fire first or get fired at, so our tanks can come in and find the people that are firing at you. On multiple occasions, every time wed go down there theyd be firing at us. And there was that situation where we had drawn the fire, we called the tanks in, tanks came in, they had located them. There was still fire back, so we had people in the trucks and dismounted on the trucks firing in thiscause the guns have what they called tracer rounds, so every five rounds that are loaded into a weapon lights up. So they said watch the tanks tracer rounds and wherever the tanks tracer rounds are firing, thats where you fire. So we were all fired at. That was the night that I was like firing into the darkness and I got hit in my arm. I was like what was that? Cause it wasnt a straight shot. And you didnt feel it? I felt it, but it didnt feel like a gun shot. But I felt it and it was dark out there and I asked my platoon leader, hey, do you see anything here? and he was like No youre good. Come to find out when we went back to base that night I took my shirt off, there was just blood, my t-shirt was stuck to my arm from blood. It was a graze, a knick.

320

False Flag Iraq

Thats kind of what they used us as. It was like, go out and draw fire and get shot at. How long was that? It was on-going. There was a good two week period where we did it like every other, every third night. Then it was off and on through out the time we were there. Our platoon was put out as bait. Take your 6 trucks, run down there and draw fire. Dangle the hook and call in the tanks, because theyre more equipped to deal with the situation. Ok Thanks! Use us as bait, the worm at the end of the hook. You know, f the casualties. I was up in the gun one of the times that we did it and I was firing the Mark-19, which is like the automatic grenade launcher. It can just destroy an area. Well, you have to keep it clean or it wont work. The gunner wasnt taking care of the gun and it misfired on me. It wouldnt work. The gunner always has their personal weapon, or M-16. So I just picked it up and just shot. I could hear the radio, there was a lot of controversy on the radio going on. And the truck is swerving, doin all this kind of stuff, but Im concentrating on what I need to do. And when we got back, the driver and the TC, and the guy we had in the dismount position kinda came to me later on an was like, I cant believe youre alive. What the? What do you mean you cant believe Im alive? The driver, who was really a good friend of mine, was like The whole time I was driving I saw nothing but tracer rounds flying straight over the hood of the truck. Like deadly close, thats why I was swerving around, did you notice that? I was like, Yeah, I kinda noticed jerking around up there. The TC came to me later, I was waiting for you to drop down into the turret. I was waiting for you to fall. And in my mind, I didnt know, I was into my thing, trying to do the right thing. I guess thats as close as it comes, but I wasnt aware of it at the time. I didnt see how close it was. Would you recommend the Army to a young kid, 18, going into the military? Not now, no way. Why not? Its a guaranteed deployment. What do you think we should do in Iraq? Leave.

321

False Flags

Leave now, just get out? Yeah. Their main thing right now is rebuilding the government, rebuilding the stature of things, our everyday soldier thats over there is not part of that. Hes not the one sitting down at the desk, saying this is what should happen. You can do that with no soldiers, you can do that over the phone. Theres an embassy over there now. Theyre trying to make Iraq a normal deployment, like a one or two year deployment we have in Germany or Korea. You know they have 14 permanent bases in Iraq? Yeah. Theyre not going anywhere. Its ridiculous. Why? I dont know. Well probably always have them. Why though? You wanna rebuild their government. You wanna help them, you wanna help what we took away from them. Thats awesome. But why do we need to be permanent over there? Ok, theres an embassy. We dont need permanent posts over there. Theres no reason for it. Were not fighting terrorists anymore. What were fighting against is decades and decades of civil war and this religious war that went on before we got there, that had nothing to do with us. And its still going on, that has nothing to do with us. And when you stick your nose in it, try to make things right, it just adds fuel to the firegive a trillion dollars to Africa and see how many more lives are positively affected. Not saying its gonna solve the problem, but how many lives are positively affected that way, than with what were doing over there in Iraq. Especially if they dont want us over there. Yeah. Weve already build a whole government for them. We got Saddam, we got rid of him. Guess what? Mission accomplished. Now what about Osama bin Laden? I dont even think about that anymore, said Matt. Its so off the wall with whats going on. From the time of 9/11, everything was just criss-cross and blinded and braided into each other. I cant even think about Afghanistan. We have soldiers over there, who are living in

322

False Flag Iraq

worse conditions than in Iraq and dealing with worse stuff than in Iraq, that people have turned a blind eye to, almost. We need to sit down and think of what were doing and where our concentration needs to be and why were in the situation were in now and think where do we need to be, where do we not need to be. If youre worried about Osama bin Laden, funding and being part of 9/11, then find Osama bin Laden. What are you doing in Iraq? Osama bin Laden aint in Iraq. Theres no way hed be there. Well because were not actively hunting Osama. Were not, Matt agreed. I had to stress my point further, We havent charged him with these crimes. Hes never been charged for this crime. I wasnt really ready for him to turn the tables on me, asking You think hes directly involved with it 9/11? I dont know. Its hard to try to be a good journalist. Its too easy to put your opinions in your statements to make them look like facts. Its like being a Jedi, knowing you will always be tempted to turn to the dark side. Id love to know for a fact that what I believe is true. The correct answer to this question he asked me though, it has to be I dont know. I do know that the official story isnt true. But why should I have to prove another theory true just to disprove the story I dont believe? I shouldnt. Yet I get sucked in every time, when posed with the logical question of, Ok, if that didnt happen, then what did? Its like, if I cant give you a good counter-story, then you will go on believing the lies you have been told? Maybe my story isnt fact, but neither is the story I was told by my government. His interviewing skills were pretty good for flying off the cuff. He asked me, You think Osama bin Laden was the guy who said Drive these planes into the twin towers on 9/11? No, I quickly answered. You think Saddam Hussein was? asked Matt. No. I said again. Do you think the country of Iraq as a whole were the people that said Drive a plane into the twin towers? No. Its so, he continued, Its mush, now. Its oatmeal to me.

323

False Flags

What does that mean? I asked. Things are so screwed up and so twisted. What do you do? Cut our losses. Weve lost a lot of people, #1, a lot of money, a lot of respect from other countries. How do we get that back, unless we figure out what really happened? Well as long as we keep going to war with people and keep a military standpoint on everything, we will never get it back. So we got to...? I asked. Bring people home. Be neutral. Rebuild our ties with all those other countries that dont like us anymore. So if the army calls you back what are you gonna do? He shakes his head no. Youre not going back? I asked. What are you gonna do? He casually answered while sipping the ice-filled drink. Stay here and chill in my hot tubno way, theres no way Im going back. I put my effort in and I did what I needed to do, and I contributed to, at the time, what the country needed me to contribute to. If you wanna keep a war going, then you need to be able to recruit your own people in. Not old people (as in veterans, not necessarily age related) who are bound to an old contract. Cause they did what they needed to do. They did what you asked them to do, to the fullest. Do you believe that our government had something to do with 9/11? I asked. With his cigarette burning into non-existence, he answered, I think somebody who is U.S. basedI think the U.S. had something to do with 9/11 to a certain point, yeah. Why they did it, who knows? There was somebody on the inside in the U.S. Satisfied with his answer I changed course in the conversation, Lets now focus on [World Trade Center] Building 7. The third building to fall that day. A 47 story building. No plane hit it, but it still fell down the same way as the twin towers. Why did it fall the way it fell? Matt answered my question with his question. Why did it weightlessly fall in, what was it, 9 seconds? Then look at the history of burning buildings, how they were constructed and never fell that way.

324

False Flag Iraq

I kept the topic going. Building 7 only had fires on 2 or 3 floors, and it still fell the exact same way as the twin towers. Whatever it is, said Matt, the 9/11 official report is not an absolute thing. Its so questionable on how these things happened. It wasnt right. Do you think we should have gone into Iraq? I asked. Not at all. Never seemed like a good idea. The reasoning for going into Iraq is so blurred, that it should have never happened. Some people say [Saddam Hussein] funded the 9/11 attacks. Others say that he was so combative towards the search for weapons of mass destruction; theres no one defining reason why we went. If it was 9/11, weve lost twice as many American soldiers than casualties weve took in the 9/11 tragedy. If it was WMDs, was it worth it to lose that many people over a couple weapons that he might have had? No. Bush was basically forced to say that the reason why we went in there was based on what he calls bad intelligence. Saddam was supposed to have WMDs. So the people who were tasked with finding out the truth came back and said no (Joe Wilson, to name one). Bush still went in front of the American people, in front of the world and told us that Saddam was building these weapons, after people told him no. And when they realized that this accusation was not true, they should have sent the troops home, or at least began to pull back our troopsEven if you dont pull the troops out, they should have taken a second look at what was going on. Thats right. They should have, and I assume they probably did. I personally voted for Nancy Pelosi because she said she was going to pull out the troops. What a gullible fool I was for that. After she won, she made it very clear that impeachment was off the table and she shut her mouth about bringing the troops home just like a good little government shill. It was fun interviewing two soldiers. Before this interview, I did not know how they felt about 9/11. I do now. They speak with caution. Like highly polished politicians when need be. I believe that in talking with someone about 9/11 for the first time at least, that this is when our political instincts kick in. It may show that there is a little politician in all of us. If that is

325

False Flags

so, then there are a lot of semi-politicians who have a lot of work to do, myself included; for I do not consider myself a politician. The only time I am called one is not in a positive manner. Its like saying; oh hes a politician because he talks about politics. Its a stereo-type. By that logic, if I talked about Mars that would make me a Martian? That doesnt work for me. I dont know or care what a politician is. I only care about what the people of this country, of this world, are doing to make it a better place. In the end, that is what counts. That is what will bring me a slight hint of worldly happiness. Knowing I have no control over the world lets me remain humble in my journey. Should I think it possible to rule the world, I would be a fool in the devils playhouse. No thank you. That is what it all comes down to. Not to 9/11, or other important incidents in this life. It is more than that. It comes down to Jesus Christ, who changed my life. Unfortunately, most of us find him when were at the bottom of the ocean, drowning. Well my friends, my brothers and sisters, when you find yourself here, look up! Grab the hand of God. If you cant see it right away, keep the faith! Know that Gods hand is coming to save you; all you must be is willing. The Frog March I actually got to meet the man who warned Joseph Wilson that Robert Novak said Joseph Wilson was an asshole. Mr. Novak was going to do a hit-piece on Mr. Wilson. I wondered for years who this person was. Never did I think Id meet him at a 9/11 truth gathering. I was obsessed with that story for years and felt the defeat when the frog march that Joseph Wilson hoped to see didnt happen to Karl Rove. There is still time. Thankfully they are working on a movie about this scandal. More so, I am sure that many scandals involving Karl Rove will soon come into view. Like this one Based on newly released White House e-mails and select transcripts of closed door testimony, it has been confirmed by Rep. John Conyers that Former White House political adviser Karl Rove

326

False Flag Iraq

was involved in the firing of at least one U.S. attorney. U.S. Attorney David Iglesias of New Mexico had his suspicions confirmed by the closed door testimony. The facts, which he already knew in his gut, made him feel sick, adding its exactly what I feared. After all the delay and despite all the obfuscation, lies, and spin, this basic truth can no longer be denied: Karl Rove and his cohorts at the Bush White House were the driving force behind several of these firings, which were done for improper reasons, said Rep. John Conyers, chairman of the House Judiciary Committee. The evidence speaks for itself. This is how congress needs to act. Get the testimony and let it speak for itself. The mainstream media should take note too. Though I doubt that will happen on a large scale, unless it is in their interest to do so. It is up to the people to make the media interested. Sometimes that means speaking with a loud obnoxious voice. Before the days of microphones, this was tolerated. Now if we speak too loudly, people think there must be something wrong with the person. They expect us to take our Paxil, Prozac and shut up! That is not going to happen. Instead, the people have awoken and continue to do so. For the truth is the truth, and the truth about the Iraq and Afghanistan wars are that they are both dead wrong!

327

Jesse Ventura

JESSE VENTURA AND THE CONSPIRACY CULTURE

Whats happened is, Alex Jones explains to his radio and TV audience, the quote, conspiracy culture, is taking over. Newsweek, Time magazine are pulling their hair out saying, Oh my God, nobody believes anything were saying anymore. Every-bodys a conspiracy theorist now. Ive got two Newsweek articles in the last week on this alone. Its everywhere. Talk radio listeners dont wanna talk about phony right-wing stuff, phony left-wing stuff. They wanna talk about the private Federal Reserve. Open Eyes With open eyes, We see the invisible lines, The cracks of freedom spread across the wall of tyranny, Truth bleeds through the wall, Until the wall is stained, Eventually, the wall crumbles, And the builders begin again, Hopefully this time, Realizing the errors of their ways.

328

And The Conspiracy Culture

Theres three new books out this week. I have mine. Dog the Bounty Hunter got one out; and I dont care if Dog beats me or not. I kind of like Dog. Hes kind of an interesting guy, but heres the one. Were beating the crap out of Karl Roves book, and thats the guy I wanna beat. I want this book to beat Karl Roves cause Karl Rove book...a friend of mine...told me that the book is trying to re-write history. Jesse Ventura

Speaking about John Wilkes Booth, Lee Harvey Oswald, James Earl Ray, and Sirhan Sirhan, Jesse Ventura tell the host of Today, All of these guys were killed by lone nuts who never spoke to anyone, never planned anything...they were failures, supposedly at everything else in life, but hugely successful when it came to assassinating someone. (1) This brings up a good point. We are expected to believe that these loners were socially incompetent, yet they were able to commit murder at the highest level of the United States Govern-ment. In the future of this conspiracy culture, what will be fact and what will be fiction? If were not willing to do the research ourselves, we had better be getting our information in this infowar from reliable and factual speaking sources that provide documents, eyewitness accounts and the information must be truly fair and balanced, unlike the Foxey News Channel. Ventura keeps saying he wont run for office. If the people get behind him, he may hold true to the title of his previous book, Dont Start the Revolution Without Me. If not, at least his opinions are documented so people can continue to attack him without looking at what evidence he and Dick Russell bring to the table. This evidence is mostly public information, yet the public is almost clueless to it in general. We can change that. We Are Change. The revolution has begun, Jesse. The only problem with the poem on the previous page is that the builders are usually the same ones who have created the problem. Throughout history, we see how they manipulate the masses of people. They create a problem that people will plead with them to fix. Then they fix it, only the fix ends up being worse than the problem. Now there is a new problem and everyones forgotten about the original problem. Now the cover of the real problem is complete. Then the

329

Jesse Ventura

builders move in stealth to spread their plague of corruption somewhere else.

The drive of the Rockefellers and their allies is to create a one world government combining super capitalism and communism under the same tent, all under their control...Do I mean conspiracy? Yes I do. I am convinced there is such a plot, international in scope, generations old in planning, and incredibly evil in intent. Congressman Larry P. McDonald (1976, killed in the Korean Airlines 747 that was shot down by the Soviets) We were in there for maybe five minutes. Five minutes and the elevators exploded on us? Yeah, we said somethins wrong here. The plane hit up on the 80th floor...I mean in five minutes, and all of a sudden now the elevators are exploding on the first level of the lobby? John Schroeder, 9/11 Firefighter

Conspiracy Theories Look at Jesse Ventura, Alex Jones explains. His TV show goes on TruTV, I consult on it, I appear on it, it becomes #1 overnight. The question is, will they give him another season? Were not sure yet. Talking about Jesse Venturas new TV show, Conspiracy Theories, Alex Jones tells his radio listening and TV watching audiences, I know that the crew have become completely convinced of the new world order while making the [show]. Its done as entertainment. Its done in kind of a shocking dramatized way---and I find it very entertaining---This is the best reality TV Ive ever seen. This is the top show right now on TruTV by the way, Jones went on. Upwards of 10 million people watch this a week, 1.7 million, when it first premieres.

330

And The Conspiracy Culture

Ventura ventures to Sternland Jesse Ventura was on the Howard Stern show explaining his opinions and questions about the official story of 9/11. While he appeared to ask more questions and provide valid arguments for his opinions, the cast of the Stern Show didnt want to part with the official story of 9/11, even saying that since Ventura thought that 9/11 was a conspiracy, that called into question everything else he said. They did admit he made some good points though. The biggest problem I have with that cast is that they were trying to force Ventura to prove another theory since he was trying to disprove the official story. So if he cant come up with a more convincing story, then they will just accept the official story? That doesnt seem right. These are two different topics that should be viewed separately, if one is searching for the truth in this matter.

331

Jesse Ventura

by Joanna Reid

What Ventura and people like Alex Jones are trying to do is initially disprove the official story, so that history can be written correctly. My brother, Manny Fernandez, has a better version of what happened than the official story, We dont know. That should have been in the 9/11 Commission Report. We have no freaking idea what happened. Thats what they should have said. Of course, that would have created more problems. My next problem with the cast of the Howard Stern Show is this; the ones who were arguing with Ventura seemed to also think that the JFK assassination story (as portrayed in the Warren Commission Report) was also correct. Of course, if you research a man named Jim Garrison, you will find the best evidence that JFK was assassinated due to a conspiracy, not a lone gunman.

332

And The Conspiracy Culture

LIES
The truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the state. The German propaganda minister, Joseph Goebbels Never did in anybodys thought process about how to protect America did we ever think, that uh, the evil doers would fly, not one, but four commercial aircraft into precious U.S. targets. Never. George W. Bush, September 15, 2001 I dont think anybody could have predicted that these people would take an airplane and slam it into the World Trade Center, take another one and slam it into the Pentagon, that they would try to use an airplane as a missile, a hijacked airplane as a missile Condoleezza Rice, May 16, 2002

Governor Jesse Ventura asked the question, if people really want to know the truth, then why is it that we attack all the truth tellers? Jesse Ventura raised somewhere around $300,000 to become Governor of Minnesota. Why was he elected? What was the underlying theme of his campaign? On the Alex Jones radio show, Ventura stated that what made him so successful were ideas and passion. The ideas of Venturas common sense were and still are very appealing to many inside and outside of this country. Everywhere you look, people are waking up and asking questions. Logic is coupled by facts. How Governor Ventura articulates has become very addicting. Who would want to go 12 rounds with a master debater like the former governor? I would only because it would mean I might learn something. You cant always go into a debate thinking youre right. There are exceptions to the rule, but theres a reason why these are exceptions and not the norm. A healthy debate has not taken place when it comes to 9/11. Its well overdue. Cowardly debunkers have no problem calling Ventura a pin head behind his back, in a co-opted book, or a corporate media article filled with propaganda. Yet they cant go toe to toe, point to point, and face to face with Ventura. What are they afraid of? Its similar to when Charlie Sheen challenged any 9/11

333

Jesse Ventura

debunkers to debate him on Larry King Live. There were no takers that came out of the shadows. They cowered in their comfort zones and spat rumors and nonsensical attacks at Charlie Sheen from afar. You cant change debunkers, they have to change themselves. Debunkers of 9/11 routinely express anger and frustration, trying to belittle those of us who believe that the 9/11 Commission Report is not an accurate assessment of what happened on 9/11. I wonder if the CIA, FBI, MI6, the Mossad, the KGB, as well as other intelligence services really take the 9/11 Commission results seriously. I seriously doubt it. Yet we common sense Americans are expected to do just that. No one should be punished for questioning our government on 9/11. People who commit crimes should be punished. If a crime is committed at a high level of government, its hard to view that government as credible and reliable. Until someone is punished for the crimes committed on 9/11, there is no hope at all to have closure. How can another country trust that we will bring them freedom when there is so much suppression of the truth right here in America? Jesse Ventura, Alex Jones, Charlie Sheen, and others are all people searching for answers. They dont have it all figured out about 9/11, like our government and our media claim to have. The way our government and our media handled 9/11 on all fronts is not how they should have handled it and they know it! How does this not make them accessories after the fact? What a shame they have done to this country. In the name of freedom, we send our soldiers to fight and die for a worthless cause. In the name of peace, we murder, rape, and torture presumably innocent people all across the world. For what? What is the common endgame that comes out of these crises? Who benefits, who prospers, and who suffers? More so, why does history keep repeating itself? I leave the answers in your hands, in your brain. I leave this to you to decide what has been done, what is being done, and what will be done in the coming years.

334

And The Conspiracy Culture

We Are Change East Bay & SF Its like meeting long distance relatives for the first time in a long time. Its great to finally have peers who are discussing the same issues I care about. I learned a lot and met some great people that I hope to be friends forever with. The atmosphere is very laid back - so theres no intimidation factor to worry about. I didnt sense any egos - everyone was given the chance to talk. I have to work on letting people finish their sentences. I think I found my new home. Hey Toto, were not in Kansas, we are change!
Everybody looks around in their little tiny world and they think, Well, everywhere I see, everything is good and as long as it doesnt upset what I can see, Im not gonna get involved,---in our country, you should get involved. Jesse Ventura If you dont hold governments feet to the fire, you will get bad government. Jesse Ventura

Huffington Post Removes Post About Jesse Venturas New Book I wont ever write for them again, said Jesse Ventura in early 2010. Ariana Huffington had been on my case for about 2 years, Jesse Ventura tells Alex Jones over a live phone interview during a broadcast on Infowars.com, to contribute to the Huffington Post. So I did my first article. Then I followed it up with my second one and of course they censored it. They had it on for an hour and then they pulled it. As reported by Infowars.com The Huffington Post has pulled its story from its website after initially having it posted there.(2) According to Infowars.com, the article completely disappeared from the Huffington Post. Why? Why would they put it up there and then take it down? The editors note at the website stated: The Huffington Posts editorial policy, laid out in our blogger guidelines, prohibits the promotion and promulgation of conspiracy theories including those

335

Jesse Ventura

about 9/11. As such, we have removed this post. As the truth tellers they are, Infowars.com lays out what the article removed from the website states: Huffington Post/Jesse Ventura Article #2 (American Conspiracies): WHAT REALLY HAPPENED ON SEPTEMBER 11TH? You didnt see anything about it in the mainstream media, the original article begins, but two weeks ago at a conference in San Francisco, more than one thousand architects and engineers signed a petition demanding that Congress begin a new investigation into the destruction of the three World Trade Center skyscrapers on 9/11. The article specifically mentions Richard Gage, whom I have met twice, the founder of Architects and Engineers for 9/11 Truth. Mr. Gage, among many others, wants to know how 200,000 tons of steel

336

And The Conspiracy Culture

disintegrated and fell to the ground in 11 seconds. A member of the American Institute of Architects, Richard Gage is quoted as saying, The official Federal Emergency Management [Agency] and National Institute of Standards and Technology reports provide insufficient, contradictory and fraudulent accounts of the circumstances of the towers destruction. Furthermore, like many people, he has been articulate in questioning Building 7, whose 447 stories came down in pure freefall acceleration that afternoon even though it was never hit by an aircraft. The article that was laid to rest by Huffington Post and brought back to life by Infowars.com gives an excerpt of Jesse Venturas book, American Conspiracies published by Skyhorse: Some people have argued that the Twin Towers went down, within a half hour of one another, because of the way they were constructed. Well, those 425,000 cubic yards of concrete and 200,000 tons of steel were designed to hold up against a Boeing 707, the largest plane built at the time the towers were completed in 1973. Analysis had shown that a 707 traveling at 600 miles an hour (and those had four engines) would not cause major damage. The twin-engine Boeing 757s that hit on 9/11 were going 440 and 550 miles an hour. ...I dont claim expertise about this, but I did work four years as part of the Navys underwater demolition teams, where we were trained to blow things to hell and high water. And my staff talked at some length with a prominent physicist, Steven E. Jones, who says that a gravity driven collapse without demolition charges defies the laws of physics. These buildings fell, at nearly the rate of free-fall, straight down into their own footprint, in approximately ten seconds. An object dropped from the roof of the 110-story-tall towers would reach the ground in about 9.2 seconds. Then theres the fact that steel beams that weighed as much as 200,000 pounds got tossed laterally as far as 500 feet. The National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) started its investigation on August 21, 2002. When their 10,000-page-

337

Jesse Ventura

long report came out three years later, the spokes-man said there was no evidence to suggest a controlled demolition. But Steven E. Jones also says that molten metal found underground weeks later is proof that jet fuel couldnt have been all that was responsible...Probably the most conclusive evidence about a controlled demolition is a research paper (two years, nine authors) published in the peer-reviewed Open Chemical Physics Journal, in April 2009. In studying dust samples from the site, these scientists found chips of nano-thermite, which is a hightech incendiary/explosive. Heres what the papers lead author, Dr. Niels Harrit of the University of Copenhagens chemistry department, had to say about the explosive that hes convinced brought down the Twin Towers and the nearby Building 7: Thermite itself dates back to 1893. It is a mixture of aluminum and rust-powder, which react to create intense heat. The reaction produces iron, heated to 2500 degrees Centigrade. This can be used to do welding. It can also be used to melt other iron. So in nano-thermite, this powder from 1893 is reduced to tiny particles, perfectly mixed. When these react, the intense heat develops much more quickly. Nanothermite can be mixed with additives to give off intense heat, or serve as a very effective explosive. It contains more energy than dynamite, and can be used as rocket fuel. Richard Gage puts it bluntly:Once you get to the science, its indisputable. Jesse Ventura honored the ragsheet by writing a great piece for them. The former Navy Seal and former Governor explained why over 1,000 Architects and Structural Engineers have come together to demand a new investigation regarding the collapse of three high-rise buildings on 9/11. It was a fact filled article that clearly explained the main technical issues that motivated the experts to demand a new investigation. (3)

338

False Flag Attacks

FALSE FLAG: IRAN

There exists a shadowy government with its own Air Force, its own Navy, its own fundraising mechanism, and the ability to pursue its own ideas of the national interest, free from all checks and balances and free from the law itself. Senator Daniel K. Inouye, during the Iran-Contra scandal.

Photograph by Ilya Petushkov

Yemen is the place where you [put] Saudi Arabia against Iran. Webster Griffin Tarpley

False Flags happen more often than we may realize. The information is available to the public, but just because information is available doesnt mean the public is aware of it. Sometimes people come across information about the Iran-Contra affair. Yet does that mean they can put it in a broader context? How do we connect the dots, if we think there is only one dot? If youre not looking for a connection, you wont find one. If you keep an open mind to a possible connection of false flag events, random coincidences may start to feel like a patterned program. This section covers two topics, Operation Ajax and Iran Contra. There is a long storied history between the United States and Iran. We

339

The Inside Jobs

have had our hands in Iranian business for years. Today, we are contemplating wiping them off the face of the earth. Many within our government claim we have to protect Israel. Really? How can we do this across the globe when we cant do it across our own state-lines? Before we take a thorn out of someone elses eye, we should pluck the speck from our own eye. Operation Ajax The United States and British run forces carried out this operation in 1953. A combination of spreading propaganda and false flag operations were used against the democratically elected leader of Iran, Mohammed Mosaddeq. Most of the information about this is now declassified; this evidence adds to the proof of United States sponsored terror. This was the first successful flex of muscle that the CIA used to create regime change in the democratically elected government of Iran. As always, if the great enterprise is threatened, it runs and cries foul. This is how cowards have controlled the world, through stealth and manipulation. Still, how long can history repeat itself before the game gets old and people see the wolf in sheeps clothing face to face?
...the Iranian Government is causing a great enterprise, the proper functioning of which is of immense benefit not only to the United Kingdom and Iran but to the whole free world, to grind to a stop. Unless this is promptly checked, the whole of the free world will be much poorer and weaker, including the deluded Iranian people themselves. Gladwyn Jebb (British delegate to the UN Security Council)

But why? What happened? In short, the democratically elected government of Iran had become a threat to western economic and geopolitical interests after the Iranian parliament nationalized the AIOC (Anglo-Iranian Oil Company) in 1951. This was the threat to the great empire? I think not. This was a threat to the global empire, not to the people.

340

False Flag Attacks

IRAN CONTRA
I had a friend who was on the elite Seal team 6, the anti-terrorist unit. He didnt even know til he was watching TV and he went, oh my God, I was part of that. Jesse Ventura (Fox Sports Radio)

On November 4, 1979, Iranian students, who were in support of an Iranian Revolution, took 52 employees of the U.S. Embassy in Iran hostage. These employees would remain hostages for 444 days, being released on the day that Ronald Reagan was sworn in as the President of the United States. The hostage situation in 1979 set the stage for the 1980 presidential election between President Jimmy Carter and Republican nominee Ronald Reagan. In the fall, leading up to Election Day, Jimmy Carter was leading the polls against Reagan. The scales were tipped in Reagans favor by the hostage situation. Though it looked like Carter might pull off the unthinkable, get the hostages released and then earn a second term to the Presidency of the United States, a meeting in Paris changed that. The meeting was allegedly set up to negotiate a deal with Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. CIA Director William Casey, with George H.W. Bush, traveled to the Paris Hilton to meet with Iranian Prime Minister Bani Sadr in what is now known as the October Surprise, which took place just weeks before the presidential election. Future Russian Prime Minister Sergey V. Stepashin wrote a six page report that would end up in the United States Congress, claiming that not only was George H.W. Bush present, but so was a staffer of the National Security Council, Robert Gates. Other credible sources also claim to have seen Bush present, though the Secret Service tried to deny it. CIA contract agent Richard Brenneke would testify under oath that he saw Bush in Paris that weekend. Bush was fired from his job as CIA director when Jimmy Carter became president. The meeting went something like this...Iran would be given weapons to fight against Iraq in the Iran-Iraq war. In exchange, Iran would cease negotiations with the Carter administration, and keep the American hostages in Tehran, Iran. All of a sudden, Carter looked weak as a political leader and was painted to be an incompetent president. Behind the shadows, forces within our own government were

341

The Inside Jobs

negotiating to keep the hostages in Iran. Thats treason. Thats how our shadow government works. They do what benefits themselves, not the American people. This is just one more reason to expose and criminally prosecute anyone involved in such crimes. Once that precedence is set, such historical incidents will be further documented, adding more proof that this is more than just a conspiracy theory, there are many facts involved. The October Surprise led to Jimmy Carter losing the Presidency of the United States and on January 21, 1981; the same day that Ronald Reagan was sworn in as the 40th President of the United States, the 52 hostages were released. Jesse Venturas book, American Conspiracies, reiterates the facts of the October Surprise, George H. W. Bush and about-to-be CIA Director William Casey, among others, arranged to supply Iran with weapons and unblock their assets in U.S. banks. In doing so, the hostages would not be freed until Reagan took office, raising suspicions about the timing. Furthermore, in the spring of 1982, when it seemed that Iran was winning the war against neighbor Iraq, in order to increase the instability and antagonize those involved on both sides of the Iran-Iraq war, accusations arose claiming that the CIA, including both CIA Director Casey and Deputy Director [Robert] Gates, knew of, approved of, and assisted in the sale of non-U.S. origin military weapons, ammunition, and vehicles to Iraq. Howard Teicher, working for the NSA submitted this accusation in an affidavit in Federal Court in 1995. Robert Gates would go on to be George W. Bushs Secretary of Defense after Donald Rumsfeld was quietly shown the door. Robert Gates holds the same job title under the new president Barack Obama. Some things never change. So you have a war between Iran and Iraq. Then you have a CIA led United States shadow team that was arming both sides. I thought America was about peace? I thought we believed in democracy? Boy was I wrong again. If we can do this type of double-dipping in this war, could we do it in others as well? In the Concluding Observations, part 8, in the report, Final Report of the Independent Counsel for Iran/Contra Matters, President Reagan, the secretary of state, the secretary of defense, and the director of central intelligence and their

342

False Flag Attacks

necessary assistants committed themselves, however reluctantly, to two programs contrary to congressional policy and contrary to national policy. They skirted the law, some of them broke the law, and almost all of them tried to cover up the Presidents willful activities. Congress cannot do its job of acting as a check and balance against such action if false information is given to Congress. When they dont have the whole story, these checks and balances are of lessened value. We live in a world that is filled with deception; where people think its ok to deceive, hide, suppress, and manipulate facts so theyre not forced to lie under oath, which would lead to prison time, or a presidential pardon. Without the proper facts, i.e. whistle blowers, its difficult for congress to conduct a thorough investigation. The disrespect for Congress by a popular and powerful President and his appointees was obscured when Congress accepted the tendered concept of a runaway conspiracy of subordinate officers and avoided the unpleasant confrontation with a powerful President and his Cabinet. So what happens when congress and/or the White House hastily investigates a scandal on this level without taking the necessary time to conduct a professional, standard, and ethical investigation? How does a lower level criminal loyally protect his boss to the bitter end? In haste to display and conclude its investigation of this unwelcome issue, Congress destroyed the most effective lines of inquiry by giving immunity to Oliver L. North and John M. Poindexter so that they could exculpate and eliminate the need for the testimony of President Reagan and Vice President Bush. There the republicans were, stated Jesse Ventura in his blockbuster best-selling book, sending weapons first to Iran to make sure Reagan got elected, then turning around and arming Saddam Hussein. CIA Manipulation and Subversion Richard Barnet, co-director of the Institute for Policy Studies said, The stock and trade of the intelligence underworld is deceit...to create contrived realities...for the purpose of manipulation and subversion...the CIA has admitted that it has had more than thirty

343

The Inside Jobs

journalists on its payroll since World War II. Proprietary corporations Air America and other agency fronts, fake foundations, student organizations, church organizations, and so forth are all part of the false-bottom world that has ended up confusing the American people as much as it has confounded foreign governments.

FALSE FLAG: HITLER

Bush and Nazi Capitalism The German propaganda minister Joseph Goebbels, under Adolf Hitler once said, The truth is the mortal enemy of the lie, and thus by extension, the truth is the greatest enemy of the state. According to a BBC story that aired July 23rd, 2007, George W. Bushs grandfather, Prescott Sheldon Bush (1895 1972) was involved in a plot to overthrow the U.S. government and install some sort of fascist dictatorship. For anyone who knows about just one of the secret societies on our universities called Skull and Bones, its probably no surprise that Prescott Bush was a member while attending Yale University. The 1933 plot to overthrow the government, according to a Congressional Committee in a report called The McCormackDickstein Report accuses (among others in America) Prescott Bush of business deals with a German named Fritz Thyssen during the 1930s, 1940s. Thyssen was allegedly a major financial backer to the rise of Adolph Hitler. The New York Herald Tribune referred to Thyssen as Hitlers Angel. In 1942, Prescott Bushs business interests were seized under the Trading with the Enemy Act. One of the businesses seized was the Hamburg America Lines, and Prescott Bush was its manager. According to the Congressional Committee Report, Hamburg America Lines offered free passage to Germany for journalists willing

344

False Flag Attacks

to write favorably about the Nazis, and had brought Nazi sympathizers to America. The McCormack-Dickstein Committee was established to investigate a homegrown American fascist plot created in 1933. Two former slave laborers have sued the U.S. government and the heirs of Prescott Bush for $40 billion dollars. They do this on the claim that one of Prescott Bushs companies at the time was engaged in mining operations in Poland using slave labor from Auschwitz. The Endgame Marine Corps Major General Smedley Butler went public after he was approached by some very powerful men in America, stating that he was asked to lead 500,000 veterans in a takeover of Washington and the White House. Butler refused and told the congressional committee what happened. His statements were corroborated by other witnesses. The committee concluded that the plot was real. Unfortunately, these were strange days as well. The names of the wealthy backers of this plot were blacked out in the committees records and no one has ever been prosecuted. Having the ability to decipher fact from fiction puts us in an awakening once we realize that things are not as they seem. We have to realize that we are puppets on a string before we even think about how we are going to cut that string. Or else, we remain in limbo, as cautionary folks may choose to do. Operation Himmler, as its most notably called, was a Nazi Germany false flag event which was planned to create the appearance of Polish aggression against Germany, in order to justify the invasion of Poland. On August 22, 1939 Adolf Hitler remarked, I will provide a propagandistic casus belli. Its credibility doesnt matter. The victor will not be asked whether he told the truth. Prior to the invasion of their country, Polish authorities were accused by Germany of being in charge of, or in cahoots with, the alleged ethnic cleansing of Germans living inside of Poland. The false flag that would be carried out was named after the man who is credited with inventing the plan, Heinrich Himmler. It would be supervised by

345

The Inside Jobs

Heinrich Muller and Reinhard Heydrich. The bulk of Operation Himmler was carried out on August 31, 1939. Agents of the SS and SD were used to carry out the operation. As many documents show, and as can be seen in the movie Endgame, German troops, dressed in Polish uniforms, would harass and storm buildings on the border of Poland and Germany. They would scare locals with random gunfire, which in itself is an act of terrorism. They would also vandalize properties inside Poland, then quickly retreat, leaving dead bodies in Polish uniforms behind. In the documents that set up this plan, the dead bodies were described as Konserve, or canned goods. These canned goods were usually prisoners from concentration camps who would be poisoned and shot for appearance sake. The cruel act of terrorism is not always what it seems to be. Hitler used terrorism as a political tool, but this was not politics as usual.
Terrorism is the best political weapon, for nothing drives people harder than a fear of sudden death. Adolf Hitler

According to Wikipedia: There were several separate operations, including staged attacks on: - the German radio station Sender Gleiwitz (Gliwice) (this was arguably the most notable of Operation Himmler operations; see Gleiwitz incident for details) - the German customs station at Hochlinden (today part of RybnikStodoy) - the forest service station in Pitschen (Byczyna) Gleiwitz Incident On August 31, 1939, led by Alfred Naujocks, a small force of German operatives dressed up in Polish uniforms and seized the Gleiwitz radio station in order to broadcast an anti-German broadcast in the Polish language. Several prisoners from one or more German

346

False Flag Attacks

concentration camps and a local Polish activist, who was arrested the day before this incident, were found dead on the scene in Polish uniforms. On September 1, 1939, Adolf Hitler gave a speech in the Reichstag, spelling out his reasoning for Germany taking defensive action against Poland.
I can no longer find any willingness on the part of the Polish Government to conduct serious negotiations with us. These proposals for mediation have failed because in the meanwhile there, first of all, came as an answer the sudden Polish general mobilization, followed by more Polish atrocities. These were again repeated last night. Recently in one night there were as many as twenty-one frontier incidents: last night there were fourteen, of which three were quite serious. I have, therefore, resolved to speak to Poland in the same language that Poland for months past has used toward us. Adolf Hitler (September 1, 1939)

According to Wikipedia.com: By mid-1939, thousands of Polish Volksdeutsche had been secretly prepared for sabotage and guerrilla warfare...the purpose of their activities was to provoke antiGerman reprisals that could be claimed as provocations by the Germans. Those German agents indeed cooperated with the German forces during the invasion of Poland. The Reichstag Fire In February of 1933, an Order of Hermann Gring to Prussian Police states, Police officers who use weapons in carrying out their duties will be covered by me. Whoever misguidedly fails in this duty can expect disciplinary action. On February 23, 1933, Gring sets up a police force of 50,000 men (mostly members of the S.S. and S.D.). These Nazi storm troopers were basically given policing powers. Two days following the creation of these storm troopers, they raided the Communist headquarters in Berlin, Germany. At the time, Gring claimed he uncovered plans for a Communist uprising during this raid. Later it was revealed that his troopers had the membership list of the Communist party and was going to arrest all of the 4,000

347

The Inside Jobs

members who were in Germany. Under the approval of Hitler, Gring and Goebbels created a plan to spread fear and terror throughout the people of Germany by burning the Reichstag building and blaming it on Communists. The Reichstag is a building in Berlin where elected members of the German government meet to conduct the daily business of governing. They still needed a patsy, a fall guy, a Guy Fawkes. As chance would have it, if it was chance, they would get one right when they needed him. According to Historyplace.com: By a weird coincidence, there was also in Berlin a deranged Communist conducting a one-man uprising. An arsonist named Marinus van der Lubbe, 24, from Holland, had been wandering around Berlin for a week attempting to burn government buildings to protest capitalism and start a revolt. On February 27, he decided to burn the Reichstag building. Carrying incendiary devices, he spent all day lurking around the building, before breaking in around 9 p.m. He took off his shirt, lit it on fire, then went to work using it as his torch. What a strange and unbelievable coincidence. It continues: They had befriended the arsonist and may have known or even encouraged him to burn the Reichstag that night. The storm troopers, led by SA leader Karl Ernst, used the underground tunnel that connected Grings residence with the cellar in the Reichstag. They entered the building, scattered gasoline and incendiaries, then hurried back through the tunnel. Hitler and Goebbels, who left from a dinner at Goebbels house, arrived on the scene to find Gring accusing the Communists of setting this fire. Soon after, an emergency meeting with leaders of the German government took place. The propaganda machine of false flag terror progressed from there. Communist arsonist, Marinus van der Lubbe, was blamed as Hitler played the part of an enraged leader of the German people. The false flag would provide Hitler with everything he needed to seize all power in Germany for his own, with the peoples support. Hitler is quoted to have said the following: The German people have been soft too long. Every

348

False Flag Attacks

Communist official must be shot. All Communist deputies must be hanged this very night. All friends of the Communists must be locked up. And that goes for the Social Democrats and the Reichsbanner as well! Hitler then went to the Vlkischer Beobachter, the German newspaper, in order to take control and manipulate the newspapers coverage of the Reichstag fire. Working with Goebbels, they spun wild tales of a Communist plot to overthrow Germany by seizing power in Berlin. Also found at Historyplace.com: At a cabinet meeting held later in the morning, February 28, Chancellor Hitler demanded an emergency decree to overcome the crisis. He met little resistance from his largely non-Nazi cabinet. That evening, Hitler and [ViceChancellor] Papen went to Hindenburg and the befuddled old man signed the decree for the Protection of the people and the State. What happened next is eerily similar to what happened after 9/11/2001, when the Patriot Act took precedence over the United States Constitution thus ending America as we knew it. A strong argument could be made that our country died that day in 2001. The same could be said for the democracy of Germany back in 1933. Just as we have the Patriot Act, Germany had an Emergency Decree. The Emergency Decree stated: Restrictions on personal liberty, on the right of free expression of opinion, including freedom of the press; on the rights of assembly and association; and violations of the privacy of postal, telegraphic and telephonic communications and warrants for house searches, orders for confiscations as well as restrictions on property, are also permissible beyond the legal limits otherwise prescribed. Exposing false flag terror strikes at the heart of the global elite, off-shore bankers, the New World Order, the Bilderberg Group, or whatever title this shadow government has. Let the facts speak for themselves. Let the doubters debate with the facts. If they remain

349

The Inside Jobs

doubters after learning the facts, may God help them. Control of the Mind Barrie Zwicker is the author of the book Towers of Deception: The media cover-up of 9/11. He is a Canadian journalist, and media critic of over 35 years. He implanted MK ULTRA into my head. These CIA declassified files deal with brainwashing, mind control, and manipulation through fear and terror. He has called on journalists all over the world to research and publish how Hitler and his Nazi party used these tactics to trick the German population into wars of his choice. Through psychological manipulation and behavior modification, Hitler and his goons were able to induce trauma and fear across Germany and beyond. Thus, using a process of trauma-based mind control that can be found in the CIA declassified files - MK ULTRA. Zwicker stresses the importance of investigating if these same tactics were used after the terror events of 9/11 in the same manner. As every history teacher I have ever had told me, History repeats itself. Zwicker and others have set about to prove that false flags are real, they are happening and have happened throughout history. If you believe that, then you can understand how history has repeated itself and continues to do so.

Photograph by Ilya Petushkov 350

False Flag Attacks

FALSE FLAG: CASTRO

Article III, Section 3 of the U.S. Constitution states: Treason against the United States, shall consist only in levying war against them... Declassified military documents give proof to the theory that the US government is more than capable of planning attacks against their own people. To those who do not believe that false flag operations are real, look up Operation Northwoods. This declassified false flag proposal was planned around 1962 by top U.S. Military leaders. Basically, the operation called for the murder of U.S. citizens by staging a terror attack and blaming it on Cuba. One scenario involved blowing up a plane over or around Cuba. The alleged attack would then be blamed on Cuba, in order to gain public support for a war against Cuba. An attack like this was necessary if the U.S. was going to convince their people that a war with Cuba was a good thing. As with all false flag terrorism, the nut-bags that come up with these schemes argue that the end justifies the means. Perhaps in their psychotic minds it does, but to non-psychopaths, its hard for us to understand that irrational illogical type of thinking. Besides the use of planes, another scenario called for the creation of a Communist Cuba terror campaign in and around Cuba. This operation was approved and signed by the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Lyman L. Lemnitzer. Lemnitzer was appointed by President Eisenhower as Army General. In 1962, he was the highest ranking U.S. Military officer. After the document was signed and approved by all Joint Chiefs of Staff, Lemnitzer presented Operation Northwoods to Kennedys Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara on March 13, 1962. The Joint Chiefs of Staff consists of a panel of the highest ranking members of each major branch of the Armed Forces. Lemnitzer recommended that

351

The Inside Jobs

the operation be run by the U.S. Army. Operation Northwoods was rejected by President Kennedy. Why False Flag Cuba? On January 1, 1959, Fidel Castro assumed power, after a six year revolution that overthrew General Fulgencio Batista. Between February 4th and 13th, Soviet First Deputy Prime Minister Anastas Mikoyan visited Cuba during the opening of a Soviet trade exhibition in Havana. He negotiated economic and trade agreements that would help Castro get away from economic dependence of the United States. On May 7th, 1960, the Soviet Union and Cuba established diplomatic relations. On July 8th, 1960, the United States suspended the Cuba sugar quota; essentially cutting off about 80% of Cuba exports to the United States. July 9th, the USSR bought sugar that was previously being exported into the United States market. August 26th, the United States imposed an embargo on trade with Cuba. On October 6th, Cuba nationalized approximately 1 billion dollars in U.S. private investments on the island. That seizure could not go unpunished by the United States. According to a 1975 Senate investigation, between 1960 and 1965 there were at least eight assassination attempts created by the United States Government on Fidel Castro. (For more information on these assassination attempts, look up Alleged Assassination Plots Involving Foreign Leaders, 11/20/75, page 73) VENTURA MEETS CASTRO In 2002, while Governor of Minnesota, Jesse The Mind Ventura took a good will trip to Cuba. There he met with Fidel Castro, even though President Bush was against the idea. After growing up in a propagandized fear of the leader of Cuba, Ventura would have an hour to speak with Castro. According to Venturas page-turning

352

False Flag Attacks

book, American Conspiracies, the first words out of Castros mouth were, You are a man of great courage. Castro made that comment because Ventura had openly defied President Bush by going to Cuba, showing Castro that not all Americans bow down to the president. Being curious about what Castro thought about John F. Kennedys assassination, Castro told him point blank, It was an inside job. Castro then explained the repercussions America would have brought down on Cuba had Castro ordered the assassination of an American President. If I would have ordered Kennedy killed, and the United States found out, we wouldnt exist anymore. Castro made it very clear to Ventura that had he ordered the assassination, the United States would have blown us off the face of the earth. Why would I take that risk? Before the brief but enlightening conversation ended, Castro reiterated the main point, It was completely an inside job. It was done by people within the United States. Make no mistake, Russia had plans to put nuclear missiles in Cuba and Castro had agreed to this. The Cuban missile crisis, had it been in any other presidents hands, might have brought about World War III. If not for diplomacy, the landscape of our world might look very different today, if it would still exist at all.
There comes a time where Silence IS betrayal! - Martin Luther King, Jr.

MARTIN LUTHER KING DAY

We may have all come on different ships, but we are all on the same boat now. Martin Luther King Jr.

After the passage of Public Law 98-144, (Jan.18, 1986) President Ronald Reagan signed a proclamation declaring the third Monday in January a public holiday in honor of the birthday of Martin Luther King Jr. It was only about 23 years ago that we started celebrating the life of one of the greatest promoters of freedom ever to live. I do not believe that the death of John F. Kennedy, Robert

353

The Inside Jobs

Kennedy, Malcolm X, and Martin Luther King were separate unrelated tragedies. I think they were all killed for the message they wished to spread, a message that was of peace and freedom.
Have we not come to such an impasse in the modern world that we must love our enemies---or else? The chain reaction of evil---hate begetting hate, wars producing more wars--must be broken, or else we shall be plunged into the dark abyss of annihilation. Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr.

The Civil Rights Law was passed in 1964. It was a great victory in the quest for freedom and sovereignty for all. Fairness and equality gained progress, while bigotry and discrimination hid in the shadows. It is well known that J. Edgar Hoover was no fan of MLK. Even back then, the FBI was keeping tabs on their citizens they saw as creating trouble for the establishment. With trouble so loosely defined, it allows people like Hoover to interpret it according to his own definition. It is whatever they say it is.
Change does not roll in on the wheels of inevitability, but comes through continuous struggle. Martin Luther King, Jr.

We are change. We the People have always been the ones who brought about change. It is We the People who need to get involved in our local communities, now more than ever. As we look around us, we see the cold age of corporations, a time of selfishness, greed and pride. The sacrifice of quality for quantity has taken hold of this country and is sucking the life out of it. What happens when there is nothing left of small businesses and farms? We have to support our local store owners and restaurants. If we dont, who else will? If we want to rebuild our country, I believe the least we can do is buy things made in America.
I have a dream that one day this nation will rise up and live out the true meaning of its creed: We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal...I have a dream that my four little children will one day live in a nation where they will not be judged by the color of their skin but by the content of their character. I have a dream today!...And if America is to be a great nation, this must become true. Martin Luther King Jr.

354

False Flag Attacks

As I write these words it is Martin Luther King Jr. Day, a great day for America. We celebrate not only the man but the actions that one man did. He showed us all that one man can make a difference. Whether on this earth or not...they can kill the messenger but they cant destroy the message. Let freedom ring. His struggle for freedom is now Americas struggle. If we lose our freedoms, in the name of fighting terrorism or not, then we are not really America...we become something else. People like Martin Luther King did not risk their lives for the next generations of human beings to turn their heads away as our freedoms are taken away from us. He would not stand for the voter injustice that we have seen in the 2000 and 2004 presidential elections. A large number of voter discrimination claims have been reported in several different states. Florida in 2000 was a joke. We need a million Martin Luther Kings to stand up for freedom and stand against tyranny. We dont need another dictatorship in this country. Eight years is enough. INJUSTICE There has been long speculation as to the governments involvement in the assassination of Martin Luther King Jr. Martin Luther Kings family filed a wrongful death lawsuit, accusing the government of having some involvement in Kings assassination. The lawsuit ended in 1999 when a jury concluded that certain governmental agencies were party to a conspiracy. Coincidently, at this same time, the media was all over the O.J. Simpson trial and silent about the lawsuit that involved one of the most important men in American history a man who has a street named after him in numerous cities around the country. Was it a goal of MLK to have a street named after him? Or is this a distraction to prevent an uproar by the people who believe King was assassinated by elements within the U.S. Government? Writing from his jail cell in Birmingham, Alabama, in 1963, Martin Luther King Jr. expressed his freedom of speech under the most trying circumstances. Yet even then, he under-stood the magnitude and importance of the justice he was standing for. How many of us are

355

The Inside Jobs

willing to die for what we truly believe in? How many of those people can say that standing up for what they believe in is about justice, unity, and peace for all colors of skin, freedom for all of Gods children? Truth, liberty, and justice for all.
Injustice anywhere is a threat to justice everywhere. We are caught in an inescapable network of mutuality, tied in a single garment of destiny. Whatever affects one directly, affects all indirectly. Martin Luther King

Though mainstream media has portrayed James Earl Ray the lone assassin in Dr. Kings murder, there is evidence, both physical and eyewitness accounts that debate that theory. Carthel Weeden, a retired Caucasian Memphis fireman, was a Captain at the firehouse across the street from where King was shot. He testified in 1999, in the civil trial, that on the morning of the murder, a group of men, calling themselves military intelligence agents, said they needed access to the roof of the building, as they were doing reconnaissance on Dr. King. He testified that after he heard shots rang out, the intelligence men were still on the roof of the fire station. Then he told them he helped put Dr. King on a stretcher. He saw the bullet wound, saying, the bullet was in an upward projective position. That indicated that King was shot from below him, not above him. So what about the people who were pointing upwards in the photograph taken right after King had been shot. This photograph would be used to convince people that the shot came from above Martin. Yet the bullet wound contradicted that theory. Who is the man that is seen kneeling next to King? Marrell McCullough, an undercover cop from the city of Memphis at that time. Its alleged he was part of the group known as the Invaders, the group that started previous riots when King was in Memphis previously. He later went to work for the CIA. The conspiracy trial in Memphis, 1999, revealed a lot of information that our media has ignored. Yet this is historical. Lloyd Jowers owned the restaurant, Jims Grill, which was across the street from the Lorraine Motel, where King was shot. He told ABC that Frank LiBerto, head of the Memphis Mafia, gave him one hundred thousand dollars, which Jowers gave to the killer. Only Jowers said that the killer was not James Earl Ray, but Earl Clark. He said after

356

False Flag Attacks

Clark shot King, Clark handed Jowers the gun through the window of his restaurant. Cab driver Paul Butler heard the shots and saw Earl Clark jump over an embankment. He chased Clark and watched Clark jump into a police car and drive off. After Butler went to the Memphis police station, and talked with the press about what he saw, he was found dead, reportedly after being pushed out of a moving car. After Jowers told everything he knew to ABC, and nothing was done, he went to the King family. He told them not only was he at a meeting with the killer, someone else present at that meeting was in the famous picture of a few men pointing upward. This prompted the King family to file a wrongful death suit against Lloyd Jowers for a whopping hundred dollars. The suit was not about money. It was about truth. The record needed to be set straight. Sometimes history lags behind the words of truth. One of the strongest pieces of evidence is that Earl Clarks whereabouts at the time of the murder were discredited by his own wife. When she took the stand in the trial, William Pepper, the attorney representing the King family, asked Clarks wife where her husband was on April 4th, 1968. She claimed he was sick that day, he didnt go to work. She testified that after he heard of the assassination from his police radio, he said he should go in because he knew there was going to be trouble. Then she said, I had to go to the cleaners and pick up my husbands clothes, because all of his uniforms were dirty. Mrs. Clark, Pepper asked, do you know what time Dr. King was shot? Yes, I do. 6 p.m. He then asked her, Do you know what time the cleaners close, Mrs. Clark? After a long pause, he answered for her, since she had obviously been caught in a lie. Turning to the jury he said, Let the record show that the cleaners close every day at 5 p.m. Justice was served in the name of truth.

357

The Inside Jobs

Malcolm X Our friendship blossomed as Malcolm began to receive death threats, Dick Gregory wrote in his book, Callus On My Soul. The breaking point came for Malcolm when Kennedy was killed. On all the channels, Gregory continued, witnesses were telling their stories. Then a strange thing happened on the evening news. All those people who had given their stories earlier in the day changed them. These people had one thing in common: they had all talked to the Secret Service. The more I read Dick Gregorys book, the more I was saddened, uplifted, smiling, crying, and praising God all at the same time. Malcolms autopsy report clearly showed that the bullets in his body were fired from above him, yet the men who allegedly shot Malcolm were standing in the audience below him. According to his book, they used the Freedom of Information Act to discover that the CIA rented the same building where Malcolm was killed, the Audubon Ballroom, one week before the murder. Gregory asks, why would they rent it right before Malcolm was set to speak there? Knowing what we now know about the CIA, its an easier question to answer now than it would have been back then. Yet people like Mr. Gregory knew about our government back then. Im still learning about what happened back then. For what history was then, it is repeating itself today. Following Malcolms death, his funeral was seen across national television. This was the first time an African-Americans death hit mainstream media, being broadcast in its entirety on all three major TV networks. As far back as the Underground Railroad, said Dick Gregory in Callus On My Soul, some white folks have tried to help, and one day we will have to talk about them in the same breath as the many Black folks who have sacrificed. The voting rights Act was finally passed, August 6, 1965, making voting a right and a privilege...its also a duty upon every American citizen, for many innocent African Americans and Caucasians sacrificed and spoke out; some died so there would be some kind of equal rights for voting. This is a milestone in the history of America.

358

We Are The Answers To The Problems

CONCLUSION
In Star Wars Episode 3: Revenge of the Sith, it is revealed that Chancellor Palpatine has been secretly running the Separatists while also running the Galactic Senate, as Chancellor. He was essentially commanding both sides of an ongoing war between the Separatists and the Republic. The republic is not what it once was, explained the future emperor. Thats because he made it that way. While countless lives were lost during the clone wars, the war came to an abrupt end when it was revealed that Chancellor Palpatine had been commanding and manipulating both sides of the war. This is the best example of false flag terrorism in a movie. This, in turn, helped bring about a galactic police state, beginning with the city planet of Coruscant. From this planet, Palpatine, better known as the Emperor, would complete his false flag mission to rule the galaxy. Before this could be done, there was one final task...to completely wipe out the Jedi, who were the last real threat against his false flag operation. By killing the Jedi, the Emperor would finally end any and all resistance to his galactic reign of tyranny. Execute order 66, the Emperor told Commander Cody. Once Order 66 was given by the new Emperor Palpatine, the clones turned on their Jedi leaders and began killing them off. Aided by the dreaded Darth Vader, this false flag operation was carried out to perfection...or so it seemed. Only the creative mind of George Lucus could be so bold as to blatantly shine a light on false flag terror using the catalyst of Star Wars Episodes 1, 2, and 3. Through this beautiful work of fiction, reality seeped through. Most people might not have noticed the strange similarities between this work of fiction and false flag terror. Yet even the critics recognized the eerie words that were shared by a young Darth Vader and President George Bush, Either you are with us, or you are with the terrorists. That was what Bush said during his State of the Union address after 9/11. Either you are with me, or you are my enemy, echoed Darth Vader a few years later. Perhaps we are living in our own version of Star Wars Episode 3: Revenge of the Sith. Perhaps we are heading into the days of the Rebel Alliance. With so many truth seekers and so much exposure of

359

We Are The Answers To The Problems

government sponsored terror incidents, its hard to think otherwise. Instead of a Star War, in reality we have an Info-War, with information warriors who are just as strong as the Rebel Alliance, if not stronger. A major false flag like the one Emperor Palpatine pulled off was completed through the arm of the police state. This is eerily similar to the coming police state that America is finding themselves in today. Like the Jedi, will it be too late to stop this catastrophic false flag operation? No. How can we stop it? By educating ourselves and helping others understand what a false flag operation is. In doing so, we will recognize a false flag operation when we see it. Now is not the time to regress, to crawl into a hole and wait for the end of the world. Now is the time to take peaceful action, in any way you choose to. We are, have been, and will continue to seek the truth. What we do with truth is up to each individual. WHO ARE THE TERRORISTS?

Photograph by Ilya Petushkov

We must speak the truth about terror. Let us never tolerate outrageous conspiracy theories concerning the attacks of September the 11th, malicious lies that attempt to shift blame away from the terrorists themselves, away from the guilty. George W. Bush, UN General Assembly, November 10, 2001

360

We Are The Answers To The Problems

Im reading from the actual bill that passed in South Carolina. They got one in Virginia and other states. It actually says in here that every member of a subversive organization, or organization subject to foreign control, every foreign asset, every person who advocates, teaches, advises, or practices the duty, the necessity, or the propriety of controlling, conducting, or seizing, or overthrowing the Government of the United States, shall register with the Secretary of State or get 10 years in prison, $25,000 fine. Alex Jones

George Washingtons Farewell Address, 1796, Library of Congress

During his farewell address in 1796, President George Washington asked the question, why? Why quit our own to stand upon foreign ground? Why, by interweaving our destiny with that of any part of Europe, entangle our peace and prosperity in the toils of European
361

We Are The Answers To The Problems

ambition, rivalship, interest, humor, or caprice? Before Baron Nathan Mayer Rothschild said, I care not what puppet is placed upon the throne of England to rule the Empire on which the sun never sets. The man that controls Britains money supply controls the British Empire, and I control the British money supply, Thomas Jefferson said, A wise and frugal government which shall restrain men from injuring one another, which shall leave them otherwise free to regulate their own pursuits of industry and improvement, and shall not take from the mouth of labor the bread it has earned - this is the sum of good government. It was the economy that Jefferson held as the first and most important virtues while placing public debt as the greatest dangers. To preserve our independence, we must not let our rulers load us with perpetual debt. We have fallen from what we once were. A country founded on freedom is allowing its own rights to be taken away. Slowly, we begin to lose respect for the constitution. Then we lose respect for each other. These two losses could be the result of the possibility that we dont even respect ourselves in this country. How far we have fallen. We will ask more questions and try to encourage you to do the same. The information in this book is nothing new. The news and information is readily available across the alternative news media and even in some mainstream news sources. We are here to place blame, if there is blame to be placed. If there is something to hide, we will shine a bright light on it exposing it for what it really is. If there is need to hold someone accountable, then we will try to hold the appropriate people accountable. We the people are the last stand for freedom. Maintaining our constitutional rights should be a top priority. That means we may have to educate ourselves to what some of those basic rights are, even if wed rather do something a little less boring. Its important that someone guard the watch towers, that someone rings the alarm when the bells of freedom fall silent. Its important that we do something, which means we cannot stand by and do nothing. How much further can we fall before we hit rock bottom? I dont know about you, but I dont want to find out. Instead, I choose to look upward and wish to figure out a way to climb out of this hole. When I was a young boy, my older brother and I would play the game Catch with a baseball. It consists of simply throwing a baseball back

362

We Are The Answers To The Problems

and forth. When one of us threw the ball too hard or off-course, it would land in our neighbors yard. Wed look at each other and decide who was going to climb the fence and retrieve the baseball. To get over the high fence, one of us would give the other a boost, eventually getting over the fence and getting our ball back. I feel like that is what has happened to our constitution. Bush threw the constitution over the fence and now we must decide who is going to go over the fence and get it back. Unfortunately, it will take more than one person, political group or social class to do so. We will all have to work together if we really intend to get our constitution back and continue the game of catch that was started when this country was first founded. In the political arena, this game of catch would take place between the checks and balances of the country, which were put in place for a reason. One of the biggest problems of the last eight years is the lack of oversight, which led to the lack of account-ability. As a nation founded on the constitution, I find this lack of checks and balances unacceptable. To fix this problem, we must first understand what the problem is and why it must be fixed. To do that, we must understand the constitution and the basic freedoms it allows. I have included some simplified versions of the first four amendments because I feel that those are the ones that we are in most danger of losing. Why? Because without these rights, We the People have nothing else to peacefully protect ourselves against tyrants such as King George of England. These basic rights were put in place to protect against all enemies, foreign and domestic. We have accepted the propaganda about foreign enemies, but are we just as willing to accept the propaganda about domestic enemies? A False Flag operation seems too far-fetched for most people to even consider. Nevertheless, it should be considered when deemed appropriate, or when suspicious acts surround the event in question. Just ask yourself, who benefits? Who really benefited from 9/11? Look on both sides of the coin, and then you will see who benefited more, the Base (al-Qaeda) or the front line (America)? Or is it a third faction that moves in stealth, controls world currencies and is financing both sides of major wars? Looking back now, I understand that what I am asking you to accept is not something that you may want to hear. I didnt want to hear it either. It just seemed too far-fetched, something out of X-Files or a Tom Clancy book. What I have come to realize since then is how

363

We Are The Answers To The Problems

far this country has fallen from its roots. The seeds that the tree of America has sprouted have some very bad apples growing from it. We try to pick these apples from the tree and throw them away, so they dont spawn more bad seeds. Yet, its impossible to catch every bad apple, just as its impossible to take out every terrorist or expose every false flag event. The point is that we persevere. We continue the fight, no matter what the consequences are and no matter what the price will be. The price of freedom can only be fully paid for once you have left this life. Until then, you are paying continuously. What you choose to pay for is entirely up to you. When it comes to people dying and suffering, Ill pay for truth and call out evil when I see it. I stand with the truth. I fall with the truth. I think Jesse Ventura said it best when he was on Larry King back in 2009. He was asked about the media exposure of Michael Jacksons death. Michael was a great entertainerto me enough is enough. Our medias gone far too much to the entertainment side and to the ratings side, as opposed to the information side and the knowledge side. Honor Michael, do a tribute to him. But it should not last into weeks into months.

364

We Are The Answers To The Problems

Declaration of Independence (http://www.ace-clipart.com/clipart) The Declaration of Independence explains, We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness. That to secure these rights, Governments are instituted among Men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed, That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness...

365

We Are The Answers To The Problems

The United States Constitution This is the oath that one must take before officially becoming the President of the United States: I do solemnly swear that I will faithfully execute the office of president of the United States, and will to the best of my ability, preserve, protect and defend the constitution of the United States. The oath is generally given by the Chief Justice on January 20, which is the day of the Presidents inauguration (when the president enters office). To be eligible to become the President of the United States you must: Be a natural-born citizen. Be at least 35 years old. Have lived in the United States at least 14 years. Of course theres a lot more to it than that, but if you do not meet all three of these requirements, you are never going to be the President of the United States; unless the constitution is amended. Now, to be eligible to vote in an election in the United States is not so complicated. Though the requirements may vary somewhat from state to state, they are essentially the same in most states: 1. Be a citizen of the United States. 2. Be a citizen of the state in which they vote (6 months to 2 years, depending on the state). 3. Be 18 years old. 4. Be registered to vote (be put on official list of voters). In 2008, two records were set for voter turnout; Obama won both the Electoral College and popular vote by a heavy margin. By the time California polls closed that day, we knew who would be the next President of the United States. Barack Obama was the choice of the people, regardless of the fact that the people were only given, in a mainstream sense, two choices. They chose a man who said he would pull the troops out of Iraq in 16-18 months, depending on which speech you hear. Will he repeal the Patriot Act 1 and 2? Will he listen to the

366

We Are The Answers To The Problems

9/11 victims family members who want a real investigation into 9/11/2001?well seefor now lets briefly go over the rules of becoming a member of the House of Representatives: 1. Be at least 25 years of age. 2. Have been a citizen of the United States for at least 7 years. 3. Live in the state he/she is elected to represent. As of 1963, there are 437 members of Congressional Representatives. The House of Representatives has the sole power of impeachment. They serve two year terms. The US Senate has the sole power of trying impeachment cases, which decides if the president gets the boot from office or not. There have only been two Presidents of the United States that have been impeached; Andrew Johnson (17th President of the United States) and Bill Clinton (42nd President of the United States). They were both acquitted (found innocent). There are 100 members in the US Senate. Each state has two senators. They serve six year terms. To become a member of the US Senate there are three basic requirements: 1. Must be 35 years old. 2. Must have been a United States citizen for 9 years. 3. Must live in the state he/she represents. On July 4, 1776, The US Declaration of Independence was signed in Philadelphia. Thus, the United States of America was officially born. The 10 articles of amendments were ratified (made legal) in 1791. Along with the Declaration of Independence, these amendments (the Bill of Rights) formed the Constitution of the United States. Should we lose or sacrifice these rights, we move towards tyranny. We have seen how dictatorships have ruined country after country, and it continues today. As long as we know what the constitution is and understand what it says, we will be able to see when someone is trying to take away those rights.

367

We Are The Answers To The Problems

The First Amendment Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press; or the right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition the Government for a redress of grievances. The First Amendment deals with the freedoms given to each citizen. There can be no law that makes any religion the official religion of the United States of America. Congress cannot take away a citizens right to worship. This is better known as freedom of religion. Congress cannot take away or limit freedom of speech or freedom of the press. 1. No one can advocate the overthrow or changing of the Government by war. 2. People have the right and freedom to peacefully assemble (gatherings and groups holding meetings or meet-ups). 3. People have the right to petition (protest) the government for any correction wanted. The Second Amendment A well regulated Militia, being necessary to the security of a free State, the right of the people to keep and bear Arms, shall not be infringed. This is a very important issue in America today. The right to bear arms was put in the constitution for a reason. Regardless of whether you agree with owning guns or not, it was written into the constitution for ones own protection, should they need them. 1. For protection. 2. For purpose of well trained militia. 3. People may keep and bear arms; this right may not be infringed.

368

We Are The Answers To The Problems

4. The Federal or State governments may pass laws restricting certain types of weapons and ways they may be used. The Third Amendment No soldier shall, in time of peace be quartered in any house, without the consent of the Owner, nor in time of war, but in a manner to be prescribed by law. This amendment is about not allowing soldiers to be stationed in your house. No civilian can be forced to house soldiers unless during a time of war, and only then after Congress has passed a law saying so. This Third Amendment stemmed from before the US was independent of British rule. Under British rule, many people in the US were forced to have British soldiers take up quarters in their households. So when the US gained independence, they made this law to ensure that the US government would not do the same as the British. The Fourth Amendment The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures, shall not be violated, and no warrants shall issue, but upon probable cause, supported by Oath or affirmation, and particularly describing the place to be searched, and the persons or things to be seized. This protects US citizens from unreasonable searches and seizures. Unfortunately, I could show you documents of this right being violated on a consistent basis. Keep your eyes open for these rights being stripped away for our own good. 1. The Right to Privacy. 2. To be protected from the taking of persons belongings, their house, their papers and personal property. 3. Warrants for any of these must be issued with good cause, sworn to by oath and has to describe in detail the exact place to

369

We Are The Answers To The Problems

be searched and who or what is to be seized. This protects citizens from Writ of Assistance - which were used by the British to allow any search or seizure any time and any place.

These amendments and the other twenty three should be taught in our schools from an early age. The more we are taught about the constitution, the better informed we will all be. Former Attorney General, Alberto Gonzales has referred to the Geneva Convention as quaint. I wonder what he thinks of the constitution. To find that out, we would have to know and understand our rights in order to know what he cant take away, as stated in the United States Constitution. Sam Houston once said, Texas has yet to learn submission to any oppression, come from what source it may. Recently, Chuck Norris told World Net Daily, Weve bastardized the First Amendment, reinterpreted Americas religious history and secularized our society until we ooze skepticism and circumvent religion on every level of public and private lifeHow much more will Americans take? When will enough be enough? And, when that time comes, will our leaders finally listen or will history need to record a second American Revolution? We the people have the authority according to Americas Declaration of Independence, which states: That when-ever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government
370

We Are The Answers To The Problems

The Threat
We view ourselves on the eve of battle. We are nerved for the contest, and must conquer or perish. It is vain to look for present aid: None is at hand. We must now act or abandon all hope! Rally to the standard, and be no longer the scoff of mercenary tongues! Be men, be free men, that your children may bless their fathers name. Sam Houston

The threat we face in this country is real. If we will not accept the fact that false flag terror is being used against us, how can we fight it, should it emerge? How do you fight an entity that you refuse to believe exists? You cant. That is the exact reason why false flag terror has been so successfulup until now. Thanks to people like Alex Jones, that is changing. We are fighting an opposition that moves in stealth mode. If people know that the threat of false flag terror is real, those who would try and use false flag terror for their own purposes will think twice before doing so. Americas Declaration of Independence did predict the destructibility of our government and what to do about it. I just stress the point that I am in no way advocating a revolution. I only think that a restoration of the constitution is necessary: That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or to abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness. Prudence, indeed, will dictate that Governments long established should not be changed for light and transient causes; and accordingly all experience has shown that mankind are more disposed to suffer, while evils are sufferable than to right them-selves by abolishing the forms to which they are accustomed. But when a long train of abuses and usurpations, pursuing invariably the same Object evinces a design to reduce them under absolute Despotism, it is their right, it is their duty, to throw off such Government, and to provide new Guards for their future security. This part in the declaration is not calling for a new form of government, but a restoration of the United States Constitution. We must throw off corrupt and evil governments and provide new guards of the constitution. If we know our rights as citizens, we stand at the front-line against tyranny. That is why understanding the

371

We Are The Answers To The Problems

constitution is so important. If we do not understand our rights, how will we know if and when they have been violated? We wont. It happens every day. Abraham Lincoln says in his own words, I was born Feb. 12, 1809, in Hardin County, Kentucky. My parents were both born in Virginia, of undistinguished families-second families, perhaps I should say. My mother, who died in my tenth year, was of a family of the name of Hanks...My father...removed from Kentucky to...Indiana, in my eighth year....It was a wild region, with many bears and other wild animals still in the woods. There I grew up....Of course when I came of age I did not know much. Still somehow, I could read, write, and cipher...but that was all.

372

We Are The Answers To The Problems

(http://www.ace-clipart.com/clipart) Lincoln spent eight years in the Illinois legislature. He and his wife, Mary Todd, had four boys. Of those four, only one would live past maturity. In 1858 Lincoln ran an impressive campaign against Stephen A. Douglas for senator. It was so impressive among the

373

We Are The Answers To The Problems

Republican Party that even though he lost the senate race, in debating with Douglas he proved to his party that he was the right man for the highest office in America, the Republican nomination for President in 1860. Lincoln warned the South in his Inaugural Address: In your hands, my dissatisfied fellow countrymen, and not in mine, is the momentous issue of civil war. The government will not assail you....You have no oath registered in Heaven to destroy the government, while I shall have the most solemn one to preserve, protect and defend it. He served one full term, not much more than John F. Kennedy, before being assassinated a year into his second term. On January 1, 1863, he issued the Emancipation Proclamation that declared the slaves within the Confederacy free men forever. He was re-elected in 1864 as the Civil War was ending, with the Union victory. He encouraged southerners of the Confederacy to lay down their arms and join speedily in reunion. (Gov.com) The House Divided Speech of 1858 This was addressed in front of the Illinois Republican Convention, while he was running for US Senate. Lincoln was attempting to connect Stephen Douglas (Democratic Senator), Roger Taney (Chief Justice of the US Supreme Court), James Buchanan (US President 1857-1861) and Franklin Pierce (US President 1854-1857) in what we call today a conspiracy theory. Lincoln, in this speech, is talking about the rising tensions between the North and South. More so, he is addressing tensions between the slave states and the free states. He saw their coll-ective actions as a sort of movement to make slavery legal and perhaps permanent in America around the 1850s. The Dred Scott Decision, written by Roger Taney, basically said that African Americans could not be citizens; they had no rights and should remain slaves. This is how Lincoln saw these actions, as a possible collective unit: We cannot absolutely know that all these exact adaptations are

374

We Are The Answers To The Problems

the result of preconcert. But when we see a lot of framed timbers, different portions of which we know have been gotten out at different times and places and by different workmen Stephen (Douglas), Franklin (Pierce -ancestor of Barbara Bush), Roger (Taney), and James (Buchanan) for instance and we see these timbers joined together, and see they exactly make the frame of a house or a mill...in such a case, we find it impossible not to believe that Stephen and Franklin and Roger and James all understood each other from the beginning, and all worked upon a common plan or draft drawn before the first lick was struck. Lincoln believed in conspiracy theories? Perhaps he was not intimidated like most politicians today are. Perhaps back then, people werent called crazy because they believed in conspiracy theories? Perhaps for revealing this conspiracy theory, he became the victim of one himself? That is open to interpretation, but the more you know, the more you are able to interpret fact from propaganda. To make claims of falsities is very easy to do, especially if you are trying to discredit something. It takes a lot more effort to apply facts and reasons for such claims. No president should be worshiped or assumed to be perfect. What each president chooses to do and not do is what I examine. Lincoln told the people of his time this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of freedom and that government of the people, by the people, for the people, shall not perish from the earth. On Good Friday, April 14, 1865, Lincoln was assassinated at Fords Theater in Washington by John Wilkes Booth, an actor. The fact that Lincoln was not the only target in this plot of assassinations is not told in your history books yet. Ulysses S. Grant was also a target for assassination around the same time. Yet we are to believe that this lone gunman acted alonealso similar to what happened to JFK. What Can We Do? What can one man or woman do against such surmountable odds? How can we defeat such a monstrous foe? One need only look at the story of David and Goliath. How did civil rights begin? With civil disobedience? Peace activists, fact finders, Truth seekers. We are Change, 911 Truth and many others must have asked this same question

375

We Are The Answers To The Problems

before they decided to do something. So what separates them from us? What makes a person so involved that they would put themselves in harms way, face the evil giant or shout, Why dont you investigate 9/11? to Bill Clinton. I have to admit, it gave me some great satisfaction watching that clip at Infowars.com. I had never seen Bill so flustered, not even in the heyday of his extramarital affairs, or when questioned about what he did to stop Osama bin Laden. The Truth Movement, We Are Change. It came down to ordinary human beings demanding the truth in the face of embarrassment, harassment, and humility. Yet they stood their ground and still do to this day. Bless them. For they are the first twigs in a rolling tumbleweed. They are the kindle that will keep the wood burning nights on end. That tumbleweed will pick up fast, and we will either have to move with it, or let it pass us by. Should we try to stop this inevitable force from reaching its destination (unless by truthful means), then we are putting a lid on the truth. How far out there does the truth go? Do you dare take up the challenge to find out? If you do, you will never be the same. You may never see the world as you always have, maybe just maybe, you too will wake up as so many others have, including myself. Make no mistake; I did not get here overnight. It has been a long, troublesome journey. The stress at times has become almost unbearable. Yet we push on, move forward. Where the arguments are weak, let it be known. Where the proof is inconclusive let it be known. Where the truth is the truth is the truth, let it never be smeared. There are more questions concerning 9/11/2001 than there are answers. So why have we accepted the unquestioned answers that have been provided by the 9/11 Commission, the White House and the established media? Why are we so quick to accept what we are told? If we are so quick to accept such theories, then what is to stop these three forces and others alike from bending the truth, manipulating the facts or worse, creating a False Flag Operation? I believe you can answer that question yourself. Once we begin to understand the psychology of these people (global elitists, world bankers, manipulative dictators masquerading as nation builders, Bilderbergers, New World Order members, PNACProject For A New American Century Members, Bohemian Grove members, CFR members, and high powered secret societies), we can

376

We Are The Answers To The Problems

begin to fight them through peaceful and truthful means. Before we try to understand these people, however, we must figure out who they are. Since most of these members come and go, it is difficult to pinpoint most of these freelancers; but there are some established families in some of the groups I mentioned above that are part of these cabals. I am continuing to do my research on them so I dont know that much about them yet. Yet some names keep popping up time and time again; most notably, two families; the Rothschilds and the Rockefellers. Extensive research must be done to figure out why these two families have a vested interest in the global structure and global economy, in one fashion or another; through the banks, the media, and governments. So what can we do? What can we do? Heres the first thing. Research. If we do the least, at least we have done something, relieving us from the guilt of doing nothing.
Today [the Federal Reserve are] protected, theyre in total secrecy and theyre protected by the law - if [House Resolution Bill] 1207 is passed, we have an audit and they have to answer the questions and I figure, if we ever get that far and get the exposure and get the transparency that we need, then people will wake up and realize, why do we have them at all? Ron Paul Since March 9, 1933, the Untied States has been in a state of national emergency. A majority of the people of the Untied States have their lives under emergency rule. For 40 years freedoms and governmental procedures, guaranteed by the Constitution have, in varying degrees, been abridged by laws brought forth by states of national emergency. Senate Report 93-549 (1973) National Socialism will use its own revolution for establishing a new world order. Adolph Hitler (during World War II)

As a reminder, false flag terror has been associated with the provocation that led to the Mexican-American war. It may now be considered mainstream news to say that the sinking of the battleship, Maine, which triggered the Spanish-American war, may also be related to false flag terror. It may come as a surprise that on the History Channel as well as many other news outlets, they report about the provocation of Japan to attack Pearl Harbor. This last claim is backed up by documentation that President Franklin Roosevelt may have
377

We Are The Answers To The Problems

known about the Japanese attack days before Japan actually attacked us. There is no doubt that Japan did attack us. The doubt comes from our own defenses in Hawaii at Pearl Harbor. It asks the same questions we are asking about 9/11who knew what, when did they know it and what did they do about it? To write these off as mistakes could indirectly encourage false flag terror in the future. This is why it is so important that we say no to false flag terror, whether we believe the government is doing it or not. We can stop false flag events. Once we take away the secrecy of a false flag operation, we make those who would wish to use this tactic think twice. At that point, they would know that everyone would be expecting a false flag event, or that at least the public would be examining the possibility closely. The evil conspirators would have to create a new tactic to get their way. So that is the aim of this book and others. We must try to wake people up; at least those who will listen. The problem is that every person is different and most people dont react the same way as others, so different tactics have to be used for waking up different people. Roman Distraction During the height of government tyranny in Rome, the coliseum harbored more events than ever before. This distraction kept the people busy, kept them happy. It sedated them, manipulated them. Who watches the world burn while theres a party going on? Back then they used their sports stadiums to distract the oppressed people. Today, we use sports stadiums in the same way. As the saying goes, history repeats itself.

Unfortunately, not only do we have sports as a distraction, but we also have our loving TV sets.

378

We Are The Answers To The Problems

I understand some people can be football fans, but it really shows the state of America when people are more interested in that. Just imagine what we could do if we got 60,000 people, instead of going to a stadium, if we were to surround the White House on one weekend [to peacefully protest], says Mark Dice on the Alex Jones show. Just before the 2010 NFL Superbowl, Mark Dice posted a YouTube clip, falsely stating that the Super Bowl was canceled; (1) and his video got on KTLA, reaching hundreds of thousands of people, in order to educate them on whats important and what we should be paying attention to. Alex Jones responded, Exactly. Thats why the U.N. and others say, even back in Roman times they wrote, they give you these sports stadiums and hype up sports so youll be distracted under their tyranny. Again, I see friends, family, catching their breath, watching football. We need that same excitement for liberty. Thats what is so sick, [The Shadow Government are] scientifically using it. The distractions are fading away. People are continually waking up to recognize government sponsored terror as some-thing that really happens, with factual evidence to support its existence. It takes time, education, facts, and patience in order to reach this logical conclusion. Were changing minds, one mind at a time, responds Mark Dice. So everybody get out there. Its another opportunity to bring these issues to the forefront. Power to the resistance shat-tering the multi-million dollar propaganda machine. Whats Important in this World
Facts are facts. You can have your own opinions but you cant have your own facts. Alex Jones

I kind of feel like Im a fish out of water sometimes, explains Mark Dice. On the Alex Jones radio show, Dice covers what type of impact the American people could make if we were as interested in current affairs as we are in sports

379

We Are The Answers To The Problems

games. Its hard to disagree. Theres nothing wrong with watching some football, wrestling or MMA, but why dont we put as much energy into real world problems? Dice continues, I had dinner with some friends, and friends of friends, the other day and the first thing that these people asked me when I sat down was, Saints or Colts? I just couldnt take it. Why is it perfectly normal to scream and holler about our favorite sports teams, athlete, or entertainer and thats ok. Yet if we scream and holler about real issues, real things that are affecting this country and this world, were looked at as if were crazy for being so loud. Its almost as if were living in a world where being a walking zombie is acceptable, while being vocal about a life or death situation is unacceptable. People laugh at someone acting belligerent about a sports team, but cringe when someone is bolstering about the endless wars, false flag events, and strange mysteries surrounding 9/11. People at gas stations, explains Alex Jones. People on the street, Colts or Saints? We dont talk about how we get together and defeat this corrupt government. How do we get our country back? How do we save our jobs? How do we get our education system fixed? No, its like, Colts or Saints? One thing that bothered me about the Superbowl was the news I heard stating the government will be running ads during the Superbowl. When they say government, that means you and I flip the bill. When government money could be going to help people, I do have a problem with our money being spent on ads promoting the Census; which calculates how many people live in this city or town. The ad basically says, how will we know how many kids live in which district? They claim this will help us figure out how many schools need to be built. Yet, our states are broke so does it really matter how many new schools were not going to build this year? The Census is fine to a point, but it could also be conditioning for us common people to accept the government sticking their business in our lives, our homes, and our families. An incompetent government cannot be trusted to run an effective Census count. Our priorities as a country are what we need to evaluate.

380

We Are The Answers To The Problems

Mistakes will always be made. Whats important is how we deal with mistakes, so we dont repeat them. The world just wants to have fun, while our economy and our sovereignty are flushed down the toilet. This is, at the heart, whats wrong with our country, says Alex Jones. America isnt about worshiping a bunch of crack heads. It isnt about a bunch of steroid heads being worshiped. Its about freedom. Jesse Ventura was asked by a radio host what he thought about the Tiger Woods situation. Ventura responded that it was a private matter and all Ventura cared about was how well Tiger hit the golf ball. When further asked about the kids who view Tiger as a role model and the impact of his private personal life, Ventura said that kids should not be viewing people like Tiger as a role model. Ventura reminded the hosts of when Charles Barkley said, Im not a role model...Just because I dunk a basketball doesnt mean I should raise your kids. Mr. Barkleys quote woke me up to the existence of what we call image. I thought image was everything back then. Now I understand that image is just a lie it's a hard shell that is hollow inside one false crack and the shell breaks! Then what? Then we see the person in another image, a negative image. So either good or bad, image is not real; it will never reveal the true identity of a person. It only reveals what people want you to know about their image. Image doesn't always reflect morals either. Who should our role models be? Our parents should be our role models, our public servants, our teachers, our elected officials, our police officers, our firefighters, our soldiers, and good civilians, positive influences like Jesus Christ...these are the real role models of the world. Tiger Woods is a professional golfer. The one thing to remember about any role model is that they are human beings who make mistakes, just like you and I. Who children view as role models has a major impact on the way they choose to live their lives, what goals they set for themselves, and what morals and priorities they choose to live by. Waking Up Your Mind If I grow up with violence all around me, Im trained to think

381

We Are The Answers To The Problems

thats just normal life. So the environment in which we live in, and the environment we bring up our kids in, has a profound effect on their future. I believe this is the reason why its so important to treat every individual differently. Each person is going through their own trials in life. What wakes up one person doesnt always wake up another.
Once you start to become aware of these ideas, your eyes start to open and you completely start to see things for what they are. You are unplugged from the matrix. Its like living in another world. Your life is never the same. Mark Dice

Open your mind Quaid...open your mind. Remember this message from Quato? You should if youve ever seen the movie, Total Recall. Instead of the government wanting oil, they control the air on Mars. If Quaid, the character played by Arnold Schwarzenegger, starts the reactor, he will bring air to Mars, free from government control. Avatar has a similar plot, as Ive read at Movie Spoiler.com. Instead of oil or air, the government wishes to control the mining of crystals. The common theme is of course, government control. What if the government wants to control our mind, as Alex Jones insists? Theres a war on for your mind. The sub-conscious and conscious mind can be controlled, or to put it more accurately, manipulated. Government mind control, as seen in the movie, The Men Who Stare At Goats, is a real operation. The Borne Identity and its two sequels, along with The Manchurian Candidate, are great movies that give you a general idea of how the government could use mind control. The television presents one of the greatest ways for us to be manipulated through mind control. Anyone who knows about marketing or advertising, knows about ways to trick the mind, enhance a product, and persuade the viewer. Conditioning is another form of mind control. We can condition people to see violence as normal if we show them violence everyday on TV. Pretty soon, no one thinks violence is that bad, its just normal. Thats just one example, in a very simple and generic form. When we open our mind, when we question the things around us, when we educate, instead of indoctrinate ourselves, our search for truth begins. Lets unplug from the matrix, then discover what the matrix is, and why its being used against us. The mind is a powerful tool. If used correctly, the mind can grow with knowledge, wisdom, and
382

We Are The Answers To The Problems

understanding. Used improperly, the mind can do a lot of damage. Who needs that kind of negativity? Who needs evil in their life? Why would you want it? When you have a real [terrorist] attack, said Alex Jones to his radio and television listeners, they dont give attention to the terrorists. When you have a staged attack, you see a massive media blitzkrieg. How can that be? I ask myself. Wouldnt the media want to exploit every incident of terrorism, even if its for their own benefit? One might think so. Alex continued, talking about Mike Rivero, a GCN radio talk show host, who once worked for big media news, according to Alex. In 1995, Mike started his own website, What Really Happened.com. While driving, listening to the radio, Alex heard Mike stating what Alex already knew, and what has been in many journalistic publications. There were over 1,000 bombings and terror attacks in the 60s and 70s that were real.

Though Alex admits that while some were staged by the government, most were real...when you have a real terror attack, the news has an agreement with the government...to not cover it. Alex Jones on Anderson Cooper Think about it, Alex Jones told Anderson Cooper, You got CNN, who was the biggest group, along with Fox, pushing WMDs in Iraq, and they knew it wasnt true. Its come out, the Pentagon and CIA literally run CNN, Alex continued. They just pose as liberals to cover up what theyre doing. Left-right manipulation; and its angry to me to have these people that go to their cocktail parties and feel like theyre great liberals when theyre really a bunch of propagandists helping to destroy our country. Pushing the banker bailout takeover and the carbon taxes. These are

383

We Are The Answers To The Problems

really despicable people. They ask Alex about a new term called hatriots. (Hate-reeott) What do you think of the term hatriot and are you a hatriot? Oh absolutely. Distrusting your government, hating despotism and corruption is as American as apple pie. I mean, have you read George Washington, Thomas Jefferson, Benjamin Franklin? I absolutely hate it when the cops shoot a handcuffed youth in the back and then cover it up. I absolutely hate it when trillions of dollars are stolen in the banker bailout and then the Federal Reserve wont tell us where the money went. I love my country, I love my constitution, I love my republic. But I hate and fear the corrupt foreign corporate interest that have hijacked our nation and are using our government as a tool and suck our country dry, like Argentina, or Nigeria, or Greece...I hate Hitler, I hate Stalin, I hate Mao, I hate Fidel Castro, I hate Polpot, I hate all despots, and by any historical yardstick, America is sliding quickly into full [blown] scientific, 21st century tyranny. And you better believe I hate seeing my country, where I have 3 children, being destroyed and bankrupted by design. And watching Herman Von Rupey, the head of the E.U., and Ban Ki Moon, the head of the U.N., and Gordon Brown, the Prime Minister of England, all say global government is here, run by banks, and theyre gonna levy carbon taxes on it and then mainstream news runs pieces saying were crazy, world government doesnt exist. You guys still think you got the people bamboozled and conned. You dont. They see the world leaders calling for world government, and then they see you saying it doesnt exist. And thats why youre losing all credibility. So keep pushing it because the American people are awake. CNN and Fox and MSNBC and all of you who sit there on the perches of the false left-right paradigm, with the false debate going on where you try to sucker people into your false reality. Its over, the people are awake and the new world order needs to back off and realize they should cut their losses now, because the awakening is on.
Presidents come and go, but the secret teams run by the big Wall Street banks that set up the CIA rule this country and by extension, the world. Alex Jones

Stop voting for democrats and republicans. I dont care who you vote for, dont vote for them, said Jesse Ventura on the Alex Jones
384

We Are The Answers To The Problems

radio show. Its true. If more people voted for a third party, instead of the same old two choices, perhaps we could inject common sense into our political landscape. Ventura sums it up by saying, Theyre the problem, theyre not the solution. Though you may not agree with everything in this book, I thank you for taking the time to read this information. That is the most important step; stop, read, learn, and speak. This book will be continued in Something Stinks and Made In The USA, which are inspired by all truth tellers, truth seekers, and truth finders. The future is in your hands now. For books about inspiration and motivation, please read my brothers books, First Day of School and The Rocky Balboa Syndrome by Manuel Fernandez. Truly inspiring books from a person who is actively seeking truth. If we dont seek truth, how would we find it? The movement for truth is just beginning. Almost 10 years after 9/11 happened, we have so much more work to do. Yet we have come so far since the days of ignorance. One day we will correct the history books. One day, all of the conspirators and accomplices of the Twin Towers attacks and the assassinations of heads of state, like John F. Kennedy, will face their maker and answer for their crimes. That much, I have no doubt of. Until then, its up to the people to spread the truth, question the lies and keep fighting for our freedom! As long as we fight for our freedom, freedom has not been taken from us. A false flag operation only works if we believe false flags do not exist.

385

We Are The Answers To The Problems

Conclusion

War Is A Racket
I appeared before the congressional committee, the highest representation of the American people under subpoena, to tell what I knew of activities which I believed might lead to an attempt to set up a fascist dictatorship...I was deposed to lead an organization of 500,000 men, which would be able to take over the functions of government. General Smedley Butler (1934) (2)

The global conspiracy to fully overthrow America, thus control the world, has been a plot that existed, possibly, even before the founding of this country. Just going by what is on record is enough to see that there is a shadow force that exists which wants to destroy national sovereignty and bring about a global empire. Alex Jones had a guest on his radio show that goes by the name

386

We Are The Answers To The Problems

of Colonel Sixx. He has been a caller on the show for some time, and on August 8th, 2011, Colonel Sixx (Colonel6.com) told Alex that family members of the Seal team were planning on going public with information about the falsity of the Osama bin Laden raid in Pakistan this past May and the real story about the deaths of their loved ones. The future will tell if this story is legitimate. For now, lets look at the claim closely, and then see if it turns out to be true. Seal Team Six is the team who participated in the Abbottabad, Pakistan raid, which allegedly ended with the death of Osama bin Laden. According to Alex Jones, Colonel Sixx (who we will refer to as C-6 for the remainder of this book) has really good sources. Alex reminded him, The info youve given us on four or five subjects has turned out to be true. Theres not much we know about C-6, aside from what he has told the world who were listening on August 8th, 2011. Ive been in intelligence for the better part of 25 years. Alex adds that he has spoken to C-6 off-air and checked his background information. While Jones wont give away too much information about the source, C-6, he does say that C-6 is out of the military but still works for them. What type of intelligence is out of the military but still works for them? C-6 had obviously been in the Marine core, or at least works (or worked) around them because he says Everybody in the Marine core is familiar with Smedley Butler who wrote the book War Is A Racket. That makes us, in essence, racketeers. Butlers book is short but direct. It lays out how war is used in order for the Military Industrial Complex to profit and control the world. Its because of this book, according to C-6, that a lot of people are awake to the New World Order. Roughly 80% of the military is starting to wake up to the New World Order. Thats good news for America. A big part of those who can help restore the democratic republic of the United States will be people within the armed forces.

387

We Are The Answers To The Problems

War Is A Global Racket In 1934 Marine Corps Major-General Smedley Butler exposed a plot to overthrow the United States Government. The plan was to replace a democratic republic with National Socialism. He was to lead an army of 500,000 traitors that would stage a coup to overthrow President Roosevelt. He played along with the coup in order to learn as much as he could with the messenger. As John Spivak has reported, as recorded in sworn testimony before the Congressional Committee, the messenger was a bond salesman named Gerald C. (Jerry) MacGuire, who earned about $150 a week. I record his wage not as proof of his competence or lack of it, but because, as brought out in the testimony, when he was ready for the first overt move to get the conspiracy off the ground, his bank account flowered with cash deposits of over $100,000 for expenses. (3) Even Wikipedia, the most untrustworthy news source I have ever found, reported that the investigating committee found the allegations of Butler to be credible. (Ask a media personalities, such as professional wrestlers, like Dutch Mantell, about Wikipedia getting

388

We Are The Answers To The Problems

their bio information wrong and how hard it is to get Wikipedia to change false information). For those who lived during the 1930s, and those who have investigated Butlers allegations, and those who were privy to the information, there is no doubt that Butler was telling the truth. When Butler learned who the main plotters were he reported it to congress before the Unites States House Committee on Un-American Activities. Soon it became clear that the House Committee had no intention of pursuing his findings. The committee refused to question the people whom General Butler exposed as the ringleaders of the conspiracy. The congressional committee (also known as the McCormack Dickstein Congressional committee) went one step further, which would prove that the shadow forces of a global conspiracy already had control over the United States Government. The committee omitted the generals testimony from the record, which is a blatant cover-up. This left little doubt to the general that the Military Industrial Complex was real and that, above all else, War Is A Racket.

The conspirators were defeated for the time being, yet they had learned a valuable lesson. Shadows move in stealth or not at all. When

389

We Are The Answers To The Problems

the veil of secrecy is gone, so are their manipulations. Still they are evil and evil never sleeps. Maybe thats why so many people in the military know about General Butler and his book, War Is A Racket. One day, they too may be called upon to commit treason; but only once theyve been vetted as suitable subjects to become traitors to the land I love. We are still the land of the free and the home of the brave, even if theres fewer of us now. As long as one resists, resistance is not futile. The final report of the McCormick-Dickson Committee concluded they had received evidence showing that certain persons had made an attempt to establish a fascist organization in this country. Adding, There is no question that these attempts were discussed, were planned, and might have been placed in execution when and if the financial backers deemed it expedient. Yet no charges were ever filed, names were never named, and Butler was left out in the cold. Way before the (modern) days of the Internet, Butlers next years of speaking tours were successful in exposing the truth about the military industrial complex that was trying to seize full control over the United States. In 1935, General Butler told Common Sense magazine his story of spending 33 years and four months in active military service and during that period I spent most of my time as a high class thug for Big Business, for Wall Street and the bankers. In short, I was a racketeer, a gangster for capitalism. I helped make Mexico and especially Tampico safe for American oil interests in 1914. Even back then the Military Industrial Complex in the form of big business and Wall Street and the bankers was moving ahead with their global domination schemes. Butler continued to tell Common Sense, I helped make Haiti and Cuba a decent place for the National City Bank boys to collect revenues in. I helped in the raping of half a dozen Central American republics for the benefit of Wall Street. I helped purify Nicaragua for the International Banking House of Brown Brothers in 19021912. I brought light to the Dominican Republic for the American sugar interests in 1916. I helped make Honduras right for the American fruit companies in 1903. In China in 1927 I helped see to it that Standard Oil went on its way unmolested. Looking back on it, I might have given Al Capone a few hints. The best he could do was to operate his racket in three districts. I operated on three continents. For anyone keeping score, John D. Rockefeller was the founder of Standard Oil, created in

390

We Are The Answers To The Problems

1870. He was also the chairman and senior shareholder of the oil business. About three years after Butlers confession, there was an interesting letter written to President Roosevelt in 1936. In the letter, U.S. Ambassador to Germany, William Dodd expressed his concern about a shadow force that threatened the existence of the United Stated. In the letter, Dodd told the president, A clique of U.S. industrialists is hell-bent to bring a fascist state to supplant our democratic government and is working closely with the fascist regime in Germany and Italy. I have had plenty of opportunity in my post in Berlin to witness how close some of our American ruling families are to the Nazi regime...A prominent executive of one of the largest corporations, told me point blank that he would be ready to take definite action to bring fascism into America if President Roosevelt continued his progressive policies. Certain American industrialists had a great deal to do with bringing fascist regimes into being in both Germany and Italy. They extended aid to help Fascism occupy the seat of power, and they are helping to keep it there. Propagandists for fascist groups try to dismiss the fascist scare. We should be aware of the symptoms. When industrialists ignore laws designed for social and economic progress they will seek recourse to a fascist state when the institutions of our government compel them to comply with the provisions. (4) This leaves a lot of unresolved questions. Yet these are questions that can be put to rest if the public is told who the main conspirators were in the failed coup to overthrow the president. Why would our government want the truth hidden? Just as they have tried to hide the truth about September 11th, so too, have they tried to hide many other conspiracies through out history. Why? If the truth is on their side, and if its not a threat to the prosperity of the United States, why would they hide the truth? What would such truths reveal about complicity to commit criminal acts? Use our imagination... We are living under a Global Empire. Due to the events of 9/11, The Global Empire has extended their control across the world. They lie. They kill. They destroy. The Truth Movement dies when it becomes about something other than Truth. As long as we remain truthful to the mission, The Truth Movement can never be defeated.

391

We Are The Answers To The Problems

392

A Spiritual Afterword

A Spiritual Afterword
A Spiritual Message I want to know who the wizard is. Who pulled the strings behind 9/11? Heres the problem...maybe God doesnt want me to know? What if I do become obsessed with finding the answers? Still, I want to know who orchestrated 9/11 and why? As my faith in Jesus Christ strengthens, the obsession becomes less and less significant since from a spiritual point of view, evil is controlled by the devil and will fall when the day of judgment comes but since I am flesh, it will remain with me, as a constant battle. I must have faith that God will show me the way. God will show me the path that I am suppose to be on, just as God will show me when I have strayed from that path. I still maintain that people should not be punished for crimes they did not commit. Justice served is in the hands of the people. The constitution is what holds this country together. Now that we have lost it to the Patriot Act, we should vote to get it back! We can! We can begin by voting out all the people who voted for it. Make sure you vote for someone who stands by the constitution, not just someone who talks about it. As you may have noticed, my books do not have a solid thesis. I do not believe that I can give you all the answers, in fact this book is meant to get people to ask more questions. Thats it. False Flaghmm? Whats a False Flag? Once these two words are household names, we may begin to understand how our government works behind the scenes. You know what I mean, the parts that are classified? Well who judges if the information should be classified or not? When you examine evidence from Jim Garrisons monu-mental JFK assassination trial, there was evidence that was sealed as classified. Could this evidence let the people learn more about Oswald and his possible accomplices and puppet masters? What if the people who have the power to declassify are the same ones who will be thrown in jail if

A Spiritual Afterword

the information is declassified? I believe Congress alone should decide what is classified, since they represent us, the people. The CIA, the FBI and Homeland Security are not elected officials. They cannot be held accountable by the people. We third party advocates need to give the people a real choice, a real candidate. If all of the third parties held a special election and united around the elected winner, they could use all their re-sources combined and run this candidate against both the Democratic and the Republican candidate. Then the two party system would begin to fade out of the picture. Perhaps then America could get back to business. This is my goal. To be but a speck of dust that adds a little spark to the fire of freedom. That is all most of us can be anyhow. Is that too much to ask of us? Shouldnt we contribute if we can? Its our right, its our choice, and never let them tell you its a privilege. A privilege will be something they try to take away. As these shadow governing bodies are pushed into the light of day, we will remind the people of what the truth is...then the people will decide. For that is the country I thought I was born into; that is the country I want to see rise again. I know it was an illusion of my mind. I was a child and thought the world was one way; only to find out the world is cruel and cold. Still, that image of what this country could be holds true. We can have it! Hope is good, my father-in-law once told me. We must have hope. I believe him. Wise men come along not so often in this dwindling world. When you meet one, take hold of that knowledge. Regardless of whether you agree with the wisdom or not, take hold and keep it in your thoughts. For one day you may need this wisdom. On that day, since you have taken note of this information, you will have it at your disposal. On the other hand, should you be quiet when people around you slander the 9/11 Truth Movement, do not fear. For as Franklin D. Roosevelt told the country, The only thing we have to fear is fear itself. With that being said, we move forward, but are we moving in the right direction? We were told to move on after the fraudulent 2000 Presidential Election. They told us to move on from 9/11 and Afghanistan and focus on Iraq. Then they tell us to move on about

A Spiritual Afterword

President Bush lying to get us into an unwinnable war. Then we were told to move on when the government got caught illegally spying on American citizens. We were told to move on after we found evidence of Guantanamo Bay torture. We were told to move on when family members werent satisfied with the 9/11 Commission Report. Time and time again, we are told to simply move on. The question is which way do we move and who benefits from that? Is it the American people, or the global corporations and inter-national bankers that dominate the world stage? When we see that the economy has come to a complete halt, assuming that hasnt happened already, how will we move on then? When they take away our constitutional rights, how will we move on from there, again, assuming it hasnt happened already? With God all things are possible. Things that I thought I could not or would never do these are the things I am dealing with today. The goals and dreams that I never knew I had are what I am fulfilling today. As you read this, you are helping me do so. Never forget that! The power of reading is as strong as the power of writing. We are as much a nation of activists as we are a nation of thinkers. We need a healthy balance in our lives to carry on with the harshness of reality we face every day. Since every person is created differently, we need to take this into consideration when dealing with anyone other than ourselves. Just because it works for you does not mean the same method will work for anyone else. The dumbing-down of America has been our great downfall as a country. We are arrogant. We are full of pride. Do we look past our own wants and desires, and try to help out others first? Second? Third? A selfish nation, such as ours, has become many nations unto itself, surrounded in its own likeminded circles of people. We have created standard barriers in which we decide if we will let people into our circles or not. Putting yourself in your enemys shoes is very hard to do, but it should be a goal to acquire over time. The mentality you have today may change tomorrow. I change all the time; hopefully, for the better and not for the worse. These next four years will be very telling of what our president does. As always, we will be here to hold him accountable for all the promises made during his

A Spiritual Afterword

campaign. Personally, for now, Ill settle for him pulling our troops out of Iraq. I do not believe he will support an independent investigation of 9/11, or a re-examination of the 9/11 Commission Report. Still, that will be the real mission in the next four years. We cant be starry-eyed over any man. Your own problems seem minimal compared to the problems of the world. You may even come to appreciate and be grateful for what little you have on this earth. When you die, all these materialistic things remain here on earth and eventually decay. The revolution for freedom continues. It should always continue, as long as we love this country and respect the constitution. The country and constitution are one in the same. One does not exist without the other. If we completely lose our country, we have lost our constitution as well. Should we sacrifice or compromise the constitution in the name of combating terror, we give up our constitution, along with our country. Im not willing to do either. Even Obama suggests that we can still combat terrorism and respect the constitution at the same time. In a country of multi-tasking, I dare say that we can end the alleged war on terrorism, repeal the Patriot Act 1 & 2, and solve the economic crisis, all at the same time. If this president cant say yes we can to that, then certainly yes we can find a president who will. I have the patience to see this through, do you? I am willing to wait as long as it takes to make the wrong things right. This country has suffered enough. We turn to our politicians for leadership. We should know that we should turn to ourselves first. Leadership begins with you. As I have said before, I dont expect you to agree with everything I say in this book, but I thank you for reading. When the world stops revolving, Ill stop writing. An Active Lifestyle People are made to be active not zombies that the government can use and abuse. Children are made to run around and be active not to sit mind numbingly in front of the TV. Children who are not active

A Spiritual Afterword

may become anxious and act out in negative ways. Taking your child to the park is a very positive way to keep them active. Let them run around, play with them, get them involved in sports, challenge their mind dont fill their brains for them. Give them brain food and see what they pick up on. My dad took my brother and me to the park a lot. I remember it especially because there were a lot of times that I did not see my dad. So when I did, it was always exciting. It was adventurous. I loved every minute of it because my father is full of life. Hopefully, that trait will follow me for many years, into my old age. I have never met a man more passionate about his children. That passion has passed on to me now. I will use it to fight negative with positive usually it attracts open minds. I have seen how people hover around when they hear a deep and meaningful conversation. They are interested, even if they have no clue how they can help or what they could possibly do. I see the light in their eyes. They want to help. They need that encouragement that my father gave me. They need to know that theyre not alone in this fight. Thats probably why there are so many groups supporting 9/11 truth. Theyre the people I turn to when I feel beaten down. The book I turn to is the Bible. The guide I follow in my life is the Lord Jesus Christ. I do not expect you to agree with me, but I thank you for reading. So Many Questions There is a systematic thinking in this country that has bothered me since 2001. It is the thinking that just because we are American, we are right. In fact, the opposite could be said. We are a dying nation, clinging on to the forefathers with all of our hearts, yet blinded by the arrogance of pride. When George W. Bush said Mission Accomplished, I believe he meant it. Make no mistake, there has been substantial profits made since 9/11; blood money, in my opinion. My opinion, based on substantial research and proven facts, is all I can present to you here. You have to do the rest, research.

A Spiritual Afterword

You, like me, will have to do your own research to believe what I am saying here; or what others who feel as strongly as I do say about this subject; or to disprove my views in public opinion. I can present a fascinating display of research and circumstantial evidence to you, but what will it matter if you have no clue as to what I am talking about? How can you rationally dispute the facts I will present here unless you have done research to counter my argument? If you will argue for the sake of arguments sake, you will not disprove false flag operations, but only prove that you have not done your homework. Make no mistake, this is implied and purposely intended to do so. The power of separation has been evident since the beginning of mankind. From the geographical locations to the language barriers, we are all separated. How much more will we be in the next five years? We need only look at the last five. How about in 10, 20, 30 years? We are separated by our incomes, our races, our political affiliations, and so much more. Count the ways that you are separated from everyone else. What type of people do you associate with and why? Is it only those like you? Only those who share the same mentality and thoughts as you do? Are you willing to accept that perhaps no one thinks like you do? Are you ready to discover your own truth, by means of humiliation, soul searching or putting yourself in someone elses shoes? Do you see the world as your own, or are you just a mere speck of dust floating in the wind? Who are you? What defines you? Will that which defines you today hold true tomorrow? How can you be sure? The seeds of doubt may have been planted in us from the beginning of our life. If we submit to these feelings, we will live in self doubt forever, never really sure of our true emotions, our convictions and our morals. Should we have no morals, how far apart are we from animals? Morals are not limited to a religion or a spiritual journey. Every human being must understand what is right and what is wrong, even if he (or she) be a hypocrite in his actions. No man is perfect and no hypocrite can deny his wrongdoings. Still, the truth is the truth is the truth. Though no man should judge another, still we may find ourselves in this situation. Though no man should speak evil, even in

A Spiritual Afterword

our minds we are not free from evil thoughts. Its the temptation that drives us mad. It does not stop, does not halt and will show no mercy to the one who is tempted. Evil does not rest. For that reason, we are not allowed to rest either. Time does have an end, but no man know it for certain. As is written in the Bible, I come at a time you know not. Yet we are deceived by false prophets who put the Pharisees of the old days to shame. Evil has many faces, perhaps even your own. But what is evil today can be saved tomorrow. Redemption is of your own, should you choose it. Your fate is not decided by another man. What lye behind the curtain in the skies, no living human knows for certain. Still we continue to ask, to search, while the world spins around, knowing that we will never fully know the truth, the meaning of life, until we have completed the test of life itself. So what is politics? It is open to interpretation. Your definition may vary from another, and that is ok. It is important to respect not only other people but their opinions as well. For that reason, I listen closely when one defines what a real or true Christian is, knowing that only the Lord knows for certain. Never was it commanded by God or Jesus Christ that a true believer be labeled as a Christian. The name is man made, so it is flawed. However, the spiritual bliss that I feel as a Christian cannot be denied. Judgment is a vicious cycle. Let he who is without sin cast the first stone. Yet we cast stones each day, perhaps so, without realizing the harm we may cause to another human being. It is the debt of being human and living in sin that we cannot escape, no matter how hard we try. We must face reality, but we do not have to accept it. We can change. We are Change. Unless we cease to exist, every day we face change. It is how we deal with change that is important. To properly understand the term False Flag, this is where one would stick in the Websters dictionary version of what a false flag is. It is disheartening to me that so few, including myself up to a few years ago, have ever heard this term. Yet, without knowing it, through your history classes, you probably have come across many examples of false flag operations. Yet we have been conditioned to associate false flag operations with conspiracy theory conspiracy theory with lunatics, lunatics with

A Spiritual Afterword

unstable people or perhaps even terrorists all as the president fights to ensure that that 9/11 truth activists are smeared to death, erased of credibility. To that I say, mission failed. The facts speak for themselves. A conspiracy must involve two or more people. Therefore, by definition, 9/11 was a conspiracy. The only question is, Who were these conspirators, from the top down, to the actual hijackers? This is where our country has been divided. This is understandable. What is not understandable is why the country is divided on an independent investigation into that horrible day? In light of the facts that have recently come out about firefighters talking on camera about explosives going off in the lobby of one of the towers on 9/11, how can we not call for a new investigation? The firefighters testimony was withheld by NIST until late 2010, when they were sued and forced to release about four terabytes of information most o which deals with explosives on 9/11. The truth is available now but it only proves what the 9/11 Truth Movement has been saying all along 9/11 was an inside job. How did the explosives get into the buildings? Was an airplane supposed to hit Building 7 that day as well? Don't we want answers? Don't we want to make sure this does not happen again? Don't you want government account-ability? If so, here's the opportunity! (Sigh) Of course, some dont want to know. Some are so sure of the official story that they see no need to look past the iron curtain that guards the evidence we need to unravel the conspiracy of 9/11. There is the classic phrase that it is unpatriotic to question our commander-in-chief. Whether or not you understand what a false flag is, you should recognize that false flag operations are real. The JFK assassination and the events of 9/11 were both false flag operations that served a purpose. Both got us into meaningless wars, both caused thousands of people to be killed, if not millions that are still dying due to the lies. Both of these false flag events were covered up and then exposed for what they are a false flag conspiracy. False flag operations are everywhere and have the ability to happen at every level of government, from the local government to the global government. False flags become real when your commanding officer tells you to drive down a street and wait until you are shot at,

A Spiritual Afterword

then return fire. It is as real as the old fashioned set up, to frame someone else for an act you committed. Sometimes you have to see these false flags with your own eyes to even attempt to be open-minded about false flag terrorism. The Truth Movement will stand the test of time, and like the Warren Commission Report after Kennedys death, the 911 Commission Report will not. It has already lost most of its credibility. All that is left is for a huge blockbuster film to break down the barriers that have separated the facts from fiction in regards to 9/11. Is the real Oliver Stone available? Is he willing to accept this challenge? We will never forget. Time is on our side, for lies can only be held in place as long as the people remain ignorant sheep, or as I heard Jason Bermas call them Sheeple. People who are sheep. Even so, the day is upon us when we will wake up as a people, as one nation, under God. On that day, may God have mercy on us all. May it also be so for those who are responsible for 9/11, both directly and after the fact. My gender does not define me. My race does not disclose my true identity. I am not bound by any particular culture. I shall never accept the division of upper and lower classes. I shall never put a man on a pedestal above the rest, nor let anyone say that I do such a thing to myself. I simply do not accept division. Labels such as conservative, liberal, or whacko conspiracy nut serve no one any good. These name calling methods only further the plague of division. A person should not be contained in a box where he is seen as a certain stereo-type. What you call politics I see as part of a bigger picture. There may be no factor in our life where separation is not evident. Men will mock you for your beliefs, we know this. Still we must push forward. I believe it is foolishness to say that you have it all figured out. Better to think you have nothing figured out and ask God for wisdom to see the things that have been blinded from your eyes. Pull back the curtain of OZ. Shine the brightest light on the chaotic shadows that manipulate our governments and peoples. There is no place like Kansas and each person has their own Kansas buried inside their soul. Still, even Dorothy could not leave that dreadful nightmare until her mission was complete. She poured water

A Spiritual Afterword

on the wicked witch and accomplished her mission. She did not intentionally kill the witch. It was the weakness of the witch that caused her own downfall. Evil has to try and hold on to their power. All we have to do is be about truth; call them out on their tyranny. Throw some clean water on their dirty faces. That is how we will defeat the New World Order. In a spiritual sense, I believe we already have. May God bless us all.

INDEX

9/11: Facts, Questions & Answers A www.LooseChange911.com , www.Infowars.com , http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kRaKHq2dfCI B at 1:04:36, http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EOVdJTe6cZ0&NR=1 C at 5:00:00, http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=U27emOn5KnM&feature=related D - http://news.yahoo.com/bush-explains-slow-reaction-september-11-attacks230850794.html 1. India in Anti-Taliban Military Plan, Indiareacts.com, June 26, 2001; George Arney, BBC News, Sept. 18, 2001; Rahul Bedi, India Joins Anti-Taliban Coalition, Janes Defense News, March 15, 2001 2. http://www.globalresearch.ca/articles/GOD111A.html 3. Maggie Burns Secrecy Surrounds a Bushs Brothers Role in 9/11 Security, American Reporter Jan. 20, 2003 4. Susan Lindauer Blows the Whistle Again, by Michael Collins, Monday, 02 March 2009 5. http://www.defense.gov/speeches/speech.aspx?speechid=430 6. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FGGP20137SA&feature=related 7. pa-police-reports04.pdf page 6 8. Report from Ground Zero: The story of the Rescue Efforts at the World Trade Center Dennis Smith, New York: Penguin,2002, 18 9. CNN 9/11/02 (source Http://edition.cnn.com/2002/ALLPOLITICS/09/11/ar911.king.cheney/) 10. The Mineta Testimony: 9/11 Commission Exposed by Gregor Holland on July 22, 2005 11. http://blogcritics.org/politics/article/the-mineta-testimony-911-commissionexposed/page-3/#ixzz12CXWbnif 12. Richmond Times Dispatch December 11, 2001 news.nationalgeographic.com/news/2001/12/1211-wirepentagon.html) 13. http://www.911forum.org.uk/board/viewtopic.php?t=14474&sid=1bef4c80b363f1b7dd6 93475b0a4a6ee 14. http://whatreallyhappened.com/WRHARTICLES/bbc_wtc7_videos.html?q=bbc_wtc7_vi deos.html 15. http://www.washingtonpost.com/ac2/wp-dyn?pagename=article&contentId=A437082002Jan26 16. http://www.opednews.com/articles/Hamdan-Case-Exemplifies-Bu-by-Mary-Shaw080808-657.html 17. Transcript of NBCs Meet the Press With Tim Russert, September 23, 2001 Colin Powell, 18. Colin Powell, Secretary of State, White House September 24th, www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2001/09/20010924-4.html 19. AP Kathy Gannon, Taliban Willing to Talk, But WantsU.S. Respect, Nov. 1, 2001. http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&aid=15892 20. http://whatreallyhappened.com/WRHARTICLES/osamatape.html?q=osamatape.html 21. http://911review.com/articles/usamah/khilafah.html

22. Donald Rumsfeld (New York Times, October 12, 2001) 23. Http://www.pbs.org/newshour/bb/congress/july-dec02/intelligence_12-11.html 24. Top US Intelligence Agency was to simulate plane crash into government building on September 11, 2001. AP, August 21, 2002 25. http://www.DEP.STATE.PA.US/DEP/EMERGENCY/PICTURES/091201C.HTM 26. Infowars.com Aaron Dykes, October 29, 2009 27. FEMA World Trade Center Building Performance Study, May 2002 www.fema.gov/library/wtcstudy.shtm 28. New York Times March 29, 2002, Towers Withstood Impact, but Fell to Fire, Report Says - James Glanz and Eric Lipton 29. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Frank_Gaffney 30. http://www.msnbc.msn.com/id/15345694/ 31. Workers Uncover More Remains at WTC Site, AP October 22, 2006 http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2006/10/22/national/main2113163.shtml 32. http://www.nyccan.org/Decision_Denied.php 33. http://www.commonwealthclub.org/archive/02/02-04mueller-speech.html 34. Bin Ladens Amazing Business Link With President Bush. Daily Mail, September 24, 2001. 35. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Project_for_the_New_American_Century 36. The Grand Chessboard (1997) page 212 37. CNN.comtranscript, aired September 11, 2001 13:55 (E.T.), America UnderAttack: Henry Kissinger Discusses Terrorist Attack on the U.S. 38. www.ifamericansknew.org/us_ints/nc-pilger.html John PilgerDecember 16, 2004 39. George W. Bush, press conference, Washington DC, March 13, 2002 www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2002/03/200203-8.html 40. False Flag Terror Of The New World Order: Methods used to facilitate staged attacks, by Paul Joseph Watson, Prison Planet.com, Tuesday, December 12, 2006 41. 9/11 Synthetic Terror: Made in USA, Webster Griffin Tarpley & Washington Post, Wednesday, October 3, 2001 42. http://www.foxnews.com/us/2010/10/20/al-qaeda-terror-leader-dined-pentagonmonths/ 43. http://www.infowars.com/al-qaeda-mastermind-invited-to-pentagon-after-911/ 44. http://www.foxnews.com/world/2010/11/02/yemen-charges-born-radical-cleric-alawlaki/ 45. October 18th West Virginia senate debate: http://www.infowars.com/constitution-partysenate-candidate-in-wv-questions-foreknowledge-of-wtc7-collapse-in-live-tv-debate/ http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/events/newsnight/1645527.stm http://www.prisonplanet.com/twenty-minutes-with-the-president.html http://www.infowars.com/wearechange-la-questions-vp-biden-on-911-and-nano-thermite/ 9/11/01: We Are Not Going Any Closer. They Had It Wired With Explosives, Obviously http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7j0AyzhT2bw&feature=player_embedded http://www.infowars.com/91101-we-are-not-going-any-closer-they-had-it-wired-withexplosives-obviously-/ , http://www.wearechange.org/?p=4381 http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&aid=17505 http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UaOgwsv7R9E

JFK 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

David Ratcliffe, Understanding Special Operations www.theatlantic.com/doc/200406/holland Jim Garrisons Playboy Interview: vol. 14 no. 10 - October 1967 http://www.jim-garrison.com/closing.html Infowars.com Aaron Dykes, October 29, 2009

New World Order 1. Bill Clinton, NWO http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1etgsNU46s4 2. PAKISTAN DAILY, FEB.1 2009 3. http://www.newsmakingnews.com/mblarrymcdonald.htm http://www.infowars.com/ronpaul-where-is-the-gold/ 4. Bilderberger meeting in Baden Baden, Germany (a meeting also attended by thenGovernor Bill Clinton) www.mega.nu/ampp/bilderberg.html. [Main source: Dr. Dennis Cuddy, A Chronological History of the New World Order] 5. quoted in Time, July 20th, l992. 6. In a novel he published in 1844 called Coningsby, the New Generation 7. The New Freedom (1913) 8. U.S. Senator Barry Goldwater in his l964 book: With No Apologies 9. Notes on the State of Virginia, p. 169 (last part of Query, XVII), Boston: Lilly and Wait, 1832 10. With No Apologies, Barry Goldwater, 1979, pg. 293 11. With No Apologies, Barry Goldwater, 1979, pg. 299 The Global Empire 1- one month after the JFK assassination, op-ed section of the Washington Post, early edition 2- Common Sense: of monarchy and hereditary succession 3- Liberty Defined, Ron Paul, pages 90-91 4- Liberty Defined, Ron Paul, page 88 5- The True Story of the Bilderberg Group, Daniel Estulin 6- http://www.prisonplanet.com/tucker-confirms-geithner-presence-at-bilderberg-meeting.html 7- The Bilderberg Conspiracy by H. Paul Jeffers page 36. 8- Lou Dobbs on Alex Jones- April 15 (@ about 16:30:00) 9- The Bilderberg Conspiracy by H. Paul Jeffers page 144-145. 10- http://www.bloomberg.com/apps/news?pid=newsarchive&sid=avjlPu.bRVmk 11- http://www.mnforsustain.org/rockefeller_1972_transmittal_ltr_members_staff.htm 12- The Rockefeller File, Gary Allen, page 137 13- None Dare Call It Conspiracy, Gary Allen, page 47 14- Endgame, Alex Jones, Infowars.com, 11:02 15- The Rothschilds: A Family Portrait, Frederic Morton. Pages 53-54. (Secker & Warburg 1962) 16http://query.nytimes.com/gst/abstract.html?res=9D03E5DF103CE633A2575BC2A9679D9463 96D6CF 17- http://query.nytimes.com/mem/archive-

free/pdf?res=F00816FD3B5E13738DDDA10894DD405B828DF1D3 18- None Dare Call It Conspiracy, Gary Allen. Page 38 19- None Dare Call It Conspiracy, Gary Allen. Page 39 20 Frederick Lewis Allen, Life Magazine, April 25, 1949 21 - Farm Boy to Financier, Saturday Evening Post, pp. 25, 70. February 9, 1935 22 - None Dare Call It Conspiracy, Gary Allen. Page 46 False Flag Terror Storm 1. http://www.georgewashington2.blogspot.com/2010/02/yes-america-is-still-in-officialstate.html 2. Alex Jones, www.infowars.com August 5th, 2009 3. Reuters - http://www.prisonplanet.com/german-intelligence-agents-caught-stagingfalse-flag-terror.html http://www.spiegel.de/international/europe/0,1518,592298,00.html 4. http://www.infowars.com/german-intelligence-agents-caught-staging-false-flag-terror/ 5. http://www.cnn.com/2006/POLITICS/08/29/rumsfeld.ap/index.html 6. http://www.wanttoknow.info/mindcontrol10pg#ciadocs 7. Wayne Madsen, Online Journal December 12, 2008 8. http://www.infowars.com/india-isi-behind-mumbai-attacks/ http://www.infowars.com/mumbai-attacks-blamed-on-al-qaeda-as-pretext-for-usmilitary-response/ World Wide Caution 1 - http://travel.state.gov/travel/cis_pa_tw/pa/pa_4787.html 2 - http://www.prisonplanet.com/tsa-charges-congressman-with-violating-federal-law-forexposing-security-breaches.html#comments 3 - http://www.prisonplanet.com/federal-court-rules-tsa-violated-law-by-introducing-bodyscanners.html 4 - http://www.washingtontimes.com/news/2011/apr/19/libya-rebels-will-receive-25-millionfrom-us/ 5 - http://www.washingtontimes.com/news/2011/feb/24/al-qaeda-offers-aid-to-rebels-inlibya/?page=2 6 - http://www.whitehouse.gov/the-press-office/2011/03/28/remarks-president-address-nationlibya Osama Bin Laden is Dead 1- (CNN/Univision Democrat Presidential Debate, Austin, TX, 2/21/08) 2- Obama racks up list of broken promises http://www.wnd.com/?pageId=91286#ixzz1NOpQpY5k 3-http://rpc.senate.gov/public/index.cfm?p=PolicyPapers&ContentRecord_id=2ce90800-4d974fb9-9011-adcf3454d03a&ContentType_id=48a8eee4-33df-4bce-b6bd710c426ab3e1&d77c912a-2c22-4843-a17b-96c2f091d607&Group_id=173c191d-eb25-4dc291aa-8240e24e28db&MonthDisplay=2&YearDisplay=2011 4-(Memorandum in support of defendants motion to dismiss, Florida v. HHS, June 16, 2010, p. 50) 5-http://www.infowars.com/obamacare-advocate-make-refuseniks-wear-gold-stickers/

6- http://www.infowars.com/osama-bin-ladens-second-death/ 7http://online.wsj.com/article/SB10001424052748704569404576298760734953124.html?mod =wsj_india_main 8http://online.wsj.com/article/SB10001424052748704569404576298760734953124.html?mod =wsj_india_main 9http://latimesblogs.latimes.com/washington/2011/05/osama-bin-laden-dead-al-qaedaislamabad-navy-seals.html 10- http://latimesblogs.latimes.com/washington/2011/05/osama-bin-laden-death-obamageorge-w-bush.html 11- http://www.latimes.com/news/politics/la-pn-osama-bin-laden-cia20110502,0,6466214.story?track=rss&utm_source=feedburner&utm_medium=feed&utm_ca mpaign=Feed%3A+latimes%2Fmostviewed+%28L.A.+Times+-+Most+Viewed+Stories%29 12- http://www.infowars.com/abbottabad-resident-never-saw-osama-in-the-neighborhood/ 13- Pieczenik told Jones during the April 24, 2002 interview. http://www.prisonplanet.com/jones_report_042402_pieczenik.html 14- http://www.foxnews.com/story/0%2C2933%2C41576%2C00.html 15- http://www.infowars.com/red-alert-government-had-osama-bin-laden-frozen-for-years/ 16- http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2001/nov/01/afghanistan.terrorism 17- http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2002/07/17/terror/main515468.shtml#ixzz1PrwVI1aN 18- http://edition.cnn.com/2002/WORLD/asiapcf/central/10/06/karzai.binladen/ 19- http://usliberals.about.com/b/2005/11/25/senator-harry-reid-told-osama-bin-laden-killedin-pakistan-earthquake.htm 20- http://usliberals.about.com/b/2006/09/23/french-intelligence-also-suspects-osama-binladen-is-dead.htm 21- http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UnychOXj9Tg 22- http://www.corbettreport.com/osama-bin-laden-pronounced-dead-for-the-ninth-time/ 23- http://www.nytimes.com/2011/05/03/world/asia/03intel.html?pagewanted=all 24- http://news.yahoo.com/s/yblog_theenvoy/20110503/ts_yblog_theenvoy/in-aftermath-ofbin-laden-raid-new-intelligence-shifting-accounts 25- http://news.yahoo.com/s/ap/20110504/ap_on_re_us/us_bin_laden 26- http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2011/may/04/osama-bin-laden-killing-us-story-change 27- http://www.cbsnews.com/video/watch/?id=7364899n&tag=watchnow 28- http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/al-qaeda/8493391/Osama-bin-Laden-deadBlackout-during-raid-on-bin-Laden-compound.html 29- http://old.news.yahoo.com/s/ap/20110504/ap_on_re_us/us_bin_laden 30- http://www.reuters.com/article/2011/05/06/us-binladen-qaeda-idUSTRE7452OQ20110506 31- http://ca.news.yahoo.com/al-qaeda-confirms-bin-laden-death-monitoring-group122049286.html 32- http://blogs.ajc.com/political-insider-jim-galloway/2011/05/05/saxby-chambliss-first-shotat-osama-bin-laden-was-a-miss/ 33- http://politicalticker.blogs.cnn.com/2011/05/04/senators-misled-by-likely-fake-bin-ladenphotos/ 34- http://www.prisonplanet.com/hoax-white-house-claims-4-year-old-bin-laden-tapes-arenew-footage.html 35- http://www.zerohedge.com/article/full-barack-obama-60-minutes-interview-and-completetranscript 36- third video:

http://www.infowars.com/obama-we-could-not-say-definitively-that-bin-laden-was-there/ 37http://www.infowars.com/articles/terror/bin_laden_cia_commander_we_let_slip_away.htm 38- http://visibility911.com/jongold/?p=268 39- (http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/article410125.ece)

Obama Drama 0 - http://www.infowars.com/hillary-clinton-we-are-losing-the-infowar/ 00 - (http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cuASoVK8f9c&feature=related 1 - (http://www.bloomberg.com/news/2011-02-09/terror-threat-highest-since-sept-11-attacksnapolitano-says.html) 2 - http://transcripts.cnn.com/TRANSCRIPTS/0109/11/bn.06.html 3 - http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SISUIhprOa8 3.1 Against All Enemies, pg. 30 4 - http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4PGmnz5Ow-o 5 - (radio show 2/23/11) (radio show 2/23/11: 37:00) 6 - http://www.infowars.com/constitution-party-senate-candidate-in-wv-questionsforeknowledge-of-wtc7-collapse-in-live-tv-debate/ 7 - (http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ltP2t9nq9fI&feature=related) 8 - http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bZCO6eUslY4&feature=related 9 - http://www.infowars.com/geraldo-expands-his-911-comments-wtc7-collapse-reminiscentof-controlled-demolition/ ) 10_ (http://news.yahoo.com/s/yblog_theticket/20110303/pl_yblog_theticket/matt-damon-joinsthe-growing-list-of-celebrities-unhappy-with-president-obamaa) 11- http://wrestlingtruth.com/news/xpac-wakes-up-to-the-real-new-world-order/ 12 - (http://www.opednews.com/articles/1/Feds-Drop-Case-Against-Acc-by-Michael-Collins090116-583.html) 13 - http://www.infowars.com/obama-admin-seeks-to-legalize-and-expand-governmentspying/ 14 - http://www.infowars.com/patriot-act-a-nazi-law-ex-cia-official/ 15 - http://www.infowars.com/republicans-move-to-make-patriot-act-permanent/ 16 - williamthecoroner.wordpress.com 17 - http://www.infowars.com/fox-news-caught-in-shocking-dirty-tricks-stunt-against-ron-paul/ 18 - (Ron Paul's speech entitled "A Foreign Policy of Freedom" at the Future of Freedom Foundation's conference "Restoring the Republic 2008: Foreign Policy & Civil Liberties," June 6, 2008. http://www.youtube.com/view_play_list?p=3B2E946FEAE83519 19 - (http://www.infowars.com/ron-paul-sets-msnbc-host-right-on-taxes/ ) 20 - (Translated courtesy of Tiphaine Dickson), Le Figaro, 11 October 2001 (Posted at globalresearch.ca 2 November 2001). 21- http://globalresearch.ca/articles/RIC111B.html 22 http://www.nytimes.com/2005/01/15/national/15translate.ml?_r=1&ex=1153886400&en=1384 2175814b8e8c&ei=5070 Read more: 9-11 panel to probe <br>FBI informant's tip http://www.wnd.com/?pageId=24051#ixzz1EpHFQu00

23 - (http://cryptome.org/nara/behrooz-sarshar.pdf) 24 - (for story below: http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/2011/02/01/the-fbi%E2%80%9Ckamikaze-pilots%E2%80%9D-case/ 25 -(http://www.fromthewilderness.com/free/ww3/izvestia_story_pic.html) 26 - (http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/northamerica/usa/1340698/Israeli-securityissued-urgent-warning-to-CIA-of-large-scale-terror-attacks.html) 27 - (http://www.9-11commission.gov/report/911Report_Ch6.pdf 28 - (http://www.globalresearch.ca/articles/CHO308C.html) 29 - (http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/cms.dll/articleshow?xml=0&catkey=2128936835&art_id=1454238160&sType1 or http://articles.timesofindia.indiatimes.com/200110-09/india/27243646_1_isi-link-evidence-india) 30 - (http://www.globalresearch.ca/articles/KUP310A.html) 31 - (transcript:www.911blogger.com/2006/06/former-cia-member-robert-baercomments.html) 32 - (http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2002/01/28/eveningnews/main325887.shtml) 33 - (Ron Suskind, The Price of Loyalty, pg. 70) 34 - (http://prisonplanet.com/Italy_Tells_of_Threat_at_Genoa_Summit.htm) 35 - (Steven Komarow and Tom Squitieri, Norad had drills of jets as weapons USA Today, April 18, 2004 http://www.usatoday.com/news/washington/2004-04-18-norad_x.htm 36 - (Steven Komarow and Tom Squitieri, Norad had drills of jets as weapons USA Today, April 18, 2004 http://www.usatoday.com/news/washington/2004-04-18-norad_x.htm 37 - the 9/11 commission report ch. 8.1, pg. 262 38 - (the 9/11 commission report, ch. 8, note 37, pg. 535) 39 - (9/11 commission report, ch. 8.1, pg. 260) 40 - (http://www.time.com/time/covers/1101020603/memo.html) 41 - (9/11 commission report, ch. 8.2, pg. 275) 42 - (http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=M27ZbfL-Iwg) 43 - (http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/articles/A13203-2005Feb10.html ) 44 - (http://georgewashington.blogspot.com/2006/07/interview-with-april-gallop.html) 45 - (Ghost Wars: pg. 163) 46 (http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=viewArticle&code=BUN20051120&articleId =1291) 47 - (Ian Henshall, 9/11 Revealed: The New Evidence & the 9/11 Commission Report, chapter 4 note 2, pg. 479) 48 - http://www.rawstory.com/rs/2011/02/15/iraqi-defector-curveball-admits-to-wmd-lies-thatled-to-war/ 49 - http://transcripts.cnn.com/TRANSCRIPTS/0410/29/lkl.01.html 50 - http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/northamerica/usa/1475515/Bush-takes-asix-point-lead-after-new-bin-Laden-tape.html 51 - (from the documentary: World Trade Center: A Modern Marvel; 9/11 Mysteries: Demolitions www.911Mysteries.com) 52 - (Eric Nalder twin towers Engineered to Withstand Jet Collision, Seattle Times, February 27, 1993.) 53 - (BBC The Fall of the World Trade Center, march 7 2002) http://www.bbc.co.uk/science/horizon/2001/worldtradecentertrans.shtml) 54 - http://peterbcollins.com/2011/02/11/susan-lindauers-5-year-patriot-act-nightmare-will-

durst-on-reagans-100th/ 55 - http://www.infowars.com/6-year-old-girl-groped-then-drug-tested-by-tsa/ 56 - http://www.infowars.com/parents-threatened-by-tsa-before-6-year-old-was-groped/ 57 - http://www.infowars.com/tsa-gropes-8-year-old-boy-in-front-of-outraged-mother/ 58 - http://www.infowars.com/busted-tsa-lied-about-promise-not-to-grope-children/ 59 - http://www.infowars.com/jesse-ventura-talks-tsa-groping-with-lou-dobbs/ 60 - http://epic.org/privacy/backscatter/radiation_cluster_dosimeter.pdf and http://www.wusa9.com/news/article/156513/373/TSA-Workers-Fear-Radiation-Dangers-FromScanners and http://www.tgdaily.com/hardware-features/56899-tsa-ignored-warnings-oncancer-cluster 61 - http://www.usatoday.com/travel/flights/2010-12-06-tsa-xray-inside_N.htm 62 - http://www.examiner.com/human-rights-in-national/congress-turns-on-president-obamainvokes-war-powers-resolution?CID=examiner_alerts_article 63 - http://www.examiner.com/human-rights-in-national/president-obama-violates-us-warpowers-act-and-constitution-video 64 - http://www.examiner.com/human-rights-in-national/congress-turns-on-president-obamainvokes-war-powers-resolution?CID=examiner_alerts_article 65- http://www.infowars.com/u-s-government-backs-libyan-al-qaeda-while-hyping-terrorattacks-inside-u-s/ 66 - http://www.guardian.co.uk/politics/2002/nov/10/uk.davidshayler 67 - http://www.reuters.com/article/2011/03/29/us-libya-usa-intelligenceidUSTRE72S43P20110329 68 - http://www.infowars.com/us-nato-commander-admits-al-qaeda-linked-to-libyan-rebels/ 69 - http://www.mcclatchydc.com/2011/03/26/111109/new-rebel-leader-spent-muchof.html#ixzz1SfzoNihx 70 - http://www.infowars.com/cia-operative-appointed-to-run-al-qaeda-connected-libyanrebels/ 71 http://www.infowars.pl/joomla15/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=1931:infow arscom-al-qaeda-pawns-of-cia-insurrection-from-libya-to-yemen&catid=104:libia&Itemid=1083 72 - http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&aid=24763 73 - http://www.cbsnews.com/8301-503543_162-20048982-503543.html 74 http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2011/03/30/earlyshow/main20048664.shtml?tag=contentMai n;contentBody 75 - http://www.law.com/jsp/nlj/PubArticleNLJ.jsp?id=1202490049179&slreturn=1&hbxlogin=1 76 - http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mhIASI6ONtw&feature=related False Flag: Iraq 1. www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/uk/article387374.ece 2. Cognitive Infiltration, David Ray Griffin, page 18-19 3. http://query.nytimes.com/gst/fullpage.html?res=9C07E3D61E3AF935A35754C0A9659 C8B63 4. http://www.washingtonpost.com/wpdyn/content/article/2005/10/20/AR2005102000874.html 5. http://query.nytimes.com/gst/fullpage.html?res=9405E5D71731F937A35755C0A9609 C8B63&sec=&spon=&pagewanted=all 6. http://politicalhumor.about.com/cs/bushcomedian/a/bushradiotv2004.htm

7. http://www.cnsnews.com/news/article/61811 8. http://abcnews.go.com/ThisWeek/Economy/story?id=6618199&page=1 9. http://www.lewrockwell.com/bovard/bovard41.html 10. http://www.antiwar.com/mcgovern/?articleid=14077 11. https://www.truthout.org/article/will-news-media-help-bush-exploit-911-anniversaryagain 12. http://www.prisonplanet.com/former-president-jimmy-carter-supports-call-for-new-911investigation.html 13. http://iraqsolidaritycampaign.blogspot.com/2005_09_01_archive.html 14. USA TODAY Army suicides rise as time spent in combat increases By Gregg Zoroya, January 2009 15. Arron Glantz (on DEMOCRACY NOW) (source Middle East Online, January 16, 2009 16. Pauline Jelinek, Associated Press Writer, Officials: Army suicides at 3 decade high 17. Salon.com, April 2, 2008 18. Seymour Hersh (on Democracy Now with Amy Goodman, April 1, 2009 19. http://www.huffingtonpost.com/robert-naiman/mcclatchy-obama-torenege_b_781522.html Conspiracy Culture 1. NBC, Today, 3/9/10 2. http://www.infowars.com/huffington-post-sends-ventura-article-to-memory-hole/ 3. Huffington Posts Ventura Censorship Backfires, TPM, March 17, 2010 Conclusion 1. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9hTbRqZcnjQ&feature=related 2. Endgame (DVD) by Alex Jones. Infowars.com 3. http://coat.ncf.ca/our_magazine/links/53/Plot1.html 4. http://joeplummer.com/1933_bush_coup.html

MIND BODY SOUL PRODUCTIONS

False Flags Something Stinks

BOOKS

Slow Kill

Spirituality

Baylien Invasion

Greg Fernandez Jr.

False Flag

False Flag 2: Falling

False Flag 3: Conspiracies

FALSE FLAGS: cover art by Maria Fernandez This book examines the conspiracies of 9/11 and the JFK assassination, and takes a look at false flag operations in Iran, Iraq, Cuba, Georgia and covers the tragedies with the Bush Administration and the Obama administration. This book displays public information that you may not have heard from the media. Stories like firefighters hearing explosions going off and some firefighters who became victims of explosions in the lobby before the Twin Towers fell on 9/11. This is a great place to start if you are looking for information about the 9/11 mysteries and unanswered questions. We discuss John F. Kennedy's assassination in detail and explain how this is the work of a conspiracy. Iran-Contra, Abraham Lincoln, Jesse Ventura, Alex Jones, and We Are Change are all here. The Iraq war and the failed promises of Obama and the lies of George Bush. Quotes of a New World Order and a confrontation by Alex Jones to a Bohemian Grove member. (free download @ lulu.com) SLOW KILL: cover by Brain Phreak (brainphreak.blogspot.com) The threat of nuclear radiation reaching the United States is real. The Fukushima disaster is what certain officials tried to cover up. A Slow Kill happens when people are not given truthful information, such as in the Chernobyl situation. When people in the United States should have been staying indoors after the 3/11/11 tsunami in Japan, the United States citizens were oblivious to the looming threat across the Pacific Ocean. We will examine what happened during these first days of a possible nuclear meltdown at Japan's Fukushima Daiichi nuclear complex, where plutonium, radioactive Iodine (I-131), Cesium, Xenon, and other harmful chemicals are exposed into the atmosphere, threatening the entire northern hemisphere with a Slow Kill. (free download @ lulu.com) SOMETHING STINKS: cover art by Ilya Petushkov (ilyapetushkov.com)
Something is rotten in America. Can you smell it You cough and you choke, begging for a breath of fresh air. But the foul stench oozes out of every sewer system, reaching every city, every town, and every village worldwide. This book explores only a piece of history in time and the rotten news that you might not have heard about. Or perhaps you have forgotten about Perhaps this book will give you some gas in your drive for finding truth. The rotten news you will read about is meant to fuel America into waking up and realizing that we have to get involved in the direction of our country. If we want real change, we have to be it. (free download @ lulu.com)

SPIRITUALITY: cover art by Ilya Petushkov If we live, we live to the Lord; and if we die, we die to the Lord. So, whether we live or die, we belong to the Lord. ROMANS 14:8 This book encourages you to study the Bible, to seek understanding of God, tolerance of others, to throw away your pride and celebrate the glory of God, Jesus Christ, and The Holy Spirit. God has taken me places I never thought possible. How awesome is our God? How awesome our God is! This book is designed to get you excited about the Bible and understand that Jesus Christ is the answer to sin. Reading about him will get you to understand what salvation is and how we can seek it. We must serve, instead of being served. Follow God, put this book down and read your Bible. (free download @ lulu.com)

Other Books Mind Body Soul Productions recommends:

The Rocky Balboa Syndrome by Manuel Fernandez
available at Barnes & Noble.com and everywhere on-line Ding Ding!!!! The Rocky Balboa Syndrome will provide you with the fight of your life. Get ready to experience the toughest training you will ever experience. You will be left looking at yourself and others around you in a different light. The Rocky Balboa Syndrome shows you that life's trials and tribulations are no different from the ring. If a knockout punch to life's problems are what you seek, then you have come to the right place for the proper training. Age and past regrets are irrelevant. Where you are in life is irrelevant. Today is a new day! Today we will take on many of our worst fears, regrets, and stresses that plague our everyday life. Are you ready? Let's get to it. Manuel Fernandez uses the triumphs from tragedy that the Rocky Balboa character faced in his movies to relate to our own struggle within. We cannot give up. We cannot stay down - what matters is that we get back up and continue the fight, whatever your personal fight may be! Anyone looking for a positive inspirational message of what to do when life got you on the ropes will enjoy this book. Each chapter is written as its own story - therefore reading in order is not particularly necessary. Anyone who loves the Rocky movies will love this easy to read philosophical quest for knowledge and understanding. Get it on E-book today as well! - Greg Fernandez Jr.

First Day Of School by Manuel Fernandez

available at Barnes & Noble.com and everywhere on-line This is the very first book written by Manuel Fernandez. Relive his childhood experiences through his eyes. School is in session in this semi-autobiography that is sure to captivate your heart, hoping Manuel will make it through the early phases of his life that is The First Day Of School. I was there during the events of this book. Yet even I could not put this book down. I also gained some perspective that I didn't have before about the childhood and mentality of my older brother Manuel Fernandez. He is a writer at heart and after reading this book, it leaves you wanting more. I would recommend reading this book before The Rocky Balboa Syndrome. We all struggle in life and Manuel is no different. It's these struggles that strengthen us and make us better human beings.

The Vegetarian Agenda by Sonny Desai

available at Barnes & Noble.com and everywhere on-line.

Eating meat will make you fat and clog your arteries. Eating meat is cruel, is destroying the environment, and increasing your carbon footprint. And most importantly, eating meat is simply not hip. These are some of the statements given by animal rights activists, environmentalists, Hollywood celebrities, New Age groups, and the political Left. Yet eating meat is perfectly natural, healthy, and its practice has existed since the dawn of human history. Ironically, there isn't much discussion in the mainstream media supporting this fact. Vegetarianism is gaining popularity and a mainstream following in the Western world like never before. Historically only practiced among certain Hindu castes in India for religious reasons, vegetarianism is now being advocated as a means to improve personal health, show compassion towards animals, and reduce carbon emissions. It is being promoted by the political left, animal rights groups like PETA, environmentalists, Hindu religious sects, New Age groups, and Hollywood celebrities. Although mainstream academia and media continue to highlight all the positives of maintaining a vegetarian diet, none of the arguments opposed to Vegetarianism are properly or thoroughly presented. Some in academia, government, and the media have even proposed that laws and taxes should be enforced to limit people's freedom and ability to eat meat. Independent researcher Sonny Desai debunks many of the myths and believes associated with the virtues of Vegetarianism. Within the pages of this text Desai describes in detail how vegetarianisms' practice among most Hindu subcultures have contributed to India's continual subjugation by foreign rulers, and contributed to the creation of the brutal Hindu caste system: how the academic and economic success of Indian Hindu immigrants in the West may be attributed to their vegetarian diet, and how they are being exploited because of it. Desai also explains the psychological and physiological effects vegetarian diets have on the human mind and body, and how by understanding it people have a great deal of control over their lives and individual potential. Most importantly, he describes how vegetarianism is being used as a means to recreate human nature to be able to easily adapt to the new science based society. This is a great book for anyone who wants to understand vegetarianism, history, and the Population Control agenda. I absolutely loved this book and will recommend it to anyone who is health conscious or wants to learn more about Indian culture and how it has been manipulated by the Western World. Read it once, read it twice, then pass it to a friend!

THE MUSIC IN ME
A Special Thank You to my long-time Producer Dublin Beats. You have always given me the freedom and encouragement to express myself through music. The trust you have shown me over the years has allowed me to progress as a musical artist. We have been friends since the first day I met you at Castro Valley High School. You created Mind Body Soul Productions and I'm forever grateful of all the projects we have accomplished together, as well as all the projects we will complete in the future. False Flags is my favorite CD thus far, and that's all thanks to you. Being a part of the process of creating a beat has been a blessing. The more we work together, the more I learn. Through trial and error I hope to progress as the years go by. False Flags has raised the bar in my own eyes and will challenge me to outdo myself with each new track we record. Aside from that, we are friends for life! I will never ever forget all that you have done for me. I don't know much about the music business and I don't claim to, but it's nice to be around so many people who do understand the business and are successful in it. Thank you. (Dublin Beats) Whatever you do, do with love.

TRUTH MUSIC

DANCE MUSIC

All Available on iTunes and free download @ gregfernandezjr.bandcamp.com Headlights is a mix-tape of dance, rap, and pop music. Produced by an original member of Mind Body Soul, Alex Macias, and a close friend of Greg Fernandez Jr., this CD explores musical varieties that are new to Greg. I hope this project elevates me to another level and continues my musical growth. I am very proud of the content of this project and am extremely happy that there is no cussing, no hate speech, but there is a lot of truth in the songs you will hear. This CD is available for free download! Just search for gregfernandezjr.bandcamp.com Greg Fernandez Jr. pours open his soul in this new release of Mind Body Soul. The content of this music is very important. We try to have fun while educating and learning at the same time. Life is not all serious business, but it's not all fun and games either. There must be a balance to any good and healthy lifestyle. We have tried to present music that will continue or encourage your spiritual growth, touching on issues with love and a clear understanding of the problems we face in this world. We're speaking the truth, telling you who we are and what type of music we make in a clear and rational way. We're not trying to be something fake. We're not trying to take your money. We're not in the business of being famous. We're in the business of music, because we love making music for the love of it. Anything else is a privilege, a perk, and a blessing. Let us know what you think. Let us know how we can improve. We seek wisdom, for in wisdom a man finds the path to righteousness. Thank you.

Recommended Media Outlets